AutoCAD LT 2011 Command Reference February 2010
© 2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.
Contents Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 3D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3DALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3DARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3DCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Adjust Clipping Planes Window . . . . . . . . .
3DMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Move Gizmo Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . 3DORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 3DORBITCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -3DOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DPRINT .
ADCNAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDSELECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMECONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANALYSISCURVATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANALYSISDRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANALYSISOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis Options Dialog Box . . . . . . ANALYSISZEBRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANIPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOCONSTRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOPUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Publish Options Dialog Box . Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 . 185 . 185 . 186 B Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 BACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACTIONBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACTIONSET . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 BPARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 BREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 B S AV E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camera Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 CHAMFEREDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 CHECKSTANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Check Standards Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 CHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize User Interface Editor . . . . . . Button Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Image Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Find and Replace Dialog Box - CUI . . . . CUIEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUIIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUILOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load/Unload Customizations Dialog Box . CUIUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . CUTCLIP . . . . . .
Export Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Export Query Set Dialog Box . . . . . Export Template Set Dialog Box . . . . Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . Import Query Set Dialog Box . . . . . Import Template Set Dialog Box . . . . Label Template Dialog Box . . . . . . Label Template Properties Dialog Box . Link Conversion Dialog Box . . . . . . Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . .
DGN Underlay Ribbon Contextual tab . . . . . . . . . . . -DGNATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export DGN Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNEXPORT Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -DGNEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGNIMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 -DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 DISTANTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 DONUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Transmittal Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmittal Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Transmittal Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Modify Transmittal Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . -ETRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flatshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 FREESPOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 FREEWEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 Chapter 8 G Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 GCCOINCIDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCCOLLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCCONCENTRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCEQUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY . . . . . . . HATCHSETBOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHSETORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHTOBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIDEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIDEPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HLSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 11 J Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 JOIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 JPGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 JUSTIFYTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 Chapter 12 L Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 LAYCUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 LAYDEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYTHW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 LAYTRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 Layer Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020 Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Edit/New Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 LAYULK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 LAYUNISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATEDITOROPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Texture Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nested Map Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . Material Tool Property Editor . . . . . . . . MATERIALASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIALATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Attachment Options Dialog Box . . MATERIALMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIALSCLOSE . . . . . . . . .
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . -MLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiline Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Create New Multiline Style Dialog Box . . New, Modify Multiline Style Dialog Boxes . Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MREDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEW Command Prompt . NEWSHEETSET . . . . . . . . . NEWSHOT . . . . . . . . . . . NEWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277 . 1277 . 1278 . 1278 O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box . . . . .
Hidden Message Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374 Default Scale List Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375 Initial Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376 ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379 OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380 Chapter 16 P Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 PAGESETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449 PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450 PLANESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452 PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460 Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461 Add Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550 -PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551 PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551 PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552 Publish Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553 Publish Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557 Publish Block Template Dialog Box (Publish) . . . . . . . . . .
REDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604 REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604 REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 REDRAWALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 REFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606 REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 Edit Reference Ribbon Contextual Tab . . . . . .
RPREFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681 RSCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681 RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1682 Chapter 19 S Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685 SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685 SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685 Template Options Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Share with Autodesk Seek Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735 SHEETSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1737 Sheet Set Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738 Subset Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745 Publish Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747 Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 1749 New Sheet Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843 Configure Standards Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844 CAD Standards Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846 STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848 STLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1850 Create STL File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851 STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922 TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1926 TARGETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928 TASKBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931 TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1932 Text Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1936 Special Unicode Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ULAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underlay Layers Dialog Box . . UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNISOLATEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . Direction Control Dialog Box . -UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATEFIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATETHUMBSNOW . . . . . . . . Chapter 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VPCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2063 VPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064 VPMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2066 VPMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2067 VPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2068 VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2069 Viewports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Reference Files Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2119 XPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2120 XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2122 Bind Xrefs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2122 -XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2124 Chapter 25 Z Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2127 ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2153 APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2154 APPLYGLOBALOPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2154 APSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2155 AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2155 ATTDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2156 ATTIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CBARTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2178 CCONSTRAINTFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2178 CDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2179 CECOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2179 CELTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2180 CELTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2180 CELWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSORSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2202 CVPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2203 Chapter 31 D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2205 DATALINKNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2205 DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2206 DBCSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2207 DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMCLRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2235 DIMCLRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2236 DIMCONSTRAINTICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2236 DIMDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2237 DIMDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2237 DIMDLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2238 DIMDSEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMTOLJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2259 DIMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2259 DIMTSZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2260 DIMTVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2260 DIMTXSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2261 DIMTXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2261 DIMTXTDIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DWGNAME . . . . . . . . . DWGPREFIX . . . . . . . . DWGTITLED . . . . . . . . DXEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . DYNCONSTRAINTMODE . DYNDIGRIP . . . . . . . . . DYNDIVIS . . . . . . . . . . DYNMODE . . . . . . . . . DYNPICOORDS . . . . . . . DYNPIFORMAT . . . . . . . DYNPIVIS . . . . . . . . . . DYNPROMPT . . . . . . . . DYNTOOLTIPS . . . . . . . Chapter 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIELDEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2319 FILEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2320 FILLETRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2321 FILLETRAD3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2321 FILLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2322 FONTALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2322 FONTMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HALOGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . HELPPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . HIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . . HIDETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . HIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . HPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPANNOTATIVE . . . . . . . . HPASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR . . . HPBOUND . . . . . . . . . . . HPBOUNDRETAIN . . . . . . . HPCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . HPDLGMODE . . . . . . . . . . HPDOUBLE . . . . . . . . . . . HPDRAWORDER . . . . . . . . HPGAPTOL . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFERECOLOR . . . . INTERFEREOBJVS . . . . . INTERFEREVPVS . . . . . INTERSECTIONCOLOR . . INTERSECTIONDISPLAY . ISAVEBAK . . . . . . . . . ISAVEPERCENT . . . . . . ISOLINES . . . . . . . . . Chapter 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOGEXPMIDTONES . . . . LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE . LOGFILEMODE . . . . . . . LOGFILENAME . . . . . . . LOGFILEPATH . . . . . . . LOGINNAME . . . . . . . . LONGITUDE . . . . . . . . LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . LUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . LUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . LWDEFAULT . . . . . . . . LWDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . LWUNITS . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAVSWHEELMODE . . . . . NAVSWHEELOPACITYBIG . . NAVSWHEELOPACITYMINI . NAVSWHEELSIZEBIG . . . . . NAVSWHEELSIZEMINI . . . . NAVVCUBEDISPLAY . . . . . NAVVCUBELOCATION . . . . NAVVCUBEOPACITY . . . . . NAVVCUBEORIENT . . . . . NAVVCUBESIZE . . . . . . . NOMUTT . . . . . . . . . . . NORTHDIRECTION . . . . . Chapter 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERSPECTIVECLIP . . . . . . . . . PFACEVMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . PICKADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PICKAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . PICKBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PICKDRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . PICKFIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PICKSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLINECONVERTMODE . . . . . . . PLINEGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLINEWID . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLOTOFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . PLOTROTMODE . . . . .
PUBLISHCOLLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2474 PUBLISHHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2475 PUCSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2476 Chapter 42 Q System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2477 QCSTATE . . . . . QPLOCATION . . QPMODE . . . . . QTEXTMODE . . . QVDRAWINGPIN . QVLAYOUTPIN . . Chapter 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 44 S System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2499 SAVEFIDELITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2499 SAVEFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2500 SAVEFILEPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2500 SAVENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2500 SAVETIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2501 SCREENBOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . SPLINESEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . SPLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . SPLKNOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . SPLMETHOD . . . . . . . . . . . SSFOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSLOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSMAUTOOPEN . . . . . . . . . SSMPOLLTIME . . . . . . . . . . SSMSHEETSTATUS . . . . . . . . SSMSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDARDSVIOLATION . . . . . STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUSBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . STEPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . STEPSPERSEC . .
TEXTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT . TEXTQLTY . . . . . . . . . . TEXTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . TEXTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . THUMBSIZE . . . . . . . . . . TILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . TOOLTIPMERGE . . . . . . . TOOLTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . TPSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACEWID . . . . . . . . . . TRACKPATH . . . . . . . . . TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY . . . TRAYICONS . . . . . . . . . . TRAYNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . TRAYTIMEOUT . . .
USERS1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2577 Chapter 47 V System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2579 VIEWCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2579 VIEWDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2579 VIEWMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2580 VIEWSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2581 VIEWTWIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VSOBSCUREDEDGES . . VSOBSCUREDLTYPE . . VSOCCLUDEDCOLOR . VSOCCLUDEDEDGES . VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE . . VSSHADOWS . . . . . . VSSILHEDGES . . . . . . VSSILHWIDTH . . . . . VSSTATE . . . . . . . . . VTDURATION . . . . . VTENABLE . . . . . . . VTFPS . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batch Standards Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2636 Batch Standards Checker Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2636 SLIDELIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2640 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands You can start a command by using one of the following methods: ■ Click the command name on a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut menu. ■ Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press ENTER or SPACEBAR. The acad.pgp file lists the command aliases. To access the acad.pgp, on the Tools menu, click Customize ➤ Edit Program Parameters (acad.pgp).
2
3D Commands 1 3D Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) Creates 3D polyface mesh objects in common geometric shapes that can be hidden, shaded, or rendered. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. [Box on page 3/Cone on page 6/DIsh on page 7/DOme on page 8/Mesh on page 9/Pyramid on page 9/Sphere on page 11/Torus on page 12/Wedge on page 13]: Box Creates a 3D box polyface mesh. Corner Point Sets the first corner of the box. Length Sets the first corner of the box.
Width Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box. Height Specifies the height of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box. Rotation Angle Rotates the box about the first corner specified. If you enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes. Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify.
box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle. If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle determines the rotation of the box. ■ New Angle: Specify a point relative to the base point. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box.
then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle. If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone determines the rotation of the box. Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point relative to the base point. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates the angular distance between the reference angle and the new angle.
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance or press Enter Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter for Base Defines the base of the cone by its diameter.
Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the dish by its radius. Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter Defines the dish by its diameter.
Mesh Creates a planar mesh whose M and N sizes determine the number of lines drawn in each direction along the mesh. The M and N directions are similar to the X and Y axes of an XY plane.
Fourth Corner Point Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid. Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an option The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramid's apex, top, or ridge line. Apex Point Defines the top of the pyramid as a point (apex). Ridge Defines the top of the pyramid as a ridge line. The two endpoints must lie in the same direction as the base points to prevent a self-intersecting wireframe.
Tetrahedron Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh. Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Specify a point or enter t Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point (apex). Top Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a triangle. If the top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh.
Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter. Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Torus Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Diameter of Torus Defines the torus by its diameter. Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius of Tube Defines the tube by its radius.
Specify corner point of wedge: Specify a point (1) Specify length of wedge: Specify a distance Specify width of wedge: Specify a distance Specify height of wedge: Specify a distance Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis: Specify an angle The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge. If you enter 0, the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane. 3DALIGN Quick Reference See also: ■ Align Objects Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.
Summary You can specify one, two, or three points for the source object. Then, you can specify one, two, or three points for the destination. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter Specify source plane and orientation . . . The selected object is moved and rotated so that the base points, and the X and Y axes of the source and destination align in 3D space.
Specify third point or [Continue] : Specify a point on the object’s positive XY plane, or press Enter to skip forward to specifying destination points The third point fully specifies the orientation of the X and Y axes of the source object that will be aligned with the destination plane. Specify destination plane and orientation . . . Specify first destination point: Specify a point This point defines the destination of the base point of the source object.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Array. Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Array Toolbar: Modeling Summary For 3D rectangular arrays, in addition to columns and rows, you also specify the number of levels in the Z direction. For 3D polar arrays, you specify the axis of rotation with any two points in space. The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Rectangular Array Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis), columns (Y axis), and levels (Z axis). An array must have at least two rows or two columns or two levels. Specifying one row requires that more than one column be specified, and vice versa. Specifying one level creates a two-dimensional array. Positive values generate the array along the positive X, Y, and Z axes. Negative values generate the array along the negative X, Y, and Z axes. Polar Array Copies objects about an axis of rotation.
Starts an interactive 3D view and opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window. Summary The Adjust Clipping Planes window is displayed. Adjust Clipping Planes Window Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a 3D Dynamic View (DVIEW) Sets clipping planes for the display in 3D Orbit view. Access Methods Command entry: 3dclip Summary Use the Adjust Clipping Planes toolbar, or right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window and select an option from the shortcut menu.
Adjust Front Clipping Adjusts only the front clipping plane. The line near the bottom of the window adjusts the front clipping plane. If a check mark is displayed next to Front Clipping On, you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move the line up or down. Adjust Back Clipping Adjusts only the back clipping plane. The line near the top of the window adjusts the back clipping plane.
Back Clipping On Turns the back clipping plane on or off. A check mark indicates that the back clipping plane is on, and you can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the back clipping plane. Choose this option again to turn the back clipping plane off and remove the check mark. Reset Resets the window and clipping plane to the extents of the drawing. 3DCONFIG Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Performance Sets options that affect 3D display performance.
Summary This dialog box can also be accessed from the Performance Settings button on the System tab of the Options dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Controls whether adaptive degradation is on or off. With adaptive degradation on, if performance goes below the specified level, effects are disabled or reduced in a certain order until performance returns to an acceptable level.
Hardware and Performance Tuning Specifies hardware settings and performance tuning. The performance tuner reads your system and decides whether to use software or hardware implementation for features that support both. Features that work with your system are turned on, and features that cannot work with your system are turned off. A log file displays the results. You can make manual changes. View Tune Log Displays the Performance Tuner log. Manual Tune Displays the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box.
Performance Tuner Log Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Performance Lists the features that have been disabled, if any.
Command entry: options Summary Information includes the system configuration, 3D graphics device, driver, and if any features have been disabled. If your 3D device shows as certified, Autodesk tested AutoCAD LT with this specific hardware. List of Options The following options are displayed. Save Log As Displays a standard file selection dialog box. -3DCONFIG Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Performance Controls 3D display performance in the command line.
Curve Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for curves in your drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines and more memory. Number of Tessellations to Cache Configures your system according to memory and performance requirements. The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation. When this option is set to 1, the tessellation for all viewports is the same; some objects in the drawing may be regenerated as you zoom in and out.
For more information, see Hardware Acceleration Troubleshooting in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. ■ Enhanced 3D Performance on page 853 ■ Global Smooth Display on page 854 ■ Advanced Material Effects on page 854 ■ Gooch Hardware Shader on page 854 ■ Per-pixel Lighting on page 854 ■ Full Shadow Display on page 854 ■ Texture Compression on page 854 ■ Enhanced 2D Performance on page 854 Software Specifies software acceleration.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Orbit drop-down ➤ Continuous Orbit. Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Continuous Orbit Toolbar: 3D Navigation Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Continuous Orbit (3). Summary You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command. Selecting one of more objects before starting this command limits the display to those objects only.
Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away. Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Adjust Distance Toolbar: 3D Navigation Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Adjust Distance (4). Summary 3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one pointing down.
Toolbar: Standard Summary The Export 3D DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. After you enter a file name and click Save, the DWF file viewer is launched and your DWF file is displayed. You can also change publishing settings from the 3D DWF Publish dialog box. NOTE The File Type control on the Export 3D DWF dialog box lists 3D DWF (*.dwf) and 3D DWFx (*.dwfx) when you use the 3DDWF command.
Objects to Publish Specifies whether all model space objects or selected model space objects are published to the DWF file. All Model Space Objects All model space objects are published to the 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file. Selected Model Space Objects Allows you to create a selection set of model space objects, including external references, which are published to the 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file after you click OK. Select Objects Active only when Select Model Space Objects is enabled.
3DEDITBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the CV Edit Bar Reshapes, scales, and edits the tangency of NURBS surfaces. Access Methods Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ CV Edit Bar Summary The 3D Edit Bar allows you to reshape NURBS surfaces and to change the tangency at specific points in the U and V directions. The ability to specify precise coordinates allows you to edit a surface with surgical precision.
Understand the 3D Edit Bar Grips The 3D Edit Bar has three grips: ■ The expander grip (triangular grip) ■ The magnitude handle (circular grip) 3DEDITBAR | 33
■ The move gizmo (square grip) 34 | Chapter 1 3D Commands
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve Selects the 3D objects you want to edit. When you have selected the objects, press Enter. Base point Specifies the next edit point. Displacement Specifies a relative distance and direction for the placement of the CV using coordinate values that you enter at the command prompt. Undo Cancels the action without exiting the CV Edit Bar.
The shorcut menu has options that allow you to: ■ Reshape the curve (Move Point Location) ■ Edit the tangent scale (Move Tangent Direction) ■ Move the base point to edit a different part of the surface (Relocate Base Point) ■ Realign the gizmo (the edit bar). ■ Whether to reshape the curve (Move Point Location) or the tangency (Move Tangent Direction). Different options appear depending on what option you select. List of Options The following options are displayed.
edit bar moving in the U direction on the left, and the V direction on the right. U Tangent Direction Moves the edit bar to the U axis to constrain the tangency edit to that direction. In the image above, the image on the left shows the edit bar moving in the U direction. V Tangent Direction Moves the edit bar to the V axis to constrain the tangency edit to that direction. In the image above, the image on the right shows the edit bar moving in the V direction.
Access Methods Button Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ 3D Face Summary List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (1) or enter i First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. After entering the first point, enter the remaining points in a natural clockwise or counterclockwise order to create a normal 3D face. If you locate all four points on the same plane, a planar face is created that is similar to a region object.
Specify fourth point or [Invisible] : Specify a point (4), enter i, or press Enter The Third Point and Fourth Point prompts are repeated until you press Enter. Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish entering points, press Enter. 3DFLY Quick Reference See also: ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing Changes the 3D view in a drawing interactively to create the appearance of flying through the model.
Summary 3DFLY activates a fly mode in the current viewport. You can leave the XY plane as though you're flying through or around the model. On the keyboard, use the four arrow keys, the W (forward), A (left), S (back), and D (right) keys, and the mouse to determine the direction of your fly. For more information, see Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings Balloon on page 77. By default, the Position Locator window opens and displays your position in the drawing from a top view.
Summary Selecting one of more objects before starting this command limits the display to those objects only. While the command is active, right-click to display additional options from a shortcut menu. 3DFORBIT activates a 3D Free Orbit view in the current viewport. If the user coordinate system (UCS) icon is on, a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the current UCS appears in the 3D Orbit view. You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command.
View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor as follows: Sphere Encircled by Two Lines When you move the cursor inside the arcball, it changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. If you click and drag in the drawing area you can move freely around the objects. It works as if your cursor is grabbing a sphere surrounding the objects and dragging it around the target point. You can drag horizontally, vertically, and diagonally using this method.
3DMESH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) Creates a free-form polygon mesh. Summary The mesh density controls the number of facets, and is defined in terms of a matrix of M and N vertices, similar to a grid consisting of columns and rows. 3DMESH is a legacy method for creating mesh, designed primarily for operation under program control rather than by manual entry. To take advantage of smoothing, creasing, and refinement capabilities, use the MESH command.
Location for vertex (0, 0) Sets the coordinate location of the vertex. Enter a 2D or 3D coordinate. The location of each vertex in the mesh is defined by m and n, the row and column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0). You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before specifying vertices in row m + 1. Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a mesh depends on the position of its vertices.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Move Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Move Toolbar: Modeling Summary With the 3D Move gizmo, you can move selected objects and subobjects freely or constrain the movement to an axis or plane. If the default gizmo (DEFAULTGIZMO) is 3D Move, the 3D Move gizmo is displayed whenever you select an object in a view with a 3D visual style.
You can also align the 3D Move gizmo with the plane of a face or object by using the Align Gizmo With ➤ Face option on the shortcut menu. The direction of the move operation is then constrained relative to this workplane. When the 3D Move gizmo is displayed, the 3D Move Gizmo shortcut menu offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Selects the 3D objects you want to move.
Stretch point When you are specifying the move using the gizmo, sets the new location of the selected objects. Drag and click to move the objects dynamically. Copy When you are specifying the move using the gizmo, creates a copy of the selected objects instead of moving them. You can make multiple copies by continuing to specify locations. Base point Specifies the base point of the 3D objects you want to move. ■ Second point. Specifies where the 3D object or objects will be dragged.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Move gizmo List of Options The following options are displayed. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. ■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. ■ XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the selected axes. Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify.
3DORBIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use 3D Navigation Tools Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit only. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Orbit drop-down ➤ Orbit. Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Constrained Orbit Pointing device: Press Shift and click the mouse wheel to temporarily enter 3D Orbit mode.
The 3D Orbit cursor icon appears. If you drag the cursor horizontally, the camera moves parallel to the XY plane of the world coordinate system (WCS). If you drag the cursor vertically, the camera moves along the Z axis. NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active. While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options and modes from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area, or choosing buttons on the 3D Navigation toolbar.
■ Swivel (5). Changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the effect of swiveling the camera. See 3DSWIVEL. ■ Walk (6). Changes the cursor to a plus sign and enables you to "walk through" a model at a fixed height above the XY plane, by dynamically controlling the location and target of the camera. See 3DWALK. ■ Fly (7). Changes the cursor to a plus sign and enables you to "fly through" a model without being restricted to a fixed height above the XY plane. See 3DFLY. ■ Zoom (8).
Parallel Displays objects so that two parallel lines in a drawing never converge. The shapes in your drawing always remain the same and do not appear distorted when they are closer. Perspective Displays objects in perspective so that all parallel lines converge at one point. Objects appear to recede into the distance, and parts of the objects appear larger and closer to you. The shapes are somewhat distorted when the object is very close. This view correlates more closely to what your eyes see.
NOTE Before starting 3DORBIT, you can use the GRID command to set system variables that control the grid display. The number of major grid lines corresponds to the value you set using the Grid Spacing option of the GRID command, which is stored in the GRIDUNIT system variable. Ten horizontal lines and ten vertical lines are drawn between the major lines. ■ UCS Icon. Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. Each axis is labeled X, Y, or Z. The X axis is red, the Y axis is green, and the Z axis is blue.
■ Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces ■ Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps) Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Press Shift while right-clicking in the drawing area and click 3D Osnap ➤ Osnap Settings. Toolbar: Status bar ➤ 3D Object Snap Command entry: 3dosnap (‘3dosnap for transparent use) Summary Displays the 3D Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box on page 664.
■ ZKNOt. Snaps to a spline knot. ■ ZPERpendicular. Snaps to a perpendicular face (planar faces only). ■ ZNEAr. Snaps to an object nearest to face. ■ ZNONe. Turns off all 3D object snaps. See the 3D Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box for more information. 3DPAN Quick Reference See also: ■ Use 3D Navigation Tools When a drawing is in a Perspective view, starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically.
3DPOLY Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Polylines Creates a 3D polyline. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 3D Polyline. Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Polyline Summary A 3D polyline is a connected sequence of straight line segments created as a single object. 3D polylines can be non-coplanar; however, they cannot include arc segments. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you press Enter to end the command. Undo Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing from the previous point. Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point, and then ends the command. To be closed, a 3D polyline must contain at least two lines. 3DPRINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Print 3D Models Sends a 3D model to a 3D printing service.
Ribbon: Output tab ➤ 3D Print panel ➤ Send to 3D Print Service. Menu: Application menu ➤ Publish ➤ Send to 3D Print Service Summary The 3DPRINT command opens the 3D Printing - Prepare Model for Printing dialog box. You can ■ Learn about preparing 3D models for printing ■ Continue List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select solids or watertight meshes: Select 3D solids or watertight meshes. Press Enter.
Send to 3D Print Service Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Print 3D Models Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ 3D Print panel ➤ Send to 3D Print Service. Menu: Application menu ➤ Publish ➤ Send to 3D Print Service Command entry: 3dprint List of Options The following options are displayed. Objects The following buttons allow you to change the selection set: Select Objects Displays the canvas where you can add or remove objects from the selection set.
You can select blocks or external references (xrefs) that contain 3D solids and watertight meshes. However, only 3D solids and watertight meshes within selected blocks or xrefs are included in the STL file. Other objects are not included when you save the STL file. You can modify the dimensions of the bounding box and specify the scale of 3D solids and watertight meshes within the bounding box. If you modify this option, the proportions of these objects are unaffected. You can modify the following options.
Rotates the image within the preview window as you drag the image with the mouse. Create STL File Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Export Stereolithography STL Files Saves a drawing as an STL file. Access Methods Command entry: stlout Summary The Create STL File dialog box is a standard file selection dialog box. It displays when you use the 3DPRINT or STLOUT commands. The STL file format is preferred by 3D printing service providers.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Rotate. Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Rotate Toolbar: Modeling Summary With the 3D Rotate gizmo, you can rotate selected objects and subobjects freely or constrain the rotation to an axis. If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DROTATE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command.
When the 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed, the 3D Rotate Gizmo shortcut menu offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies the objects that you want to rotate. Base point Sets the center point of the rotation. Pick a rotation axis On the 3D Scale gizmo, specifies the axis of rotation. Move the mouse until the axis path you want to select turns yellow, then click to select it.
3D Rotate Gizmo Shortcut Menu Quick Reference See also: ■ Rotate 3D Objects Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move or align the gizmo. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Rotate gizmo List of Options The following options are displayed. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. ■ X, Y or Z.
Custom Gizmo Allows you to define the current gizmo by specifying one, two, or three points, or an object. Respect Dynamic UCS When relocating the gizmo, as you move the cursor, temporarily aligns the XY plane of the UCS with the faces or edges. 3DSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale 3D Objects In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects.
Pick a scale axis or plane Specifies whether the object is scaled uniformly or only along a specific axis or plane. You have the following choices: ■ Scale uniformly. Click the area closest to the vertex of the 3D Scale gizmo. The interior region of all axes of the gizmo is highlighted. ■ Constrain the scale to a plane. Click between the parallel lines between the axes that define the plane. This option is only available for meshes, not solids or surfaces. ■ Constrain the scale to an axis.
Copy Creates and scales a copy of the selected objects. Reference Sets a scale based on a ratio. ■ Reference length. Sets the relative amount that represents the current size in the scale ratio. ■ New Length. Sets the relative value used to calculate the new size. For example, if the reference length is 1 and the new length is 3, the size of the selected objects is tripled. ■ Points. Specifies the relative value used to calculate the new size based on two points that you specify.
Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. ■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. ■ XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the selected axes. ■ XYZ. Applies the scaling uniformly to all axes. NOTE Unlike most other objects, mesh objects support non-uniform scale. Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify.
Access Methods Button Menu: Insert ➤ 3D Studio Summary Data that can be imported from a 3ds MAX file includes meshes, materials, mappings, lights, and cameras. Procedural materials, smoothing groups, and keyframe data cannot be imported. For lights and materials, use CONVERTOLDLIGHTS and CONVERTOLDMATERIALS. The 3D Studio File Import dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. After you choose a file to import, the 3D Studio File Import Options dialog box is displayed.
Access Methods Button Menu: Insert ➤ 3D Studio Command entry: 3dsin Summary Lists available and selected 3D objects, saves 3D objects to layers, and handles objects that use multiple materials. List of Options The following options are displayed. Available Objects ® Displays the names of all objects in the specified Autodesk® 3ds MAX (3DS) file. You can select up to 70 objects. Object Name and Type Displays the type and assigned name of each object.
By Material Creates a layer for each material in the 3ds MAX file and places objects to which that material is attached on that layer. The name of the layer is the same as the name of the material. By Object Color Creates a layer for each object color in the 3ds MAX file. Each 3ds MAX object is placed on the layer corresponding to its color. The name of the layer is COLORnn, where nn is the 3ds MAX color index.
Don't Assign a Material Assigns no material to each multiple-material object. This option loses all material assignment information but preserves the 3ds MAX geometry. The object reverts to the AutoCAD default material. 3DSWIVEL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use 3D Navigation Tools Changes the target of the view in the direction that you drag. Access Methods Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Swivel Pointing device: Press Ctrl and click the mouse wheel to temporarily enter 3DSWIVEL mode.
3DWALK Quick Reference See also: ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing Changes the 3D view in a drawing interactively to create the appearance of walking through the model. Access Methods Button Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Walk and Fly ➤ Walk Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Walk (6). Summary 3DWALK activates a walk mode in the current viewport.
Animation Controls Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Preview Animations Creates and saves an animation created with 3D navigation commands such as 3DWALK on page 73 and 3DFLY on page 39. Animation Panel The Animation panel on the ribbon allows you to create walk-throughs of your model. You can create a walk-through by specifying a path with the ANIPATH command or with the animation controls when one of the 3D Navigation commands are enabled.
Animation Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing Specifies settings for recording an animation of 3D navigation. List of Options The following options are displayed. Settings Determines the settings for an animation file. Visual Style Displays a list of visual styles and render presets that you can apply to an animation file. Resolution Displays a list of resolutions. The default value is 320 x 240. Frame Rate (FPS) Specifies a frame rate (in seconds).
Position Locator Window Quick Reference See also: ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing Displays the top-view position of a 3D model when in a walk or fly navigation. List of Options The following options are displayed. Zoom In Zooms in to the display in the Position Locator window. Zoom Out Zooms out from the display in the Position Locator window. Zoom Extents Zooms to the extents of the display in the Position Locator window. Preview Displays your current location in the model.
Position Indicator Color Sets the color of the dot that shows your current position. Position Indicator Size Sets the size of the indicator. You can choose Small, Medium, or Large. Position Indicator Blink Turns the blinking effect on or off. Position Z Specifies the Z coordinate for the position indicator. You can modify the setting by entering a new value. Target Indicator Displays an indicator that shows the target of the view. Target Indicator Color Sets the color of the target indicator.
Summary Press TAB to turn the display of the balloon on and off. You can specify whether to display the instructions, and how often, in the Walk and Fly Settings dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Up arrow/W key Moves the camera backward. Down arrow/S key Moves the camera forward so that you appear to be walking (or flying) forward. Left arrow/A key Moves the camera to the left, so that you appear to be moving to the left. Right arrow/D key Moves the camera to the right.
3DZOOM Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify 3D Views Zooms in and out in a perspective view. Access Methods Button Toolbar: 3D Navigation Menu: View ➤ Zoom Pointing device: Scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in and out. Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Zoom (8). Summary Zooming in a perspective view simulates moving the camera closer to the target or farther away.
Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the view. Real Time Using the pointing device, zooms interactively.
A Commands 2 ABOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Start a Drawing Displays information about AutoCAD LT. Access Methods Menu: Help ➤ About Command entry: 'about for transparent use Summary Copyright information and product information is displayed. Product information includes the version number and service pack, serial number, license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agreement. You can save the product information as a text file.
ACISIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Import ACIS SAT Files Imports an ACIS (SAT) file and creates 3D solid, body, or region objects. Access Methods Button Menu: Insert ➤ ACIS File Summary The Select ACIS File box is displayed. Select the file to import in the File Name list. The SAT (ASCII) ACIS file is imported into the drawing. NOTE ACISIN imports SAT files up to ACIS version 7.0. ACISOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export ACIS SAT Files Exports a body object, solid, or region to an ACIS file.
NOTE When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD, you need to set the ACISOUTVER on page 2146 system variable to the ACIS version used for that release. For example, to export SAT files to AutoCAD Release 14, set ACISOUTVER to 16. ACTBASEPOINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Base Points Inserts a base point in an action macro.
NOTE When you play back the action macro (with a base point inserted) in a version older than AutoCAD 2010, an error message is displayed and the action macro is removed from the location of available action macros. ACTMANAGER Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Action Macros Manages action macro files. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Manage Action Macros Command entry: 'actmanager for transparent use Summary The Action Macro Manager on page 84is displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Manage Action Macros Command entry: actmanager (or 'actmanager for transparent use) Summary Your recorded action macro (ACTM) files are listed in the Action Macro Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed. Copy Creates a duplicate copy of an action macro. Rename Renames an action macro. Modify Displays the selected action macro in the Action Macro dialog box on page 89.
Delete Moves the selected action macro (ACTM) file to the Windows Recycle Bin. You can select and delete one or more action macros. Options Displays the Options dialog box on page 1314 (Files tab). From the Files tab, you can locate the paths used to record and play back your (ACTM) files from the Action Recorder Settings node. Close Closes the Action Macro Manager dialog box. NOTE When a single action macro is selected, you can use Copy, Rename, Modify, and Delete.
You can create an action macro by recording most of the commands that you are already familiar with. Action Recorder Preferences Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Record an Action Macro with the Action Recorder Controls the behavior of the Action Recorder panel when playing back or recording an action macro. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Preference Summary Customizes the settings used for the Action Recorder.
ACTSTOP Quick Reference See also: ■ Record an Action Macro with the Action Recorder Stops the Action Recorder and provides the option of saving the recorded actions to an action macro file. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Stop Menu: Tools ➤ Action Recorder ➤ Stop Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Action Recorder ➤ Stop. Command entry: 'actstop for transparent use Summary The Action Macro dialog box on page 89 is displayed.
Action Macro Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Record an Action Macro with the Action Recorder Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Stop Menu: Tools ➤ Action Recorder ➤ Stop Action Macro Dialog Box | 89
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Action Recorder ➤ Stop. Command entry: actstop (or 'actstop for transparent use) Summary Saves or renames the current action macro and defines the playback behavior for the action macro. List of Options The following options are displayed. Action Macro Command Name Specifies the command name for the current action macro. File Name Displays the file name for the current action macro.
-ACTSTOP Quick Reference See also: ■ Record an Action Macro with the Action Recorder Stops the Action Recorder and provides the option of saving the recorded actions to an action macro file Access methods Command entry: '-actstop for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
ACTUSERINPUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Pause for User Input Pauses for user input in an action macro. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Pause for User Input Command entry: 'actuserinput for transparent use Summary The next recorded action is set to pause for user input when the action macro is played back.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Action Recorder panel ➤ Insert Message Command entry: 'actusermessage for transparent use Summary The Insert User Message dialog box is displayed. Inserts a user message that is displayed when the action macro is played back. If you enter -actusermessage at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 93.
Enter a message to display during playback : Enter a message and press ENTER, or press ENTER to exit the command NOTE You can enter a maximum of 256 characters for the user message. ADCCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of DesignCenter Closes DesignCenter. Summary ™ Closes the DesignCenter window. ADCENTER Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of DesignCenter Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns.
Summary The DesignCenter is displayed. DesignCenter Window Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the DesignCenter Window Browses, finds, and previews content, and inserts content, which includes blocks, hatches, and external references (xrefs). Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ DesignCenter Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter Command entry: adcenter Summary Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and access options.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Content Area (DesignCenter) Displays the content of the "container" currently selected in the tree view. A container is a network, computer, disk, folder, file, or web address (URL) containing information accessible by DesignCenter.
From the content area, you can insert blocks or hatch patterns or attach external references in a drawing by dragging, by double-clicking, or by right-clicking and choosing Insert Block, Attach Xref, or Copy. You can drag or right-click to add other content to drawings, such as layers, dimension styles, and layouts. You can drag blocks and hatches from DesignCenter to tool palettes.
The Tree View Toggle button is not available while you're using the History list in the tree view. Preview Displays and hides a preview of the selected item in a pane below the content area. If there is no preview image saved with the selected item, the Preview area is empty. Description Displays and hides a text description of the selected item in a pane below the content area. If a preview image is also displayed, the description is displayed below it.
NOTE In the sample\designcenter folder are drawings containing discipline-specific blocks that you can insert in drawings. These drawings are called symbol library drawings. Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter to access tree view options. Folders Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network drives, including My Computer and Network Neighborhood.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ DesignCenter Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ DesignCenter Command entry: adcenter List of Options The following options are displayed. Look For Specifies the type of content to search for. The content type you specify determines which tabs are displayed in the Search dialog box and the search fields it provides. The Date Modified and Advanced tabs are displayed only when the Drawings option is selected in Look For.
Displays a tree view in the Browse for Folder dialog box, in which you can specify the drives and folders to search. Search Subfolders Includes subfolders in the search path. Search Now Starts the search based on criteria you specify. Stop Stops the search and displays the accumulated results in the Search Results panel. New Search Clears the Search For the Word(s) box and places the cursor in the box. Search Results Panel Displays the results of the search in resizable columns at the bottom of the window.
This option is available on the Drawings tab and the Custom Content tab. NOTE Custom content developed by third-party applications may not provide fields for searches using the Search dialog box. Search for the Name Specifies the name of the drawing, block, layer, xref, or other content type that you want to find. This option is available on all tabs except Drawings and Custom Content. Date Modified Tab (Search Dialog Box) Finds content that was created or modified during a certain time period.
ADCNAVIGATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Access Content with DesignCenter Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path. Summary The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the DesignCenter Folders tab. ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a selected object. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a single object, right-click, and click Add Selected. Summary Differs from COPY by duplicating only the general properties on page 1538 of an object. For example, creating an object based on a selected circle adopts the general properties of the circle, such as its color and layer, but prompts you for the new circle’s center point and radius.
Object type Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED Underlays (DWF, DGN, Image, and PDF) Name List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select object: Use an object selection method The prompts vary by object type. ADJUST Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the Background Adjusts the fade, contrast and monochrome settings of the selected image or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN).
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. The list of prompts depends on whether you select one or more images, or one or more underlays. Images Fade Controls the fade effect in the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the lighter that the image appears. This setting works indirectly with the contrast effect; a higher contrast value blends the image into the background when fade is set to a higher value.
ALIGN Quick Reference See also: ■ Align Objects Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Align. Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Align Summary Either one, two, or three pairs of source points and definition points can be specified to move, rotate, or tilt the selected objects, aligning them with points on another object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
ALIGN Using Two Pairs of Points When you select two point pairs, you can move, rotate, and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with other objects. The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the alignment (1, 2). The second set of points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4). After you enter the second set of points, you are prompted to scale the object.
The selected objects move from the source point (1) to the destination point (2). The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns with the destination object (2 and 4). The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6). AMECONVERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Models with Other Applications Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects. Summary The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release 2 or 2.
Because of increased accuracy in the new solid modeler, AME models may look slightly different after conversion. This difference is noticeable where the previous version of the solid modeler identified the surfaces of two different shapes as so close as to be considered in the same plane. The new solid modeler's finer tolerance may interpret these surfaces as being slightly offset. This phenomenon is most apparent with aligned features such as fillets, chamfers, and through-holes.
Positive Gaussian curvature means that the surface is shaped like a bowl. Negative Gaussian curvature means the surface is shaped like a saddle (as shown below). Mean curvature and a zero Gaussian value means that the surface is flat in at least one direction (planes, cylinders, and cones have zero Gaussian curvature). To change the curvature analysis display settings, use the Curvature tab on page 114 of the Analysis Options dialog box on page 113.
Summary The color spectrum shows draft angle changes within a specified range. The maximum draft angle displays as red, and the minimum draft angle displays as blue. If the surface is parallel to the construction plane with surface normals facing in the same direction as the current UCS, the draft angle is 90.0. When perpendicular, it is 0. If the surface is parallel to the current UCS with surface normals facing in the opposite direction than the current UCS, the draft angle is -90.0.
Access Methods Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Analysis Options Command entry: analysisoptions Summary The Analysis Options dialog box on page 113is displayed. Analysis Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Analyze Surfaces Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.
Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISZEBRA command. List of Options The following options are displayed. Select Object to Analyze Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the Analysis Options dialog box. Stripe Display Stripe Direction Specifies the display angle. (VSAZEBRADIRECTION on page 2588) This option is only available when Type is set to Cylinder.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Select object to analyze Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the Analysis Options dialog box. Color Mapping Display Style Specifies the display for color mapping (VSACURVATURETYPE on page 2585 system variable). Enter the maximum curvature value (VSACURVATUREHIGH on page 2584 system variable). When the surface curvature reaches this value, it displays as green.
List of Options The following options are available. Select object to analyze Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the Analysis Options dialog box. Color Mapping Maps green to the highest draft angle, red to the medium draft angle, and blue to the lowest draft angle. Angle Sets the value for the high and low draft angles. The draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane.
In this example, the surface continuity is G0 because the surface edges are coincident, but they are not tangent and they have different curvatures. The fact that the stripes are not aligned shows that the surfaces are not tangent. To change the zebra analysis display settings, use the Zebra Analysis tab on page 113 of the Analysis Options dialog box on page 113. ANIPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Motion Path Settings Saves an animation file of a camera moving or panning in a 3D model.
Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Animation Motion Path Menu: View ➤ Motion Path Animations Summary The Motion Path Animation dialog box on page 118 is displayed. Motion Path Animation Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Motion Path Settings Specifies settings for a motion path animation and creates an animation file.
Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Animation Motion Path Menu: View ➤ Motion Path Animations Command entry: anipath Summary A path object must be created first and then selected as the camera path or the target path. A path object can be a line, arc, elliptical arc, circle, polyline, 3D polyline, or spline. List of Options The following options are displayed. Camera Link Camera To Links a camera to a static point or a motion path in a drawing. Point Links a camera to a static point in a drawing.
If the camera is linked to a path, links the target to a static point in the drawing. Path Links the target to a motion path in the drawing. Pick Point/Select Path Selects either the point or a path for the target, depending on whether Point or Path was selected. Point/Path List Displays a list of named points or paths to which you can link the target. To create a path, you can link a target to a line, arc, elliptical arc, circle, polyline, 3D polyline, or spline.
is installed. The WMV format is available and is the default selection only if Microsoft Windows Media Player 9 or later is installed. Otherwise, AVI is the default selection. Resolution Defines the width and height of the resulting animation in screen display units. The default value is 320 x 240. Corner Deceleration Moves a camera at a slower rate as it turns a corner. Reverse Reverses the direction of an animation.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Animations panel ➤ Animation Motion Path Menu: View ➤ Motion Path Animations Command entry: anipath Summary Previews a motion path animation that you created with a motion path or 3D navigation. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview of the animation you set up either in the Motion Path Animation dialog box or when walking or flying through an animation and recording it from the ribbon. Play Plays the animation preview.
Record Records the animation, starting from the current frame displayed in the Preview region. All frames following the current frame are overwritten. The Overwrite Confirmation warning is displayed to confirm that you intend to overwrite the existing frames. The Record button is disabled when an animation is playing. Pause Pauses the animation at the current frame displayed in the Preview region. After pausing an animation, the Pause button is disabled. Save Opens the Save As dialog box.
Summary The location of each scale representation of an annotative object can be adjusted using grips. For each selected annotative object, all alternate scale representations are returned to the location of the object’s current scale representation. ANNOUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Annotative Styles Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their styles.
Controls the size of the object snap target box. Access Methods Command entry: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use) Summary Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target box. The APBOX on page 2153 system variable controls whether the object snap target box is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE controls the size of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger the target box.
Summary The Startup Suite option loads the specified applications each time the product first starts. Application files can be dragged from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities. The Load/Unload Applications dialog box is displayed. Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Load Application Menu: Tools ➤ Load Application Command entry: appload Summary Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at startup. List of Options The following options are displayed. The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file selection dialog box.
the location from which AutoCAD loads the application, as displayed in this list. You can also unload certain applications from this list. See the Unload option for details. Files that you cannot unload are not available for selection. History List Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of applications that you previously loaded with Add To History selected. You can drag files into this list from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities, such as Windows Explorer.
Displays the Startup Suite dialog box. You can also add files to the Startup Suite by clicking the Startup Suite icon or by right-clicking an application on the History List tab and clicking Add to Startup Suite on the shortcut menu. Status Line Displays messages that indicate the status of loading and unloading operations. Startup Suite Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading Adds and removes application files from the Startup Suite.
Add Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. You can use this dialog box to select files to add to the startup suite. Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite. ARC Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Arcs Creates an arc. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Arc drop-down ➤ 3-Point Menu: Draw ➤ Arc Toolbar: Draw Summary To create an arc, you can specify combinations of center, endpoint, start point, radius, angle, chord length, and direction values.
NOTE If you press ENTER without specifying a point, the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or polyline. Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: Second Point Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc's circumference. The first point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3).
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise. Specify length of chord: Specify a length End Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
(1), and ending at an endpoint (2). The direction is determined from the start point. Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc: Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the endpoint (2). If the radius is negative, the major arc is drawn. Specify radius of arc: Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise. Specify length of chord: Tangent to Last Line, Arc, or Polyline Draws an arc tangent to the last line, arc, or polyline drawn when you press ENTER at the first prompt.
Summary The Archive a Sheet Set dialog box is displayed. If you enter -archive at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Archive a Sheet Set Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets Packages the current sheet set files for archive. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Command entry: archive ➤ Publish ➤ Archive Summary The Sheets tab lists the sheets to be included in the archive package in sheet order and according to subset organization.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Sheets Tab Lists the sheets to be included in the archive package in sheet order and according to subset organization. A sheet set must be open in the Sheet Set Manager. Archive can be selected from the shortcut menu displayed when the top-level sheet set node is right-clicked, or archive can be entered at the Command prompt. Files Tree Tab Lists the files to be included in the archive package in a hierarchical tree format.
Files Table Tab Displays the files to be included in the archive package in a table format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the archive package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the archive package.
Add a File Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an additional file to include in the archive package. This button is available on both the Files Tree tab and the Files Table tab. Enter Notes to Be Included with This Archive Provides a space where you can enter notes related to the archive package. The notes are included in the archive report.
Modify Archive Setup Displays the Modify Archive Setup dialog box, in which you can specify options for the archive package. Modify Archive Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets Access Methods Command entry: archive List of Options The following options are displayed.
Archive Type and Location Specifies the type and location of archive package created. Archive Package Type Specifies the type of archive package created. Archive Package Type Description Folder Creates an archive package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder. Self-Extracting Executable Creates an archive package of files as a compressed, self-extracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting EXE file decompresses the archive package and restores the files.
Specifies the method for naming the archive package. Displays the default file name for the archive package. This option is not available if the archive package type is set to Folder. Archive File Name Type Description Prompt for a File Name Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the name of the archive package. Overwrite if Necessary Uses a logical default file name. If the file name already exists, the existing file is automatically overwritten.
This option is not available if you're saving an archive package to an Internet location. Source Root Folder Defines the source root folder for relative paths of drawing-dependent files, such as xrefs. This option determines the source root folder for the Use Organized Folder Structure option. The source root folder also contains the sheet set data (DST) file when a sheet set is archived.
Include Textures from Materials Includes textures with materials that are attached to objects or faces. Include Photometric Web Files Includes photometric web files that are associated with web lights in the drawing. Include Unloaded File References Includes all unloaded external file references. The unloaded file references are listed in the Files Tree and Files Table and report under their appropriate category.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Password for Compressed Archive Package Provides a space for an optional password for the archive package. When others attempt to open the archive package, they must provide this password to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder archive packages. Password Confirmation Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to reenter them.
AREA Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Area. Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Area Summary Several commands are available to provide area information including AREA, MEASUREGEOM on page 1110MASSPROP on page 1074. Alternatively, use BOUNDARY on page 256 to create a closed polyline or region.
Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to complete the definition of the perimeter. The area to be calculated is highlighted in green. If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that line length is added. Object Calculates the area and perimeter of a selected object.
Add Area Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas. You can use the Add Area option to calculate individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and objects and the total area of all defined areas and objects. You can also select to specify the points. A rubberband line from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed Specify points to define a polygon (3). The area to be added is highlighted in green. Press ENTER.
The specified area to be subracted is highlighted in red. The total area and perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip. ARRAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Create an Array of Objects Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Toolbar: Modify Menu: Modify ➤ Array. Summary You can create copies of objects in a regularly spaced rectangular or polar array. The Array dialog box is displayed.
independently. If you select multiple objects, the objects are treated as one item to be copied and arrayed. If you enter -array at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Array Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create an Array of Objects Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Rectangular Array Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object. Rows Specifies the number of rows in the array. If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000.
Column Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. To add columns to the left, specify a negative value. To specify column spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset button. Angle of Array Specifies the angle of rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes of the current UCS. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS on page 2000.
Center Point Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for X and Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the location. Pick Center Point Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the center point in the drawing area. Method and Values Specifies the method and values used to position objects in the polar array. Method Sets the method used to position objects.
Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array. Enter a positive value. The default direction value is 90. NOTE You can choose the Pick buttons and use the pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and Angle Between Items. Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array.
Base point settings by object Object type Default base point Region Grip point Set to Object's Default Uses the default base point of the object to position the arrayed object. To manually set the base point, clear this option. Base Point Sets a new X and Y base point coordinate. Choose Pick Base Point to temporarily close the dialog box and specify a point. After you specify a point, the Array dialog box is redisplayed.
-ARRAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Create an Array of Objects List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter the type of array [Rectangular/Polar] : Enter an option or press ENTER Rectangular Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected objects.
Specify the distance between columns (|||): To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between columns. Rectangular arrays are constructed along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option of the SNAP on page 1789 command changes the angle and creates a rotated array. The SNAPANG on page 2518 system variable stores the snap rotation angle.
You can enter 0 for the angle to fill only if you specify the number of items.
? - List Applications Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications, which can be third-party programs or internal applications such as Render. Load Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). This option loads the specified ObjectARX application. Unload Unloads the specified ObjectARX application. Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload: Commands Lists the AcEd-registered commands (AcEd-registered commands are described in the ObjectARX Developer's Guide).
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach Summary The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. To select multiple DWG files for attach, set the Files of Type to Drawing. You can select one file only for all other file formats. - ATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Inserts an external reference, image, or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN files) in the current drawing.
Scale Factor Resizes the underlay. For example, if the base image size is 36 x 24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the underlay will display at 72 x 48. Rotation Sets an angle of rotation for the underlay. PDF Underlay Prompts Path to File Enters the location of the PDF file including the file name. Page Number Enters a page number. ? Enters multiple pages. * Lists pages available in the PDF file.
Scale Factor Resizes the image. For example, if the base image size is 36 x 24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the underlay will display at 72 x 48. Rotation Sets an angle of rotation for the underlay. External Reference Prompts Path to File Enters the location of the external reference file including the file name. Reference Type Selects whether to attach this file as an underlay or an overlay. Press Enter to attach the file as an underlay (attachment).
Scale Factor Resizes the external reference. For example, if the base image size is 36 x 24 and you enter a scale factor of 2, the external reference will display at 72 x 48. Unit Changes the type of units to scale the external reference. ATTACHURL Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Using Hyperlinks in a Drawing Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
ATTDEF Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Block Attributes Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Define Attributes. Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Define Attributes Summary The Attribute Definition dialog box is displayed. If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, options are displayed. An attribute is an object that is created and included with a block definition.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Define Attributes Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Define Attributes Command entry: attdef List of Options The following options are displayed. Mode Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the block in a drawing. The default values are stored in the AFLAGS on page 2149 system variable. Changing the AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and does not affect existing attribute definitions.
Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions. Verify Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized.
Displays the Field dialog box. You can insert a field as all or part of the value for an attribute. Multiline Editor Button When Multiple Line mode is selected, displays an in-place text editor with a text formatting toolbar and ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE on page 2156 system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version. For more information, see the In-Place Text Editor.
Specifies that the attribute is . If the block is annotative, the attribute will match the orientation of the block. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Text Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing device. The height is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you select a text style that has fixed height (anything other than 0.
Enter an option to change [Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset/Lock position/Annotative/Multiple lines] : Enter attribute tag name: Enter any characters except spaces or exclamation points Enter attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Constant mode) Enter attribute prompt: Enter the text for the prompt line or press ENTER (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode) Enter default attribute value: Enter the appropriate tex
Attribute Tag Name Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation marks (!). Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase. Attribute Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. If you press ENTER, the attribute tag is used as the prompt. If you turn on Constant mode, this prompt is not displayed.
When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT on page 1214. Location of Multiline Attribute (Multiple Line Mode) Specifies the first corner of the bounding box for the multiple-line text. This location is used as the starting point for the attribute.
Summary The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility settings unless REGENAUTO on page 1615, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. The current visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE on page 2157 system variable. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal/ON/OFF] : Normal Restores the visibility settings of each attribute. Visible attributes are displayed. Invisible attributes are not displayed.
ATTEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) Changes attribute information in a block. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Attributes. Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Summary The Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed to edit attribute values for a specific block. If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Attributes Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Command entry: attedit Summary To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT. List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Indicates the name of the selected block. The value of each attribute contained in the block is displayed in this dialog box. List of Attributes Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block.
on page 2156 system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version. To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box. Previous Displays the previous eight attribute values. Previous is available only if the selected block contains more than eight attributes and you used Next to display the additional attributes. Next Displays the next eight attribute values.
The first attribute in the selection set is marked with an X. You can change any properties of the attribute you select. Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] : Enter the property to change, or press ENTER for the next attribute If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text, the prompt does not include Angle. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. For each of the options except Next, ATTEDIT prompts for a new value.
If the attribute is aligned, ATTEDIT prompts for both ends of a new text baseline. Height Changes the text height. When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the specified point and the start point of the text. Angle Changes the rotation angle. If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the specified point and the start point of the text. Style Changes the style setting.
Layer Changes the layer. Color Changes the color. You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book. You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer or byblock. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.
Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters. ATTEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Block Attributes Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file. Access Methods Summary The Attribute Extraction dialog box is displayed. If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Access Methods Command entry: attext Summary Specifies the file format for the attribute information, the objects from which you want to extract information, and the template and output file names for the information. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Format Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data.
Template File Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats. Enter the file name in the box, or choose Template File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box. The default file extension is .txt. If you select DXF under File Format, the Template File option is not available. Output File Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data.
DXF: Drawing Interchange File Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction requires no template. The file name extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .dxx for DXF format. Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract.
NOTE Not all MTEXT formatting options are available for multiline attributes even with the full In-Place Editor. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select attribute to edit: Select an attribute within a block Mask the Objects Behind Attribute Text If the text in a multiple-line attribute overlaps other objects within the block, you can hide those objects that interfere with the text with a background mask.
ATTSYNC Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Synchronize Attributes Toolbar: Modify II Command entry: attsync Summary You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current attributes defined for the blocks.
WARNING ATTSYNC removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated with the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party applications. AUDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Repair a Damaged Drawing File Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors.
AUTOCONSTRAIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation of the objects relative to one another.
Publishes drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files automatically to a specified location. Summary Publishes a drawing to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. The file format (DWF, DWFx, or PDF) is specified in the Auto Publish dialog box on page 186. To view information about the published drawings, click the Plotting Details Report Available icon in the tray on the right side of the status bar.
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and choose Options. Select the Plot and Publish tab. Command entry: options Summary Specifies options for publishing drawings to DWF, DWFx, or PDF files when you save or close a drawing file, or issue the AUTOPUBLISH on page 185 command. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Type Specifies that a single-sheet or a multi-sheet is generated for all the sheets listed in the Publish dialog box. Layer Information Specifies whether layer information is included in the published DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. NOTE Layer information for 3D DWF entries does not get published. Merge Control Specifies whether overlapping lines overwrite (the top line hides the bottom line) or merge (the colors of the lines blend together).
B Commands 3 BACTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. Summary This command is available only in the Block Editor on page 231. Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference moves or changes when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Select Objects Defines the objects that will be included in the action when modified. Enter Distance Between Columns When a linear or polar parameter is selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array action is modified. To specify the distance, use the mouse pointer. ■ Specify opposite corner. Enter Distance Between Rows or Specify Unit Cell When an XY parameter is selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array action is modified.
Offset When BACTIONBARMODE on page 2164 is set to 0 and the action is triggered, increases or decreases the angle of the selected parameter by the specified value. XY When an XY parameter is selected, specifies whether the distance applied to the action is the parameter's X distance, Y distance, or XY distance from the parameter's base point. Rotate Specifies that the selection set of objects rotates when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference.
XY When an XY parameter is selected, sets the Scale Type custom property. ■ X. Scales the selected object only along the X-axis of the XY parameter. ■ Y. Scales the selected object only along the Y-axis of the XY parameter. ■ XY. Scales the selected object along both the X- and Y-axes of the XY parameter. Stretch Specifies that the selection set of objects will stretch or move when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference.
Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 190 ■ Multiplier on page 190 ■ Offset on page 191 ■ XY on page 191 Select Objects Select Objects on page 190 Polar Stretch Specifies that the selection set of objects stretches or moves when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A polar stretch action can only be associated with a polar parameter. Specify Parameter Point Determines whether the start or end point of the parameter is used to determine the base point of the action.
Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Show All Actions/Hide All Actions Command entry: bedit ➤ bactionbar Summary You can only use the BACTIONBAR command in the Block Editor on page 231 and when in Action Bar mode (BACTIONBARMODE on page 2164 system variable is set to 1). The BACTIONBAR command controls the display of action bars for parameter objects in the Block Editor. An action bar is a toolbar-like element that displays the actions associated with a parameter object.
Access Methods Command entry: bedit ➤ bactionset Shortcut menu: Select an action in the block definition. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Action Selection Set, and then click an option. Summary Re-specifies the selection set of objects associated with an action by creating a new selection set or by adding to or removing objects from the existing selection set. You can only use the BACTIONSET command in the Block Editor on page 231.
BACTIONTOOL Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions Adds an action to a dynamic block definition. Access Methods Panel Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel Command entry: bedit ➤ bactiontool Summary Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference moves or changes when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters.
Specifies that the selection set of objects arrays when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. An array action can be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. Select Parameter Select a parameter to associate with the action. Select Objects Defines the objects that will be included in the action when modified. Enter Distance Between Columns When a linear or polar parameter is selected, specifies the distance between the selected objects when the array action is modified.
Move Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Move Specifies that the selection set of objects moves when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A move action can be associated with a point, linear, polar, or XY parameter.
Select Parameter Select Parameter on page 197 Select Objects Select Objects on page 197 Specify Action Location Specify Action Location on page 197 Base Type Specifies whether the base point for the action is dependent or independent of the associated parameter’s base point. Dependent Scales or moves selected objects relative to the base point of the associated parameter. Independent Scales or moves selected objects relative to a base point defined separately from that of the associated parameter.
Specifies that the selection set of objects scales relative to the defined base point when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference. A scale action can only be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter.
■ Specify objects. CPolygon Creates a polygon that represents the boundary area for the action when modified. ■ First polygon point. ■ Specify endpoint.
BASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Set Base Point Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Base Command entry: base (or 'base for transparent use) Summary The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS. When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other drawings, this base point is used as the insertion base point.
orphaned when the parameter with which it is associated is removed from the block definition. NOTE The BASSOCIATE command is disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE on page 2164 system variable is set to 1. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary The Block Attribute Manager is displayed. If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message is displayed. This command controls all attribute properties and settings of a selected block definition. Any changes to the attributes in a block definition are reflected in the block references. Block Attribute Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing.
Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default, Tag, Prompt, Default, Mode, and Annotative attribute properties are displayed in the attribute list. You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed in the list by choosing Settings. For each selected block, a description below the attribute list identifies the number of its instances in the current drawing and in the current layout. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Reports the number of instances of the selected block in the current model space or layout. Sync Updates all instances of the selected block with the attribute properties currently defined. This does not affect any values assigned to attributes in each block. Move Up Moves the selected attribute tag earlier in the prompt sequence. The Move Up button is not available when a constant attribute is selected. Move Down Moves the selected attribute tag later in the prompt sequence.
Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Attributes panel ➤ Manage Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager Toolbar: Modify II Command entry: battman Summary The Edit Attribute dialog box contains the following tabs: ■ Attribute ■ Text Options on page 207 ■ Properties on page 210 List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Displays the name of the block whose attributes are to be edited.
Mode Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears. Invisible Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If selected, hides the attribute value in the drawing area. If cleared, displays the attribute value. Constant Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value. You cannot change this property. If a check mark is shown in the check box, the attribute is set to its default value and cannot be changed. If the check box is empty, you can assign a value to the attribute.
Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute. Prompt Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you insert the block. Default Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when you insert the block. Text Options Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Sets the properties that define the way an attribute's text is displayed in the drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab. Text Style Specifies the text style for attribute text.
Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Properties Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and linetype for the attribute's line.
Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY system variable is off. Block Attribute Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Controls the appearance of the attribute list in the Block Attribute Manager.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Display in List Specifies the properties to be displayed in the attribute list. Only the selected properties are displayed in the list. The Tag property is always selected. Select All Selects all properties. Clear All Clears all properties. Emphasize Duplicate Tags Turns duplicate tag emphasis on and off. If this option is selected, duplicate attribute tags are displayed in red type in the attribute list.
Summary Displays the Attribute Order dialog box, which controls the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference. You can only use the BATTORDER command in the Block Editor on page 231. Attribute Order Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) Access Methods Command entry: bedit ➤ battorder Summary Specifies the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference.
Lists the attribute definitions in the current block. Move Up Moves the selected attribute definition up in the list. Move Down Moves the selected attribute definition down in the list. BAUTHORPALETTE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Block Authoring Tools Opens the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Authoring Palettes Summary Displays the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor.
BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Block Authoring Tools Closes the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor. Summary You can close the Block Authoring Palettes window only from the Block Editor. BCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of the Block Editor Closes the Block Editor. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Close panel ➤ Close Block Editor Shortcut menu: In the Block Editor, right-click in the drawing area.
BCONSTRUCTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Construction Geometry Within a Block Converts geometry into construction geometry. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Constraint Parameters panel ➤ Construction Geometry Summary The BCONSTRUCTION command is used in the Block Editor on page 231 to convert geometry into construction geometry. This command also controls the display of construction geometry and changes construction geometry back to regular geometry.
Revert Changes the selected objects back to regular geometry. The geometry is set to the current layer. Show All Displays all construction geometry. Hide All Hides all construction geometry. BCPARAMETER Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Constraints in Dynamic Blocks Applies constraint parameters to selected objects, or converts dimensional constraints to parameter constraints.
Enter an option [Linear/Horizontal/Vertical/Aligned/ANgular/Radial/Diameter/Convert] : Specify an option Linear Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Linear Creates a horizontal or vertical constraint parameter based on the locations of the extension line origins and the location of the dimension line similar to the DIMLINEAR on page 599 command. Object Selects an object instead of a constraint point. Press Enter or click the drop-down list to select the object.
Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Aligned Constrains the length of a line or the distance between two lines, a point on an object and a line, or two points on different objects. Object Object on page 218 Point & Line Selects a point and a line object. The aligned constraint controls the distance between a point and the closest point on a line. 2Lines Selects two line objects. The lines are made parallel and the aligned constraint controls the distance between the two lines.
When you enter or edit an angle value that is either negative or is greater than 360 degrees, the number entered is stored for the expression (for example, 390), but the value displayed is based on the formatting of the units (for example, 30 if decimal degrees). When an expression with variables evaluates to greater than 360 or less than -360, the constraint value is displayed in the Parameters Manager palette based on the units of the drawing.
Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Convert Converts the dimensional constraints to constraint parameters. Objects other than dimensional constraints are ignored and filtered from the selection set. -BCPARAMETER Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Constraints in Dynamic Blocks Applies constraint parameters to selected objects, or converts dimensional constraints to parameter constraints. Summary If you enter -bcparameter in the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 217.
Insertion Cycling Order Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Specifies the grip-cycling order for the insertion point of a dynamic block reference. Access Methods Command entry: bedit ➤ bcycleorder Summary When you insert a dynamic block reference in a drawing, you can use the Ctrl key to cycle through the grips that have cycling turned on in the block definition. The grip you select as you cycle is used as the insertion point for the block reference.
Move Up Moves the selected grip up in the cycling order for the dynamic block reference. Move Down Moves the selected grip down in the cycling order for the dynamic block reference. Cycling Turns cycling on or off for the selected grip. A check mark in the cycling column indicates that cycling is turned on for that grip. BEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.
When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened. The Block Editor is a separate environment for creating and changing block definitions for the current drawing. You can also use it to add dynamic behavior to blocks. Edit Block Definition Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Select from a list of block definitions that are saved in the drawing to edit in the Block Editor.
Summary When you click OK, the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes, and the Block Editor is displayed. ■ If you selected a block definition from the list, that block definition is displayed and is available for editing in the Block Editor. ■ If you entered a name for a new block definition, the Block Editor is displayed, and you can start adding objects to the block definition. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Block Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor Command entry: bedit Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area. Click Block Editor. List of Options The following options are displayed. Open/Save Panel Edit Block Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. Save Block Saves the current block definition.
Concentric (GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848) Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point. Fix (GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848) Locks points and curves in position. Parallel (GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848) Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other. Perpendicular (GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848) Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another. Horizontal (GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system.
Vertical (BCPARAMETER on page 217) Creates a vertical constraint parameter by picking two constraint points. Valid objects include lines and polyline segments. Aligned (BCPARAMETER on page 217) Creates an aligned constraint parameter using one of the following ways. ■ Selects a point and a line object. The aligned constraint controls the distance between a point and the closest point on a line. ■ Selects two line objects.
Action Parameters Panel Point (BPARAMETER on page 262) Defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference. Linear (BPARAMETER on page 262) Defines the distance between two key points in the block definition. Polar (BPARAMETER on page 262) Defines a distance and angle for two key points in the block definition. XY (BPARAMETER on page 262) Defines an X and Y distance from the base point of a block definition. Rotation (BPARAMETER on page 262) Defines an angle for the block reference.
dynamic block reference. A scale action can only be associated with a linear, polar, or XY parameter. Flip (BACTIONTOOL on page 196) A set of objects is flipped around the reflection line of the flip parameter when the action is triggered in the block reference. A flip action can only be associated with a flip parameter. Array (BACTIONTOOL on page 196) Specifies that the selection set of objects arrays when the action is triggered in a dynamic block reference.
Block Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions The Block Editor contains a special authoring area in which you can draw and edit geometry as you would in the drawing area. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area. Click Block Editor. Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor Command entry: bedit Summary You use the Block Editor to define dynamic behavior for a block definition.
■ BAUTHORPALETTE ■ BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE ■ BCLOSE ■ BCPARAMETER on page 217 ■ BCYCLEORDER ■ BCONSTRUCTION on page 216 ■ BGRIPSET ■ BLOOKUPTABLE ■ BPARAMETER ■ BSAVE ■ BSAVEAS ■ BTABLE on page 276 ■ BTESTBLOCK on page 281 ■ BVHIDE ■ BVSHOW ■ BVSTATE When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened. The Block Editor also provides a Block Editor toolbar and Block Authoring palettes that contain tools for creating dynamic blocks.
Block Editor Toolbar Provides tools for working in the Block Editor, creating dynamic blocks, and working with visibility states. The Block Editor toolbar is displayed when the ribbon is not active. It is also displayed only when you enter the Block Editor with the ribbon closed. Edit or Create Block Definition Displays the Edit Block Definition dialog box. Save Block Definition Saves the current block definition. Save Block As Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.
Parameters Manager (PARAMETERS on page 1402) Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. Learn About Dynamic Blocks Displays demonstrations in the New Features Workshop for creating dynamic blocks. Close Block Editor (BCLOSE on page 215) Closes the Block Editor. Visibility Mode (BVMODE) Controls how objects that are made invisible for the current visibility state are displayed in the Block Editor.
XY Parameter (BPARAMETER) Adds an XY parameter to the dynamic block definition and defines custom horizontal and vertical distance properties for the block reference. An XY parameter shows the X and Y distances from the base point of the parameter. In the Block Editor, an XY parameter displays as a pair of dimensions (horizontal and vertical). These dimensions share a common base point.
parameter cannot be associated with any actions, but can belong to an action's selection set. In the Block Editor, a base point parameter displays as a circle with crosshairs Actions Tab (Block Authoring Palettes Window) Provides tools for adding actions to a dynamic block definition in the Block Editor. Actions define how the geometry of a dynamic block reference move or change when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. You associate actions with parameters.
An array action causes its associated objects to copy and array in a rectangular pattern when the associated parameter is edited through a grip or the Properties palette. Lookup Action (BACTIONTOOL) Adds a lookup action to the dynamic block definition. When you add a lookup action to a dynamic block definition and associate it with a lookup parameter, it creates a lookup table. You can use a lookup table to assign custom properties and values to a dynamic block.
Polar Stretch Pair Automatically adds two stretch actions, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the polar parameter. XY Move Automatically adds a move action associated with the endpoint of the XY parameter. XY Move Pair Automatically adds two move actions, one associated with the base point and one associated with the endpoint of the XY parameter. XY Move Box Set Automatically adds four move actions, one associated with each key point on the XY parameter.
Tangent Constraint (GCTANGENT on page 838) Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions. Horizontal Constraint (GCHORIZONTAL on page 831) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system. Vertical Constraint (GCVERTICAL on page 839) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system.
-BEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dynamic Block Definitions Summary If you select a block in a drawing and enter -bedit at the Command prompt, the selected block is opened in the Block Editor on page 231.
Command entry: besettings Summary The Block Editor Settings dialog box on page 241 is displayed.
Summary Controls the environment settings of the Block Editor. List of Options The following options are displayed. Authoring Objects Controls the color of parameter and grip objects and specifies the orientation of the parameter text. Parameter Color Sets the color of parameters in the Block Editor. (BPARAMETERCOLOR on page 2170 system variable) Grip Color Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor.
Sets the display size of custom grips in the Block Editor relative to the screen display. (BGRIPOBJSIZE on page 2167 system variable) Constraint Status Specifies the color overrides for objects in the Block Editor to show constraint status. Unconstrained Sets the color of the unconstrained objects. Partially Constrained Sets the color of the partially constrained objects. Fully Constrained Sets the color of the fully constrained objects.
BGRIPSET Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Grips for Dynamic Blocks Creates, deletes, or resets grips associated with a parameter. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a parameter in the block definition. Right-click in the Block Editor drawing area. Click Grip Display, and then click an option. Summary Specifies the number of grips displayed for a parameter. Also resets the position of grips for a parameter to their default location.
Summary The BHATCH command has been renamed to HATCH. If you enter bhatch, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 870is displayed. If you enter -bhatch or -hatch, Command prompts are displayed. BLIPMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Controls the display of marker blips. Access Methods Command entry: 'blipmode for transparent use Summary When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+) appears where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.
BLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Blocks Creates a block definition from selected objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Make Toolbar: Draw Summary The Block Definition dialog box is displayed. If you enter -block at the Command prompt, options are displayed. You create a block definition by selecting objects, specifying an insertion point, and giving it a name.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Create Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Make Toolbar: Draw Command entry: block List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system or the program for other purposes. The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.
Prompts you to specify the base point when the dialog box is closed. Pick Insertion Base Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing. X Specifies the X coordinate value. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value. Z Specifies the Z coordinate value. Objects Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block.
Objects Selected Displays the number of selected objects. Behavior Specifies the behavior of the block. Annotative Specifies that the block is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Match Block Orientation to Layout Specifies that the orientation of the block references in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the Annotative option is cleared.
-BLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Blocks If you enter -block at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name or ? Block Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by Microsoft Windows and the program for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1.
If you enter yes, the block becomes annotative. Match Orientation to Layout in Paper Space Viewports If you enter yes, the block’s orientation in paper space viewports will match the orientation of the layout. Select Objects If you specify the insertion base point, you are prompted to select the objects. The program defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base point, and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the drawing.
BLOCKICON Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Blocks Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Update Block Icons Summary Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release. You can enter a series of comma-delimited block names or wild-card characters. For example, enter b1,?2, to specify that block B1 and all two-character blocks ending with 2 should be updated.
NOTE The BLOOKUPTABLE command is disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE on page 2164 system variable is set to 1. Property Lookup Table Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Lookup Actions Creates and modifies a lookup table for custom properties within the dynamic block definition. Access Methods Command entry: bedit ➤ blookuptable Pointing device: Double-click a lookup action Summary The lookup table assigns custom property values to the dynamic block reference.
The lookup table also allows the values of lookup parameters to be controlled by the values of other parameters (input properties). List of Options The following options are displayed. Action Name Displays the associated lookup action name, which you can edit in the Properties palette. Add Properties Displays the Add Parameter Properties dialog box on page 254. Audit Checks the data to ensure that each row is unique.
Access Methods Command entry: bedit ➤ blookuptable List of Options The following options are displayed. Parameter Properties Displays a list of parameters not yet added to the lookup table. Select a parameter and click OK to add it to the lookup table. Property Type Specifies the type of property to add to the lookup table. Add Input Properties Displays the available custom properties in parameters you’ve already added to the block definition.
BMPOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export Raster Files Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format. Summary The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. A bitmap file that contains the objects you select is created. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No.
Menu: Draw ➤ Boundary Summary The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed. If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Each point that you specify identifies the surrounding objects and creates a separate region or polyline. Boundary Creation Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for creating a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary Menu: Draw ➤ Boundary Command entry: boundary List of Options The following options are displayed. Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point. Island Detection Controls whether boundary detects internal closed boundaries, called islands. Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. boundary creates the boundary as a region or a polyline object.
-BOUNDARY Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. Specify internal point or [Advanced options]: Specify a point or enter a Internal Point Creates a region or polyline from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify a point inside the area. Advanced Options Sets the method BOUNDARY uses to create the boundary.
BOX Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid Box Creates a 3D solid box. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Box Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Box Toolbar: Modeling List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Center Creates the box by using a specified center point. Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length. Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.
Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. If you enter values, the length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. If you pick a point to specify the length, you also specify the rotation in the XY plane. 2Point Specifies that the height of the box is the distance between the two specified points. BPARAMETER Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Parameters to Dynamic Blocks Adds a parameter with grips to a dynamic block definition.
Access Methods Panel Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel Summary You can use the bparameter command only in the Block Editor on page 231. A parameter defines custom properties for the block reference. After you add a parameter, you must associate an action with the parameter to make the block dynamic. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Base Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Basepoint Defines a changeable base point for the dynamic block reference in relation to the geometry in the block. Specify Parameter Location Determines the default location of the basepoint for the block definition. This will be the location of the basepoint grip in the block reference. Point Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Point Defines custom X and Y properties for the block reference.
Linear Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Linear Defines the distance between two key points in the block definition. Specify Start Point/Endpoint Specifies the key points for the parameter in the block definition. Name Name on page 263 Label Label on page 264 Chain Chain on page 264 Description Description on page 264 Base Specifies the Base Location property for the parameter. ■ Startpoint.
■ 1. A grip will be displayed at just the endpoint of the parameter. ■ 2. A grip will be displayed at both the start point and endpoint of the parameter. Polar Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Polar Defines a distance and angle for two key points in the block definition. Specify Base Point Determines the point in the block definition relative to which the grip will be placed.
Label Label on page 264 Chain Chain on page 264 Description Description on page 264 Palette Palette on page 264 Value Set Value Set on page 265 Specify Endpoint Determines the maximum Y distance for the parameter. Specify Number of Grips Determines the number of grips that will display in the block reference. ■ 0. on page 265 ■ 1. A grip will be displayed at the endpoint of the Y distance. ■ 2. A grip will be displayed at both endpoints. ■ 4.
Specify Default Rotation Angle Determines the location of the grip in the block reference. Base Angle Specifies a base angle other than 0 for the parameter grip. Flip Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Flip Mirrors objects or the entire block reference about a reflection line. Specify Base Point Determines the first point for the line of reflection. The parameter grip will be displayed at this point.
Palette Palette on page 264 Lookup Button Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Action Parameters panel ➤ Lookup Defines user parameters that are determined by a lookup table. Specify Parameter Location Specify Parameter Location on page 268 Name Name on page 263 Label Label on page 264 Description Description on page 264 Palette Palette on page 264 BREAK Quick Reference See also: ■ Break and Join Objects Breaks the selected object between two points.
Summary You can create a gap between two specified points on an object, breaking it into two objects. If the points are off of an object, they are automatically projected on to the object. break is often used to create space for a block or text. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1) on an object The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object.
The portion of the object is erased between the two points that you specify. If the second point is not on the object, the nearest point on the object is selected; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline, specify the second point beyond the end to be removed. To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the second point.
BREP Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Original Forms of Composite Solids Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. Summary When a solid loses the history of the original parts from which it was created, the original parts can no longer be selected and modified. BREP also removes surface associativity. When a surface loses associativity it loses any mathematical expressions or information about how the surface was created.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Web Summary Pressing Enter displays your web browser, which automatically connects to the location you specify. Because browser does not append “http://” to web locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser. BSAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Blocks Within a Drawing Saves the current block definition.
BSAVEAS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Blocks Within a Drawing Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As Summary Displays the Save Block As dialog box on page 274. You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor on page 231. Save Block As Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Blocks Within a Drawing Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Open/Save panel ➤ Save Block As Command entry: bedit ➤ bsaveas List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Specifies a new name under which to save a copy of the current block definition. Block List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition.
Saves the block definition as a drawing file. Selecting a pre-existing drawing file overwrites the saved file. By default, the block name specified is taken as the drawing file name. BTABLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks Displays a dialog box to define variations of a block. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table Summary You can only use the btable command in the Block Editor on page 231.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify parameter location or [Palette]: Specify a location point Palette Specifies whether the block table item is displayed in the Properties palette for the block reference. Block Properties Table Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks Defines the variations for a set of user-defined properties in the block definition through a grid control.
Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table Command entry: bedit ➤ btable Summary You can press Shift+Enter to add a new line for a multiline attribute value in the grid in the Block Properties Table dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Add Properties Displays the Add Parameter Properties dialog box on page 278 where you can add parameters already defined in the Block Properties Table.
Adds parameter properties to the block properties table. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table Command entry: bedit ➤ btable List of Options The following options are displayed. Parameter Properties Displays a list of dimensional constraint parameters, user parameters, legacy parameters, and attribute definitions. Name Displays the names of parameters available to add to the block properties table.
Identifies the type of the parameter. New Parameter Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Define User Parameters in Dynamic Blocks Creates and defines a new user parameter to be added to the block properties table. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Block Table Command entry: bedit ➤ btable List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Displays the name of the new user parameter. Value Displays the value of the user parameter.
Determines the type of the new parameter. You can select a real, distance, area, volume, angle, or string parameter type. Display in Properties Palette Specifies whether to display the user parameter as a property in the Properties palette for the block reference. BTESTBLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Test Blocks Within the Block Editor Displays a window within the Block Editor to test a dynamic block.
A Close Test Block Window contextual panel is added to the ribbon when you are in the Test Block mode. In the Block Editor, the BCLOSE on page 215, BTESTBLOCK on page 281, and CLOSE on page 335 commands automatically close the Test Block window and discard the temporary file. The btestblock command closes the current Test Block window and opens a new window with the current definition. NOTE Please ensure that there are entities present in the block being tested before running the btestblock command.
Select objects to hide: Select objects to hide for the current visibility state or all visibility states Hide for current state or all visibility states [Current/All] : Enter currentto hide the selected objects for the current visibility state or enter all to hide the selected objects for all visibility states in the block definition BVSHOW Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block Makes objects visible in the current visibility state or all visibility states in a
BVSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block Creates, sets, or deletes a visibility state in a dynamic block. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States Summary Displays the Visibility States dialog box on page 284. You can only use the BVSTATE command in the Block Editor on page 231 after a visibility parameter has been added to the block definition.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States Command entry: bedit ➤ bvstate List of Options The following options are displayed. Visibility States Lists the available visibility states for the current dynamic block definition. The order of this list is reflected in the dynamic block reference when the grip is clicked to display the list of visibility states. The state at the top of the list is the default state for the block reference.
Delete Deletes the selected visibility state. Move Up Moves the selected visibility state up in the list. Move Down Moves the selected visibility state down in the list. New Visibility State Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Visibility of Objects in a Block Creates a new visibility state. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor contextual tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Visibility States Command entry: bedit ➤ bvstate List of Options The following options are displayed.
Visibility State Name Specifies the name for the new visibility state. Visibility Options for New States Displays options for the new visibility state. Hide All Existing Objects in New State Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be hidden in the new visibility state. Show All Existing Objects in New State Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new visibility state.
Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be hidden in the new visibility state. Show All Specifies that all objects in the block definition will be shown in the new visibility state. Current Visibility Specifies that the visibility of objects in the new visibility state will be the same as in the current visibility state on which the new state is based. Set Specifies the visibility state to set as current. Delete Deletes a visibility state.
4 C Commands CAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions. Access Methods Command entry: 'cal for transparent use Summary CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS.
Understand Syntax of Expressions Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of precedence: ■ Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set ■ Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division second, and addition and subtraction last ■ Operators of equal precedence from left to right Numeric Expressions Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined wi
Vector Expressions A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions combined with the operators in the following table.
You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch formatted values: ■ 5' or 60” ■ 5'-9” or 5' 9” or 5'9” ■ 5'-1/2” or 5' 1/2” or 5'1/2” ■ 5'-9-1/2” or 5' 9-1/2” or 5'9-1/2” ■ 5'-9 1/2” or 5' 9 1/2” or 5'9 1/2” To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes (“) is optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2”, you could enter 5'9-1/2.
124.6r 14g Angles entered in any format are converted to decimal degrees. Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees. Use Points and Vectors Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines a location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space. Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions, such as nor and vec, return a vector.
Point formats Coordinate system Point format WCS (instead of UCS) Uses the * prefix [*x,y,z] You can omit the following components of a point or vector: coordinate values of zero and a comma immediately preceding the right bracket (]). The following are valid points: [1,2] is the same as [1,2,0] [,,3] is the same as [0,0,3] [ ] is the same as [0,0,0] In the following example, the point is entered in the relative spherical coordinate system with respect to the (WCS).
This example defines a point located 5 units in the X direction and 1 unit in the Y direction from the point stored in AutoLISP variable A. A+[5,1] If you enter an AutoLISP variable with a name containing a character with special meaning in CAL, such as +, -, *, or /, enclose the variable name in apostrophes ('), for example: 'number-of-holes' Assigning Values to AutoLISP Variables To assign a value to an AutoLISP variable, precede the arithmetic expression with the variable name and the equal sign (=).
The syntax is getvar(variable_name) The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of the view in the current viewport. getvar(viewctr) With this method, you can also access the user system variables, USERI1-5 and USERR1-5.
CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table.
Calculate a Vector from Two Points Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points. vec(p1,p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2. vec1(p1,p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2.
Calculate the Length of a Vector Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The abs function calculates the length of a vector. abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real number. In spherical coordinates (dist
Obtain the Last-Specified Point Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator Use the character in the expression to obtain the coordinate of the last point, as shown in the following example: Command: line Specify first point: 'cal >> Expression: cen+[0,1] >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal >> Expression: +3*vec1(cen,cen) The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the first selected circle.
When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen. CAL Snap modes set the value of the LASTPOINT system variable.
Convert Points Between UCS and WCS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator Normally, the program assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current UCS. The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS. w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current UCS. u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the WCS.
The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in spherical coordinates: zof([2<45<45]) The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b: xyof(a)+zof(b) Calculate a Point on a Line Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line.
The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point. rot(p,origin,ang) Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis passing through the point origin, as shown in the following example: rot(p,AxP1,AxP2,ang) Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis passing through points AxP1 and AxP2, as shown in the following example. The axis is oriented from the first point to the second point.
ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1,p2) and a plane passing through three points (p3,p4,p5). Calculate a Distance Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2). dpl(p,p1,p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and the line passing through points p1 and p2.
The following example returns half the distance between the centers of two selected objects: dist(cen,cen)/2 The following example finds the distance between the point 3,2,4 and a plane you define by selecting three endpoints: dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end) Obtain a Radius Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The rad function determines the radius of a selected object. rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object can be a circle, an arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment.
>> Expression: 2/3*rad >> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the circle Obtain an Angle Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Command Prompt Calculator The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the two-dimensional case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case. ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v.
You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the ang function, as shown in the following example: Command: cal >> Expression: ang(end,end,end) Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices.
The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal, not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain another point. nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc segment. This normal vector is the Z coordinate of the object coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object.
The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected object. The program displays the object in plan view and does not distort the object by the parallel projection.
Shortcut functions Function Shortcut for Description vee1 vec1(end,end) Unit vector from two endpoints CAMERA Quick Reference See also: ■ Define a 3D View with a Camera Sets a camera and target location to create and save a 3D perspective view of objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Camera panel ➤ Create Camera.
Enter camera name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press Enter to list all cameras. Name Names a camera. Enter name for new camera : Location Specifies the location of the camera. Specify camera location : Height Changes the camera height. Specify camera height : Target Specifies the target of the camera. Specify camera target : Lens Changes the lens length of the camera.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Camera panel ➤ Create Camera. Toolbar: View Command entry: camera List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview of a camera view defined with the CAMERA command. Visual Style Specifies the visual style applied to the preview. Display This Window When Editing a Camera Specifies that the Camera Preview dialog box is displayed when you edit a camera.
Menu: Modify ➤ Chamfer Toolbar: Modify Summary The distances and angles that you specify are applied in the order that you select the objects. You can chamfer lines, polylines, rays, and xlines. You can also chamfer 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh to chamfer, you can choose to convert it to a solid or surface before completing the operation. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges of the base surface to chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the edges at once. Edge Selects an individual edge to chamfer. Loop Switches to Edge Loop mode. Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface. Undo Reverses the previous action in the command. Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D polyline. The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline.
If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered. Distance Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge. If you set both distances to zero, CHAMFER extends or trims the two lines so they end at the same point. Angle Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second line. Trim Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints.
CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0, the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines. Method Controls whether CHAMFER uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create the chamfer. Multiple Chamfers the edges of more than one set of objects. Expression Controls the chamfer distance with a mathematical expression. See Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager for a list of operators and functions allowed.
List of Prompts Select an Edge Selects a single solid or surface edge to chamfer. Distance 1 Sets the distance of the first chamfer edge from the selected edge. The default value is 1. Distance 2 Sets the distance of the second chamfer edge from the selected edge. The default value is 1. Loop Chamfers all edges on a single face. Expression Controls the chamfer distance with a mathematical expression. See Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager for a list of operators and functions allowed.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed Select objects: Specify “change point” or [“Properties”]: Specify a new point, or press Enter to enter new values Specify Objects If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you get varying results depending on the object selection sequence. The easiest way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only objects other than lines in a selection set.
Attribute Definitions Changes the text and text properties of an attribute that is not part of a block. Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block. Specifying a new location relocates the block. Pressing Enter leaves the block in its original location. Properties Modifies properties of existing objects. NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. You can change several properties at a time.
Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects. Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects. Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object has no effect. Transparency Changes the transparency level of selected objects.
Toolbar: CAD Standards Summary Set standards by creating a file that defines properties for layers, dimension styles, linetypes, and text styles, and save it as a standards file with the .dws file name extension. The Check Standards dialog box is displayed. Check Standards Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Drawings for Standards Violations Analyzes the current drawing for standards violations.
Lists possible replacements for the current standards violation. If a recommended fix is available, it is preceded by a check mark. If a recommended fix is not available, no items are highlighted in the Replace With list. Preview of Changes Indicates the properties of the nonstandard object that will be changed if the fix currently selected in the Replace With list is applied.
Changes the properties of an object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Enter property to change [Color on page 324/LAyer on page 324/LType on page 324/ltScale on page 324/LWeight on page 324/Thickness on page 325/TRansparency on page 325/Material on page 325/Annotative on page 325]: NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles.
Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object has no effect. Transparency Changes the transparency level of selected objects. Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90. Material Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached. Annotative Changes the property of the selected objects.
When transferring objects to paper space, the SOURCE viewport that you click determines the paper space location of the transferred objects. When transferring objects to model space, the TARGET viewport that you click determines the model space location of the transferred objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Set the SOURCE viewport active and press Enter to continue: Returns prompts similar to the following: N object(s) changed from MODEL space to PAPER space.
Center Point Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Center, Radius Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius. Radius Defines the radius of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a point. For example: Diameter Defines the diameter of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a second point. For example: 3P (Three Points) Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ 3-point Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference.
Tan, Tan, Tan Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Tan, Tan, Tan Creates a circle tangent to three objects. For example: 2P (Two Points) Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ 2-Point Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Circle drop-down ➤ Tan, Tan, Radius Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. The program draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points. For example: CLASSICIMAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Raster Images Manages referenced image files in the current drawing. Summary The legacy Image Manager is displayed.
CLASSICLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Opens the legacy Layer Properties Manager. Summary The legacy Layer Properties Manager is displayed. The LAYER command displays the current Layer Properties Manager. NOTE This command will be removed in future releases. CLASSICXREF Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Manages referenced drawing files in the current drawing. Summary The legacy Xref Manager is displayed.
CLEANSCREENON Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Toolbars Clears the screen of toolbars and dockable windows, excluding the command window. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen Summary The screen displays only the menu bar, the Model and layout tabs at the bottom of the drawing, the status bars, and the command line. Use CLEANSCREENOFF to restore display of interface items except menu bar, status bar, and the command line.
Summary Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. Use CLEANSCREENON to clear the screen of toolbars and dockable windows (excluding the command line). Press Ctrl+0 (zero) to switch between CLEANSCREENON and CLEANSCREENOFF. The Clean Screen button is available in the lower-right corner of the application status bar. CLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Clip Underlays Crops a selected external reference, image, viewport, or underlay (DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN) to a specified boundary.
Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire PDF underlay and frame. If you clip the underlay again while clipping is off, clipping automatically turns on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is off and the clipping boundary is not visible. Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original underlay. New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline.
displayed. Regardless of the current UCS, the clip depth is applied parallel to the clipping boundary. ■ Front Clip Point. Creates a clipping plane passing through and perpendicular to the clipping boundary. ■ Distance. Creates a clipping plane the specified distance from and parallel to the clipping boundary. ■ Remove. Removes both the front and back clipping planes. Delete Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block. To temporarily turn off a clipping boundary, use the Off option.
Polygonal Draws a clipping boundary. You can draw line segments or arc segments by specifying points. The descriptions of the Next Point, Arc, Close, Length, and Undo options match the descriptions of the corresponding options in the PLINE command. Delete Deletes the clipping boundary of a selected viewport. This option is available only if the selected viewport has already been clipped.
CLOSEALL Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing Closes all currently open drawings. Access Methods Menu: Application menu ➤ Close ➤ All Drawings Summary All open drawings are closed. A message box is displayed for each unsaved drawing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it. COLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Color Sets the color for new objects.
Summary The Select Color dialog box is displayed. If you enter -color at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Select Color Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Color Defines the color of objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color Menu: Format ➤ Color Command entry: color (or 'color for transparent use) Summary You can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.
Index Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Color Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color Menu: Format ➤ Color Command entry: color (or 'color for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD Color Index.
green, blue value are displayed below the palette. Click a color to select it, or enter the color number or name in the Color box. The large palette displays colors 10 through 249. The second palette displays colors 1 through 9; these colors have names as well as numbers. The third palette displays colors 250 through 255; these colors are shades of gray. Index Color Indicates the ACI color number when you hover over a color. Red, Green, Blue Indicates the RGB color value when you hover over a color.
True Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Color Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color Menu: Format ➤ Color Command entry: color (or 'color for transparent use) Summary Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true color functionality.
List of Options The following options are displayed. HSL Color Model Specifies the HSL color model for selecting colors. Hue, saturation, and luminance are properties of colors. By manipulating the values of these properties, you can specify a wide range of colors. Hue Specifies the hue of a color. Hues represent a specific wavelength of light within the visible spectrum. To specify a hue, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Hue box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value.
Red Specifies the red component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Red box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Green Specifies the green component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Green box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Blue Specifies the blue component of a color.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Object Color Menu: Format ➤ Color Command entry: color (or 'color for transparent use) Summary Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab displays the name of the selected color book. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Book Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors. The list consists of all the color books that are found in the Color Book Locations specified in the Options dialog box, Files tab.
seven colors per page. To view color book pages, select an area on the color slider or use the up and down arrows to browse. RGB Equivalent Indicates the value for each RGB color component. Color Indicates the currently selected color book color. You can search for a specific color in a color book by entering the number of the color swatch and pressing TAB. This action updates the New color swatch with the requested color number.
WARNING If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that make up a block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex results. If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. See the LAYER command for information about assigning a color to a layer. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
You can display commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts in a dockable and resizable window called the Command Line window. COMMANDLINEHIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window Hides the Command Line window. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Command Line Summary Hides the Command Line window. When the Command Line window is hidden, you can still enter commands with dynamic prompts turned on.
CONE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid Cone Creates a 3D solid cone. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Cone Menu: Home ➤ Modeling ➤ Solid Modeling drop-down ➤ Cone Toolbar: Modeling Summary Creates a 3D solid with a circular or elliptical base that tapers symmetrically to a point or to a circular or elliptical planar face. You can control the smoothness of 3D curved solids, such as a cone, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
3P (Three Points) Defines the base circumference and base plane of the cone by specifying three points. ■ 2Point on page 348 ■ Axis Endpoint on page 348 ■ Top Radius on page 348 2P (Two Points) Defines the base diameter of the cone by specifying two points. ■ 2Point on page 348 ■ Axis Endpoint on page 348 ■ Top Radius on page 348 TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the base of the cone with a specified radius tangent to two objects.
Center Creates the base of the cone by using a specified center point. ■ 2Point on page 348 ■ Axis Endpoint on page 348 ■ Top Radius on page 348 CONSTRAINTBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Verify Geometric Constraints Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.
On the ribbon, you can also show or hide all constraint bars for all constrained geometries. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select objects with constraint bars Enter an option [Show on page 351/Hide on page 351/Reset on page 351] :Enter the appropriate value to show or hide constraint bars in the drawing. Show Displays constraint bars for the selected objects with geometric constraints applied to them.
Toolbar: Parametric Summary The Constraint Settings Dialog Box is displayed. Constraint Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Constraints Allows you to control the geometric constraints, dimensional constraints, and autoconstrain settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. The Constraint Settings dialog box includes the following: ■ Geometric Tab ■ Dimensional Tab ■ Autoconstrain Tab Geometric Tab Controls the display of constraint types on constraint bars. Infer Geometric Constraints Infers geometric constraints when creating and editing geometry. Constraint Bar Filters Controls the display of constraint bars or constraint point markers for objects in the drawing editor.
Set the name format to display: Name, Value, or Name and Expression. For example: Width=Length/2 Show Lock Icon for Annotational Constraints Displays a lock icon against an object that has an annotational constraint applied (DIMCONSTRAINTICON on page 2236 system variable). Show Hidden Dynamic Constraints for Selected Objects Displays dynamic constraints that have been set to hide when selected.
Tangent Objects Must Share an Intersection Point Specifies that two curves must share a common point (as specified within the distance tolerance) for the tangent constraint to be applied. Perpendicular Objects Must Share an Intersection Point Specifies that lines must intersect or the endpoint of one line must be coincident with the other line or endpoint of the line as specified within the distance tolerance. Tolerances Sets the acceptable tolerance values to determine whether a constraint can be applied.
CONVERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier. Sumary Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous release is opened in Release 14 or later. Information about the rotation of a hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS since creating the hatch.
CONVERTCTB Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch the Type of Plot Style Table Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table (STB). Summary Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), where you can select the color-dependent plot style table file you want to convert. The Save As dialog box is then displayed. If necessary, specify a new location or name for the converted plot style table file.
tab in the Page Setup dialog box. If you want to rename the plot styles, you must do so before applying them to drawing layouts. CONVERTOLDLIGHTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Lights in Drawings from Previous Versions of AutoCAD Converts lights created in previous drawing file formats to the current format. Summary The lights in the drawing that were originally created in a previous drawing file format are updated to the current drawing file format.
changes occurred in AutoCAD 2000, AutoCAD 2004, AutoCAD LT 2007, and AutoCAD 2010. WARNING The conversion may not be correct in all cases. You may need to adjust material mapping, for example. CONVERTPSTYLES Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch the Type of Plot Style Table Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles. Summary A drawing can use either named or color-dependent plot styles, but not both.
Converting Drawings from Color-Dependent to Named Plot Styles A dialog box advises you to convert the drawing's plot style tables before converting the drawing. You can convert the color-dependent plot style tables assigned to the drawing to named plot style tables using CONVERTCTB. The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed, where you select the named plot style table file to attach to the converted drawing.
CONVTOMESH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Meshes by Conversion Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth Objects Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Smooth Mesh Toolbar: Smooth Mesh Summary Take advantage of the detailed modeling capabilities of 3D mesh by converting objects such as 3D solids and surfaces to mesh.
Object type 3D surfaces 3D faces Polyface and polygon meshes (legacy) Regions Closed polylines CONVTONURBS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create NURBS Surfaces Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces. Access Methods Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Convert to NURBS Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ Convert to NURBS Toolbar: Surface Editing Summary Converts solids and procedural surfaces to NURBS surfaces.
To convert meshes to NURBS surfaces, convert them to a solid or surface first with CONVTOSOLID on page 363 or CONVTOSURFACE on page 366 and then convert them to NURBS surfaces. CONVTOSOLID Quick Reference See also: ■ Create 3D Solids from Objects Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids.
Summary Take advantage of the solid modeling capabilities available for 3D solids. When you convert mesh, you can specify whether the converted objects are smoothed or faceted, and whether the faces are merged. The smoothness and number of faces of the resulting 3D solid are controlled by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT system variable.
Object Required properties were converted to surfaces). If the surfaces enclose a watertight area, you can also convert to a solid with the SURFSCULPT on page 1885 command. Limitations on Conversion to Solid Objects Object Description Polyline Cannot contain zero-width vertices. Polyline Cannot contain segments of variable width. Separate objects that simulate a closed surface Cannot be a planar surface with contiguous edges or an exploded 3D solid box into six regions.
CONVTOSURFACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces Converts objects to 3D surfaces. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Convert to Surface Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Convert to Surface Summary As you convert objects to surfaces, you can specify whether the resulting object is smooth or faceted.
When you convert a mesh, the smoothness and number of faces of the resulting surface are controlled by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT system variable. Whereas the previous example shows a conversion to a smooth, optimized surface, the following example shows a conversion to a faceted surface in which the faces are not merged, or optimized.
Objects Planar 3D faces objects converted to surfaces You can select the objects to convert before you start the command. NOTE You can create surfaces from 3D solids with curved faces, such as a cylinder, with the EXPLODE command. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the geometry used to create 3D objects is automatically deleted when the new object is created or whether you are prompted to delete the objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
COPY Quick Reference See also: ■ Copy Objects Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy Menu: Modify ➤ Copy Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Copy Selection. Summary With the COPYMODE system variable, you can control whether multiple copies are created automatically. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the copied objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects are copied 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current location.
■ When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE, it is placed relative to the specified base point. COPYCLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste Copies selected objects to the Clipboard. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Copy Clip Menu: Edit ➤ Copy Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy from Clipboard. Summary COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard.
COPYHIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard. Summary The text is copied to the Clipboard. COPYLINK Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit OLE Objects in Drawings Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications.
COPYTOLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Copies one or more objects to another layer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layers ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer Toolbar: Layers II Summary Creates duplicates of selected objects on a layer that you specify. You can also specify a different location for the duplicated objects. If you enter -copytolayer at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Name Displays the Copy to Layer dialog box. ■ Specify Base Point on page 373 ■ Displacement on page 373 Copy To Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Specifies the layer on which the selected objects are placed. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layers ➤ Copy Objects to New Layer Toolbar: Layers II Command entry: copytolayer List of Options The following options are displayed.
-COPYTOLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to copy: Specify the destination layer name or [“?”/= (select object)] <0>: Select an object on the destination layer, enter?, or enter= Specify the Destination Layer Name Displays a list of layers that you can select as the destination layer. You can also enter a name to create a new layer.
Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Summary User interface elements such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels, shortcut menus, and keyboard shortcuts are all managed from this dialog box. The Customize User Interface Editor is displayed. NOTE The XML-based CUIx file replaces the CUI file used in AutoCAD 2006 through AutoCAD LT 2009, and both the legacy menu (MNS) and legacy menu template (MNU) files used in releases prior to AutoCAD 2006.
■ Transfer For more information, see User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide. Customize Tab (Customize User Interface Editor) Quick Reference See also: ■ Basics of Customization Files Manages customized user interface elements such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, shortcut menus, and keyboard shortcuts.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Command entry: cui Summary Provides an interface for customizing workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels, shortcut menus, and other user interface elements.
NOTE When the Customize User Interface Editor is displayed using the Customize Commands option from the Tool Palettes window or the Customize option from the Quick Access toolbar or a toolbar, the Customizations In pane is collapsed and the Command List pane is expanded. List of Options The following options are displayed. Customizations In Pane Displays a tree structure of user interface elements that can be customized, such as workspaces, toolbars, menus, ribbon panels, partial CUIx files, and so on.
Panel Preview Displays a preview of the selected ribbon panel. Quick Properties Displays a list of object types and associated properties. You can specify which object types and properties are enabled to use with the Quick Properties panel and rollover tooltips. Command List Pane Displays a list of commands that are loaded in the program. Categories Displays filters for the command list, including All Commands, Commands, User Defined, Toolbar Control Elements, or Ribbon Control Elements.
■ Menu Bar - Specifies the display of the menu bar. (Off or On) ■ Status Bar - Specifies the display of the application and drawing status bars. (Application Only, All Off, All On, or Drawing Status Bar Only) ■ Model/Layout Tabs - Specifies the display of the Model and layout tabs along the bottom of the drawing window. (Off, On, or Do Not Change) ■ Screen Menus - Specifies the display of the screen menu.
Properties for a Command on Ribbon Panels: ■ Button Style - Specifies the orientation, size, and label display of the command. (Large With Text (Vertical), Large With Text (Horizontal), SmallWithText, or SmallWithoutText) ■ Group Name - Specifies the group name for the command when grouping is enabled for a drop-down. Properties for Drop-downs on Quick Access Toolbars and Ribbon Panels: ■ Behavior - Specifies if the button executes a command or displays a list of commands.
Properties for Screen Menus: ■ Start Line - Specifies where the first line of a submenu should be displayed. ■ Number of Lines - Specifies the number of lines that make up the screen menu. Access Controls the key combination assigned to a shortcut key. ■ Key(s) - Specifies the key combination assigned to a shortcut key. ■ KeyTip - Specifies the keytip character to access a command or control from the ribbon.
Slide Specifies the slide library and slide to use for a command in an image menu. ■ Slide library - Specifies the slide library for the slide used for the command in an image menu. ■ Slide label - Specifies the slide to use for the command in an image menu. Shortcut Controls the key combination and macros assigned to a temporary override key. ■ Key(s) - Specifies the key combination for the temporary override. Click the [..] button to display the Shortcut Keys dialog box.
comma and the total number of characters for all the tags and separators cannot be more than 256 characters. Advanced Displays the aliases and element IDs that you can define for each user interface element. ■ Aliases - Specifies a unique value for a user interface element that is used to programmatically reference the user interface element. Click the [..] button to display the Aliases dialog box. Click in the text box and edit the list of assigned aliases.
Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Editor) Quick Reference See also: ■ Transfer and Migrate Customization Transfers user interface elements to or from a main or partial customization (CUIx) file, where your interface element data is stored.
Command entry: cui Summary You open a CUIx, CUI, MNS, or MNU file to import or export user interface data. When you open CUI, MNU, or MNS files, they are not converted automatically to a CUIx file format until you save the new file that is created. The original CUI, MNU, or MNS file is not modified. List of Options Customizations In panes When you enter cuiimport at the Command prompt, the main CUIx file is displayed (acad.cuix by default) in the right pane.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and click Customize Command entry: cui List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Palette Sets the current color used by the editing tools. Standard Color Swatches Color swatches used to set of the standard 16 colors current. More Opens the Select Color dialog box. Editing Tools Provides tools for editing a custom image.
Undo Undoes the last editing action. Grid Displays a grid in the editing area. Each grid square represents a single pixel. Save Displays the Save Image dialog box, which allows you to save the customized image to the working customization file. Import Imports an externally stored image for editing. Images are stored in the working customization file as bitmap (BMP) files. Export Exports the customized image to an external local or network storage location.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ User Interface Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and click Customize Command entry: cui List of Options The following options are displayed. Loaded Customization Files List Lists the customization files that are currently loaded. Custom Images List Lists the images that are stored in the customization file selected from the Loaded Customization Files list.
Delete Permanently deletes the selected image from the Custom Images list and the customization file. Preview Displays a preview of the selected image in the Custom Images list.
Summary Locates and replaces commands or command properties (command names, descriptions, or macros). Use the Find tab to locate a specified text string, and the Replace tab to locate and replace a specified text string. List of Options The following options are displayed. Common Find What Displays the search string you want to locate. If you select a command in the Command List pane, this box displays that string. You can also enter a string.
CUIEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Transfer and Migrate Customization Exports customized settings from the main CUIx file to an enterprise or partial CUIx file. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Export Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Export Customizations Summary Customization information can be transferred between the main and partial CUIx files. Opens with the Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Editor) opened by default. The main CUIx file (acad.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Import Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Import Customizations Summary Customization information can be transferred between the main and partial CUIx files. Opens with the Transfer Tab (Customize User Interface Editor) opened by default. You can drag items from one CUIx file to the other. Click Apply to save the changes and view the updated CUIx file. CUILOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Manage Customization Files Loads a CUIx file.
Load/Unload Customizations Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Manage Customization Files Controls the display of customization groups and interface elements. Access Methods Command entry: cuiload List of Options The following options are displayed. Loaded Customization Groups Lists the currently loaded customization files. File Name Specifies the file to load when you choose Load.
Unload Unloads the customization group selected in the Customization Groups list. Load Loads the file specified under File Name. Browse Displays the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a menu file to load. CUIUNLOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Manage Customization Files Unloads a CUIx file. Summary Opens the Load/Unload Customizations dialog box, which has the same options as CUILOAD.
CUSTOMIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize Tool Palettes Customizes tool palettes and tool palette groups. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Tool Palettes Shortcut menu: Right-click any tool palette and choose Customize Palettes. Summary The Customize dialog box is displayed.
Access Methods Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Tool Palettes Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Tool Palettes Shortcut menu: Right-click any tool palette and choose Customize Palettes. Command entry: customize List of Options The following options are displayed. Palettes Lists all available tool palettes. When you export a palette, it is saved to a file with an .xtp extension. Right-click in the Palettes area to import a palette or to create a new, blank one.
Right-click a palette group, and then click Set Current on the shortcut menu to display the palette group.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Cut Menu: Edit ➤ Cut Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Cut from Clipboard. Summary CUTCLIP copies selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an embedded OLE object (see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). CUTCLIP does not create OLE link information.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve to add control vertices. Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Point Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Insert Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to place a point directly on a surface. This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
Access Methods Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Hide CV Menu: Modify ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤ Hide CV Toolbar: Surface Editing Summary Turns off the CV display for all NURBS objects. CVREBUILD Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit NURBS Surfaces Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves.
Summary If you have difficulties editing the control vertices or there are too many control vertices, you can rebuild a surface or curve with less control vertices in the U or V direction. CVREBUILD also allows you to change the degree of the surface or curve. If you select a surface, the Rebuild Surface dialog box on page 403 is displayed. If you select a spline, the Rebuild Curve dialog box on page 405 is displayed.
Toolbar: Surface Editing Command entry: cvrebuild Summary Reshapes a NURBS surface by rebuilding the CV hull. List of Options The following options are displayed. Control Vertices Count Specifies the number of control vertices in the U and V directions. In U Direction Specifies the number of control vertices in the U direction. (REBUILDU on page 2486 system variable) In V Direction Specifies the number of control vertices in the V direction.
Maximum Deviation Displays the maximum deviation between the original surface and the new one. Rebuild Curve Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves ■ CVREBUILD on page 402 Rebuilds the shape of a NURBS curve.
Delete input geometry Specifies whether the original curve is retained along with the rebuilt curve. (REBUILD2DOPTION on page 2484 system variable) Maximum Deviation Displays the maximum deviation between the original curve and the new one. CVREMOVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit NURBS Surfaces Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve to remove control vertices Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Point Specifies a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Remove Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to remove a point directly from the surface. This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
Access Methods Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Control Vertices panel ➤ Show CV Menu: Modify ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤ Show CV Toolbar: Surface Editing Summary Prompts you to select the NURBS surfaces and curves whose control vertices you want to display. Non-NURBS surfaces do not have control vertices. You can convert objects to NURBS surfaces with the CONVTONURBS command. CYLINDER Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid Cylinder Creates a 3D solid cylinder.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Solid Primitives drop-down ➤ Cylinder Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Cylinder Toolbar: Modeling Summary In the illustration, the cylinder was created using a center point (1), a point on the radius (2), and a point for the height (3). The base of the cylinder is always on a plane parallel with the workplane. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a cylinder, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.
2P (Two Points) Defines the base diameter of the cylinder by specifying two points. ■ 2Point on page 409 ■ Axis Endpoint on page 409 TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the base of the cylinder with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.
■ 2Point on page 409 ■ Axis Endpoint on page 409 CYLINDER | 411
412
D Commands 5 DATAEXTRACTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard Extracts drawing data and merges data from an external source to a data extraction table or external file.
The Data Extraction wizard on page 414 is displayed. If you enter -dataextraction at the Command prompt, options are displayed. on page 444 Data Extraction Wizard Quick Reference See also: ■ Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard Provides step-by-step instructions for extracting information from objects, blocks, and attributes, including drawing information in the current drawing or a set of drawings.
■ Select Properties on page 419 ■ Refine Data on page 420 ■ Choose Output on page 422 ■ Table Style on page 423 ■ Finish on page 425 Begin Starts the data extraction process. Options include creating a new data extraction, using a template, or editing an existing data extraction. Create a New Data Extraction Creates a new data extraction and save it to a DXE file.
Edit an Existing Data Extraction Allows you to modify an existing data extraction (DXE) file. Click the [...] button to select the data extraction file in a standard file selection dialog box. Define Data Source Specifies the drawing files, including folders from which to extract data. Allows selection of objects in the current drawing from which to extract information.
Add Folder Displays the Add Folder Options dialog box on page 426, where you can specify folders to include in the data extraction. Add Drawings Displays the standard file selection dialog box, where you can specify drawings to include in the data extraction. Remove Removes the checked drawings or folders listed in the Drawing Files and Folders list from the data extraction. Settings Displays the Data Extraction - Additional Settings dialog box on page 427, where you can specify data extraction settings.
Objects Object Displays each object by its name. Blocks are listed by block name. Non-blocks are listed by their object name. Display Name Provides a place to enter an optional alternative name for an object as it will appear in the extracted information. Select a display name, right-click in the list, and click Edit Display Name. Type Displays whether the object is a block or non-block. Preview Displays a preview image of the checked block in the Object list view.
Select Properties Controls the object, block, and drawing properties to extract. Each row displays a property name, its display name, and category. Right-click a column head and use options on the shortcut menu to check all or clear all items, invert the selection set, or edit the display name. Click the column head to reverse the sort order. Columns can be resized. Properties Property Displays object properties from objects selected on the page.
Category Filter Property Category List Displays a list of categories that are extracted from the property list. Unchecked categories filter the Properties list. Categories include 3D Visualization, Attribute, Drawing, Dynamic Block, General, Geometry, Misc, Pattern, Table, and Text. Property Grid Shortcut Menu Check All Selects all the properties in the property grid. Uncheck All Clears all the properties in the property grid. Invert Selection Inverts the current checked items in the property grid.
Icons display in the column header for inserted formula columns and columns extracted from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Combine Identical Rows Groups identical records by row in the table. Updates the Count column with the sum of all aggregated objects. Show Count Column Displays the Count column in the grid. Show Name Column Displays the Name column in the grid.
Combine Record Mode Displays numeric data in the selected column as separate values or collapses identical property rows into one row and displays the sum of all the numeric data in the selected column. This option is available when the Combine Identical Rows is checked and the selected column contains numerical data. Show Count Column Displays a Count column that lists the quantity of each property. Show Name Column Displays a Name column that displays the name of each property.
Output Options Insert Data Extraction Table into Drawing Creates a table that is populated with extracted data. You are prompted to insert the table into the current drawing when you click Finish on the Finish on page 425 page. Output Data to External File Creates a data extraction file. Click the [...] button to select the file format in a standard file selection dialog box.
Table Style Select the Table Style to Use for the Inserted Table Specifies the table style. Click the Table Style button to display the Table Style Dialog Box on page 1908, or select a table style from the drop-down list that is defined in the drawing. Formatting and Structure Use Table in Table Style for Label Rows Creates the data extraction table with a set of top rows that contain label cells and a bottom set of label rows that contain header and footer cells.
Data Cell Style Specifies the style for data cells. Click the drop-down list to select a cell style defined in the selected table style. Use Property Names as Additional Column Headers Includes column headers and uses the Display Name as the header row. Display Preview Displays a preview of the table layout. If the table style does not include a title row or header row, none is displayed.
Add Folder Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard Specifies the folders to be used for data extraction. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II Command entry: dataextraction Summary Drawings in the selected folders are monitored for data changes. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Folder Displays the path to the specified folder. Folder Button Click the [...] button to select the folder in a standard file selection dialog box. Options Automatically Include New Drawings Added in this Folder to the Data Extraction Includes new drawings to the data extraction when they are added to the folder. The New Drawings Found dialog box on page 429 displays when new drawings are added. When this option is selected, the specified folders are “live.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II Command entry: dataextraction List of Options The following options are displayed. Extraction Settings Extract Objects from Blocks Includes objects nested in blocks. Extract Objects from Xrefs Includes objects and blocks in externally referenced (xref) files. Include Xrefs in Block Counts Includes xrefs when counting blocks.
All Objects in Drawing Includes all objects in model space and paper space in the drawing, including drawing information. On by default. New Drawings Found Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard Displays a list of new drawings added to the folder selected for the data extraction after the extraction was performed.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II List of Options The following options are displayed. Drawing Name Displays the name of the drawing that was added to the data extraction folder. Folder Displays the path and folder name for each new drawing.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II List of Options The following options are displayed. Data Link Choose the Source of the External Data Displays a list of established links to an Excel spreadsheet.
Data Link Manager Button Displays the Data Link Manager on page 445, where you can specify a link to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Data Matching Drawing Data Column Displays a list of extracted property columns. External Data Column Displays a list of column names from the linked data in the Excel spreadsheet. Check Match Compares the data in the specified drawing data key column and the external data key column.
Learn About Using External Data Displays the New Features Workshop. Sort Columns Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize and Refine the Extracted Data Specifies a sort order for columns. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II List of Options The following options are displayed.
Specifies the sort order of columns. The Column section contains column names from the Refine Data page. Add Adds a new item of sorting criteria to the Column list. Remove Removes the currently selected sort criteria. Move Up Moves the selected item up in the list view. Move Down Moves the selected item down in the list view. Insert Formula Column Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize and Refine the Extracted Data Specifies the formula for the column that is inserted into the extracted data.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II List of Options The following options are displayed. Column Name Specifies a name for the column that can be edited. Duplicate column names cannot be used. Formula Displays the selected formula or functions that are available for QUICKCALC on page 1588 and CAL on page 289. Addition (+) Button Adds the numerical data from one column to another.
Displays the column names from the extracted drawing data and external data (if data linking was established). Column names can be double-clicked to be added to the Formula field or dragged from the Column list to the Formula field. Existing formula columns are not listed and cannot be used as values for creating additional formula columns. Set Cell Format Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize and Refine the Extracted Data Defines the formatting for cells in the table.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II List of Options The following options are displayed. Data Type Displays a list of data types (Angle, Date, Decimal Number, and so on) that you can format for table rows. Preview Displays a preview of the option you selected in the Format list. Format Depending on the data type you select, displays a list of relevant format types.
Additional Format Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize and Refine the Extracted Data Provides additional formatting options for fields and table cells. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Data Extraction List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Value Displays the value in base drawing units. Preview Displays updates to the format as you change the conversion factor and other settings. Conversion Factor Specifies the conversion factor to use on the current value.
Additional Text Specifies a prefix or a suffix for the value. Number Separators Specifies a decimal separator and the formatting for numbers over 1000. ■ Decimal Specifies the separator for decimal values. Select a period, a comma, or a space. ■ Thousands Inserts a comma to group thousands in a field value. Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. ■ Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal values. For example, 0.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II List of Options The following options are displayed. Column Name Specifies a name for the column that can be edited. Formula Displays the existing formula or function. Plus (+) Adds the numerical data from one column to another. Minus (-) Subtracts the numerical data from one column to another. Multiply (*) Multiplies the numerical data from one column to another.
Division (/) Divides the numerical data from one column to another. Validate Checks the validity of the specified equation. A formula column can only be inserted when the formula is validated. Columns Displays the column names from the extracted drawing data and external data (if data linking was established). Column names can be double-clicked to be added to the Formula field or dragged from the Column list to the Formula field.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Extract Data Menu: Tools ➤ Data Extraction Toolbar: Modify II List of Options The following options are displayed. Filter Based on the Following Conditions Displays conditions based on the type of data in the selected column. First Column Specifies the first condition. Second Column Available when the specified filter uses two conditions.
Filter Across These Values Displays a list of values depending on the type of data being filtered. Filters for numeric data include Greater than >, Equal To, Between, and so on. Filters for textual data include Equal To, Not Equal To, Contains, and Begins With. Data Extraction - Outdated Table Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Data Extraction Table Automatically Offers options to update the data extraction table, update all tables, skip the update, or skip all updates.
Skip All Updates Does not update any tables. -DATAEXTRACTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard Extracts data as specified in an existing attribute extraction template (BLK) file created with the Attribute Extraction wizard in AutoCAD 2006 or data extraction (DXE) file created in AutoCAD 2007. Summary If you enter -dataextraction at the Command prompt, prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
DATALINK Quick Reference See also: ■ Link a Table to External Data Displays the Data Link dialog box. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Linking & Extraction panel ➤ Data Link Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Data Link Manager Summary A table can be linked to data in a Microsoft Excel (XLS, XLSX, or CSV) file. You can link to an entire spreadsheet, individual row, column, cell, or cell range in Excel. The Data Link Manager on page 445 is displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Linking & Extraction panel ➤ Data Link Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Data Link Manager Command entry: datalink List of Options The following options are displayed. Data Link Tree View Displays links contained within the drawing. Also gives options for creating new data links. Excel Links Lists the Microsoft Excel data links within the drawing. If the icon displays a linked chain, then the data link is valid.
Create a New Excel Data Link Launches a dialog box where you enter the name for a new data link. Once a name has been created, the New Excel Data Link dialog box on page 447 is displayed. Details Lists information for the data link selected in the tree view above. Preview Displays a preview of the linked data as it would appear in the drawing table. When a data link is not currently selected then no preview is displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. File Specifies the file and file path from which to create a data link. Choose an Excel File Allows you to choose an established Microsoft XLS, XLSX, or CSV file to link to your drawing. At the bottom of this drop-down list, you can select a new XLS, XLSX, or CSV file from which to create a data link. Click the [...] button to browse for another Microsoft Excel file on your computer.
Select the Excel Sheet to Link to Displays the names of all sheets within the specified XLS, XLSX, or CSV file. The link options specified below are applied to the sheet you choose here. Link Entire Sheet Links the entire specified sheet within your Excel file to a table in your drawing. Link to a Named Range Links a named range of cells already contained within your Excel file to a table in your drawing. Clicking the arrow displays the available named ranges found in the linked spreadsheet.
Imports data formats. Data is calculated from formulas in Excel. Convert Data Formats to Text, Solve Formulas in Excel Imports Microsoft Excel data as text with data calculated from formulas in Excel (supported data formats not attached). Allow Writing to Source File Specifies that the DATALINKUPDATE on page 450 command can be used to upload any changes made to linked data in your drawing to the original external spreadsheet.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables panel ➤ Download from Source Menu: Tools ➤ Data Links ➤ Update Data Links Summary Updates changes to linked data between a table in a drawing and an external data file. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select an option [Update data link/Write data link] : Update Data Link Updates the linked data in a table in your drawing with data that has been changed in the external source file.
DBCONNECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Provides an interface to external database tables. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ dbConnect. Summary The dbConnect Manager is displayed and the dbConnect menu is added to the menu bar.
■ Format dialog box on page 481 ■ Import Query Set dialog box on page 482 ■ Import Template Set dialog box on page 483 ■ Label Template dialog box on page 484 ■ Label Template Properties dialog box on page 489 ■ Link Conversion dialog box on page 490 ■ Link Manager on page 493 ■ Link Template dialog box on page 498 ■ Link Template Properties dialog box on page 499 ■ New Label Template dialog box on page 500 ■ New Link Template dialog box on page 501 ■ New Query dialog box on page 502
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ dbConnect. Summary You can view and edit database tables, execute structured query language (SQL) queries, and link table records to graphical objects. By default, the dbConnect Manager opens as a docked window on the left side of the drawing area. When you open the dbConnect Manager, a small red X is displayed in the lower right corner of each database and data object. The X indicates that these objects are currently unconnected.
Execute Query Executes a query. This button is not available unless a query is selected in the tree view. New Query Displays the New Query dialog box. This button is not available unless a single table, link template, or query is selected. If a query is selected, you can use this button to display the Query Editor, in which you can edit the query. New Link Template Displays the New Link Template dialog box. This button is not available unless a single table or link template is selected.
Hide Labels Turns off visibility of all labels in the selected drawing. Reload Labels Refreshes the field values of the labels in the selected drawing, updating them to reflect any changes made in the source database table. Database Objects Shortcut Menu Provides options available for database objects (such as link templates, label templates, and queries) attached to the drawing nodes. Different database objects have different subsets of menu options available to them.
Delete Labels Deletes all labels in the current drawing that use the selected label template. Available only for label templates. Synchronize Verifies that all links in the current drawing based on the selected link template contain valid values. Any detected problems are reported in the Synchronize dialog box. Available only for link templates.
New Link Template Opens the New Link Template dialog box. Available only for database tables. New Label Template Opens the New Label Template dialog box. Available only for database tables. New Query Opens the New Query dialog box. Available only for database tables. Data View Window Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Provides the primary interface for viewing and editing external database tables from within the program.
Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a link template, a label template, or a table from the dbConnect Manager and choose View Table or Edit Table. Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a database table in the dbConnect Manager and choose View Table or Edit Table. Pointing device: Double-click a database table or a link template in the dbConnect Manager. Double-clicking a link template that has no links created in the drawing it's associated with opens the Link Template dialog box.
drawing does not have a current selection set, you are prompted to select objects to link to. Create Freestanding Label Creates a freestanding label that isn't associated with a graphical object. You are prompted to specify an insertion point for the label. Create Attached Label Creates a link to one or more graphical objects and creates a corresponding label. If the current drawing has a selection set already established, a link is created for all objects in the selection set.
Select operation, this button's tooltip is Return to Link Select, and choosing it returns you to the Link Select dialog box. Link Template List Creates a new link template, or specifies a link template from those that are defined for the open table. The selected link template is applied when you create new links in the current drawing. To create a new link template, select the New Link Template option from the Link Template list, and then choose the Link button flyout.
Column Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected column headers. Sort Opens the Sort dialog box, in which you can select a combination of up to five columns to use in specifying a sort order for the Data View. A small triangle in the column header indicates that the data is sorted by that column. Hide Removes all selected columns from the Data View display. Unhide All Restores all hidden columns to the Data View display.
Find Opens the Find dialog box, which you can use to search for a specific value. The Find shortcut menu option limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell. Replace Opens the Replace dialog box, which you can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a replacement value that you specify. Replace limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell. Available only for database tables that are opened in Edit mode.
Clear All Marks Clears record selection marks from the selected records in the Data View window. Grid Header Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click the grid header. Commit Saves all changes made in the Data View window to the source database table and closes the Data View window. Available only when a database table is open in Edit mode and you have edited its values. Restore Undoes any changes made to a database table during an editing session and closes the Data View window.
Data View Print Preview Window Loads into the Data View window a preview image of how the current table appears when you print it. When the Data View window is in Preview mode, none of the primary Data View buttons is available and the navigation buttons are removed from the bottom of the window. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Data View ➤ Print Preview Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and choose Print Preview. Print Opens the default system Print dialog box.
Query Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Consists of a series of tabs that you can use to build and execute queries. Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table, New Query on a Link Template, or Edit Query. (Displays a dialog box in which you can select a database object to query.) Toolbar: dbConnect buttons ➤ Select a database table or a link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Query button.
Quick Query Tab (Query Editor) Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Develops simple queries based on a single database field, single operator, and single value. List of Options The following options are displayed. Field Lists the fields from the current database table, from which you can select one to apply to the query. Operator Displays a list of available operators that can be applied to the query.
Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table in the Column Values dialog box, from which you can select the value you want. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criterion in the Data View window. Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criterion in the current drawing. Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box. Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Look Up Values (From, Through) Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table in the Column Values dialog box, from which you can select the value you want. Through Specifies the second value of the range. The query returns all records or graphical objects that are less than or equal to this value. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criterion in the Data View window.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Query Builder Grid Provides a space for you to construct queries based on multiple search parameters. Parenthetical Grouping Groups a series of search criteria by bracketing them within parentheses. You can nest up to four sets of parentheses within a single statement. To insert a beginning parenthesis, click in the cell to the left of the first Field cell that you want to group.
Fields in Table Displays a list of available fields from the current database table, from which you can specify the fields to display in the Data View window when the query is executed. If you don't specify any fields to display, the query displays all fields from the database table. Double-clicking in a field in this list or selecting a field and choosing Add (Show Fields) adds the field to the list of those that are displayed in the Data View window by the returned query.
Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query. Store Saves the query with the current drawing. Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box. SQL Query Tab (Query Editor) Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Constructs any query statement that conforms with the SQL 92 protocol. The SQL Query tab provides both a query editor text box where you can type a free-form SQL statement and a set of tools to assist you in constructing your query.
Provides a space for you to type a free-form SQL query or add elements that you select using the various SQL Query tools. Table Lists all database tables that are available in the current data source. You can add database tables to the SQL text editor by double-clicking them, by selecting them and choosing Add in the Table area, by dragging them from the Table list to the SQL text editor, or by entering their names directly in the SQL text editor.
Check Checks your SQL query for proper syntax without actually executing it. This function helps you isolate syntax errors before you issue your query. Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box. Column Values Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Lists values for the selected database column; you can select a value to apply to the current operation. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Data Sources node and choose Configure Data Source. Summary For detailed information about configuring a particular database system, refer to “Configure External Databases” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Data Source Name Specifies a name for the OLE DB data source that you are configuring. Data Sources Lists all OLE DB data sources configured for use with the program that are present on your system.
Access Methods Toolbar: Data View buttons Menu: Data View ➤ Options. (The Data View menu is available only if you currently have a database table open in the Data View window.) List of Options The following options are displayed. AutoPan and Zoom Control how linked objects are displayed in the current drawing when you select their corresponding records in the Data View window.
Record Indication Settings Control the appearance of linked records in the Data View window when their corresponding objects are selected in the current drawing. Show Only Indicated Records Displays in the Data View window only the record set that is associated with the current selection set. Any records not linked to the current drawing selection set are not displayed. Show All Records, Select Indicated Records Displays all records in the current database table.
Adds additional records to the record set as you select additional graphical objects. If this option is cleared, the Data View window indicates a new set of records each time you select a new set of graphical objects. Export Links Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Exports a set of links that are associated with a selection set of graphical objects.
File Name Specifies a name for the exported link file. Save as Type Specifies the file format for the exported links. You can save the file in the native database format of the current database table or as a comma-delimited or space-delimited text file. Link Template Name Displays the name of the link template whose links you're exporting.
Exports a set of link templates and label templates that are associated with the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ Export Template Set Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager, right-click the drawing node of a drawing that has one or more templates defined and choose Export Template Set. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Name Specifies a name for the template set. Save as Type Specifies the file format for the template set.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Find What Specifies the value to search for. Match Case Searches for the exact value, including case, of what you enter in Find What. If this option is cleared, the program searches for the value regardless of case. Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that you're searching for. Direction Toggles the direction that the program searches for the specified value in the Data View window.
Specifies the size in points that is applied to the current font. Effects Applies additional formatting to the Data View window on page 458 display. Strikeout draws a line through the center of all column data. Underline applies an underline to all column data. Color applies a color to all column data. Sample Displays how the current Format option values look when applied to the Data View window. Script Specifies the script that is applied to the current font.
Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the query set that you're importing. Query sets always have the .dbq extension. Import Template Set Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Imports a set of link templates and label templates into the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ Import Template Set Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager and choose Import Template Set.
Label Template Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Applies formatting to labels. Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Label Template. Select a link template in the Select a Database Object dialog box and choose Continue. Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a database table, link template, or label template and choose the New Label Template button.
Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text. The default value is based on the current text style. If the current text style has no fixed height, the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE on page 2552 system variable. Bold Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.
colors in the color list or click Other to open the Select Color dialog box. on page 337 Symbol Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. Symbols can also be inserted manually. See Symbols and Special Characters on page 1244. Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu. Click Other to display the Character Map dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system. Select a character and click Select to place it in the Characters to Copy box.
text and affect the justification of the line. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries. Text is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. See -MTEXT on page 1240 for an illustration of the nine justification options. Width Sets a paragraph width for new or selected text. The No Wrap option produces a single line. The width of individual characters is not affected by this option.
Field Displays a list of available fields from the current database table that you can include in your label. You may include any number of fields from the source table. Add Adds the selected field in the Field list to the label. Table Displays the name of the current database table. Label Offset Tab Defines X and Y coordinate offsets for the insertion point of both your label and, if it is an attached label, its associated leader object. Start Specifies the start point for the leader object.
the tip of the leader object. The Leader Offset settings apply only to attached labels. Tip Offset Specifies the leader tip or label text offset values for attached and freestanding labels. For attached labels, the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y offset from the value specified in Start for the tip of the leader object. For freestanding labels, the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y offset from the insertion point you specified for the label.
Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the selected label template. You can select a new catalog from this list to apply to the label template. Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the selected label template. You can select a new schema from this list to apply to the label template. Table Displays the name of the database table specified for the selected label template. You can select a new database table from this list to apply to the label template.
Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Link Conversion Because legacy links are stored in formats that differ significantly from AutoCAD 2000 and later, the link conversion process requires that you specify ™ a mapping of the old AutoCAD SQL Extension (ASE) link values to the new ones used by AutoCAD 2000 and later.
Old Link Format (R12) Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that you're converting. DBMS Specifies the database management system used by the link that you're converting. Database Specifies the database used by the link that you're converting. Table Specifies the database table used by the link that you're converting. Old Link Format (R13/R14) Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that you're converting.
Table Lists available database tables that you can select for the converted link. Link Template Lists available link templates that you can select for the converted link. OK Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file and closes the dialog box. Apply Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file but keeps the dialog box open so that you can specify conversions for additional links. Cancel Closes the dialog box without converting any links.
Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Links ➤ Link Manager. Select a linked graphical object. Shortcut menu: Select and then right-click a linked graphical object, and then choose Link ➤ Link Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed. Link Templates Lists all link templates that are associated with the selected graphical object. Select the link template whose link values you want to view or edit. Key Displays the key fields of the currently selected link template.
Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Links ➤ Link Select Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose Link Select. Summary The Link Select dialog box, known as ASE Select in previous releases, is an advanced implementation of the Query Editor. You begin a Link Select operation by creating an initial query or selection set of graphical objects (set A), which can be operated on by an additional query or selection set (set B).
List of Options The following options are displayed. Do Applies a Link Select operator to the current query or selection set. The following operators are available: Select, Union, Intersect, Subtract A-B, Subtract A-B. Select Creates an initial query or selection set. This selection set can be refined through subsequent Link Select operations. Union Adds the results of the new query or selection set to the running selection set.
Use Query Uses any of the available Query Editor tabs to construct a query that returns a selection set to the Link Select operation. Select in Drawing Closes the Link Select dialog box when you choose the Select button so that you can construct a selection set of graphical objects to return to the Link Select operation. Execute/Select Executes the current Link Select query or temporarily dismisses the Link Select dialog box so you can select graphical objects from the drawing.
Link Template Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Specifies the key fields that are used by a link template. Summary Before the Link Template dialog box opens, the New Link Template dialog box is displayed, in which you can name the link template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Access Methods Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a database table and choose the New Link Template button.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a database table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Link Template. Pointing device: Double-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager. This method opens the Link Template dialog box directly, without first displaying the New Link Template dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Template Name Displays the name of the link template. Table Displays the current database table.
Summary Before the Link Template Properties dialog box opens, the Select a Database Object dialog box is displayed, from which you can select a link template. List of Options The following options are displayed. Template Name Displays the name of the selected link template. Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the selected link template. You can select a new data source from this list to apply to the link template.
Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Label Template. Select a link template from the Select a Database Object dialog box and choose Continue. Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a database table and choose the New Label Template button. Toolbar: Data View buttons ➤ Choose New Label Template from the Label Template list, and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout.
Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Link Template. Navigate to and then select a database table in the Select a Data Object dialog box and choose Continue. Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a database table and choose the New Link Template button. Toolbar: Data View buttons ➤ Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list, and then choose the Link button flyout. Shortcut menu: Right-click a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Link Template.
Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table or New Query on a Link Template. (A dialog box is displayed in which you can select a database object to query.) Toolbar: dbConnect Manager buttons ➤ Select a link template, database table, or existing query and choose the New Query button. Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template, database table, or existing query in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Query.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a single cell or column header in the Data View window and choose Replace. Summary You can specify a replacement value that overwrites the value that you're searching for. The search is limited to a single database table column. It is not possible to conduct a global search that scans all columns in the database table. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: List of Options The following options are displayed. Find What Specifies the value to search for.
Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Templates ➤ New Label Template, Edit Link Template, Edit Label Template, Delete Link Template, or Delete Label Template; Queries ➤ Execute Query, New Query on a Link Template, Edit Query, or Delete Query; Links ➤ Delete Links; Labels ➤ Reload Labels, Show Labels, Hide Labels, or Delete Labels; View Data ➤ View Linked Table, Edit Linked Table Summary You can select a database object from this list to apply to the current operation.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Tree View Window Lists the available data sources, from which you can select a database table to apply to the current operation. OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a secondary dialog box or window, in which you can continue the current operation. If, for example, you are creating a new link template, the New Link Template dialog box is displayed.
Ascending Applies an ascending sort order to the selected column. The column data is ordered with the smallest value at the beginning of the Data View record set and the largest value at the end of the record set. Descending Applies a descending sort order to the selected column. The column data is ordered with the largest value at the beginning of the Data View record set and the smallest value at the end of the record set. Then By Specifies an additional column to apply to the sort operation.
Access Methods Menu: dbConnect ➤ Synchronize Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose Synchronize. Summary Links can become invalid if you change the underlying structure of their source database table, or if you move the source table to a new location. In these cases, the structure specified by the link template used to create the links is no longer valid, and link templates and any associated links must be updated.
DBLIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings Lists database information for each object in the drawing. Summary The text window displays information about each object in the current drawing. The program pauses when the window fills with information. Press Enter to resume output, or press Esc to cancel. DCALIGNED Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Constrains the distance between two points on different objects.
The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects Line and constraint point Two lines ■ When a line or an arc is selected, the distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained. ■ When a line and a constraint point are selected, the distance between the point and the closest point on the line is constrained.
2Lines Selects two line objects. The lines are made parallel and the aligned constraint controls the distance between the two lines. First Line Select the first line to be constrained. Second Line to Make Parallel Select the second line to constrain the distance between the two selected lines.
The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Pair of lines Pair of polyline segment Three constraint points Arc ■ When two lines are selected, the angle between the lines is constrained. The initial value always defaults to a value less than 180 degrees.
First Angle Constraint Point Specifies the first angle endpoint of the arc. Second Angle Constraint Point Specifies the second angle endpoint of the arc. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 512 DCCONVERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. Access Methods Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Convert Summary This command is equivalent to the Convert option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 584.
DCDIAMETER Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Constrains the diameter of a circle or an arc. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Diameter Summary This command is equivalent to the Diameter option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 584. The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Circle Arc ■ Constrains the diameter of the circle or arc. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
DCDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. Access Methods Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Show/Hide Menu: Parametric ➤ Dynamic Dimensions ➤ Select Objects Toolbar: Parametric List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Specifies whether the dimensional constraint being created is dynamic or annotational. Summary This command is equivalent to the Form option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 584. Setting the value for this command defines the Constraint Form property of the object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter constraint form [Annotational on page 516/Dynamic on page 516] : Select a constraint form Annotational Applies annotational dimensional constraints to objects.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Horizontal option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 584. The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects ■ When a line or an arc is selected, the horizontal distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Linear Summary This command is equivalent to the Linear option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 584. The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects ■ When a line or an arc is selected, the horizontal or vertical distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained.
DCRADIUS Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Radius Summary This command is equivalent to the Radius option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 584. The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Circle Arc ■ Constrains the radius of the circle or arc. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
DCVERTICAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel ➤ Vertical Summary This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 584.
Second Constraint Point Specifies the second point of the object to be constrained. Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object. Object Selects an object instead of a constraint point. DDEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Text Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames.
■ Text created using MTEXT on page 1214 displays the In-Place Text Editor. ■ Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition) display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box. ■ Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press Enter to end the command. Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value. You can use this option immediately after editing.
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Text Access Methods Button Toolbar: Text Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Edit. Command entry: ddedit Modifies an attribute definition's tag, prompt, and default value. List of Options The following options are displayed. Tag Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain exclamation marks (!).
DDPTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Reference Points Specifies the display style and size of point objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Point Style Menu: Format ➤ Point Style Command entry: 'ddptype for transparent use Summary The Point Style dialog box is displayed. Point Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Reference Points Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an icon.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Point Style Menu: Format ➤ Point Style Command entry: ddptype (or 'ddptype for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Point Display Images Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in the PDMODE on page 2446 system variable. Point Size Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units.
DDVPOINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the 3D Projection Style Sets the 3D viewing direction. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint Presets Summary The Viewpoint Presets dialog box is displayed. Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the 3D Projection Style Defines 3D view settings.
Access Methods Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint Presets Command entry: ddvpoint List of Options The following options are displayed. Set Viewing Angles Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system (WCS) or a user coordinate system (UCS). Absolute to WCS Sets the view direction relative to the WCS. Relative to UCS Sets the view direction relative to the current UCS. From Specifies viewing angles. X Axis Specifies the angle from the X axis.
You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles. The black arm indicates the new angle. The gray arm indicates the current angle. Specify an angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-circle. Selecting the bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to the value displayed in that region. If you select the inner arc or an area inside it, the angle is not rounded off, and the result may be a fractional number.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Delete Constraints Menu: Parametric ➤ Delete Constraints Toolbar: Parametric Summary The number of constraints removed are displayed on the command line. Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from the selected objects. DETACHURL Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Removes hyperlinks in a drawing. Summary Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects. If an area is selected, the polyline is deleted.
Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DGN underlay. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Adjust Summary You can change the default values for Fade, Contrast, and Monochrome for a single or multiple DGN underlays. To confirm the settings on a selected DGN underlay, use the Properties palette.
inverted, with the darkest linework displaying in white, and the lightest linework displaying in black. DGNATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Insert a DGN file as an underlay into the current drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach Menu: Insert ➤ DGN Underlay Toolbar: Insert Summary When you attach a DGN file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to the current drawing.
NOTE When a DGN file is attached as an underlay, its levels structure (layers) are combined into a single layer. The DGN underlay is placed on the current layer. To hide the DGN attachment, freeze the layer on which it was attached. Attach DGN Underlay Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Names, locates, and defines the insertion point, scale, and rotation when attaching DGN underlays.
Conversion Units Matches the DWF files’s drawing units to the master units and sub-units specified in the DGN file. For example, if the DGN file has master units set to meters, and sub-units set to millimeters, and you want the DWG to be set to millimeters, select sub-units in the Attach DGN Underlay dialog box. Master Units Matches the DWG drawing units to the master units set in the DGN file. Sub Units Matches the DWG drawing units to the sub- units set in the DGN file.
Scale Factor Field Enters a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected DGN underlay. Specify on-screen If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value at the Command prompt. Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0.
Adjust Panel Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the underlay. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary secondary color. Fade Controls the appearance of the linework. The greater the value, the lighter the linework in the underlay appears. Display in Monochrome Displays the underlay in black and white. Clipping Panel Create Clipping Boundary (DGNCLIP on page 537) Crops the display of a selected DGN underlay to a specified boundary.
NOTE DGNATTACH is not limited to files with *.dgn extensions. It supports all DGN files, even those that do not have a .dgn extension. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. TIP You can drag a DGN file onto the drawing window to start the DGNATTACH command. Path to DGN File to Attach Enters the full path name to the DGN underlay file. The file name can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this program.
Scale Factor Specifies the scale factor of the selected DGN underlay and the scale factor units. You can enter a scale factor at the command prompt or click onscreen with the mouse. If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. On Turns on clipping and displays the DGN underlay clipped to the previously defined boundary. Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire DGN underlay. If you reclip the DGN underlay while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.
DGNEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export MicroStation DGN Files Creates one or more DGN files from the current drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Export ➤ DGN File Summary The Export DGN File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Once you specify a DGN file name, the Export DGN Settings dialog box is displayed. You can export a V8 or V7 file using DGNEXPORT. If you enter -dgnexport at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 547.
Export DGN Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Export MicroStation DGN Files Controls how objects are processed when exporting them to a DGN file. Access Methods Menu: Application menu ➤ Export ➤ DGN File List of Options The following options are displayed. External DWG References Controls how xrefs are processed.
All referenced DWG files, including nested DWG references, are converted into DGN files. The resulting DGN files use the same file name as the DWG files, but use a .dgn file extension. With the following set of options, you can choose whether or not to overwrite DGN reference files ■ Prompt to Overwrite ■ Overwrite without Prompting ■ Do Not Overwrite Bind All DWG References into One DGN file The parent DWG file and all referenced DWG files are combined into a single DGN file.
Conversion Units Select the appropriate conversion units for the translation. The DGN seed file contains working units (imperial or metric) called master units and sub-units. One DWG unit is converted to either one master unit or one sub-unit. Master Units Specifies that one DWG drawing unit will convert to one master unit of the specified DGN seed file. Sub Units Specifies that one DWG drawing unit will convert to one sub-unit of the specified DGN seed file.
DGN Seed File Name Master Unit (label) Sub Unit (label) Resolution V7-Imperial-Arch02Seed3D.dgn Feet (‘) Inches (“) 12”/1’ and 1000 POS V7-Imperial-Civil01Seed2D.dgn Feet (‘) Tenths (tn) 10tn/1’ and 100 POS V7-Imperial-Civil01Seed3D.dgn Feet (‘) Tenths (tn) 10tn/1’ and 100 POS V7-Imperial-Civil02Seed2D.dgn Feet (‘) Tenths (tn) 10tn/1’ and 1000 POS V7-Imperial-Civil02Seed3D.dgn Feet (‘) Tenths (tn) 10tn/1’ and 1000 POS V7-Metric-Seed2D.
Setup Description Displays the description of the selected mapping setup. Mapping Setups Opens the DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 560 where new mapping setups can be created and existing mapping setups can be renamed, modified, or deleted (see DGNMAPPING on page 559). Mapping Preview for Setup Lists all properties of both the exported DWG file in the DWG column and the selected mapping setup in the DGN column.
DWG to DGN Conversion Table AutoCAD LT MicroStation Notes Colors Colors Colors are matched as closely as possible. Colors set with the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) are translated directly to the DGN color index. If TrueColor is used and a direct match of RGB values is available in the DGN color index, the colors are also mapped directly. If a TrueColor match is not available, an RGB value is added to the DGN color index.
DWG to DGN Conversion Table AutoCAD LT MicroStation Notes Dimensions, Dimension Styles Dimensions, Dimension Styles The size, spacing, style, and shape of dimensions may vary slightly. Dimension associativity is maintained whenever possible, and the correct dimension values are always maintained. Raster Images Raster Images These image file types are supported: .bmp, .cal, .tif, .png, .tga, .jpg, .gif, .rlc, .bil, and .pcx. All other image file types are discarded.
-DGNEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export MicroStation DGN Files If you enter -dgnexport at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter DGN file format [V7/V8] : Specify whether the file is DGN V7 or V8 Enter filename for DGN export : Specify path and filename of DGN file Specify conversion units [Master/Sub] : Specify m or s, or press Enter Specify mapping setup or [?] : Specify mappi
? After specifying a filter, a list of available export mapping setups that match the filter is displayed and will re-prompt. Seed File Specify a seed file that matches the existing behavior of other commands with filters. ■ ? on page 548 DGNIMPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files Imports the data from a DGN file into a new DWG file.
Import DGN Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files Specifies the import settings for a DGN file. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Open ➤ DGN File List of Options The following options are displayed.
Select a Design Model from the DGN file The DGN design model that you select is imported into the model space of your current DWG file. V8 DGN files might contain multiple design and sheet models. A DGN design model is equivalent to model space, and a DGN sheet model is equivalent to paper space. Because a DWG file can have only one model space, you need to select the design model in the DGN file that you want to import.
NOTE If a host folder is read-only, any DWG xrefs will be created in the My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder. Ignore All External References Referenced DGN and DWG files that are external to the specified DGN file are not included in the resulting DWG file. If the DGN file has self references or references to other design models contained within the DGN file, these references are included.
includes text created along a curved path. The first character determines the location and rotation of the text object. Translate DGN Properties to DWG Properties Selects and manages the mapping setup used on the current DGN import. Select Mapping Setup Displays the currently defined mapping setups. Standard is the default mapping setup which extracts data from the drawing being exported and applies an automatic mapping to DGN layers, linetypes, lineweights, and colors, as shown in the mapping preview.
The following table lists the DGN objects and features that are supported for import, and notes on the scope of the translation. DGN to DWG Conversion Table MicroStation AutoCAD LT Notes Geometric Elements Geometric Objects The following DGN elements are translated into DWG objects: line, SmartLine, LineString, multiline, shape, complex chain, complex shape, arc, ellipse, curve, B-spline curve, and pattern. Pattern elements are limited to simple pattern styles.
DGN to DWG Conversion Table MicroStation AutoCAD LT Notes Text Objects, Text Styles used to map SHX text fonts to DGN text fonts. TrueType fonts and SHX fonts in AutoCAD are exported to MicroStation V7 as Engineering. This can result in many visual differences. Tables Tables Cells that represent tables in DGN are imported as blocks. Dimensions, Dimension Styles Dimensions, Dimension Styles The size, spacing, style, and shape of dimensions may vary slightly.
DGNIMPORT Unit Mapping Table Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files The following table lists the linear units used in the resulting DWG file as determined by the master units, sub-units, and unit precision of the DGN file being imported.
DGN to DWG Unit Mapping Table DGN Master Units DGN Sub Units DGN Precision DWG Units Notes port DGN Settings dialog box Inches Any Other Unit Fractional Fractional Inches Any Other Unit Decimal Decimal Any Other Unit Any Other Unit Fractional Fractional Sub Units selected in the Import DGN Settings dialog box For import of a V7 file, Master unit label will be read and will use the following table to set the Master units based on the unit translation table.
V7 DGN Unit Translation Table DGN Label Name DGN Label Name “ inches ‘ feet -DGNIMPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Import MicroStation DGN Files If you enter -dgnimport at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
or “path\filename.dgn” If you enter a valid DGN file name without a file extension, the program adds the extension and search for the file. ? - List of Design Models Lists all design models contained in the DGN file. Units Specifies a drawing-units value for scaling the DGN file. Mapping Setups Specifies the mapping setup of the selected design model. ? After specifying a filter, a list of available import mapping setups that match the filter is displayed and will re-prompt.
DGNMAPPING Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Translation Mapping Setups Allows users to create and edit user-defined DGN mapping setups. Summary The DGN Mapping Setups dialog box on page 560 is displayed. It can also be accessed from the Import DGN Settings and Export DGN Settings dialog boxes. The import/export process translates basic DGN/DWG data into the corresponding DWG/DGN data.
DGN Mapping Setups Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Translation Mapping Setups Creates new mapping setups, renames mapping setups, modifies mapping setups, and deletes mapping setups. Access Methods Command entry: dgnmapping List of Options The following options are displayed. Current User Displays the user’s login name. Name Lists all mapping setups. If the setup name is too long to be completely displayed, an ellipsis (...) is shown at the end.
New Displays the New Mapping Setup dialog box on page 561, in which you can define a new mapping setup. Rename Starts in-place editing of the currently selected mapping setup (direct editing in the list). NOTE The Rename button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected. Modify Displays the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box on page 563, in which you can modify the currently selected mapping setup. NOTE The Modify button is disabled when the Standard mapping setup is selected.
Access Methods Command entry: dgnmapping List of Options The following options are displayed. Current User Displays the user’s login name. New DGN Mapping Setup Name Specifies the new mapping setup name. Based On Sets a mapping setup to use as a basis for the new one. For the new mapping setup, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with. Mapping Type Specifies what type of mapping setup to create. Import Specifies an import mapping type.
Continue button Opens the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box on page 563. Depending on the mapping type selected (Import or Export), the appropriate import/export dialog box is displayed. Modify DGN Mapping Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Translation Mapping Setups Sets the properties for the selected mapping setup.
Summary When you choose Continue in the New Mapping Setup dialog box, the Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new mapping setup in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the mapping setup that you selected.
Export mapping setup: If you have accessed the Modify DGN Mapping Setups dialog box by creating a new setup from the Export DGN Settings dialog box, the DWG column includes all defined linetypes in the current drawing file. Whenever the target cell is blank (right-hand column), we will use the default system mapping. You can directly type DGN linestyle names in the cells in the right column.
column. You can only make changes on the right-hand column of the Lineweight tab. The left-hand column is not editable. Color You can map color values between DGN to DWG files. By default the Color tab is blank and the default color mapping is used. Color translations between DGN color values is done to the closest AutoCAD color values and AutoCAD color values are mapped to the closest DGN color values. The Color tab is the only tab that allows editing in both columns.
DGN column: Selecting Add Color… from the right-click menu allows you to add a valid DGN color value to the cell. Valid colors include 0-255, ByLevel and ByCell. The DWG column is automatically populated with the equivalent RGB value. You can modify a DGN color by double-clicking the cell and typing a different value. DWG column: Selecting Add Color… from the right-click menu brings up the Select Color dialog box on page 568. You can add ACI colors, true colors or color from a Color Book.
NOTE Only unique properties are added to the list in the Layer and Linetype tabs when adding properties from files. Add Properties from Drawing File Opens the Add Properties from Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). The layer and linetype properties from the chosen DWT/DWG/DWS files are added to the DWG columns in the Modify DGN Mapping Setups dialog box table. In Files of Type, the drop-down list includes the following: ■ Drawing template (*.dwt) ■ Drawing (*.
■ True Color on page 340 ■ Color Books on page 342 DIM and DIM1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Dimensioning Accesses Dimensioning mode commands. Summary The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode, in which you can use a special set of dimensioning commands on page 569. (DIM and DIM1 are provided only for compatibility with previous releases.) Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command.
Dimensioning mode commands Command Description UNDO or U Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session. The following table shows which AutoCAD LT commands are equivalent to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD LT command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents Dimensioning mode command Equivalent command RADIUS DIMRADIUS RESTORE -DIMSTYLE Restore ROTATED DIMLINEAR Rotated SAVE -DIMSTYLE Save STATUS -DIMSTYLE Status TEDIT DIMTEDIT TROTATE DIMEDIT Rotate UPDATE -DIMSTYLE Apply VARIABLES -DIMSTYLE Variables VERTICAL DIMLINEAR Vertical DIMALIGNED Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Aligned Dimensions Creates an aligned linear dimension.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Aligned Menu: Dimension ➤ Aligned Toolbar: Dimension Summary Creates a linear dimension that is aligned with the origin points of the extension lines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line. Dimension Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the DIMALIGNED command ends. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text.
DIMANGULAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Angular Dimensions Creates an angular dimension.
Summary Measures the angle between selected objects or 3 points. Objects that can be selected include arcs, circles, and lines, among others. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines. The program determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned, extension lines are added as needed to extend one or both lines. The arc is always less than 180 degrees. Three-Point Specification Creates a dimension based on three points you specify.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Quadrant Specifies the quadrant that the dimension should be locked to. When quadrant behavior is on, the dimension line is extended past the extension line when the dimension text is positioned outside of the angular dimension. DIMARC Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Arc Length Dimensions Creates an arc length dimension.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Arc Length Menu: Dimension ➤ Arc Length Toolbar: Dimension List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or polyline arc segment: Use an object selection method Specify “arc length dimension location” or [“Mtext”/“Text”/“Angle”/“Partial”/“Leader”]: Specify a point or enter an option Arc length dimensions measure the distance along an arc or polyline arc segment.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Partial Reduces the length of the arc length dimension. Leader Adds a leader object. This option is displayed only if the arc (or arc segment) is greater than 90 degrees. The leader is drawn radially, pointing towards the center of the arc being dimensioned. No Leader Cancels the Leader option before the leader is created.
If no dimension was created in the current session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Otherwise, the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session.
Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select a feature location, the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press Enter. Undo Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session.
Toolbar: Dimension Summary Dimension breaks can be added to linear, angular, and ordinate dimensions, among others. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
intersecting objects are modified. You can only place a single manual dimension break at a time with this option. DIMCENTER Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Radial Dimensions Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs.
DIMCONSTRAINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. Access Methods Panel Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Dimensional panel Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Horizontal Toolbar: Dimensional Constraints Summary Applies a dimensional constraint to a selected object or converts an associative dimension to a dimensional constraint.
Objects Valid Constraint Points Polyline Endpoints, midpoints of line and arc subobjects, center of arc subobjects Block, Xref, Text, Mtext, Attribute, Table Insertion point After you specify the dimensional constraint type, you can either enter an expression value or accept the default (constraintname=value).
DIMCONTINUE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Continue Menu: Dimension ➤ Continue Toolbar: Dimension Summary Automatically continues creating additional dimensions from the last linear, angular, or ordinate dimension created, or from a selected extension line. The dimension lines are lined up automatically.
Specify a “second extension line origin” or [“Undo”/“Select”]
Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension. After you select a continued dimension, the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc. DIMDIAMETER Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Radial Dimensions Creates a diameter dimension for a circle or an arc.
Specify dimension line location or [“Mtext”/“Text”/“Angle”]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD LT automatically draws an arc extension line. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text.
dimensions in paper space are excluded). DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and the number that are disassociated. DIMEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dimension Text Edits dimension text and extension lines. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Oblique Menu: Dimension ➤ Oblique Toolbar: Dimension , Oblique Summary Rotates, modifies, or restores dimension text.
The selected dimension text is returned to its default position and rotation as specified in its dimension style. New Changes dimension text using the In-Place Text Editor. The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets (< >). Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1938. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK.
DIMINSPECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Inspection Dimension Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Inspect Menu: Dimension ➤ Inspection Toolbar: Dimension Summary Inspection dimensions specify how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range.
The Inspection Dimension Dialog Box is displayed and allows you to add or remove inspection dimensions from an existing dimension. Inspection dimensions allow you to effectively communicate how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range. If you enter -diminspect at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Toolbar: Dimension Command entry: diminspect Summary Use the Shape and Inspection Label/Rate settings to the appearance of the frame of the inspection dimension and the inspection rate value. List of Options The following options are displayed. Select Dimensions Specifies the dimensions that an inspection dimension should be added to or removed from. Remove Inspection Removes the inspection dimension from the selected dimension.
The label is displayed in the leftmost section of the inspection dimension when the Label check box is selected. Inspection Rate Turns the display of the rate field on and off. Inspection Rate Value Specifies how frequently a part should be inspected. The value is expressed as a percentage, and the valid range is 0 to 100. The inspection rate is displayed in the rightmost section of the inspection dimension when the Inspection Rate check box is selected.
DIMJOGGED Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Radial Dimensions Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Jogged Menu: Dimension ➤ Jogged Toolbar: Dimension Summary DIMJOGGED measures the radius of the selected object and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. The origin point of the dimension line can be specified at any convenient location.
Accepts a new center point for a jogged radius dimension that takes the place of the true center point of the arc or circle. Specify dimension line location on page 597 or [Mtext/“Text”/“Angle”]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD LT automatically draws an arc extension line.
DIMJOGLINE Quick Reference See also: ■ Dimension Jog Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Dimension, Dimjogline Menu: Dimension ➤ Jogged Linear Toolbar: Dimension Summary Jog lines in a dimension indicate a break in the objects being dimensioned. The dimension value represents the actual distance, rather than the measured distance in the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
DIMLINEAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Linear Dimensions Creates a linear dimension. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Linear Menu: Dimension ➤ Linear Toolbar: Dimension Summary Creates a linear dimension with a horizontal, vertical, or rotated dimension line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1938.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Horizontal Creates horizontal linear dimensions. Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. ■ Mtext on page 600 ■ Text on page 600 ■ Angle on page 601 Vertical Creates vertical linear dimensions.
Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions. Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines.
DIMORDINATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Ordinate Dimensions Creates ordinate dimensions. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Ordinate Menu: Dimension ➤ Ordinate Toolbar: Dimension Summary Ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal or vertical distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum.
Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompt is displayed, where you can specify the endpoint. Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed, where you can specify the endpoint. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text.
DIMOVERRIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Override a Dimension Style Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Override Menu: Dimension ➤ Override Summary Overrides a specified dimensioning system variable for selected dimensions, or clears the overrides of selected dimension objects, returning them to the settings defined by their dimension style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
DIMRADIUS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Radial Dimensions Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Radius Menu: Dimension ➤ Radius Toolbar: Dimension Summary Measures the radius of a selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. You can use grips to reposition the resulting radius dimension easily. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1938. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see “Change Existing Objects” in the User's Guide.
Summary Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is displayed for each association point prompt. ■ If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a geometric object, the marker appears as an X ■ if the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X inside a box. NOTE The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse.
Angular (Two Line) Select first line : Select a line, or press Enter to skip to the next prompt Select second line : Select another line, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Diameter Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Leader Specify leader association point : Specify an object snap location, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Ordinate Specify feature location
NOTE After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version, the association between dimensions and objects or points may need to be updated. You can use the DIMREASSOCIATE on page 607 command to reassociate modified dimensions with the objects or points that they dimension. DIMSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Dimension Spacing Adjusts the spacing between linear dimensions or angular dimensions.
Select dimensions to space: Select a parallel linear or angular dimension to equally space from the base dimension and press Enter Enter value or [Auto] : Specify a spacing distance or press Enter Enter Spacing Value Applies a spacing value to the selected dimensions from the base dimension. For example, if you enter a value of 0.5000, all selected dimensions will be separated by a distance of 0.5000.
If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Dimension Style Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Creates new styles, sets the current style, modifies styles, sets overrides on the current style, and compares styles. Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: dimstyle List of Options The following options are displayed.
Current Dimension Style Displays the name of the dimension style that is current. The default dimension style is STANDARD. The current style is applied to dimensions you create. Styles Lists dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted. Right-click in the list to display a shortcut menu with options to set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a style that is current or in use in the current drawing. A that the style is .
Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box on page 614, in which you can define a new dimension style. Modify Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box on page 616, in which you can modify dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box. Override Displays the Override Current Style dialog box on page 616, in which you can set temporary overrides to dimension styles.
Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: dimstyle ➤ Dimension Style List of Options The following options are displayed. New Style Name Specifies the new dimension style name. Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new style, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with. Annotative Specifies that the dimension style is .
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Set properties for dimension styles. Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: dimstyle ➤ Dimension Style Summary When you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box.
■ Fit on page 629 ■ Primary Units on page 633 ■ Alternate Units on page 637 ■ Tolerances on page 640 Lines Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Sets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks. Summary Sets the dimension line properties. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Dimension Lines Color Displays and sets the color for the dimension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRD system variable) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. Linetype Sets the linetype of the dimension line. (DIMLTYPE system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line.
Suppresses display of dimension lines. Dim Line 1 suppresses the first dimension line; Dim Line 2 suppresses the second dimension line. (DIMSD1 and DIMSD2 system variables) Extension Lines Controls the appearance of the extension lines. Color Sets the color for the extension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRE system variable.
Extend Beyond Dim Lines Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines above the dimension line. (DIMEXE system variable) Offset From Origin Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the points on the drawing that define the dimension. (DIMEXO system variable) Fixed Length Extension Lines Enables fixed length extension lines. (DIMFXLON system variable) Length Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin.
Symbols and Arrows Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Sets the format and placement for arrowheads, center marks, arc length symbols, and jogged radius dimensions. Summary Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads. List of Options The following options are displayed. Arrowheads First Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When you change the first arrowhead type, the second arrowhead automatically changes to match it.
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Second Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line. (DIMBLK2 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.
Displays and sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN system variable) Dimension Break Controls the gap width of dimension breaks. Break Size Displays and sets the size of the gap used for dimension breaks. Arc Length Symbol Controls the display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension. (DIMARCSYM system variable) Preceding Dimension Text Places arc length symbols before the dimension text.
Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension. (DIMJOGANG system variable) Linear Jog Dimensions Controls the display of the jog for linear dimensions. Jog lines are often added to linear dimensions when the actual measurement is not accurately represent by the dimension. Typically the actual measurement is smaller than the desired value.
Text Appearance Controls the dimension text format and size. Text Style Lists the available text styles. Text Style Button Displays the Text Style Dialog Box on page 1854 where you can create or modify text styles. (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter color name or number.
Text Placement Controls the placement of dimension text. Vertical Controls the vertical placement of dimension text in relation to the dimension line. (DIMTAD system variable) Vertical position options include the following: ■ Centered: Centers the dimension text between the two parts of the dimension line. ■ Above: Places the dimension text above the dimension line. The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap.
■ At Ext Line 2: Right-justifies the text with the second extension line along the dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See Arrowheads and Offset from Dim Line. ■ Over Ext Line 1: Positions the text over or along the first extension line. ■ Over Ext Line 2: Positions the text over or along the second extension line. View Direction Controls the dimension text viewing direction.
placed inside only if the arrowheads, dimension text, and a margin leave enough room for the text gap. (DIMGAP system variable) Text Alignment Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether it is inside or outside the extension lines. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables) Horizontal Places text in a horizontal position. Aligned with Dimension Line Aligns text with the dimension line.
Fit Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the dimension line. List of Options The following options are displayed. Fit Options Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available between the extension lines.
When space is available, text and arrowheads are placed between the extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options. (DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables) Either Text or Arrows (Best Fit) Moves either the text or the arrowheads outside the extension lines based on the best fit (DIMATFIT system variable). ■ When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines.
■ When not enough space is available for text, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines. Both Text and Arrows When not enough space is available for text and arrowheads, moves both outside the extension lines (DIMATFIT system variable). Always Keep Text Between Ext Lines Always places text between extension lines. (DIMTIX system variable) Suppress Arrows If They Don't Fit Inside Extension Lines Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines.
Over the Dimension Line, Without Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. Text that is moved away from the dimension line is not connected to the dimension line with a leader. (DIMTMOVE system variable) Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. Scale for Dimension Features Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling. Annotative Specifies that the dimension is .
Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when the arrowheads are placed outside the measured points. (DIMTOFL system variable) Primary Units Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes and suffixes for dimension text. List of Options The following options are displayed. Linear Dimensions Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions.
Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. (DIMLUNIT system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text. (DIMDEC system variable) Fraction Format Sets the format for fractions. (DIMFRAC system variable) Decimal Separator Sets the separator for decimal formats.
dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMPOST system variable) If you specify tolerances, the suffix is added to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1938. Measurement Scale Defines linear scale options. Applies primarily to legacy drawings. Scale Factor: Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements.
0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'. Angular Dimensions Displays and sets the current angle format for angular dimensions. Units Format Sets the angular units format.
Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'. Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. Alternate Units Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their format and precision. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Display Alternate Units Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. Sets the DIMALT system variable to 1. Alternate Units Displays and sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular. Unit Format Sets the unit format for alternate units. (DIMALTU system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Sets the number of decimal places for alternate units.
Includes a suffix in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text cm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMAPOST system variable) For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1938. Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero.
After Primary Value Places alternate units after the primary units in dimension text. Below Primary Value Places alternate units below the primary units in dimension text. Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. Tolerances Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Specifies the display and format of dimension text tolerances. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Tolerance Format Controls the tolerance format. Method Sets the method for calculating the tolerance. (DIMTOL system variable) ■ None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. ■ Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance in which a single value of variation is applied to the dimension measurement. A plus-or-minus sign appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.
■ Basic: Creates a basic dimension, which displays a box around the full extents of the dimension. The distance between the text and the box is stored as a negative value in the DIMGAP system variable. Precision Sets the number of decimal places. (DIMTDEC system variable) Upper Value Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you select Symmetrical in Method, this value is used for the tolerance. (DIMTP system variable) Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value.
■ Middle: Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 1. ■ Bottom: Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 0. Tolerance Alignment Controls the alignment of upper and lower tolerance values when stacked Align Decimal Separators Values are stacked by their decimal separators.
0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'. Alternate Unit Tolerance Formats alternate tolerance units. Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places.
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dimension Styles Compares the properties of two dimension styles or displays all properties of one style. Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: dimstyle ➤ Dimension Style Summary You can print the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and then paste to other MicrosoftWindows applications. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Compare Specifies the first dimension style for the comparison. With Specifies the second dimension style for the comparison. If you set the second style to or to the same style as the first, all the properties of the dimension style are displayed.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current dimension style: Annotative: Enter a dimension style option [ANnotative on page 647/Save on page 647/Restore on page 647/STatus on page 648/Variables on page 648/Apply on page 648/?] : Enter an option or press Enter Annotative Creates an dimension style. Save Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a dimension style.
?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Select Dimension Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style. Status Displays the current values of all dimension system variables. Variables Lists the dimension system variable settings of a dimension style or selected dimensions without modifying the current settings. Name Lists the settings of dimension system variables for the dimension style name you enter.
Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Text Angle Menu: Dimension ➤ Align Text ➤ Angle Toolbar: Dimension Summary The companion command that edits the dimension text and changes the extension line angle is DIMEDIT. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select dimension: Select a dimension object You are prompted for the new location of the dimension text.
Right Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions. Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions. Home Moves the dimension text back to its default position. For example: Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. The center point of the text does not change.
DIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations Measures the distance and angle between two points. Access Method Command entry: 'dist for transparent use Summary In general, the DIST command reports 3D distances in model space and 2D distances on a layout in paper space. In model space, changes in X, Y, and Z component distances and angles are measured in 3D relative to the current UCS. In paper space, distances are normally reported in 2D paper space units.
DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or second point if you omit the Z coordinate value. NOTE When using the DIST command for 3D distances, it is recommended that you switch to model space. Multiple Points If you specify multiple points, a running total of the distance based on the existing line segments and the current rubberband line is displayed in the tooltip. A dynamic dimension is also displayed. The distance is updated as you move the cursor.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify light direction FROM <0,0,0> or [Vector]: Specify a point or enterv Specify light direction TO <1,1,1> Specify a point If you enter the Vector option, the following prompt is displayed: Specify vector direction <0.0000,-0.0100,1.
emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface. ■ Candela (symbol: cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Cd/Sr ■ Lux (symbol: lx) is the SI unit of illuminance.
HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Color Book Specifies a color from a color book. DIVIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Divide an Object into Equal Segments Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Divide Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Divide List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Use DDPTYPE on page 524 to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing. Block Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included. Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to, or collinear with, the divided object at the dividing points. No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Donut Menu: Draw ➤ Donut Summary A donut consists of two arc polylines that are joined end-to-end to create a circular shape. The width of the polylines is determined by the specified inside and outside diameters. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside diameter of zero. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
DRAGMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. Access Method Command entry: 'dragmode for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter new value [ON/OFF/Auto] : Enter an option or press Enter On Permits dragging, but you must enter drag where appropriate in a drawing or editing command to initiate dragging. Off Ignores all dragging requests, including those embedded in menu items.
DRAWINGRECOVERY Quick Reference See also: ■ Recover from a System Failure Displays a list of drawing files that can be recovered after a program or system failure. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Open the Drawing Recovery Manager Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Recovery Summary Opens the Drawing Recovery Manager.
Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Open the Drawing Recovery Manager Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Recovery Command entry: drawingrecovery Summary You can preview and open each drawing or backup file to choose which one should be saved as the primary DWG file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Backup Files Displays the drawings that may need to be recovered after a program or system failure.
■ When an individual drawing or backup file is selected, additional information about that file is displayed. Preview Displays a thumbnail preview of the currently selected drawing or backup file. Shortcut Menu Options Right-click a drawing node, drawing or backup file, or a blank area in the Backup Files area to display a shortcut menu with relevant options. Open All Opens all the drawing and backup files associated with the selected, top-level drawing node.
DRAWORDER Quick Reference See also: ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed Changes the draw order of images and other objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Bring to Front Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order Toolbar: Draw Order Shortcut menu: Select an object, right-click, and then click Draw Order. Summary Use the DRAWORDERCTL system variable to control the default display behavior of overlapping objects.
Back Moves the selected objects to the bottom of the order of objects in the drawing. When you change the draw order (display and plotting order) of multiple objects, the relative draw order of the selected objects is maintained. By default, when you create new objects from existing ones (for example, FILLET or PEDIT), the new objects are assigned the draw order of the original object you selected first.
Drafting Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Precision Tools Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, Dyn or Quick Properties on the status bar and click Settings. Summary Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box. You cannot access the Options dialog box from the Drafting Settings dialog box if you are running DSETTINGS transparently.
Snap On Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9, or by using the SNAPMODE system variable. Snap Spacing Controls an invisible, rectangular grid of snap locations that restricts cursor movement to specified X and Y intervals. Snap X Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system variable) Snap Y Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction.
Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type & Style. If this value is 0, the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing. The Polar Distance setting is used in conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap tracking. If neither tracking feature is enabled, the Polar Distance setting has no effect. (POLARDIST system variable) Snap Type Sets the snap style and snap type. Grid Snap Sets the snap type to Grid.
Block Editor Sets the grid style to dotted grid for the Block Editor. (GRIDSTYLE on page 2334 system variable) Sheet/Layout Sets the grid style to dotted grid for sheet and layout. (GRIDSTYLE on page 2334 system variable) Grid Spacing Controls the display of a grid that helps you visualize distances. NOTE The limits of the grid are controlled by the LIMITS command and the GRIDDISPLAY system variable. Grid X Spacing Specifies the grid spacing in the X direction.
Displays the grid beyond the area specified by the LIMITS command. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable) Follow Dynamic UCS Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable) Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls the AutoTrack settings. Polar Tracking On Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP system variable.
Deletes selected additional angles. Object Snap Tracking Settings Sets options for object snap tracking. Track Orthogonally Only Displays only orthogonal (horizontal/vertical) object snap tracking paths for acquired object snap points when object snap tracking is on. (POLARMODE system variable) Track Using All Polar Angle Settings Applies polar tracking settings to object snap tracking. When you use object snap tracking, the cursor tracks along polar alignment angles from acquired object snap points.
Object Snap On Turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (OSMODE system variable) Object Snap Tracking On Turns object snap tracking on and off. With object snap tracking, the cursor can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn on one or more object snaps.
Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, region, solid, spline, or xline. Center Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc. Node Snaps to a point object, dimension definition point, or dimension text origin. Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, spline, or xline. Extended Intersection is not available as a running object snap. NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids.
Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, or spline. Deferred Tangent snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one tangent snap. You can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line or xline that is tangent to arcs, polyline arcs, or circles. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Tangent snap point, a marker and an AutoSnap tooltip are displayed.
NOTE Turn off ORTHO mode before using the parallel object snap. Object snap tracking and polar snap are turned off automatically during a parallel object snap operation. You must specify the first point of a linear object before using the parallel object snap. Select All Turns on all object snap modes. Clear All Turns off all object snap modes. Dynamic Input Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls pointer input, dimension input, dynamic prompting, and the appearance of drafting tooltips.
Preview Area Shows an example of pointer input. Settings Displays the Pointer Input Settings dialog box. Enable Dimension Input Turns on dimensional input. Dimensional input is not available for some commands that prompt for a second point. (DYNMODE system variable) Dimension Input Displays a dimension with tooltips for distance value and angle value when a command prompts you for a second point or a distance. The values in the dimension tooltips change as you move the cursor.
Enable Quick Properties Palette Depending on the object type, you can enable or disable Quick Properties palette. Quick Properties palette can also be turned on or off by clicking Quick Properties on the status bar or by using the QPMODE on page 2478 system variable. Palette Display Sets the display settings of the Quick Properties palette. See Quick Properties for more information. All Objects Sets the Quick Properties palette to display for any selection of objects.
Sets the Palette Location mode to Cursor-dependent. In cursor-dependent mode, the Quick Properties palette displays in a location relative to where you selected the object. (QPLOCATION on page 2477 system variable) Quadrant: Specifies the relative location to display the Quick Properties palette. You can select one of the four quadrants top-right, top-left, bottom-right, or bottom-left. Distance in Pixels: Sets the distance in pixels when Cursor is selected under the Palette Location modes.
Allow Selection Cycling You can also set this option with the SELECTIONCYCLING on page 2505 system variable. Display Selection Cycling List Box Displays the Selection Cycling List box. Cursor Dependent Moves the list box relative to the cursor. Quadrant Specifies in which quadrant of the cursor to position the list box. Distance in Pixels Specifies the distance between the cursor and the list box. Static The list box does not move with the cursor and remains in the same position.
Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Controls the settings of pointer input tooltips. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, or Dyn on the status bar and click Settings. List of Options The following options are displayed. Format Controls coordinate format in the tooltips that are displayed when pointer input is turned on.
direct distance method when this option is selected. (DYNPICOORDS system variable) Visibility Controls when pointer input is displayed. (DYNPIVIS system variable) As Soon As I Type Coordinate Data When pointer input is turned on, displays tooltips only when you start to enter coordinate data. (DYNPIVIS system variable) When a Command Asks for a Point When pointer input is turned on, displays tooltips whenever a command prompts you for a point.
Displays only the length change dimensional input tooltip when you are using grip editing to stretch an object. (DYNDIVIS system variable) Show 2 Dimension Input Fields at a Time Displays the length change and resulting dimensional input tooltips when you are using grip editing to stretch an object. (DYNDIVIS system variable) Show the Following Dimension Input Fields Simultaneously When you are using grip editing to stretch an object, displays the dimensional input tooltips that are selected below.
Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, Otrack, or Dyn on the status bar and click Settings. Summary Use the TOOLTIPMERGE system variable to combine drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. For more information about tooltips, see Set Interface Options. List of Options The following options are displayed. Previews Displays an example of the current tooltip appearance settings.
DSVIEWER Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan and Zoom with the Aerial View Window Opens the Aerial View window. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Aerial View Summary The Aerial View window is displayed. Aerial View Window Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan and Zoom with the Aerial View Window Displays the entire drawing; the current view is marked with a wide outline box.
are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window. List of Options The following options are displayed. View Menu (Aerial View Window) Changes the magnification of the Aerial View by zooming in and out of the drawing or by displaying the entire drawing in the Aerial View window. Zoom In Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming in by a factor of 2, centered on the current view box.
Global Displays the entire drawing and the current view in the Aerial View window. Options Menu (Aerial View Window) Provides toggles for automatic viewport display and dynamic updating of the drawing. All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window. Auto Viewport Displays the model space view of the current viewport automatically when multiple viewports are displayed.
DVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify 3D Views Defines parallel projection or perspective views by using a camera and target. Access Methods Summary NOTE Transparent ZOOM, DSVIEWER, PAN, and scroll bars are not available in DVIEW. When you define a perspective view, ZOOM, PAN, transparent ZOOM and PAN, DSVIEWER, and scroll bars are not available while that view is current. List of PromptsObject Selection on page 686 The following prompts are displayed. Select objects on page 686 or
DVIEWBLOCK If you press Enter at the Select Objects prompt, DVIEWBLOCK displays a preview image. You can create your own DVIEWBLOCK block in a 1 unit by 1 unit by 1 unit area, with its origin at the lower-left corner. The following illustration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view (moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view). Point Specification Rolls the view under the camera. The point you select with your pointing device is a start point for the dragging operation.
the positions available for that angle. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and you can use the cursor to rotate the camera. Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle measures from -180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of 0 degrees looks down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin.
Toggle (Angle From) Toggle (Angle From) on page 688 Distance Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. This option turns on perspective viewing, which causes objects farther from the camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. A special perspective icon replaces the coordinate system icon. You are prompted for the new camera-to-target distance. A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current distance.
The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight relative to the target, where the field of view remains constant. Points Locates the camera and target points using X,Y,Z coordinates. You can use XYZ point filters. To help you define a new line of sight, a rubber-band line is drawn from the current camera position to the crosshairs. You are prompted for a new camera location.
For information about entering direction and magnitude angles, see Point Specification. Pan Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification. Zoom If perspective viewing is off, dynamically increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport. A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current scale. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the scale. Moving it to the left decreases the scale.
Twist Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. The twist angle is measured counterclockwise, with 0 degrees to the right. Clip Clips the view, obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front of the front clipping plane. The front and back clipping planes are invisible walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and target. Back Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane. ■ Distance from Target.
Front Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane. ■ Distance from Target.Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera. A negative distance places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. ■ Eye. Positions the front clipping plane at the camera. ■ On. Turns on front clipping. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off.
DWFADJUST Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the Background Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a DWF or DWFx underlay. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Adjust Summary You can change the default values for Fade, Contrast, and Monochrome for a single or multiple DWF and DWFx underlays. To confirm the settings on a selected DWF or DWFx underlay, use the Properties palette.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly, the fading effect, of the underlay. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Monochrome Controls the color saturation of all linework while maintaining the luminance. When turned on, the linework appears in varying shades of gray starting at black if the background color luminance is 50 percent or more.
When you attach a DWF or DWFx file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. NOTE If you plan to access DWF or DWFx files from the Vault client server, the Vault file open dialog box supersedes the Select DWF File dialog box. Access to the Vault client server is only available to Autodesk Subscription customers.
Browse Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295). Select one of more sheets from the DWF file Displays all of the sheets that are found in the DWF file. If the DWF file only contains a single sheet, that sheet is listed. You can select multiple sheets by holding the Shift key or the Ctrl key while selecting the sheets to attach. If you hover over the preview, the file name displays.
Specify on-screen If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value at the Command prompt. Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0. Show Details Displays the DWF file path. Found In Displays the path where the DWF file is located. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the DWF file is attached.
Menu: Insert ➤ DWF Underlay Toolbar: Insert Command entry: dwfattach Summary The names of DWF or DWFx references you attach must be unique. Attempts to attach two DWF or DWFx references that have the same name displays the Substitute DWF Name dialog box. New DWF Name Enter a unique name for the DWF or DWFx underlay you are attempting to attach. Once a new name is supplied, you can continue with the attachment process. NOTE This only changes the name of the DWF or DWFx reference when it is attached.
List of Panels Adjust Panel Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the underlay. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Fade Controls the appearance of linework. The greater the value, the lighter the linework in the underlay appears. Display in Monochrome Displays the underlay in black and white. Clipping Panel Create Clipping Boundary Deletes the old clipping boundary (if one exists) and creates a new one.
Summary When you attach a DWF or DWFx file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. NOTE If you plan to access DWF or DWFx files from the Vault client server, the Vault file open dialog box supersedes the Select DWF File dialog box. Access to the Vault client server is only available to Autodesk Subscription customers. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected DWF underlay by entering an angle value at the Command prompt or by clicking onscreen. DWFCLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Clip External References and Blocks Crops the display of a selected DWF or DWFx underlay to a specified boundary.
On Turns on clipping and displays the DWF underlay clipped to the previously defined boundary. Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire DWF or DWFx underlay and frame. If you reclip the DWF or DWFx underlay while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible. Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and displays the full original underlay.
Summary The default DWF Format is DWFx. DWFLAYERS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Layers in an Underlay Controls the display of layers in a DWF or DWFx underlay. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Underlay Layers Shortcut menu: Select a DWF or DWFx underlay, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DWF Layers. Summary After selecting the DWF underlay, the Underlay Layers dialog box on page 1992 is displayed.
Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Properties Menu: File ➤ Drawing Properties Summary The Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed. General information, keywords, and custom properties can be created and stored with a drawing file. These file properties are accessible from Windows and can help identify drawing files.
Summary Document properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field dialog box on page 796. ■ General on page 706 ■ Summary on page 708 ■ Statistics on page 709 ■ Custom on page 711 General Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Quick Reference Displays read-only information about the drawing file. This data is derived from the operating system.
Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Properties Menu: File ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: dwgprops List of Options The following options are displayed. File Name Shows the file icon and the file name. File Type, Location, Size Shows the file type, the file location, and the size of the file. MS-DOS Name, Created, Modified, Accessed Shows MS-DOS name, when the file was created, and the date and time it was last modified and last accessed.
Summary Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Quick Reference Displays properties such as author, title, and subject that are predefined. For example, you can add keywords to all your drawing files and then use ™ DesignCenter to search for all drawing files with a particular keyword. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Properties Menu: File ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: dwgprops List of Options The following options are displayed.
Specifies the title you want to use when searching for this drawing. The title can be different from the drawing file name. Subject Specifies the subject of the drawing. You can use the subject name to group drawings that have the same subject. Author Specifies the author of the drawing. The author name can only be entered or changed by the user. To change the author, delete the existing name and enter a new one. Keywords Specifies the keywords you want to use to locate the drawing.
Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Properties Menu: File ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: dwgprops List of Options The following options are displayed. Created Displays the date and time the drawing was created. This value is stored in the TDCREATE system variable. Modified Displays the date and time the drawing was last modified. This value is stored in the TDUPDATE system variable. Last Saved By Displays the name of the last person who modified the file.
Revision Number Displays the revision number. This value is not accessible. To track revisions, create a custom property on the Custom tab. Total Editing Time Displays the total amount of editing time in the drawing. This value is stored in the TDINDWG system variable. Custom Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Quick Reference Assigns custom properties to the drawing.
Command entry: dwgprops Summary For example, you could create a custom property called Project and assign the actual project name as the value. To assign the same custom properties to a group of drawings, create the custom properties in a drawing template file. Custom properties are displayed in the list of field names in the Field dialog box. You also have access to the properties data using programming interfaces, ® such as AutoLISP . List of Options The following options are displayed.
Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Drawing Properties Menu: File ➤ Drawing Properties Command entry: dwgprops List of Options The following options are displayed. Custom Property Name Specifies a unique name for the custom property. The name can contain up to 255 characters. The following characters are not permitted: asterisk (*), equal sign (=), less-than and greater-than signs (< >), slash (/), backslash (\), quotation marks ("), reverse quote (`), pipe sign (|), colon
Menu: Insert ➤ Drawing Exchange Binary Summary AutoCAD DXB files contain only 2D vectors in binary format with 16-bit integer precision. These vectors are imported as line objects, and they assume the current layer and object properties. The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the name of the file to import.
E Commands 6 EATTEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Edits attributes in a block reference. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Edit Single Attribute Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Toolbar: Modify II Summary Edits the values, text options, and properties of each attribute in a block. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
After you select a block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor is displayed. Enhanced Attribute Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Block Attribute Definition Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of each attribute.
Tag Tag identifying the attribute. Select Block Temporarily closes the dialog box while you select a block with your pointing device. Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you have made, and leaves the Enhanced Attribute Editor open. Attribute Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Displays the tag, prompt, and value assigned to each attribute. You can change only the attribute value.
Text Options Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Sets the properties that define the way an attribute's text is displayed in the drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab. Text Style Specifies the text style for the attribute text. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box. Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-, center-, or right-justified). Height Specifies the height of the attribute text.
Sets the character spacing for the attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Boundary Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text.
If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the attribute. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY system variable is off. EATTEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard Exports block attribute information to a table or to an external file.
-EATTEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Extract Data Using the Data Extraction Wizard Extracts data as specified in an existing attribute extraction template (BLK) file created with the Attribute Extraction wizard in AutoCAD 2006 or data extraction (DXE) file created in AutoCAD 2007. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
EDGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify 3D Subobjects Changes the visibility of 3D face edges. Summary This command only affects objects created using the 3DFACE command. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify edge of 3D face to toggle visibility or [Display]: Edge of 3D face to toggle visibility Controls the visibility of the edges you select. If the edges of one or more 3D faces are collinear, the program alters the visibility of each collinear edge.
Select Selects hidden edges of a partially visible 3D face and displays them. If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again, use the Edge option. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it. AutoSnap markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed, indicating the apparent snap locations on each invisible edge. EDGESURF Quick Reference See also: ■ Construct Meshes from Other Objects Creates a mesh between four contiguous edges or curves.
You can select the four edges in any order. The first edge (SURFTAB1) determines the M direction of the generated mesh, which extends from the endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end. The two edges that touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2) of the mesh. The MESHTYPE system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default. Set the variable to 0 to create legacy polyface or polygon mesh. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Opens the Program Parameters (PGP) text file that defines command abbreviations Access Methods Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Customization panel ➤ Edit PGP. Summary Commands can have abbreviated names called command aliases that you can enter at the Command prompt. Command aliases are defined in the PGP file. If you edit the PGP file while the program is running, enter REINIT to use the revised file. You can also restart program to reload the file automatically.
Access Methods Command entry: 'elev for transparent use Summary ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects. The elevation is reset to 0.0 whenever you change the coordinate system to the world coordinate system (WCS). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify New Default Elevation The current elevation is the default Z value for new objects when you specify only X and Y values for a 3D point.
ELLIPSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Ellipses Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Center Menu: Draw ➤ Ellipse ➤ Center Toolbar: Draw Summary The first two points of the ellipse determine the location and length of the first axis. The third point determines the distance between the center of the ellipse and the end point of the second axis. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis using the distance from the midpoint of the first axis to the endpoint of the second axis (3). Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about the first axis. Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circular ellipse. Arc Creates an elliptical arc.
90.6 degrees are invalid because the ellipse would otherwise appear as a straight line. Multiples of these angle values result in a mirrored effect every 90 degrees. Start Angle Defines the first endpoint of the elliptical arc. The Start Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated.
Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the ellipse, or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify. Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about the first axis. Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circle. Isocircle Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Erase Menu: Modify ➤ Erase Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area, and click Erase. Summary You can erase selected objects from the drawing. This method does not move objects to the Clipboard, where they can then be pasted to another location. If you are working with 3D objects, you can also erase subobjects such as faces, meshes, and vertices.
Menu: Application Menu ➤ Send ➤ eTransmit Summary The Create Transmittal dialog box is displayed. If you enter -etransmit at the Command prompt, options are displayed. When you select a set of drawing files in a transmittal package, it automatically includes all related dependent files such as xrefs and font files. Create Transmittal Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission Packages a set of files for Internet transmission.
Sheets Tab Lists the sheets to be included in the transmittal package in a hierarchy based on sheet subsets. On this tab, you can create a transmittal package from a sheet set, sheet subset, or sheet. A sheet set must be open in the Sheet Set Manager, and eTransmit must be selected from the shortcut menu that is displayed when a sheet set, sheet subset, or sheet node is right-clicked.
Files Table Tab Displays the files to be included in the transmittal package in a table format. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts) are listed. You can add files to the transmittal package or remove existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the transmittal package. Add File Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an additional file to include in the transmittal package.
Enter Notes to Be Included with This Transmittal Package Provides a space where you can enter notes related to a transmittal package. The notes are included in the transmittal report. You can specify a template of default notes to be included with all your transmittal packages by creating an ASCII text file called etransmit.txt. This file must be saved to a location specified by the Support File Search Path option on the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit List of Options The following options are displayed. Transmittal Setups Lists transmittal setups. New Creates a new transmittal setup. New Transmittal Setup Name Enter the name of the new transmittal setup. Based On Select an existing transmittal setup from which the new one will be created. Rename Renames the currently highlighted transmittal setup.
Displays the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box, in which you can specify options for the transmittal package. Delete Removes the currently highlighted transmittal setup. Import In a sheet set context, opens standard file selection dialog box, in which you can navigate to a sheet set data (DST) file. Then displays the Import Transmittal Setups dialog box, in which you can specify the transmittal setups that you want to import.
Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit List of Options The following options are displayed. List of Transmittal Setups Displays a list of transmittal setups. Check the ones that you want to import into the current sheet set. Description Displays the optional description that is stored with the selected transmittal setup. Current Sheet Set Storage Location Displays the storage location for the current sheet set.
Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit List of Options The following options are displayed. Transmittal Type and Location Specifies the type and path to the transmittal package created.
Specifies the type of transmittal package created. Transmittal Package Type Description Folder Creates a transmittal package of uncompressed files in a new or existing folder. Self-Extracting Executable Creates a transmittal package of files as a compressed, self-extracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting EXE file decompresses the transmittal package and restores the files to the folder location that you specify. Zip Creates a transmittal package of files as a compressed ZIP file.
Transmittal File Name Specifies the method for naming the transmittal package. Displays the default file name for the transmittal package. This option is not available if the transmittal package type is set to Folder. Transmittal File Type Property Description Prompt for a File Name Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the name of the transmittal package. Uses a logical default file name.
■ A SheetSets folder is created to hold all support files for sheet sets, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root folder. This option is not available if you're saving a transmittal package to an Internet location. Source Root Folder Defines the source root folder for relative paths of drawing-dependent files, such as xrefs. The source root folder also contains the sheet set data (DST) file when a sheet set is transmitted.
Insert Binds the DWG external reference to the current drawing in a way similar to detaching and inserting the reference drawing. Prompt for Password Opens the Transmittal - Set Password dialog box, where you can specify a password for your transmittal package. Purge Drawings Does a complete purge of all the drawings in the transmittal package. NOTE As the purge is done in silent mode, you will not receive any notifications when purged items in the drawings have been removed.
Transmittal Setup Description Enter a description for the transmittal setup. This description is displayed in the Create Transmittal dialog box below the list of transmittal file setups. You can select any transmittal setup in the list to display its description. Transmittal - Set Password Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ eTransmit Command entry: etransmit List of Options The following options are displayed.
Password Confirmation Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password field. -ETRANSMIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Create transmittal package/Report only/CUrrent setup/CHoose setup/Sheet set> : Enter an option Create Transmittal Package Packages a set of files according to the transmittal setups on page 735 for Internet transmission.
Breaks a compound object into its component objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Explode Menu: Modify ➤ Explode Toolbar: Modify Summary Explodes a compound object when you want to modify its components separately. Objects that can be exploded include blocks, polylines, and regions, among others. The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change. Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you're exploding.
Block Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the block exposes the polyline or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects. Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects.
EXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export Drawings to Other File Formats Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ Export Summary The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. If you do not see the file format that you need in the Files of Type drop-down list, also check the PLOT command for several other file types, including PDF.
■ V7 DGN (*.dgn): MicroStation DGN file (see DGNEXPORT) ■ V8 DGN (*.dgn): MicroStation DGN file (see DGNEXPORT) ■ FBX files (*.fbx): Autodesk® FBX files (see FBXEXPORT on page 787) -EXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files ■ Export FBX Files Creates a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from the command line. Summary The command prompt version of EXPORTDWF, EXPORTDWFX, and EXPORTPDF provides an interface for publishing drawing sheets that can be controlled by a script.
Detailed Plot Configuration? Specifies detailed page settings for the Model tab or layout tab you are plotting. NOTE If you enter No, the Save As dialog appears if FILEDIA is set to 1. If FILEDIA is set to 0, you are prompted to enter a file name at the command prompt. Paper Size Enter the paper size or enter ? to view a list of paper sizes defined for the default plotter driver. Paper Units Specify Inches or Millimeters as the paper size unit.
EXPORTDWF Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Creates a DWF file and allows you to set individual page setup overrides on a sheet by sheet basis. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF panel ➤ Export drop-down ➤ DWF Menu: Application Menu ➤ Export ➤ DWF Summary When you create DWF files with the EXPORTDWF command, you can quickly override the device driver’s page setup options, add a plot stamp, and change file options.
Sets file options such as file name and location when you create a DWFx file. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF panel ➤ Export ➤ DWF Menu: Export ➤ DWF Command entry: exportdwf Summary When you export your drawing to a DWF file, the Save As DWF dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to specify the file name and location, but also allows you to change export, page setup, and plot stamp settings. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Page Setup Override Overrides the page settings. Click the Page Setup Override button to display the Page Setup Override dialog box on page 754. Export to DWF/PDF Options Palette Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Specifies the general export options for the DWF, DWFx, or PDF file, such as file location, password protection, and whether or not to include layer information.
Naming Names multi-sheet files, prompts for name during export, or specifies the name before export. Layer Information Includes layer information in the DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. Merge control Specifies whether overlapping lines merge (the colors of the lines blend together into a third color) or overwrite (the last plotted line obscures the line beneath it). DWF Data Options Changes settings that are only available for DWF and DWFx files.
Summary You can override the regular page settings applied to the layout through the Page Setup dialog box. The override settings remain until you exit the application. So, you do not have to reset the overrides every time you export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Paper Size Select the paper size from the drop-down list of paper sizes defined for the default plotter driver.
Access Methods Button Access Methods Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Export to DWF/PDF panel ➤ Export to DWF/PDF Options. In the Export to DWF/PDF Options window, under General DWF/PDF Options, select Override Precision. Then, from Override Precision drop-down, click Manage Precision Presets. Summary With the Precision Presets Manage you can override the PC3 file’s dpi setting and automatically adjusts the dpi on a sheet-by-sheet basis during export and publish.
Color and Grayscale Resolutions Sets the resolution for color and grayscale raster images in the DWF, DWFx, or PDF file. The default is 200 dpi. This setting cannot exceed the current vector resolution setting. Black and White Resolution Sets the resolution for black and white raster images in the DWF, DWFx, and PDF file. The default setting is 200 dpi. This setting cannot exceed the current vector resolution setting.
Summary You can import precision presets from an existing sheet set (DSD file). The Select List of Sheets dialog opens (a standard file selection dialog box). To open the Import Precision Preset dialog box, click Import in the Precision Presets Manager. Export to DWF/PDF Ribbon Panel Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Creates a DWFx file where you can set individual page setup overrides on a sheet-by-sheet basis.
Current Layout Exports only the current layout. This option is available only in paper space. All Layouts Exports all layouts. This option is available only in paper space. Page Setup Exports the objects to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file using the drawings page setup options or overrides the current options. Page Setup Override Button Allows you to override the page settings on page 754. Preview Displays the objects in a Preview window before you export.
Summary When you create DWFx files with the EXPORTDWFX command, you can quickly override the device driver’s page setup options, add a plot stamp, and change file options. You can change these settings in the Save as DWFx dialog box. To include layer information, change file location, add password-protection, and other file options, use the Export to DWF/PDF Options palette.
Output Controls Open in Viewer when Done The DWFx file will open in the default viewer after the export completes when this option is selected. Include Plot Stamp Select to include user-defined information such as drawing name, date and time, or plot scale in the DWFx file. To edit the plot stamp, click the Plot Stamp button to open the Plot Stamp dialog box. Export Selects which part of the drawing to export. If you are in paper space, you can select the current layout or all layouts.
Menu: Application Menu ➤ Export ➤ PDF Summary When you create PDF files with the EXPORTPDF command, you can quickly override the device driver’s page setup options, add a plot stamp, and change file options. You can change these settings in the Save as PDF dialog box. To include layer information, change file location, add password-protection, and other file options, use the Export to DWF/PDF Options palette.
Options Opens the Export to DWF/PDF Options palette where you can change PDF file settings such as file location, password-protection, and layer information. Output Controls Open in Viewer when Done The PDF file will open in the default viewer after the export completes when this option is selected. Include Plot Stamp Select to include user-defined information such as drawing name, date and time, or plot scale in the PDF file.
Menu: Application menu ➤ Save As ➤ Save Layout as a Drawing Summary Exported objects are duplicated visually in the new drawing and, as a result, they might be trimmed, scaled, copied, or exploded. The Export Layout to Model Space Drawing dialog box is displayed. Select the location and file name for the new exported drawing. All drawings are exported as Drawing (*.dwg). NOTE The EXPORTLAYOUT command is only available in a layout.
Summary The Export Layout to Model Space Drawing dialog box is displayed. You can specify a file name and location. The default location is the location of the current drawing. The default file name is the concatenation of the name of the current drawing and the current layout name. The Export Layout to Model Space Drawing dialog box is a standard file selection dialog box. However, on the Tools drop-down list, Options is not displayed.
EXPORTTOAUTOCAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects Creates a new DWG file with all AEC objects exploded. Access Methods Command entry: -exporttoautocad or aectoacad Summary You can create a new version of a drawing file with all proxy AEC objects exploded into basic AutoCAD LT objects.
No Maintains the xrefs as links to other drawings. Bind Type Determines how xref-dependent objects are treated when the Bind option is turned on. Bind Maintains the names of layers and other xref-dependent objects when binding xrefs. Insert Merges the names of xref-dependent objects into the new drawing without including the original file name. Maintain Determines how blocks within custom AEC objects are treated. Yes Explodes all block instances within custom AEC objects into basic AutoCAD LT objects.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Extend Menu: Modify ➤ Extend Toolbar: Modify Summary To extend objects, first select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to extend. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select boundary edges...
Shift-Select to Trim Trims the selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending them. This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending. Fence Selects all objects that cross the selection fence. The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points. The selection fence does not form a closed loop. Crossing Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points.
View Specifies projection along the current view direction. Edge Extends the object to another object's implied edge, or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space. Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space. No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it in 3D space.
Undo Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND. EXTERNALREFERENCES Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Opens the External References palette. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Menu: Insert ➤ External References Toolbar: Reference ➤ External References Summary The EXTERNALREFERENCES command opens the External References palette if the palette is inactive.
External References Palette Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Access Methods Button 772 | Chapter 6 E Commands
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Menu: Insert ➤ External References Toolbar: Reference Command entry: externalreferences ➤ External References Summary The External References palette organizes, displays, and manages referenced files, such as DWG files (xrefs), DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlays, and raster images. Only DWG, DWF, DWFx, PDF, and raster image files can be opened directly from the External References palette.
Attach (file type) Button The Attach button displays a list of file types that you can attach. The following options are displayed: ■ Attach DWG. Starts the XATTACH command. ■ Attach Image. Starts the IMAGEATTACH command. ■ Attach DWF. Starts the DWFATTACH command. ■ Attach DGN. Starts the DGNATTACH command ■ Attach PDF. Starts the PDFATTACH command ■ Attach from Vault. Provides access to content stored in the Vault client. NOTE Attach from Vault is only shown when the Vault client is installed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. List View The listed information includes the reference name, status, file size, file type, creation date and saved path. Reference Name The reference name column always displays the current drawing as the first entry, followed by additional attached files that are listed in the order they were attached. Status The status of the referenced file: ■ Loaded - The referenced file is currently attached to the drawing.
Tree View The top level of the tree view always shows the current drawing. Referenced files appear at the next level. Referenced files that contain their own nested file references can be opened to show deeper levels. When making selections in tree view, only one file reference can be selected at a time.
Menu Item Description Attach DWG Starts the XATTACH command. Attach Image Starts the IMAGEATTACH command. Attach DWF Starts the DWFATTACH command. Attach DGN Starts the DGNATTACH command. Attach PDF Starts the PDFATTACH command. Tooltip Style Modifys the tooltip that appears when you hover over an item in the list view of the palette. Preview/Details Pane Turns the display of the Preview/Details pane off and on. Close Closes the External References palette.
Menu Item Description Reference Status Reload Reloads the selected file references. Always available - status has no affect on this function. Detach Detaches the selected file references. Available for all file references except data link. Bind Displays the Bind Xrefs dialog box. Only available for referenced DWG files. This is not available for images and underlays. Available only for file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Details Pane When displaying the Details mode, properties for the selected file reference are reported. Each file reference has a core set of properties and some file references, like referenced images, display properties specific to the file type. The core set of details include the reference name, status, file size, file type, creation date, saved path, found at path and file version, if the Vault client is installed.
Saved Path Shows the saved path of the selected file reference (this is not necessarily where the file reference is found). This property cannot be edited. Found At Displays the full path of the currently selected file reference. This is where the referenced file is actually found and is not necessarily the same as the saved path. Clicking the […] button displays the Select Image File dialog box where you can select a different path or file name. You can also type directly into the path field.
If there is no preview available, the text “Preview not available” is displayed in the center of the pane. Messaging Field Below the Details / Preview pane is a messaging field that supplies information about certain selected file references. When you select one or more nested references, information is displayed regarding the file references. Messages also appear if you decide the change the name of a file reference.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling ➤ Extrude Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Extrude Toolbar: Modeling Summary You can extrude either an open or closed object to create a 3D surface or solid. If you extrude a surface, you will create a regular surface or a NURBS surface depending on how the SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable is set. To extrude meshes, use the MESHEXTRUDE on page 1137 command.
Object type Can be extruded? Can be extrusion path? Ellipses X X Elliptical arcs X X Helixes Comments X Lines X X Meshes: faces X Meshes: edges X X 2D Polylines X X 3D Polylines X X Regions X 2D Solids X 3D Solids: edges X 3D Solids: faces X Splines: 2D and 3D X X Surfaces: edges X X Surfaces: planar and non-planar X X Traces X 2D polylines with crossing segments cannot be extruded. Thickness and width are ignored. The extrusion extends from the center line.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Objects to Extrude Specifies the objects to extrude. NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. Mode Controls whether the extruded object is a solid or a surface. Surfaces are extruded as either NURBS surfaces or procedural surfaces, depending on the SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable. Height of extrusion Extrudes objects along the positive Z axis of the object's coordinate system if you enter a positive value.
NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. The path should not lie on the same plane as the object, nor should the path have areas of high curvature. The extrusion starts from the plane of the object and maintains its orientation relative to the path. If the path contains segments that are not tangent, the program extrudes the object along each segment and then miters the joint along the plane bisecting the angle formed by the segments.
When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains constant, and the radius of the arc changes. ■ Angle of taper. Specifies the taper between -90 and +90 degrees. ■ Specify two points. Specifies the taper angle based on two specified points. The taper angle is the distance between the two specified points. Drag the cursor horizontally to specify and preview the taper angle. You can also drag the cursor to adjust and preview the height of the extrusion.
7 F Commands FBXEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export FBX Files Creates an Autodesk® FBX file containing selected objects in the current drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Export ➤ FBX Summary The FBX Export dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295) is displayed. Once you select an FBX file, the FBX Export Options on page 788 dialog box is displayed. If you enter -fbxexport at the command prompt, options are displayed.
FBX Export Options Dialog Box Quick Reference Specifies the export settings for the FBX file. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Command entry: fbxexport ➤ Export ➤ FBX Summary Specifies what to export to the FBX file and how to export textures. List of Options The following options are displayed. Export Specifies whether to export the entities that are selected in the drawing or the entities that are visible in the current viewport.
Objects Exports selected or visible 3D objects (and 2D objects with thickness), depending on whether the Export option is set to Selected Entities or Visible Entities. Lights Exports selected or visible lights (including Point, Spot, Distant, Photometric, Sun, and Sky lights), depending on whether the Export option is set to Selected Entities or Visible Entities.
Selected Prompts you to select the 3D objects, 2D objects with thickness, lights, cameras, and materials to be exported. Select objects Select the objects in the drawing to export to FBX and press Enter. You can select 3D objects, lights, cameras, and materials to export. As you select, the list of selected items displays. A list of all exportable items in the drawing is displayed.
FBXIMPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Import FBX Files Imports an Autodesk® FBX file, which can contain objects, lights, cameras and materials. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import Summary The FBX Import Options dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295) is displayed. Once you select an FBX file, the FBX Import Options on page 791 dialog box is displayed. If you enter at -fbximport the command prompt, options are displayed on page 793.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import Command entry: fbximport Summary Specifies what to import, how to assign layers for the imported objects, the conversion units, and whether to import the FBX file as a block. List of Options The following options are displayed. Import Specifies what to import. Objects Imports all objects. The number of objects in the FBX file is indicated in parentheses. Lights Imports all Point, Spot, Distant, Photometric, Sun, and Sky lights.
Create target cameras in Autodesk® 3ds Max to accurately import cameras into AutoCAD. Materials Imports materials. The number of materials in the FBX file is indicated in parentheses. Assign Objects To Layers Specifies how to assign layers for the imported objects. New Layer Assigns the imported objects to a new layer. The name displayed in parentheses is both the file name and the new layer name. Current Layer Assigns the imported objects to the current layer.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter path and name of file to import: Enter the path to and the file name of the FBX file to import to AutoCAD. A list of items that can be imported is displayed. Specify types to import [Settings, All types] : Settings Prompts you to select what should be imported and how. Select your choice in the following prompts to import objects, lights, cameras, and materials from the FBX file.
Selecting no, imports the chosen contents of the FBX file to be imported into the current file, either in the current layer, or a new layer as specified by you. Name the block: Specify a name for the block and press Enter. The contents of the FBX file is saved as a block to the temp folder. FIELD Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Fields in Text Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes.
Field Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Fields in Text Inserts a field in the drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field Menu: Insert ➤ Field Shortcut menu: Right-click while any text command is active, and click Insert Field.
Summary The options available in the Field dialog box change with the field category and field name. List of Options The following options are displayed. Field Category Sets the types of fields to be listed under Field Names (for example, Date & Time, Document, and Objects). Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a field name to display the options available for that field.
Sheet set fields (fields that were selected from the sheet set category) behave differently than other types of fields. By default, other types of fields update automatically when you save the drawing or when you use REGEN. In contrast, sheet set fields store the last values that were used, and they display these stored values if the information referenced by the sheet set field is not accessible. To update the value in a sheet set field, use UPDATEFIELD command.
Average/Sum/Count When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify table cells. The result is appended to the formula. Cell When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify a table cell. The cell address is appended to the formula. Precision Specifies precision for fields based on the selected format. Select Current Precision to use the current setting of the LUPREC on page 2403 system variable.
Off Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are displayed and plotted. Changing Fill mode affects existing objects after the drawing is regenerated. The display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode setting. FILLET Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Fillets Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. Access Methods Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet.
Summary In the example, an arc is created that is tangent to both of the selected lines. The lines are trimmed to the ends of the arc. To create a sharp corner instead, enter a radius of zero. You can fillet arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines, and xlines. You can also fillet 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh object for filleting, you can choose to convert the mesh to a solid or surface and continue the operation.
FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly. If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the edges individually. Enter fillet radius : Specify a distance or press Enter Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, or enter r Edge Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press Enter.
If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner of a box, FILLET computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the three incident fillets have the same radii. Chain Changes from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges, called a chain selection. Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge.
Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc. The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs. Trim Controls whether FILLET trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints. Multiple Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects. FILLETEDGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Fillets Rounds and fillets the edges of solid objects.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select an Edge Specifies an edge to fillet. After pressing Enter, you can drag the fillet grip to specify a radius, or use the Radius option. Radius Specifies a radius value. Chain Specifies more than one edge. FILTER Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects by Properties Creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a selection set.
Summary The Object Selection Filters dialog box is displayed. Object Selection Filters Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects by Properties Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection. Access Methods Command entry: filter (or 'filter for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Filter Property List Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter.
Object Types and Logical Operators Lists object types that you can filter and logical operators (AND, OR, XOR, and NOT) for grouping the filter expressions. If you use logical operators, make sure that you pair and balance them correctly in the filter list. The number of operands you can enclose depends on the operation.
Substitute Replaces the filter property selected in the filter property list with the one displayed in Select Filter. Add Selected Object Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list. Edit Item Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. The edited filter replaces the selected filter property. Delete Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter. Clear List Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text Menu: Edit ➤ Find Toolbar: Text Formatting Summary The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND Quick Reference See also: ■ Find and Replace Text Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope and results of the search.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Find Text Menu: Edit ➤ Find Toolbar: Text Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Find. Command entry: find List of Options The following options are displayed. Find What Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a text string, including any wild-card characters, or choose one of the six most recently used strings from the list.
For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the User’s Guide. Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text. Enter a string, or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list. Find Where Specifies whether to search the entire drawing, the current layout, or the currently-selected object. If an object is already selected, then Selected Objects is the default value. If no object is selected, then Entire Drawing is the default value.
Creates a selection set from the objects that contain the text highlighted on the list of results. The selected objects must all be located either in model space or in a single layout. Create Selection Set (All) Creates a selection set from all the objects that contain the text on the list of results. The objects must all be located either in model space or in a single layout. Find/Find Next Finds the text that you enter in Find What. If you have not entered text in Find What, this option is not available.
Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results. Match Half or Full Width Forms Matches half- and full-width characters in search results. Text Types Specifies the type of text objects you want to include in the search. By default, all options are selected. Block Attribute Value Includes block attribute text values in search results. Dimension or Leader Text Includes dimension and leader object text in search results.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Flatshot Summary The Flatshot dialog box is displayed. The edges of all 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes are projected line-of-sight onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these edges are inserted as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be exploded for additional changes.
Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view. Access Methods Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Flatshot Command entry: flatshot Summary The edges of all 3D solids and surfaces are projected line-of-sight onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these edges are inserted as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be exploded for additional changes. The result can also be saved as a separate drawing file.
Specifies to insert the flattened representation as a block in the current drawing. Replace Existing Block Replaces an existing block in the drawing with the newly created block. Select Block Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the block you are replacing in the drawing. When you finish selecting the block, press Enter to re-display the Flatshot dialog box. Block Selected / No Block Selected Indicates whether a block has been selected. Export to a File Saves the block to an external file.
Include Tangential Lines Creates silhouette edges for curved surfaces. Create Creates the flattened view. FREESPOT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Spotlights Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Hotspot Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS and AUNITS. Falloff Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as the field angle.
Color Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance.
■ Inverse Squared. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is one quarter as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one sixteenth as strong. Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits or not. Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. The default is 0.
NOTE The LIGHTINGUNITS system variable must be set to a value other than 0 to create and use freeweb lights. Name Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters. Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Status Turns the light on and off.
Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Web Specifies the intensity for a light at points on a spherical grid. File Specifies which web file to use to define the properties of the web. Web files have the file extension .ies. X Specifies the X rotation for the web. Y Specifies the Y rotation for the web.
Color Book Specifies a color from a color book.
824
G Commands 8 GCCOINCIDENT Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve). Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Coincident Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Coincident Toolbar: Geometric Constraint Summary This command is equivalent to the Coincident option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848.
Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Circle ■ Arc ■ Polyline arc ■ Ellipse ■ Spline ■ Two valid constraint points List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first point on page 826 or [Object on page 826/Autoconstrain on page 826]
GCCOLLINEAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Collinear Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Collinear Toolbar: Geometric Constraint Summary This command is equivalent to the Collinear option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848.
Second object Selects the second object to be constrained. Multiple Picks successive points or objects to be made collinear with the first object. GCCONCENTRIC Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point.
Select first object on page 829: Select a circle, arc, or ellipse Object Selects an object to be constrained. First object Selects the first circle, arc, or ellipse to be constrained. Second object Selects the second circle, arc, or ellipse to be constrained. GCEQUAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the same length.
■ Polyline arc List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first object on page 830 or [Multiple on page 830]: Select an object or enter m to select multiple objects Object Selects an object to be constrained. First object Selects the first object to be constrained. Second object Selects the second object to be made equal with the first object. Multiple Picks successive objects to be made equal with the first object.
When you apply the Fix constraint to a point on an object, you lock the node in place. You can move the object around the locked node. When you apply the Fix constraint to an object, the object is locked and cannot be moved.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Horizontal option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848. You can select different constraint points on the same object or different objects. The following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Ellipse ■ Multiline text ■ Two valid constraint points List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
GCPARALLEL Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Parallel option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848. Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Ellipse ■ Multiline text GCPERPENDICULAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another.
■ Polyline segment ■ Ellipse ■ Multiline text GCSMOOTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another spline, line, arc, or polyline. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Smooth Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Smooth Toolbar: Geometric Constraint Summary This command is equivalent to the Smooth option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848.
NOTE Endpoints of the curves to which you apply the smooth constraints are made coincident. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first spline curve on page 836: Select a spline object Curve Selects an endpoint of a curve. First Spline Curve Selects the first spline curve to be constrained. Second Curve Selects the second curve to be made continuous with the first spline curve.
For lines, the line’s angle is made symmetric (and not the endpoints). For arcs and circles, the center and radius are made symmetric (not the endpoints of the arc). Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Circle ■ Arc ■ Polyline arc ■ Ellipse NOTE You must have an axis around which you will constrain the objects or points to be symmetrical. This is referred to as the symmetry line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
GCTANGENT Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Tangent Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Tangent Toolbar: Geometric Constraint Summary This command is equivalent to the Tangent option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848.
GCVERTICAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Geometric panel ➤ Vertical Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Vertical Toolbar: Geometric Constraint Summary This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 848.
Select an object or [2Points on page 840] <2Points>: Select an object or two constraint points 2Points Selects two constraint points instead of an object. GEOGRAPHICLOCATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Specifies the geographic location information for a drawing file.
Define Geographic Location Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Defines a geographic location. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Sun & Location panel ➤ Set Location Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Toolbar: Lights List of Options The following options are displayed. Import a .kml or a .kmz File Displays the Import a .kml or .kmz file dialog box.
Location Already Exists Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Enables you to edit, redefine, or remove an existing location. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Sun & Location panel ➤ Set Location Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Toolbar: Lights List of Options The following options are displayed. Edit Current Geographic Location Displays the Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 843, where you can edit the existing location information.
Provides an option to convert the alternate coordinate system to the LL84 coordinate system used by AutoCAD. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Sun & Location panel ➤ Set Location Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Toolbar: Lights List of Options The following options are displayed. Leave existing coordinate system Does not convert the alternate coordinate system to the LL84 coordinate system.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Sun & Location panel ➤ Set Location Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Toolbar: Lights List of Options The following options are displayed. Latitude and Longitude Displays or sets latitude, longitude, and direction in decimal values. Decimal Lat / Long Sets the format of the latitude and longitude representation in the drawing.
Use Map Displays the Location Picker Dialog Box on page 847. Specifies a location by using the pointing device. The latitude and longitude values are updated when you select a location. If you enter latitude and longitude values, then the map displays the updated location. Latitude Sets the latitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select a location on the map. The valid range is -90 and +90 as a floating point number. (LATITUDE on page 2379 system variable).
Sets the Y component of the world coordinate system for the geographic location. Z Sets the Z component of the world coordinate system for the geographic location. Pick Point Specifies the X, Y, and Z values of the Geographic Location marker based on the World Coordinate System (WCS). Elevation Sets the relative height along the specified up-direction defined for a geographic location. North Direction By default, north is the positive Y direction in the World Coordinate System (WCS).
Location Picker Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Geographic Location of a Drawing Sets the latitude and longitude of the selected location. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Sun & Location panel ➤ Set Location Menu: Tools ➤ Geographic Location Toolbar: Lights List of Options The following options are displayed. Map Specifies a location on the map. Region Specifies a region of the world. Nearest City Specifies a city in the selected region.
See also: ■ Geographic Location Dialog Box on page 843 GEOMCONSTRAINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Applies or persists geometric relationships between objects or points on objects. Summary When you apply a geometric constraint to a pair of objects, the order in which the objects are selected and the point on which each object is selected can affect how the objects are positioned relative to each other.
The following commands are equivalent to each GEOMCONSTRAINT option: Horizontal (GCHORIZONTAL on page 831) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system. Vertical (GCVERTICAL on page 839) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system. Perpendicular (GCPERPENDICULAR on page 834) Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another.
Summary Select an object that has an attached hyperlink. The file or web page (URL) that is associated with the hyperlink opens. GRADIENT Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Gradient Menu: Draw ➤ Gradient Toolbar: Draw Summary When the ribbon is active, the Hatch Creation contextual tab on page 882 is displayed.
GRAPHICSCONFIG Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Sets options for 3D display performance. Summary The Manual Performance Tuning dialog box on page 851 is displayed. Manual Performance Tuning Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Performance Sets options that affect 3D display performance.
Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, System tab) Shortcut menu: On the application status bar, click Display Performance button and select Hardware Acceleration.
Summary These options are set automatically by the performance tuner. You can set them manually in this dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Sets a driver for the graphics card and sets options for hardware acceleration. Enable Hardware Acceleration Uses hardware acceleration. When this check box is cleared, hardware acceleration is not used, and all the items in this dialog box are unavailable.
■ Smooth display. Controls the status of the full screen anti-aliasing effect. This option removes the jagged effect on the display of diagonal line and curved edges. ■ Advanced material effects. Controls the status of the advanced materials effect on screen. ■ Gooch hardware shader. Enables the use of Gooch shading.
with AutoCAD, check with the software vendor to see if it supports hardware acceleration and if not, disable hardware acceleration prior to starting the remote access software or use the /NOHARDWARE command line switch to start AutoCAD in Software mode. General Settings Sets performance-related options that are not hardware dependent. Discard Back Faces When selected, the back faces of objects are not drawn.
based on the current draw order. The graphical artifacts are less noticeable due to the opaque objects being drawn prior to the transparent objects. ■ High quality improves on medium quality by sorting transparent objects to decrease the appearance of graphical artifacts. However, the sorting does not completely eliminate all graphical artifacts. Rendering ■ Low quality disables the use of transparency for all materials, and the materials are rendered as opaque instead.
Reset to Recommended Values Resets the values to the defaults based on the performance tuner’s evaluation of the graphics card. -GRAPHICSCONFIG Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Sets options for 3D display performance in the command line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [General Options/acceLeration] : General Options Sets performance-related options that are not hardware dependent.
The available drivers are AcadDM10.hdi and direct3d10.hdi. When you select Hardware, the default driver is set to the AcadDM10.hdi driver that is included with the program. ■ Driver Name. You can select a driver from a list of available hardware-accelerated drivers found in the Drv directory. If you want to use ® a hardware driver from another vendor, it must be supported by the Heidi Graphics System. For more information, see Hardware Acceleration Troubleshooting in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.
GRAPHSCR Quick Reference See also: ■ Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window Switches from the text window to the drawing area. Access Methods Command entry: 'graphscr for transparent use Summary GRAPHSCR closes the text window. You can also press F2 to open or close the text window. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems. GRID Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport.
Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the value sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap interval. On Turns on the grid using the current spacing. Off Turns off the grid. Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP command. Major Specifies the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Grid lines rather than grid dots are displayed in any visual style except 2D Wireframe.
Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions. Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval rather than the drawing units. The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric. GROUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Group Objects Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. Access Methods Summary The Object Grouping dialog box is displayed. If you enter -group at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Displays, identifies, names, and changes object groups. Access Methods Command entry: group List of Options The following options are displayed. Group Name Displays the names of existing groups. Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected. When the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 0, no groups are selectable.
Find Name Lists the groups to which an object belongs. The Group Member List dialog box is displayed, showing the groups to which the object belongs. Highlight Shows the members of the selected group in the drawing area. Include Unnamed Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed. When this option is cleared, only named groups are displayed. Create Group Specifies properties of new groups. New Creates a new group from the selected objects, using the name and description under Group Name and Description.
NOTE When you remove objects from a group and then later add them back during the same drawing session, they are returned to their previous position in the numerical order of the group. Add Adds objects to the selected group. NOTE Group names are displayed in alphabetical order. Rename Renames the selected group to the name entered in Group Name under Group Identification. Re-Order Displays the Order Group dialog box, in which you can change the numerical order of objects within the selected group.
Reorders objects in groups. Access Methods Command entry: group List of Options The following options are displayed. Group Name Displays the names of all groups. Description Displays the description of the selected group. Remove from Position (0-n) Specifies the current position of the object to reorder. Enter New Position Number for the Object (0-n) Specifies the position to which the object moves. Number of Objects (1-n) Specifies the object number or range of numbers to reorder.
-GROUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Group Objects List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter a group option [?/Order/Add/Remove/Explode/REName/Selectable/Create] : Enter an option or press ENTER ?—List Groups Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing. Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern.
Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected. Create Creates a group. Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters.
868
H Commands 9 HATCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch Toolbar: Draw Summary When the ribbon is active, the Hatch Creation contextual tab on page 882 is displayed. When the ribbon is off, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 870 is displayed.
NOTE To prevent the creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited. This limit prevents memory and performance problems. However, you can change the maximum number of hatch lines with the HPMAXLINES on page 2356 system variable. Choose from several methods to specify the boundaries of a hatch. ■ Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects. ■ Select objects that enclose an area.
Toolbar: Draw Command entry: hatch List of Options ■ Hatch tab on page 875 ■ Gradient tab on page 877 ■ More Options section on page 879 ■ Add: Pick Points on page 871 ■ Add: Select Objects on page 872 ■ Remove Boundaries on page 872 ■ Recreate Boundary on page 873 ■ View Selections on page 873 ■ Select Boundary Objects on page 873 ■ Options on page 873 ■ Inherit Properties on page 874 ■ Preview on page 874 Add: Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an en
If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method is specified. NOTE Red circles are displayed at unconnected endpoints of boundary objects to identify gaps in the hatch boundary. These circles are temporary and can be removed with REDRAW or REGEN. Add: Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area.
Select Objects Removes objects from the boundary definition. Add Boundaries Adds objects to the boundary definition. Recreate Boundary Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. View Selections Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is available only when a boundary has been defined.
Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper. (HPANNOTATIVE on page 2348 system variable) Associative Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that is associative is updated when you modify its boundary objects.
More Options Expands the Hatch and Gradient dialog box to display more options on page 879. Hatch Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied. List of Options The following options are displayed. Type and Pattern Specifies the hatch’s type, pattern, color, and background color. Type Specifies whether to create a predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch pattern.
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. (HPCOLOR on page 2351 system variable) Background Color Specifies the background color for new hatch objects. Choose None to turn off the background color. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR on page 2349 system variable) Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern. Click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 887. Custom Pattern Lists the available custom patterns.
Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. This option is available only when Type is set to User Defined. (HPSPACE system variable) ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This option is available only when Type is set to Predefined and Pattern is set to one of the available ISO patterns. Hatch Origin Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Specifies whether to fill the hatch boundary with a monochormatic or two-color blend. One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between a color and a specified tint (the color mixed with white) or between a color and a specified shade (the color mixed with black). (GFCLRSTATE on page 2330 system variable) Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors.
More Options (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Controls the operation of islands and boundaries. List of Options The following options are displayed. Islands Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost boundary. Island Detection Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. (HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE on page 2355 system variable) Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 2355 system variable) The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select objects to define your boundaries. Boundary Retention Specifies whether to create an object that encloses the hatch. Retain Boundaries Creates an object that encloses each hatch object.
Boundary Set Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary. By default, when you use the Add: Pick Point option to define a boundary, HATCH analyzes all objects in the current viewport extents. By redefining the boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects.
Hatch Creation Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Defines the boundaries, pattern or fill properties, and other parameters for hatch and fills. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch Toolbar: Draw Command entry: hatch List of Options The following options are displayed. Boundaries Panel Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point.
Select Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area. When you use the Select Objects option, HATCH does not automatically detect interior objects. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style. Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu.
When you select an associative hatch, a single, circular grip called the control grip is displayed. No boundary grips are displayed because the boundaries of an associative hatch can be modified only by changing its associated boundary objects. Use the Select Boundary Objects option to select and grip-edit the boundary objects. To modify the boundaries of a nonassociative hach, you modify the boundaries of the hatch object itself.
Hatch Color or Gradient Color 1 Overrides the current color for solid fills and hatch patterns, or specifies the first of two gradient colors. (HPCOLOR on page 2351 or GFCLR1 on page 2329 system variables) Background Color or Gradient Color 2 Specifies the color for hatch pattern backgrounds, or the second gradient color. When Hatch Type is set to Solid, Gradient Color 2 is not available.
Set Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly. Bottom Left Sets the hatch origin at the bottom-left corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Bottom Right Sets the hatch origin at the bottom-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Top Left Sets the hatch origin at the top-left corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Top Right Sets the hatch origin at the top-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary.
Create Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified. (HPSEPARATE system variable) Islands Normal Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If an internal island is encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until another island within the island is encountered.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Hatch Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch Toolbar: Draw Command entry: hatch Summary Organizes patterns on four tabs, with images arranged alphabetically on each tab. Click an image to select a pattern and click OK. List of Options The following options are displayed. ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with the program. ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with the program.
Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped with the program. Custom Displays a list of custom PAT files that you have added to the search path, which is set in the Options dialog box, Files tab. Preview Displays a preview image of the selected custom pattern. -HATCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Uses command prompts to fill an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or solid fill.
If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method is specified. NOTE Red circles are displayed at unconnected endpoints of boundary objects to identify gaps in the hatch boundary. These circles are temporary and can be removed with REDRAW or REGEN. Properties Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply.
Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or fill. Draw Boundary Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill. The options that are available as you specify points are also available in PLINE.
Boundary Set Specifies a limited set of objects, called a boundary set, for evaluation by the pick point of the hatch New Creates a boundary set from the selected objects. Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the current viewport. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses everything visible in the drawing or in the current viewport. Retain Boundary Creates an object that encloses each hatch object.
+Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. -Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use the Normal style. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
Gap Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose the area with no gaps. Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify in the gap tolerance are ignored, and the boundary is treated as closed. Separate Hatches Controls whether the command creates a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects when several separate closed boundaries are specified.
color red by entering the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) number 1 or the ACI name red. You can also set the hatch color to ByLayer or ByBlock. Truecolor Specify an RGB color expressed as values from 0 to 255, such as 210,155,95. Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system. Layer Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current layer.
Summary Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill. List of Options The following options are displayed. Select hatch object: Use an object selection method When the ribbon is active, the Hatch Editor contextual tab on page 898 is displayed. when the ribbon is off, the Hatch Edit dialog box is displayed. If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, the associated options are displayed in the command line.
Summary The options in the Hatch Edit dialog box are the same as the options for the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 870. Certain options are available only when creating hatches. Hatch Editor Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale and angle for an existing hatch or fill.
Select Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area. When you use the Select Objects option, interior objects are not detected automatically. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style. Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu.
Remove Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added previously. Recreate Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. Display Boundary Objects Displays the boundary grip controls for the selected hatch that you can use to grip-edit both the boundary and the hatch object. When you select or use the Display Boundary Objects option to select a non-associative hatch, the hatch boundary grips are displayed.
User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you have added to the search path. Hatch Color or Gradient Color 1 Specifies the color for solid fills, hatch patterns, or as the first of two gradient colors. Background Color or Gradient Color 2 Specifies the color for hatch pattern backgrounds or as a second gradient color. When Hatch Type is set to Solid, Gradient Color 2 is not available.
Bottom Right Sets the hatch origin at the bottom-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Top Left Sets the hatch origin at the top-left corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Top Right Sets the hatch origin at the top-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary. Center Sets the hatch origin at the center of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundary.
Islands Normal Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If an internal island is encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until another island within the island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION system variable) Outer Island Detection Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This option hatches or fills only the specified area and leaves the internal islands unaffected.
Disassociate Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch or fill. Style Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost boundary. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank.
Specify Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point, and associates the selected hatch with the boundary objects. Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area, and associates the selected hatch with the boundary objects. Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified.
Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system. Layer Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current layer. Transparency Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current object transparency. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current object transparency setting.
Redefines a selected hatch or fill to conform to a different closed boundary. Summary Trims a selected hatch to within a selected boundary or geometry. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Select hatch object to be trimmed. Select objects to be used for the new boundary: Select the new boundary or geometry and press ENTER.
HATCHTOBACK Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects. Access Methods Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Draw Order ➤ Send Hatches to Back Summary Selects all hatches in the drawing, including hatch patterns, solid fills, and gradient fills, and sets their draw order to be behind all other objects.
Toolbar: Modeling Summary Use a helix as a sweep path for the SWEEP command to create springs, threads, and circular stairways. Initially, the default base radius is set to 1. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive or helix. The default value for the top radius is always the value of the base radius. The base radius and top radius cannot both be set to 0.
Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the helix axis. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the helix. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point Turns Specifies the number of turns (revolutions) for the helix. The number of turns for a helix cannot exceed 500. Initially, the default value for the number of turns is three.
Menu: Help ➤ Help Toolbar: Standard Command entry: ? (or 'help for transparent use) Summary Pressing F1 while a tooltip or command is active displays Help for that command. Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that dialog box. HIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Regenerates a 3D wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed.
If they are extruded, circles, solids, traces, and wide polyline segments are treated as solid objects with top and bottom faces. You cannot use HIDE on objects whose layers have been frozen; however, you can use HIDE on objects whose layers have been turned off. To hide text created with MTEXT or TEXT, the HIDETEXT system variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness value.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click in drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Hide Objects. Summary Temporarily hides selected objects in the current view. All other objects are visible. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method HIDEPALETTES Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window.
Summary The Visual Styles Manager on page 2051 is displayed. HYPERLINK Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Hyperlink Menu: Insert ➤ Hyperlink Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink. Summary Hyperlinks in a drawing provide jumps to associated files.
■ Edit Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that already contain hyperlinks) on page 918 After you insert a hyperlink, the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move the cursor over the attached object. To open the hyperlink, right-click the selected object and choose Hyperlink. The PICKFIRST system variable must be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks.
Specifies a description for the hyperlink. This is useful when the file name or URL is not helpful in identifying the contents of the linked file. Existing File or Web Page Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box) Creates a hyperlink to an existing file or web page. Type the File or Web Page Name Specifies the file or web page to associate with the hyperlink. The file can be stored locally, on a network drive, or on an Internet or intranet location.
Opens the Select Place in Document dialog box, in which you can select a named location in a drawing to link to. Path Displays the path to the file associated with the hyperlink. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is selected, only the file name is listed. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is cleared, the full path and the file name are listed. Use Relative Path for Hyperlink Sets a relative path for hyperlinks. If you select this option, the full path to the linked file is not stored with the hyperlink.
E-mail Address Specifies an email address. Subject Specifies a subject for the email. Recently Used E-mail Addresses Lists recently used email addresses, from which you can select one to use for the hyperlink. Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Edits hyperlinks.
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Hyperlink Menu: Insert ➤ Hyperlink Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyperlink, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink. Command entry: hyperlink Summary The Edit Hyperlink dialog box is a modified version of the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, with one additional option. List of Options The following options are displayed. Remove Link Deletes the hyperlink from the selected objects.
Summmary The named location that you select is the initial view that is restored when the hyperlink is executed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Select an Existing Place in the Document Provides an expandable tree view of the named locations within the linked drawing, from which you can select a named location to link to.
Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object]
HYPERLINKOPTIONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Hyperlink to Access a File or a Web Page Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor, tooltips, and shortcut menu. Summary Controls the display of hyperlink cursor, tooltip, and shortcut menu. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
I Commands 10 ID Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ ID Point Toolbar: Inquiry Command entry: 'id for transparent use Summary ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point.
Specify Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point The UCS coordinate values of the location are displayed at the Command prompt. If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected feature of the object. IMAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Raster Images Displays the External References palette.
-IMAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Raster Images List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter image option [?/Detach/Path/Reload/Unload/Attach] : Enter an option or press Enter ?—List Images Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored. Images are listed in alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT system variable.
Attach Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing. The Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. The file name without the extension is assigned as the image name. Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or this program. If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed.
"imagename=filename" You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the imagename=filename convention at the Command prompt. Enter a tilde (~) at the Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press Esc after the dialog box opens, the Enter Image Name prompt is displayed. IMAGEADJUST Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images.
Image Adjust Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade Controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness, contrast, and fade settings of the selected image. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Adjust Toolbar: Reference Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Image ➤ Adjust.
Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast. Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectlyd the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more the image blends with the current background color.
If you select a single image, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are the current property settings of the image. If you select multiple images, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are 50, 50, and 0, respectively. Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly, the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image.
Summary When you attach an image file, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Once you select an image file, the Attach Image Dialog Box on page 931 is displayed. After the file is attached, you can adjust and clip the underlay through the Image Ribbon Contextual tab.
Toolbar: Reference Menu: Insert ➤ Raster Image Reference List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the image you have selected to attach. Browse Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295). Preview Displays the image that you have selected to attach.
the image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined. Specify On-screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1. Scale Factor Field Enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach Toolbar: Reference Menu: Insert ➤ Raster Image Reference Command entry: imageattach Summary When you select a raster image that is attached to a drawing, the Image Contextual tab appears on the ribbon. List of Options The following options are diaplayed. Adjust Panel Brightness Controls the brightness and the contrast of the image. The greater the value, the brighter the image.
External References Displays the External References Palette. IMAGECLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Clip Raster Images Crops the display of a selected image to a specified boundary. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Image contextual tab ➤ Clipping panel ➤ Create Clipping Boundary. Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Image Toolbar: Reference Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and click Image ➤ Clip.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. On Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined boundary. Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame. If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible. Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image.
Controls the display quality of images. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Quality Toolbar: Reference Summary The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately without causing a regeneration of the drawing. NOTE Images are always plotted using a high-quality setting. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. High Produces a high-quality display of the image.
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import Toolbar: Insert Summary You can import data files, other than DWG files, that were created with other applications into the current drawing. The import process translates data into the corresponding DWG file data. The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. In Files of Type, select the file format to import. In File Name, select the file name to import. The file is imported into the drawing.
Imprints 2D geometry on a 3D solid or surface, creating additional edges on planar faces. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Solid Modeling tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Imprint Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Imprint Edges Summary 2D geometry located on a face or the intersection of a 3D solid with a face can be combined with that face to create additional edges. These edges can provide a visual effect, and can be pressed and pulled to create indentations and extrusions.
Select a 3D solid or surface Specifies a 3D solid or surface object to be imprinted. Select an object to imprint Specifies an object that intersects the 3D object you selected. Delete the source object Specifies whether to remove the object whose shape served as the imprint outline. INSERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.
Insert Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert Menu: Insert ➤ Block Toolbar: Insert Command entry: insert Summary The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS. Name Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block.
Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can select a block or drawing file to insert. Path Specifies the path to the block. Locate Using Geographic Data Inserts drawing using geographic data as the reference. Specifies if the current and attached drawing contain geographic data. This option is available only if both drawings have geographic data. Preview Displays a preview of the specified block to insert.
X Sets the X scale factor. Y Sets the Y scale factor. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS. Specify On-Screen Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device. Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block. Block Unit Displays information about the block units. Unit Specifies the INSUNITS value for the inserted block.
-INSERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter block name or [?] : Enter a name, enter ?, enter ~, or press Enter Units: Conversion: Specify insertion pointor [Basepoint/Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/Geographic]: Specify a point or enter an option Block Name Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups.
Block "current" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] : Enter y, enter n, or press Enter If you choose to redefine the block, the existing block definition is replaced with the new block definition. The drawing is regenerated, and the new definition is applied to all existing insertions of the block definition. Press Esc when prompted for the insertion point if you do not want to insert a new block into the drawing. ?—List Block Names Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing.
Z Sets the Z scale factor. Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for the block. Geographic Sets the geographic location of the attached file as reference. INSERTOBJ Quick Reference See also: ■ Import OLE Objects Inserts a linked or embedded object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ OLE Object Menu: Insert ➤ OLE Object Toolbar: Insert Summary The Insert Object dialog box is displayed.
Insert Object Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Import OLE Objects Inserts a linked or embedded object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ OLE Object Menu: Insert ➤ OLE Object Toolbar: Insert Command entry: insertobj List of Options The following options are displayed. Create New Opens the application that's highlighted in the Object Type list so that you can create a new object to insert. Object Type Lists available applications that support linking and embedding.
Link Creates a link to the selected file rather than embedding it. Display as Icon Displays the source application's icon in the drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information. INTERFERE Quick Reference See also: ■ Check 3D Models for Interferences Creates a temporary 3D solid from the interferences between two sets of selected 3D solids.
If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another. If you define two selection sets, INTERFERE checks the solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set. If you include the same 3D solid in both selection sets, INTERFERE considers the 3D solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection set.
First set of objects Specifies a set of objects to be checked. If you do not select a second set of objects, all objects in this selection set are checked against each other. ■ Second set of objects ■ Nested selection ■ Settings Second set of objects Specifies an additional set of objects to be compared against the first set of objects. If you select the same object twice, the object is handled as part of the first selection set. ■ Second set of objects ■ Nested selection ■ Check first set.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Interfere Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Interference Checking Command entry: interfere List of Options The following options are displayed. Interference Objects Specifies the visual style and color for interference objects. Visual Style Specifies the visual style for interference objects (INTERFEREOBJVS). Color Specifies the color for interference objects (INTERFERECOLOR).
Interference Checking Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Check 3D Models for Interferences Cycles through, zooms, and deletes or retains interference objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Interfere Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Interference Checking Command entry: interfere List of Options The following options are displayed. Interfering Objects Displays the number of interferences found between each set during the INTERFERE command.
Second Set Displays the number of objects selected in the second set. Interfering Pairs Found Displays the number of interferences found among the selected objects. Highlight Highlights interference objects while using Previous and Next to cycle through the objects. Previous Highlights the previous interference object. Next Highlights the next interference object. Zoom to Pair Zooms to interference objects while using Previous and Next. Zoom Closes the dialog box and starts the ZOOM command.
-INTERFERE Quick Reference See also: ■ Check 3D Models for Interferences Summary INTERFERE highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of objects selected and the number of interfering pairs. If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another. If you define two selection sets, INTERFERE checks the solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set.
INTERSECT Quick Reference See also: See also: ■ Create Composite Objects Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Intersect Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Intersect Toolbar: Modeling Summary With INTERSECT, you can create a 3D solid from the common volume of two or more existing 3D solids, surfaces, or regions.
ISOLATEOBJECTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Objects Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Isolate Objects. Summary Displays selected objects in the current view. All other objects are temporarily hidden. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed.
ISOPLANE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Isometric Grid and Snap Specifies the current isometric plane. Access Methods Command entry: 'isoplane for transparent use Summary The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE.
Top Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair. Right Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair.
J Commands 11 JOIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Break and Join Objects Joins similar objects to form a single, unbroken object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Surface Modeling tab ➤ Curves panel ➤ Join Menu: Modify ➤ Join Toolbar: Modify Summary Most objects to be joined must be located in the same plane. You can join objects in different planes if the source object is a spline or a 3D polyline. Each type of object has additional restrictions.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select source object: Select a line, polyline, 3D polyline, arc, elliptical arc, spline, or helix Depending on the source object selected, one of the following prompts is displayed: Line The line objects must be collinear (lying on the same infinite line), but can have gaps between them. Polyline The objects can be lines, polylines, or arcs. The objects cannot have gaps between them, and must lie on the same plane parallel to the UCS XY plane.
Helix The helix objects must be contiguous (lying end-to-end). The resulting object is a single spline. JPGOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export Raster Files Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format. Summary The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Justify Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Justify Toolbar: Text Summary The justification point options shown above are described in the TEXT command.
L Commands 12 LAYCUR Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Changes the layer property of selected objects to the current layer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Change to Current Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Change to Current Layer Toolbar: Layers II Summary If you find objects that were created on the wrong layer, you can quickly change them to be on the current layer. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to be changed to the current layer: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you are finished N object(s) changed to layer X (the current layer). LAYDEL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Deletes all objects on a layer and purges the layer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Delete Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Delete Summary This command also changes block definitions that use the layer to be deleted.
Delete Layers Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Displays layers available for deletion. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Delete Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Delete Command entry: laydel List of Options The following options are displayed. Layers to Delete Displays a list of layers that you can delete. Press Shift or Ctrl to select more than one layer.
Select object on layer to delete or [Name/Undo]: Select an object, enter n, or enter u Select Object on Layer to Delete Select an object on the layer you want to delete. Name Select a layer to delete. LAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity ■ CLASSICLAYER on page 330 ■ LAYERPALETTE on page 994 Manages layers and layer properties.
Use layers to control the visibility of objects and to assign properties such as color and linetype. Objects on a layer normally assume the properties of that layer. However, you can override any layer property of an object. For example, if an object’s color property is set to BYLAYER, the object displays the color of that layer. If the object’s color is set to Red, the object displays as red, regardless of the color assigned to that layer.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager Menu: Format ➤ Layer Toolbar: Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Summary You can add, delete, and rename layers, change their properties, set property overrides for layout viewports, or add layer descriptions and apply changes in realtime. You do not need to click Ok or Apply to view property changes.
Displays the Layer Filter Properties dialog box, where you can create a layer filter based on one or more properties of the layers. New Group Filter Creates a layer filter that contains layers that you select and add to the filter. Layer States Manager Displays the Layer States Manager on page 996, in which you can save the current property settings for layers in a named layer state and then restore those settings later. New Layer Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named LAYER1.
Filters the layer list by name quickly as you enter characters. This filter is not saved when you close the Layer Properties Manager. Status Line Shows the name of the current filter, the number of layers displayed in the list view, and the number of layers in the drawing. Invert Filter Displays all layers that do not meet the criteria in the selected layer property filter. Indicate Layers in Use Displays icons in the list view to indicate whether layers are in use.
the Layer Filter button is displayed adjacent to Layer Filter status text. The Layer Filter button gives you access to the filters when the full Layer Filter pane is closed. If there are xrefs attached to the drawing, an xref node displays the names of all the xrefs in the drawing and the layers in each xref. Layer filters defined in xref files are not displayed.
Viewport In the current layout viewport, controls the VP Freeze setting of the layers in the selected layer filter. This option is not available for model space viewports. ■ Freeze: Sets VP Freeze for layers in the filter. In the current viewport, objects on the layer are not displayed and not plotted but do hide other objects when you use HIDE. The drawing is regenerated when you thaw the layer. ■ Thaw: Clears VP Freeze for layers in the filter.
Select Layers Temporarily closes the Layer Filter Properties dialog box so that you can select objects in the drawing. This option is available only when a layer group filter is selected. ■ Add: Adds the layers of the selected objects to the layer group filter that is selected in the tree view. ■ Replace: Replaces the layers of the selected layer group filter with the layers of the objects that are selected in the drawing.
Linetype Changes the linetype associated with the selected layers. Clicking the linetype name displays the Select Linetype dialog box. Lineweight Changes the lineweight associated with the selected layers. Clicking the lineweight name displays the Lineweight dialog box. Transparency Controls the visibility of all objects on the selected layer. When transparency is applied to individual objects, the objects’ transparency property overrides the transparency setting of the layer.
VP Plot Style (available only from a layout tab) Sets an override for the plot style associated with the selected layer for the active layout viewport. Override settings are not visible in the viewport or plotted when the visual style in the drawing is set to Conceptual or Realistic. If you are working with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot set a plot style override. Description (Optional) Describes the layer or the layer filter.
Layer Shortcut Menu Show Filter Tree Displays the tree view. Clear this option to hide the tree view. Show Filters in Layer List Displays filters at the top of the list view. The filters are listed in alphabetical order. Clear the check mark to display only layers in the list view. Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. (CLAYER system variable) New Layer Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named LAYER1. You can edit this layer name immediately.
VP Thaw Layer in All Viewports Thaws the selected layer in all existing layout viewports and new viewports. Select All Selects everything displayed in the list view. Clear All Removes selection from all items in the list view except the most recently selected layer or filter. Select All but Current Selects everything displayed in the list view except the current layer. Invert Selection Selects everything displayed in the list view except the items that are currently selected.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager Menu: Format ➤ Layer Toolbar: Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Summary When a layer filter is selected in the tree view of the Layer Properties Manager, layers that match the filter criteria are displayed in the list view. List of Options The following options are displayed. Filter Name Provides a space to enter a name for the layer properties filter.
Plot Style Click the [...] button to display the Select Plot Style dialog box. Plot Click the Plot icon or the Do Not Plot icon. VP Freeze Click the Freeze icon or the Thaw icon. New VP Freeze Click the Freeze icon or the Thaw icon. VP Color Click the [...] button to display the Select Color dialog box. VP Linetype Click the [...] button to display the Select Linetype dialog box. VP Lineweight Click the [...] button to display the Lineweight dialog box.
Example 2 The filter named “RYW” displays layers that meet all of the following criteria: ■ Are on ■ Are frozen ■ Are red or yellow or white 980 | Chapter 12 L Commands
Select Linetype Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layers Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager Menu: Format ➤ Layer Toolbar: Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing. Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, in which you can load selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager Menu: Format ➤ Layer Toolbar: Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Summary You can customize your lineweights to plot at other values by using the Plot Style Table Editor. See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype” in the User's Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Lineweights Displays the available lineweights to be applied.
Displays the previous lineweight. The default lineweight assigned when a layer is created is DEFAULT (which plots to a default value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm). (LWDEFAULT system variable) New Displays the new lineweight assigned to the layer. Layer Transparency Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layers Sets the transparency level for the selected layer(s) in the current drawing.
Layer Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use New Layer Notification Displays new layer notification, isolate layer, and dialog settings.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager Menu: Format ➤ Layer Toolbar: Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) Summary Click on the Layer Properties Manager on page 967. Controls when notification occurs for new layers and if layer filters are applied to the Layers toolbar; also controls the background color of viewport overrides in the Layer Properties Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Notify when New Layers Are Present Turns on new layer notification. (LAYERNOTIFY = 0) Open Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you use the OPEN command. (LAYERNOTIFY = 2) Attach/Reload Xrefs Displays new layer notification when new layers are present when you are attaching or reloading xrefs. (LAYERNOTIFY = 4) Restore Layer State Displays new layer notification when you are restoring layer states.
Dialog Settings Apply Layer Filter to Layer Toolbar Controls the display of layers in the list of layers on the Layers toolbar and Layers panel on the ribbon by applying the current layer filter. Indicate Layers in Use Displays icons in the list view to indicate whether layers are in use. In a drawing with many layers, clear this option to improve performance.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer Properties Manager Menu: Format ➤ Layer Toolbar: Layer Command entry: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Check the Columns you want to Display Lists all columns that display depending on whether the Layer Properties Manager was accessed from Model space or a layout tab. Checked columns are displayed in the Layer Properties Manager.
Manages layers and layer properties. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current layer: <"current"> Enter an option [?/Make/Set/New/Rename/ON/OFF/Color/Ltype/LWeight/TRansparency on page 991/MATerial/Plot/PStyle/Freeze/Thaw/LOck/Unlock/stAte/Description/rEconcile]: NOTE The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.
Color Changes the color associated with a layer. Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to used for the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as PANTONE® . The color is assigned to the layer or layers, and the layers are turned on.
If you select a plot style other than NORMAL, the following prompt is displayed: Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current : Enter the names of the layers to use this plot style, or press Enter to apply the style to the current layer only Freeze Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration and plotting. Thaw Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and plotting. Lock Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers.
A warning prompt is displayed when you enter a description to a layer with an existing description. Reconcile Sets the unreconciled property of an unreconciled layer. ? - Name List of Layers Displays a list of all unreconciled layers. LAYERCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layers Closes the Layer Properties Manager. Summary Closes the Layer Properties Manager if it is open.
Toolbar: Layers Summary Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If settings are restored, a message is displayed: “Restored previous layer states.” When you use Layer Previous, it undoes the most recent change using either the Layer control or the Layer Properties Manager. Every change you make to layer settings is tracked and can be undone by Layer Previous.
LAYERPMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings. Summary When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked. LAYERSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layer States Saves, restores, and manages named layer states.
Saves the layer settings in a drawing as a named layer state. Named layer states can then be restored, edited, imported, and exported for use in other drawings. Layer States Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layer States Create or edit layer states. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State drop-down ➤ Manage Layer States.
Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Toolbar: Layers Command entry: layerstate Summary Displays a list of saved layer states in the drawing. You can create, rename, edit, and delete layer states. List of Options The following options are displayed. Layer States Lists the named layer states that have been saved in the drawing, the space in which they were saved (model space, layout, or xref), whether the layer list is the same as in the drawing, and an optional description.
selected, the Select Layer States dialog box on page 1002 is displayed where you can select layer states to import. Export Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you can save the selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file. Restore Restores state and property settings of all layers in a drawing to their previously saved settings. Restores only those layer state and property settings that you specify with the check boxes. Close Closes the Layer States Manager and saves changes.
See also: ■ Layer Properties Manager on page 967 New Layer State to Save Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layer States Specifies a name and a description for the layer state defined in the Layer States Manager. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State drop-down ➤ Manage Layer States. Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Toolbar: Layers Command entry: layerstate List of Options The following options are displayed.
Edit Layer State Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save, Restore, and Edit Layer States Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State drop-down ➤ Manage Layer States.
Summary Modifies the selected layer state. Displays all the layers and their properties that are saved in the selected layer state except for viewport override properties. List of Options The following options are displayed. Layer List Displays a list of layers in the selected layer state and their properties. Delete Removes the selected layers from the layer state.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State drop-down ➤ Manage Layer States. Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Toolbar: Layers Command entry: layerstate Summary Displays layers by name and includes descriptions that are not defined in the selected named layer state. Multiple layers can be selected. Clicking OK displays the selected layers in the Edit Layer State dialog box on page 1000. List of Option The following option is available in this dialog box.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Layer State drop-down ➤ Manage Layer States. Menu: Format ➤ Layer States Manager Toolbar: Layers Command entry: layerstate List of Option The following option is available in this dialog box. Check Layer States to Import Displays a list of layer states, the space (model tab or layout tab) in which the layer state was saved, and a description.
NOTE If the layer state to be imported contains linetypes or plot styles that do not exist in the current drawing, they are imported from the DWG, DWS or DWT file. LAYFRZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Freezes the layer of selected objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Freeze Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Freeze Toolbar: Layers II Summary Objects on frozen layers are invisible.
Layer “” has been frozen. Settings Displays settings for viewports and block definitions. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Enter setting type for [Viewports/Block selection]: Viewports Displays settings for viewports. In paper space viewport use [Freeze/Vpfreeze] : Enter f to freeze objects in all viewports or v to freeze an object in the current viewport only Block Selection Displays settings for block definitions. ■ Block.
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Isolate Toolbar: Layers II Summary All layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked are called isolated. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
LAYMCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Match Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Match Toolbar: Layers II Summary If you enter -laymch at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 1008. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Change to Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Displays a list of layers to choose as the destination layer. You can also create a new destination layer. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Match Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Match Toolbar: Layers II Command entry: laymch List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Layer Displays the currently selected layer. Create a new layer name by entering a name.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to be changed: Select objects: Select an object to change its layer After you select the object(s) to change, the following prompt is displayed: Select object on destination layer on page 1009 or [Name on page 1009]: Select an object or enter n to enter a layer name Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer. Name Displays the Change to Layer dialog box on page 1008.
LAYMCUR Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Sets the current layer to that of a selected object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current Toolbar: Layers Summary You can change the current layer by selecting an object on that layer. This is a convenient alternative to specifying the layer name in the Layer Properties Manager.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Merge Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Merge Summary You can reduce the number of layers in a drawing by merging them. Objects on merged layers are moved to the target layer, and the original layers are purged from the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Merge Layers Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Merge Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Merge Command entry: laymrg List of Option The following prompt is displayed in this dialog box. Merge Layer list Displays a list of layers to merge. Merge to Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Displays a list of layers onto which the selected layers or objects can be merged.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Merge Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Merge Command entry: laymrg List of Options The following options are displayed. Target Layer Displays the first layer in an alphabetical list of the layers in the current drawing. Target Layer list Displays an alphabetical list of the layers onto which you can merge the selected layers or objects.
Name Displays a list of layers onto which you can merge the selected object or layer. LAYOFF Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Turns off the layer of a selected object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Off Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Off Toolbar: Layers II Summary Turning off the layer of a selected object makes that object invisible.
Viewports Displays the Viewports setting types. Returns the following prompt: ■ Vpfreeze: In paper space, freezes the layer selected in the current viewport. ■ Off: In paper space, turns off selected layers in all viewports. Block Selection Displays the Block Selection setting types, where you can freeze layers of selected objects. ■ Block: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a selected object is nested in a block, the layer containing that block is turned off.
Summary All layers that were previously turned off are turned back on. Objects created on those layers become visible, unless the layers are also frozen. LAYOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space) Creates and modifies drawing layout tabs. Access Methods Button Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Layout from Template Toolbar: Layouts List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Only the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab. Template Creates a new layout tab based on an existing layout in a template (DWT), drawing (DWG), or drawing interchange (DXF) file. If theFILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed for selecting a DWT, DWG, or DXF file.
Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Create Layout Wizard Summary The Layout wizard is displayed. Layout Wizard Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Layout Settings Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Create Layout Wizard Command entry: layoutwizard Summary The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new layout.
LAYTHW Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Thaws all layers in the drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Thaw Menu: Format ➤ Layer tools ➤ Thaw All Layers Summary All layers that were previously frozen are unfrozen. Objects created on those layers become visible, unless the layers are also turned off or have been frozen in individual layout viewports. Layers that are frozen in individual layout viewports must be thawed layer by layer.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Standards panel ➤ Layer Translator Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Layer Translator Toolbar: CAD Standards Summary Maps the layers in the current drawing to different layer names and layer properties in a specified drawing or standards file, and then converts them using those mappings. The Layer Translator is displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Translate From Specifies the layers to be translated in the current drawing. You can specify layers by selecting layers in the Translate From list or by supplying a selection filter. The color of the icon preceding the layer name indicates whether or not the layer is referenced in the drawing. A dark icon indicates that the layer is referenced; a white icon indicates the layer is unreferenced.
You can load layers from more than one file. If you load a file that contains layers of the same name as layers already loaded, the original layers are retained and the duplicate layers are ignored. Similarly, if you load a file containing mappings that duplicate mappings already loaded, the original mappings are retained and the duplicates are ignored. New Defines a new layer to be shown in the Translate To list for translation.
Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Translate Layer Names and Properties Controls the process of layer translation. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Standards panel ➤ Layer Translator Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Layer Translator Toolbar: CAD Standards Command entry: laytrans List of Options The following options are displayed. Force Object Color to BYLAYER Specifies whether or not every object translated takes on the color assigned to its layer.
Specifies whether or not a log file detailing the results of translation is created. If this option is selected, a log file is created in the same folder as the translated drawing. The log file is assigned the same name as the translated drawing, with a .log file name extension. Show Layer Contents When Selected Specifies which layers to display in the drawing area. Edit/New Layer Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Translate Layer Names and Properties Sets or modifies layer properties.
Specifies the layer color. Lineweight Specifies the layer lineweight. Transparency Specifies the layer transparency. Plot Style Specifies the layer plot style. You can modify the plot style only if all drawings referenced by the Layer Translator use named plot styles. LAYULK Quick Reference See also: ■ Prevent Objects from Being Selected Unlocks the layer of a selected object.
LAYUNISO Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Unisolate Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unisolate Toolbar: Layers II Summary Reverses the effects of the previous LAYISO command. Any additional changes made to layer settings after you use the LAYISO command will be retained.
LAYVPI Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Freezes selected layers in all layout viewports except the current viewport. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Layers panel ➤ Isolate to Current Viewport Menu: Format ➤ Layer tools ➤ Isolate Layer to Current Viewport Summary Isolates the layer of a selected object in the current viewport by freezing the layer in all but the current viewport. You can choose to isolate all layouts or only the current layout.
Settings Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Layouts Displays layout options for isolating layers. ■ All Layouts: In all layouts, isolates layers of selected objects in all but the current viewport ■ Current Layout: In the current layout, isolates layers of selected objects in all but the current viewport. This option persists from session to session.
Toolbar: Layers II Summary The LayerWalk dialog box is displayed. Displays a dialog box with a list of all layers in the drawing. For drawings with a large number of layers, you can filter the list of layers that are displayed in the dialog box.Use this command to review the objects on each layer and to purge unreferenced layers. By default, the effect is temporary and layers are restored when you close the dialog box.
You can use the Layer Walk dialog box in a paper space viewport to select layers to turn on and thaw in the layer table and the current viewport. Any layer that is not selected in the Layer list is frozen in the current viewport. You can change the display of one viewport without altering the display of another viewport. List of Options The following options are displayed. Filter Turns an active filter on and off.
Release All Turns off the Always Show option for all layers. Select All Selects and displays all layers. Clear All Clears all layers. Invert Selection Clears current layers and selects and displays all other layers. Select Unreferenced Selects all unreferenced layers. Use with the Purge button to remove unused layers. Save Layer State Saves the current selection of layers as a layer state that can be used by the Layer States Manager.
LEADER Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Leaders Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. Summary It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER on page 1174 command to create leader objects. For more information about multileader objects, see Create and Modify Leaders. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify leader start point: Specify next point: A leader line segment is drawn and prompts for points and options are displayed.
Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control frame with geometric tolerances, or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on the object copied. The value of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP system variable) determines where the text and multiline text objects are inserted.
Format Controls the way the leader is drawn and whether it has an arrowhead. Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the leader line are the control points, each of equal unit weight. Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments. Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line. None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point. Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. The previous prompt is displayed.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Lengthen Menu: Modify ➤ Lengthen Summary You can specify changes as a percentage, an increment, or as a final length or angle. LENGTHEN is an alternative to using TRIM or EXTEND. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object or enter an option Object Selection Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object. LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects.
Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle. Percent Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Total Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a specified total angle. Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point.
LIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Guidelines for Lighting Creates a light. List of Prompts Depending on the type of light you specify, the prompts that are displayed are identical to the prompts in the POINTLIGHT, SPOTLIGHT, WEBLIGHT, TARGETPOINT, FREESPOT,FREEWEB or DISTANTLIGHT command. LIGHTLIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Light Properties Turns on and off the Lights in Model palette that lists all lights in the model.
Summary Opens the Lights in Model palette on page 1038, which lists the lights in the drawing. With one or more lights selected, right-click and use the shortcut menu to delete or change the properties of the selected lights. Lights in Model Palette Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Light Properties Lists the lights in the drawing.
Ribbon: 3D Modeling Workspace Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Lights in Model Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ Light List Toolbar: Render Command entry: lightlist ➤ Summary An icon in the Type column indicates the type of light: point light, spotlight, or distant light, and whether it is on or off. Select a light in the list to select it in the drawing. To sort the list, click the Type or Name column head. List of Options The following options are displayed on the shortcut menu.
Summary The Lights in Model window on page 1038 closes. LIMITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or layout tab. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Drawing Limits Command entry: 'limits for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next time you turn on limits checking. LINE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Lines Creates straight line segments. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line Menu: Draw ➤ Line Toolbar: Draw Summary With LINE, you can create a series of contiguous line segments. Each segment is a line object that can be edited separately. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
If the most recently drawn object is an arc, its endpoint defines the starting point of the line, and the line is drawn tangent to the arc. Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment, which forms a closed loop of line segments. You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two or more segments. Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence.
Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them. LINETYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Linetypes Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype Menu: Format ➤ Linetype Command entry: 'linetype for transparent use Summary The Linetype Manager is displayed. If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype Menu: Format ➤ Linetype Command entry: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Linetype Filters Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are referenced by objects. Invert Filter Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria you select.
Current Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. Setting the current linetype to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned to a particular layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever the block is inserted, all objects inherit the block's linetype. The CELTYPE system variable stores the linetype name. Delete Deletes selected linetypes from the drawing.
Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited. Use Paper Space Units for Scaling Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when working with multiple viewports. (PSLTSCALE system variable) Global Scale Factor Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes. (LTSCALE system variable) Current Object Scale Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Linetype Menu: Format ➤ Linetype Command entry: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use) Summary The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Button Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box, in which you can select a different linetype (LIN) file. File Name Displays the name of the current LIN file.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [?/Create/Load/Set]: ?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). After you select an LIN file, the linetypes available in the file are listed. Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file. The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Specify the file to which you want the linetype added.
is not loaded, the program searches for its definition in the acad.lin file. If the linetype is neither loaded nor in acad.lin, the program displays a message and returns you to the Command prompt. Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter bylayer, new objects inherit the linetype associated with the layer on which the object is drawn. If you enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype until they are grouped into a block.
■ The thickness of an object, if it is nonzero. ■ Elevation (Z coordinate information). ■ Extrusion direction (UCS coordinates), if the extrusion direction differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS. ■ Additional information related to the specific object type. For example, for dimensional constraint objects, LIST displays the constraint type (annotation or dynamic), reference type (yes or no), name, expression, and value.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select section object Turns on live sectioning for the section object you select. LOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Shape Files Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command. Summary The Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list. You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; it is loaded automatically thereafter.
LOFT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Loft Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Loft Toolbar: Modeling Summary Creates a 3D solid or surface by specifying a series of cross sections. The cross sections define the shape of the resulting solid or surface. You must specify at least two cross sections.
When creating surfaces, use SURFACEMODELINGMODE on page 2539 to control whether the surface is a NURBS surface or a procedural surface. Use SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 2537 to control whether procedural surfaces are associative.
Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Used as Cross Sec- Used as a Loft Path Used as Guides tions Region Trace To automatically delete the cross sections, guides, and paths, use DELOBJ. If surface associativity on page 2537 is on, DELOBJ is ignored and the originating geometry is not deleted. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Cross Sections in Lofting Order Specifies open or closed curves in the order in which the surface or solid will pass through them.
■ Intersects each cross section ■ Starts on the first cross section ■ Ends on the last cross section Select any number of guide curves for the lofted surface or solid and press Enter. Path Specifies a single path for the lofted solid or surface. The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections. Cross Sections Only Creates lofted objects without using guides or paths. Settings Displays the Loft Settings dialog box.
Loft Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting Controls the contour of a lofted surface at its cross sections. Also allows you to close the surface or solid.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Ruled Specifies that the solid or surface is ruled (straight) between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS system variable) Smooth Fit Specifies that a smooth solid or surface is drawn between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the start and end cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS system variable) Start Continuity Sets the tangency and curvature of the first cross section.
surface. 0 is defined as outward from the plane of the curve. (LOFTNORMALS system variable) The following illustration shows the affect of using a different draft angle for the first and last cross sections of a lofted solid. The first cross section is assigned a draft angle of 45 degrees, while the last cross section is assigned a draft angle of 135 degrees. You can also use the draft angle handle to adjust the draft angle (triangular grip) and magnitude (circular grip).
Start Angle Specifies the draft angle for the start cross section. (LOFTANG1 system variable) Start Magnitude Controls the relative distance of the surface from the start cross section in the direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the next cross section. (LOFTMAG1 system variable) End Angle Specifies the draft angle for the end cross section.
Closes the text window log file opened by LOGFILEON. Summary The program stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file. You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS on page 1314 command. Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab on page 1326 in the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab on page 1316 to change the location of the log file. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .
LTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Linetype Scale Sets the global linetype scale factor. Access Methods Command entry: 'ltscale for transparent use Summary Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing. Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to be regenerated. LWEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Lineweights Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click LWT on the status bar and choose Settings. Command entry: 'lweight for transparent use Summary The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed. If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Lineweight Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click LWT on the status bar and choose Settings. Command entry: lweight (or 'lweight for transparent use) Summary For a table of valid lineweights, see “Overview of Lineweights” in the User's Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Lineweights Displays the available lineweight values.
Display Lineweight Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If this option is selected, lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space. You can also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable. Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more than one pixel. Clear Display Lineweight if performance slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing. This option does not affect how objects are plotted.
The current lineweight value is displayed; if the value is not BYLAYER, BYBLOCK or DEFAULT, the value is displayed in millimeters or inches. Default Lineweight Sets the current default lineweight. Lineweight values consist of fixed settings, including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. Values are calculated in either inches or millimeters; millimeters are the default. If you enter a valid lineweight value, the current default lineweight is set to the new value.
1066
M Commands 13 MARKUP Quick Reference See also: ■ View Markups Opens the Markup Set Manager. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Markup Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager Summary When submitting designs for review, you can publish a drawing as a DWF or DWFx file. The reviewer can open the file in Autodesk Design Review, mark it up, and then send the file back to you. Opens the Markup Set Manager.
Markup Set Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ View Markups Displays information about loaded markup sets and their status. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Markup Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Markup Set Manager Command entry: markup Summary You can show or hide markups and their originating drawing files in your drawing area. You can change the status of individual markups and add notes and comments to them.
markups. When you click Open, the markups in the selected DWF or DWFx file are loaded into the Markup Set Manager. NOTE When opening a digitally signed DWFx file, a message box is displayed that warns you about saving a new version of the file will invalidate the attached digital signature. Republish Markup DWF Provides options for republishing the marked-up DWF or DWFx file.
Indicates an individual markup that does not yet have an assigned status. This is the default status for new markups. Question Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of Question. When you open and view a markup, you can change the status to Question if you need additional information about the markup. For Review Indicates an individual markup that has an assigned status of For Review.
Republish Markup Sheets Opens the Specify DWF File dialog box. Use this dialog box to overwrite the previously published DWF or DWFx files, or create a DWF or DWFx file. The DWF or DWFx file created contains changes you make to the drawing file geometry and the status of the markups. Markup Shortcut Menu Options (Markup Node) Right-clicking an individual markup node in the Markups area displays the following shortcut menu options.
Show All Sheets/Hide Non-Markup Sheets Displays all sheets in the marked-up DWF or DWFx file in the tree view of the Markup Set Manager, or hides the sheets that do not have associated markups. Markup Details Provides information about the currently selected node (markup set, drawing sheet, or individual markup) in the Markups area. When an individual markup is selected in the Markups area, Markup Details displays the status of the markup.
Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor Markup Set Manager. If this option is selected, a window can be docked when you drag it over a docking area at the side of a drawing. A docked window adheres to the side of the application window and causes the drawing area to be resized. Selecting this option also makes Anchor Right and Anchor Left available. Anchor Right/ Anchor Left Attaches the Markup Set Manager to an anchor tab base at the right or left side of the drawing area.
MASSPROP Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties Toolbar: Inquiry Summary Refer to the Help system for a complete list of definitions for each of the region or mass properties computed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Mass properties for all regions Mass property Description Perimeter The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. The perimeter of a solid is not calculated. Bounding box The two coordinates that define the bounding box. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system, the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a rectangle that encloses the region.
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Mass property Description Principal moments and X,Y,Z directions about centroid Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that also passes through the centroid.
Mass properties for solids Mass property Description Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units. Principal moments and X,Y,Z directions about centroid Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that also passes through the centroid.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials Browser Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser Toolbar: Render Summary This command closes the Materials Browser on page 1079. MATBROWSEROPEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Browse Material Libraries Opens the Materials Browser. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials Browser Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser Toolbar: Render Summary The Materials Browser on page 1079 is displayed.
Materials Browser Quick Reference See also: ■ Browse Material Libraries The Materials Browser allows you to navigate and manage your materials. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials Browser Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser Toolbar: Render Summary You can also manage your material libraries in the Materials Browser. It also allows you search and sort materials in all open libraries and in the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
View Controls the details view display of the library content. Swatch Size Adjusts the size of the swatches. Material Editor Displays the Materials Editor on page 1086. MATCHCELL Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells. Access Methods Shortcut menu: With a table selected and a cell selected, right-click and click Match Cell.
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Match Properties Menu: Modify ➤ Match Properties Toolbar: Standard Command entry: painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use) Summary The types of properties that can be applied include color, layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, transparency, and other specified properties. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Match Properties Menu: Modify ➤ Match Properties Toolbar: Standard Command entry: matchprop or painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use) Summary Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source object to the destination objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Basic Properties Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects.
Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Linetype Scale Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports.
not transferred to the destination polyline. If the source polyline has variable width, the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline. Material In addition to basic object properties, changes the material applied to the object. If the source object does not have a material assigned and the destination object does, the material is removed from the destination object.
MATEDITORCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Materials Closes the Materials Editor. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Editor Toolbar: Render ➤ Materials Editor Summary This command closes the Materials Editor on page 1086. MATEDITOROPEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Materials Opens the Materials Editor.
Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Editor Toolbar: Render ➤ Materials Editor Summary The Materials Editor on page 1086 is displayed. Materials Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Create New Materials Edits the material selected in the Materials in This Document panel.
Name Specifies the name of the material. Create Creates or duplicates the material. Show Materials Browser Displays the Materials Browser on page 1079. Information Tab Contrains all controls for editing and viewing the keyword information of a material. Information Specifies the general description of the material. ■ Description. Provides the descriptive information of the material appearance. ■ Keywords. Provides keywords or tags of the material appearance.
Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Editor Toolbar: Render ➤ Materials Editor Summary The Texture Editor allows you to modify texture properties. In the Materials Editor on page 1086, click the image or procedural-based texture to display the Texture Editor. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Any changes in a texture are reflected in the interactive swatch preview right away. You can enlarge or reduce the size of the preview area.
Tile causes the map to be tiled within the material. Mirror causes the map to be tiled, but each tile is a mirror of the adjacent one. None specifies no modifications to the map pattern. Map Property Settings Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Map Properties The map property settings displayed on the Texture Editor depend on the selected map type.
■ Wood Checker Property Settings Quick Reference See also: ■ Checker Controls the property settings for the Checker procedural map. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color 1 Provides the option of selecting a color for one of the checkers. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box. Color 2 Provides the option of selecting a color for the other checker. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box.
Gradient Property Settings Quick Reference See also: ■ Gradient Controls the property settings for the Gradient procedural map. List of Options The following options are displayed. Gradient Type Specifies the type of shade from one color to another. These affect the entire gradient. ■ 4 Corner. An asymmetrical linear transition of colors. ■ Box. A box. ■ Diagonal. A linear diagonal transition of colors. ■ Lighting. Based on the light intensity value. No light=far left; brightest light=far right.
Gradient Interpolation Specifies the type of calculation for the intermediate values. These affect the entire gradient. ■ Custom. Sets an individual interpolation type for each node. Under Current Node select the interpolation type. ■ Ease In. Weighted more toward the next node than the current node. ■ Ease In Out. Weighted more toward the current node than the next node. ■ Ease Out. Weighted more toward the previous node than the next node. ■ Linear. Constant from one node to the next. (Default.
Marble Property Settings Quick Reference See also: ■ Marble Controls the property settings for the Marble procedural map. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color 1 Specifies the color of the stone. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box. Color 2 Specifies the vein color of the marble. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box. Size Sets the space between veins. Range = 0-100; Default = 1.00. Vein Width Sets the width of the veins.
Type Creates random perturbation of a surface based on the interaction of two colors. ■ Regular. Generates plain noise. Basically the same as fractal noise with levels setting at 1. When the noise type is set to Regular, the Levels spinner is inactive (because Regular is not a fractal function). ■ Fractal. Generates noise using a fractal algorithm. The Levels option sets the number of iterations for fractal noise. ■ Turbulence.
Speckle Property Settings Quick Reference See also: ■ Speckle Controls the property settings for the Speckle procedural map. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color 1 Provides the option of selecting a color for the speckle. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box. Color 2 Provides the option of selecting a second color for speckle. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box. Size Adjusts the size of the speckles.
Color Provides the option of selecting a color for the tile. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box. Horizontal Count Controls the number of tiles in a row. Default = 4. Vertical Count Controls the number of tiles in a column. Default = 4. Color Variance Controls the color variation of the tiles. Default = 0.05. Fade Variance Controls the fading variation of the tiles. UV Scaling Specifies the horizontal and vertical scaling for procedural maps on materials.
UVW Tiling Adjusts the tiling of the map along the UVW axes. Wood Property Settings Quick Reference See also: ■ Wood Controls the property settings for the Wood procedural map. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color 1 Provides the option of selecting a color for the wood. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box. Color 2 Provides the option of selecting a second color for the wood. Click the color box to display the Select Color dialog box.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Editor Toolbar: Render ➤ Materials Editor Summary Nested maps within a parent map or material can be selected. The Nested Map Navigation provides lists and buttons to control the current level of the nested maps. List of Options The following options are displayed. Home to Material Settings Returns the display of nested map property settings back to the current basic material settings.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Editor ➤ Materials Editor Summary The properties displayed here are described in the Material Editor. A few properties, such as swatch geometry and checkered underlay, are not available in the Material Tool Property Editor. When you edit a material tool, only the tool itself is affected.
MATERIALATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Materials to Objects and Faces Associates materials with layers. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Attach By Layer Summary The Material Attachment Options dialog box is displayed. Material Attachment Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Materials to Objects and Faces Associates materials with layers.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Attach By Layer Summary All objects on the layer that have their Material property set to BYLAYER have the specified material applied. List of Options The following options are displayed. Materials List Lists all the materials in the drawing, both in use and not in use. Drag a material onto a layer in the Layers List to apply the material to that layer.
next to the layer. Use the Detach button to remove the material from the layer. NOTE If you change the association of a material to a layer in an xref, the change is not saved back to the xref drawing. MATERIALMAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Mapping On Objects and Faces Displays a material mapping gizmo to adjust the mapping on a face or an object.
Move Displays the Move grip tool to move the map. Rotate Displays the Rotate grip tool to rotate the map. Fit to Object Scales the Mapping Gizmo to the object's size Reset Resets the UV coordinates to the default for the map. Switch Mapping Mode Re-displays the main command prompt of options.
■ Move on page 1103 ■ Rotate on page 1103 ■ Fit to Object on page 1103 ■ Reset on page 1103 ■ Switch Mapping Mode on page 1103 Cylindrical For example: 1104 | Chapter 13 M Commands
■ Move on page 1103 ■ Rotate on page 1103 ■ Fit to Object on page 1103 ■ Reset on page 1103 ■ Switch Mapping Mode on page 1103 Spherical For example: MATERIALMAP | 1105
■ Move on page 1103 ■ Rotate on page 1103 ■ Fit to Object on page 1103 ■ Reset on page 1103 ■ Switch Mapping Mode on page 1103 Copy Mapping To Applies mapping from the original object or face to the selected objects. This easily duplicates a texture map along with any adjustments to other objects. Reset Mapping Resets the UV coordinates to the default for the map.
Opens the Materials Browser. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Materials panel ➤ Materials Browser Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser Toolbar: Render Summary The Materials Browser is displayed. The Materials Browser allows you navigate and manage your materials. You can organize, sort, search, and select materials for use in your drawing. MATERIALSCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Materials Closes the Materials Browser.
Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Measure Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Measure Summary The resulting points or blocks are always located on the selected object and their orientation is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. Use DDPTYPE to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing.
Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle. If the snap rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of the circle starts to the right of center, on its circumference. The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit distances along a polyline, with the PDMODE on page 2446 system variable set to 35. Block Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected object. Align Block With Object ■ Yes.
MEASUREGEOM Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Distance Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance Toolbar: Inquiry Summary The MEASUREGEOM command performs many of the same calculations as the following commands: ■ AREA ■ DIST ■ MASSPROP List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Distance Measures the distance between specified points. The following display at the Command prompt and in the tooltip: ■ The current UCS X axis ■ Distance in X direction (Delta X) ■ Distance in Y direction (Delta Y) Multiple Points A running total of distance based on existing line segments and the current rubber-band line is calculated. The total updates as you move the cursor and displays in the tooltip. If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines display.
Subtract Area Subtracts a specified area from the total area. The total area and perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip. Volume Measures the volume of an object or a defined area. Object Measures the volume of an object or defined area. You can select a 3D solids or 2D objects. If you select a 2D object you must specify a height for that object. If you define an object by specifying points, you must specify at least three points to define a polygon.
Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option. Direction Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. ■ Endpoint of Arc on page 1455 Half width Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges. The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width.
MENU Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand User Interface Customization Loads a customization file. Summary The Select Customization File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter or select a customization file name. A customization file is an XML-based file containing the menus, toolbars, workspaces, and other interface elements that you can customize. You can create a customized menu file and use MENU or CUI to load the file.
Ribbon: Mesh tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Box Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Primitives Toolbar: Smooth Mesh Primitives, Smooth Mesh Summary The basic mesh forms, known as mesh primitives, are the equivalent of the primitive forms for 3D solids. You can reshape mesh objects by smoothing, creasing, refining, and splitting faces. You can also drag edges, faces, and vertices to mold the overall form. NOTE By default, new mesh primitives are created with no smoothness.
First corner / Corner Sets the first corner of the mesh box. ■ Other corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box. ■ Cube ■ Length Center Sets the center of the mesh box. ■ Corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box. ■ Cube ■ Length Cube Sets all edges of the box to be of equal length. ■ Length Length Sets the length of the mesh box along the X axis. ■ Width (not available for cubes) Width Sets the width of the mesh box along the Y axis.
Specify the diameter and height. Center point of base Sets the center point of the base of the mesh cone. ■ Base radius ■ Diameter 3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh cone by specifying three points: ■ First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh cone base. ■ Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh cone base. ■ Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh cone base.
2P (diameter) Defines the base diameter of the mesh cone based on two points: ■ First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first location on the circumference of the mesh cone base. ■ Second endpoint of diameter. Determines the general location and size of the mesh cone base by setting the endpoint of the diameter.
■ Center. Specifies the method for creating an elliptical mesh cone base that starts with the center point of the base: ■ Center point. Sets the center of the mesh cone base. ■ Distance to first axis. Sets the radius of the first axis. ■ Endpoint of second axis. Sets the endpoint of the second axis. Base radius Sets the radius of the mesh cone base. ■ Height ■ 2Point (height) ■ Axis endpoint ■ Top radius Diameter Sets the diameter for the base of the cone.
Cylinder Creates a 3D mesh cylinder. Specify the size of the base and height. Center point of base Sets the center point of the mesh cylinder base. ■ Base Radius ■ Diameter 3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh cylinder by specifying three points: ■ First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh cylinder base. ■ Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh cylinder base. ■ Third point.
2P (diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh cylinder base by specifying two points: ■ First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point on the diameter of the mesh cylinder base. ■ Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the second point on the diameter of the mesh cylinder base. ■ Height ■ 2Point (height) ■ Axis endpoint 2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cylinder by specifying the distance between two points: ■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. ■ Second point.
Diameter Sets the diameter for the base of the cylinder. ■ Height ■ 2Point (height) ■ Axis endpoint Height Sets the height of the mesh cylinder along an axis that is perpendicular to the plane of the base. Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top face of the cylinder. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space. Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cylinder. ■ ■ Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh cone base.
Specify the diameter and height. Center point of base Sets the center point of the mesh pyramid base. ■ Base radius ■ Inscribed Edge Sets the length of the one edge of the mesh pyramid base, as indicated by two points that you specify: ■ First endpoint of edge. Sets the first location of the edge of the mesh pyramid. ■ Second endpoint of edge. Sets the second location of the edge of the mesh pyramid.
■ Edge ■ Sides. Resets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. Base radius Sets the radius of the mesh pyramid base. ■ Height ■ 2Point (height) ■ Axis endpoint ■ Top radius Inscribed Specifies that the base of the mesh pyramid is inscribed, or drawn within, the base radius. ■ Base radius ■ Circumscribed Height Sets the height of the mesh pyramid along an axis that is perpendicular to the plane of the base.
Sphere Creates a 3D mesh sphere. Specify the size of the sphere (diameter or radius). Center point Sets the center point of the sphere. ■ Radius. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified radius. ■ Diameter. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified diameter. 3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh sphere by specifying three points: ■ First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh sphere. ■ Second point.
Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines a mesh sphere with a specified radius that is tangent to two objects: ■ Point on object for first tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve as the first tangent point. ■ Point on object for second tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve as the second tangent point. ■ Radius of circle. Sets the radius of the mesh sphere. If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used. Wedge Creates a 3D mesh wedge.
■ Length Center Sets the center point of the mesh wedge base. ■ Corner. Sets one corner of the mesh wedge base. ■ Height ■ 2Point (height) ■ Cube ■ Length Cube Sets all edges of the mesh wedge base to be of equal length. ■ Length Length Sets the length of the mesh wedge base along the X axis. ■ Width (not available for Cube) Width Sets the width of the mesh box along the Y axis. ■ Height ■ 2Point (height) Height Sets the height of the mesh wedge.
Specify two values: the size of the tube and the distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube. Center point Sets the center point of the mesh torus. ■ Radius (torus) ■ Diameter (torus) 3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and rotation of the mesh torus by specifying three points. The path of the tube passes through the specified points: ■ First point. Sets the first point on the path of the tube. ■ Second point. Sets the second point on the path of the tube. ■ Third point.
2P (torus diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh torus by specifying two points. The diameter is calculated from the center point of the torus to the center point of the tube. ■ First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point used to specify the torus diameter distance. ■ Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the second point used to specify the torus diameter distance.
Tube radius Sets the radius of the profile that is swept around the mesh torus path. 2Point (tube radius) Sets the radius of the profile of the tube based on the distance between two points that you specify: ■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. ■ Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance. Tube diameter Sets the diameter of the profile of the mesh torus tube. Settings Modifies the smoothness and tessellation values for the new mesh object.
Smooth Panel Smooth More (MESHSMOOTHMORE) Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. Smooth Less (MESHSMOOTHLESS) Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. Refine Mesh (MESHREFINE) Multiplies the number of faces in selected mesh objects or faces. Convert Mesh Panel Convert to Solid (CONVTOSOLID) Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids. Convert to Surface (CONVTOSURFACE) Converts objects to 3D surfaces.
Mesh Subobject Ribbon Contextual Panels Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Mesh Objects Provides ribbon access to commonly used tools when a mesh subobject is selected. Access Methods Pointing device: Select a mesh face, edge, or vertex. Crease Panel Add Crease (MESHCREASE) Sharpens the edges of selected mesh subobjects. Remove Crease (MESHUNCREASE) Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices. Edit Face Panel Split Face (MESHSPLIT) Splits a mesh face into two faces.
Refine Mesh (MESHREFINE) Multiplies the number of faces in selected mesh objects or faces. MESHCAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Close Mesh Gaps Creates a mesh face that connects open edges. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Close Hole Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Close Hole Summary You can close gaps in mesh objects by selecting the edges of the surrounding mesh faces. For best results, the faces should be on the same plane.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select connecting mesh edges to create a new mesh face Specifies which mesh edges form the boundary for the closure. Click the edges to select them. MESHCOLLAPSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Mesh Faces Merges the vertices of selected mesh faces or edges.
Summary You can cause the vertices of surrounding mesh faces to converge at the center of a selected edge or face. The shapes of surrounding faces change to accommodate the loss of one or more vertices. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select mesh face or edge to collapse Specifies a mesh edge or a face whose midpoint becomes the point of convergence for the surrounding faces. Click a single mesh edge or face.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Mesh tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Add Crease Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Crease Toolbar: Smooth Mesh Summary You can sharpen, or crease, the edges of mesh objects. Creasing deforms mesh faces and edges that are adjacent to the selected subobject. Creases added to mesh that has no smoothness are not apparent until the mesh is smoothed. You can also apply creases to mesh subobjects by changing the crease type and crease level in the Properties palette.
Select mesh subobjects to crease Specifies the mesh subobjects to crease. Click mesh faces, edges, and vertices to crease their associated edges. Press Shift+click to remove a subobject from the selection set. ■ Crease value ■ Always Crease value Sets highest smoothing level at which the crease is retained. If the smoothing level exceeds this value, the crease is also smoothed. Enter a value of 0 to remove an existing crease.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Mesh face(s) to extrude Specifies the mesh faces to extrude. Click one or more faces to select them. ■ Height of extrusion ■ Direction ■ Path ■ Taper angle Setting (Available only when you start the command before selecting faces) Sets the style for extruding multiple adjacent mesh faces. ■ Join adjacent mesh faces when extruding Specifies whether adjacent mesh faces are extruded singly or as a unit.
■ No. Extrudes each adjacent face separately. Height of extrusion Extrudes mesh faces along the Z axis. Enter a positive value to extrude the face along the positive Z axis. Enter a negative value to extrude along the negative Z axis. Multiple mesh faces do not need to be parallel to the same plane. Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion. (The direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the sweep curve created by the extrusion.) ■ Start point of direction.
The path should not lie on the same plane as the mesh face or have areas of high curvature. For extrusions that adhere closely to the curved path, use a spline, not an arced polyline, as the path. Taper angle Sets an angle of taper for an extrusion. Positive angles taper inward from the base mesh face. Negative angles taper outward. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to the plane of the mesh.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Merge Face Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Merge Face Summary You can merge two or more adjacent mesh faces to form a single face. The merge operation is performed only on mesh faces that are adjacent. Other types of subobjects are removed from the selection set. Merging mesh faces that wrap a corner can have unintended results when you try to edit the mesh or convert it to other types of solid objects.
MESHOPTIONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Meshes by Conversion Displays the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box, which controls default settings for converting existing objects to mesh objects. Access Methods Bu o tn Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Mesh Tessellation Options Summary The Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box is displayed. Mesh Tessellation Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Meshes by Conversion Controls default settings for converting objects to mesh objects.
Access Methods Bu o tn Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ ➤ Mesh Tessellation Options Command entry: meshoptions Summary The defaults that you set in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box control the appearance of objects that you convert to 3D mesh objects. For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see the MESHSMOOTH command. This dialog box is also available from the Options dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Mesh Type and Tolerance Specifies the default properties of objects that are converted to 3D mesh objects. Settings that increase the number of mesh faces can slow program performance. Mesh Type Specifies the type of mesh to be used in the conversion. (FACETERMESHTYPE system variable) ■ Smooth Mesh Optimized. Sets the shape of the mesh faces to adapt to the shape of the mesh object. ■ Mostly Quads. Sets the shape of the mesh faces to be mostly quadrilateral. ■ Triangles.
■ Greater than 0 but less than 1. Sets the maximum ratio by which the width can exceed the height. This option does not affect faces that are planar before conversion. Maximum Edge Length for New Faces Sets the maximum length of any edge that is created during a conversion to a mesh object. (FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH system variable) With the default value 0 (zero), the size of the model determines the size of the mesh faces.
Sets the level of smoothness for new mesh objects. (FACETERSMOOTHLEV system variable) Enter 0 to eliminate smoothness. Enter a positive integer for increased degrees of smoothness. This option is available only when Apply Smoothness After Tessellation is selected. Preview Displays the effect of the current settings in the drawing area. Press Enter to accept the changes. To display the dialog box again, press Esc.
Sets the tessellation defaults for primitive mesh objects. Access Methods Ribbon: Mesh tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Command entry: meshprimitiveoptions ➤ Mesh Primitive Options Summary The defaults you set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box control the appearance of new mesh primitive objects. Mesh primitives include boxes, cones, pyramids, cylinders, spheres, wedges, and tori. This dialog box is also available from the Options and Mesh Tessellation Options dialog boxes.
For each selected mesh primitive type, sets the default number of divisions for each side. Enter a new value to reset the number of divisions for new mesh primitives. ■ Box Length. Sets the number of divisions for the length of a mesh box along the X axis. (DIVMESHBOXLENGTH system variable) Width. Sets the number of divisions for the width of a mesh box along the Y axis. (DIVMESHBOXWIDTH system variable) Height. Sets the number of divisions for the height of a mesh box along the Z axis.
■ Cone Axis. Sets the number of divisions around the perimeter of the mesh cone base. (DIVMESHCONEAXIS system variable) Height. Sets the number of divisions between the base and the point or top of the mesh cone. (DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT system variable) Base. Sets the number of divisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh cone base.
■ Cylinder Axis. Sets the number of divisions around the perimeter of the mesh cylinder base. (DIVMESHCYLAXIS system variable) Height. Sets the number of divisions between the base and the top of the mesh cylinder.
Base. Sets the number of divisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh cylinder base. (DIVMESHCYLBASE system variable) ■ Pyramid Length. Sets the number of divisions for the sides of the mesh pyramid base. (DIVMESHPYRLENGTH system variable) Height. Sets the number of divisions between the base and the top of the mesh pyramid.
Base. Sets the number of divisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh pyramid base. (DIVMESHPYRBASE system variable) ■ Sphere Axis. Sets the number of radial divisions around the axis endpoint of the mesh sphere. (DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS system variable) Height. Sets the number of divisions between the two axis endpoints of the mesh sphere.
Length. Sets the number of divisions for the length of a mesh wedge along the X axis. (DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH system variable) Width. Sets the number of divisions for the width of the mesh wedge along the Y axis. (DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH system variable) Height. Sets the number of divisions for the height of the mesh wedge along the Z axis.
Slope. Sets the number of divisions in the slope that extends from the apex of the wedge to the edge of the base. (DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE system variable) Base. Sets the number of divisions between the midpoint of the perimeter of the triangular side of the mesh wedge. (DIVMESHWEDGEBASE system variable) ■ Torus Radius. Sets the number of divisions around the circumference of the profile that forms the tube of the torus.
Sweep Path. Sets the number of divisions around the circumference of the path that is swept by the profile. (DIVMESHTORUSPATH system variable) Preview Displays different views of the changes you make. Zoom Extents button Sets the preview display so that the image fits entirely within the Preview window. Pan button Moves the image horizontally and vertically within the Preview window. You can also pan by holding down the scroll wheel of your mouse as you move the mouse.
Preview Shortcut Menu Displays the following options on a shortcut menu when you right-click the preview image: ■ Zoom Extents. Sets the preview display so that the image fits entirely within the Preview window. ■ Pan. Moves the image horizontally and vertically within the Preview window. ■ Zoom. Changes the magnification of the Preview image. ■ Visual Styles. Sets the preview display in the dialog box to reflect the selected visual style. Preview Update Sets how often the preview image is updated.
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Refine Mesh Toolbar: Smooth Mesh Summary Refining a mesh object increases the number of editable faces, providing additional control over fine modeling details. To preserve program memory, you can refine specific faces instead of the entire object. Refining an object resets the smoothing level that was assigned to the object to 0 (zero). This level of smoothness becomes the new baseline for the object.
Summary Take advantage of the detailed modeling capabilities of 3D mesh by converting objects such as 3D solids and surfaces to mesh. Use this method to convert 3D faces (3DFACE) and legacy polygonal and polyface meshes (from AutoCAD LT 2009 and earlier). You can also convert 2D objects such as regions and closed polylines. The default mesh settings are defined in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. The level of smoothness upon conversion depends on the mesh type setting in this dialog box.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth Less Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Smooth Less Toolbar: Smooth Mesh Summary Decrease the smoothness of selected mesh objects by one level. You can only decrease the smoothness of objects whose level of smoothness is 1 or higher. You cannot decrease the smoothness level of objects that have been refined. You can decrease the smoothness of multiple objects.
MESHSMOOTHMORE Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Mesh Smoothness Levels Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Mesh panel ➤ Smooth More Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Smooth More Toolbar: Smooth Mesh Summary Smoothing increases the number of facets in the mesh, resulting in a rounder object.
Facets are the underlying components of each mesh face. You can increase the smoothness level up to the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV as long as the number of faces does not exceed the value in the SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE system variable. If you select multiple objects with differing levels of smoothness, their respective levels are increased by one. You can only smooth mesh objects. However, you have the option of converting some types of objects to mesh during the smoothing operation.
NOTE You can use MESHSPLIT to divide a rectangular face into two triangular faces. If you plan to spin the edge between the triangular faces, use the Vertex option to ensure that the split extends precisely from one vertex to the other. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First triangular mesh face to spin Specifies one of two faces to be modified. Click a triangular mesh face. Second adjacent triangular mesh face to spin Specifies the second of two faces to be modified.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Mesh tab ➤ Mesh Edit panel ➤ Split Mesh Face Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Split Face Summary Split a face to add more definition to an area without having to refine it. Because you specify the start and endpoint of the split, this method provides greater control over the location of the split. For more precision in the placement of the split, you can specify that the split starts or ends at a vertex.
Face to split In the drawing area, specifies which mesh face to split. ■ First split point on face edge. Sets the location on an edge of the mesh face to start the split. ■ Second split point on face edge. Sets a second location on an edge of the mesh face to define the path of the split. ■ Vertex Vertex Limits the first endpoint of the split to a mesh vertex. ■ First vertex for the split. Specifies a vertex on a mesh face. ■ Second split point on face edge.
Toolbar: Smooth Mesh Summary Restore smoothness to an edge that has been creased. You can also remove a selected crease in the Crease area of Properties palette by changing the Type value to None. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed: Select crease to remove Specifies which creased edges to smooth. You do not need to press Ctrl to select a creased subobject.
MINSERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array. Summary Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options, respond to the prompts by specifying a distance for the scale options or an angle for rotation. Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded.
Number of Rows/Columns Specifies the number of rows and columns in the array. Distance Between Rows Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. You can use the pointing device to specify the distance between rows, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns. Distance Between Columns Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point and the opposite corner.
■ Distance Between Rows on page 1167 ■ Distance Between Columns on page 1167 X Sets the X scale factor. ■ Specify Rotation Angle on page 1166 ■ Number of Rows/Columns on page 1167 ■ Distance Between Rows on page 1167 ■ Distance Between Columns on page 1167 Y Sets the Y scale factor. ■ Specify Rotation Angle on page 1166 ■ Number of Rows/Columns on page 1167 ■ Distance Between Rows on page 1167 ■ Distance Between Columns on page 1167 Z Sets the Z scale factor.
■ Corner on page 1167 ■ XYZ on page 1167 Preview Scale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. ■ X Scale Factor on page 1166 ■ Corner on page 1167 ■ XYZ on page 1167 Preview X Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.
Preview Rotate Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position. ■ X Scale Factor on page 1166 ■ Corner on page 1167 ■ XYZ on page 1167 MIRROR Quick Reference See also: ■ Mirror Objects Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror Menu: Modify ➤ Mirror Toolbar: Modify Summary You can create objects that represent half of a drawing, select them, and mirror them across a specified line to create the other half.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter to finish Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are mirrored. For mirroring in 3D, this line defines a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line.
MIRROR3D Quick Reference See also: ■ Mirror Objects Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects across a mirroring plane. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ 3D Mirror Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Mirror Summary It is recommended that you use the gizmos available through the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, and 3DSCALE commands to manipulate 3D objects. For more information about using gizmos, see Use Gizmos to Modify Objects.
Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the mirroring plane. Delete Source Objects If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press Enter, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained. Last Mirrors the selected objects about the last defined mirroring plane. Z Axis Defines the mirroring plane by a point on the plane and a point normal to the plane.
3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. If you select this option by specifying a point, the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt is not displayed. MLEADER Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Leaders Creates a multileader object.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multileader Menu: Dimension ➤ Multileader Toolbar: Multileader Summary A multileader object typically consists of an arrowhead, a horizontal landing, a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or a block. Multileaders can be created arrowhead first, leader landing first, or content first. If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that specified style.
If you choose End at this point, then no landing line is associated with the multileader object. Options Specifies options for placing the multileader object. Leader Type Specifies a straight, spline, or no leader line. ■ Straight. ■ Spline. ■ None. Leader Landing Changes the distance of the horizontal landing line ■ Yes. ■ No. If you choose No at this point, then no landing line is associated with the multileader object.
First Angle Constrains the angle of the first point in the new leader line. ■ Enter first angle constraint. ■ None. Second Angle Constrains the second angle in the new leader line. ■ Enter second angle constraint. ■ None. MLEADERALIGN Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Leaders Aligns and spaces selected multileader objects.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select multileader to align to or [Options] Options Specifies options for aligning and spacing the selected multileaders. Distribute Spaces content evenly between two selected points. Make Leader Segments Parallel Places content so that each of the last leader segments in the selected multileaders are parallel. Specify Spacing Specifies spacing between the extents of the content of selected multileaders.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Collect Toolbar: Multileader Summary After you select multileaders, you can specify their placement. For example: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify collected multileader location on page 1179 or [Vertical on page 1179/Horizontal on page 1179/Wrap on page 1179] Specify Collected Multileader Location Specifies the point for placing the multileader collection in the upper-left corner of the collection.
Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Multileaders panel ➤ Add Leader Toolbar: Multileader List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify leader arrowhead location on page 1180 or [Remove Leader on page 1180] Add Leader Adds a leader line to a selected multileader object. The new leader line is added to the left or right of the selected multileader, depending on the location of the cursor.
MLEADERSTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Leader Styles Creates and modifies multileader styles. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Leaders panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Toolbar: Multileader, Styles ➤ Multileader Style Summary The Multileader Style Manager is displayed.
Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Leaders panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Toolbar: Multileader Toolbar: Styles Command entry: mleaderstyle ➤ Multileader Style Summary Sets the current multileader style and creates, modifies, and deletes multileader styles. The appearance of multileaders is controlled by multileader styles. These styles specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content. List of Options The following options are displayed.
List Controls the contents of the Styles list. Click All Styles to display all multileader styles available in the drawing. Click Styles In Use to display only the multileader styles that are referenced by multileaders in the current drawing. Preview Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list. Set Current Sets the multileader style selected in the Styles list as the current style. All new multileaders are created using this multileader style.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Leaders panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Toolbar: Multileader Toolbar: Styles Command entry: mleaderstyle ➤ Multileader Style Summary Controls the general appearance of the multileader. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview image of the style being modified. Learn About Multiline Styles Click the link or information icon to learn more about multileaders and multileader styles.
List of Tabs The following tabs are displayed. ■ Leader Format Tab on page 1185 ■ Leader Structure Tab on page 1186 ■ Content Tab on page 1187 Leader Format Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Leader Styles General Controls the general settings of the arrowheads. Type Determines the type of leader line. You can choose a straight leader, a spline, or no leader line. Color Determines the color of the leader line. Linetype Determines the linetype of the leader line.
Leader Break Controls the settings used when adding a dimension break to a multileader. Break Size Displays and sets the break size used for the DIMBREAK command when the multileader is selected. Leader Structure Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Leader Styles Constraints Controls the constraints of the multileader. Maximum Leader Points Specifies a maximum number of points for the leader line. First Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the first point in the leader line.
Specifies that the multileader is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Scale Multileaders to Layout Determines a scaling factor for the multileader based on the scaling in the model space and paper space viewports. This option is available when the multileader is not annotative. Specify Scale Specifies the scale for the multileader. This option is available when the multileader is not annotative.
Text Color Specifies the color of the multileader text. Text Height Specifies the height of the multileader text. Always Left Justify Specifies that the multileader text is always left justified. Frame Text Check Box Frames the multileader text content with a text box. Mtext: Leader Connection Controls the leader connection settings of the multileader. Horizontal Attachment Inserts the leader to the left or right of the text content.
Block: Block Options Controls the properties of block content in a multileader object. Source block Specifies the block used for multileader content. Attachment Specifies the way the block is attached to the multileader object. You can attach the block by specifying the insertion point of the block or the center point of the block. Color Specifies the color of the multileader block content.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Leaders panel ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Toolbar: Multileader, Styles ➤ Multileader Style List of Options The following options are displayed. New Style Name Names the new multileader style. Start With Specifies an existing multileader style whose settings are the default for the new multileader style. Annotative Specifies that the multileader object is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects.
Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multiline Summary The Multiline Edit Tools dialog box is displayed. If you enter -mledit at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Multilines Modifies multiline objects.
Summary The dialog box displays tools with sample images in four columns. The first column controls multilines that cross, the second controls multilines that form a tee, the third controls corner joints and vertices, and the fourth controls breaks in multilines. List of Options The following options are displayed. Closed Cross Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines.
■ First Mline on page 1192 Undo Undoes the open-cross intersection. ■ First Mline on page 1192 Merged Cross Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines. The order in which you select the multilines is not important. ■ Select First Mline on page 1192 ■ Select Second Mline on page 1192 ■ First Mline on page 1192 ■ Undo on page 1193 Closed Tee Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines.
■ Select First Mline on page 1192 ■ Select Second Mline on page 1192 ■ First Mline on page 1192 ■ Undo on page 1193 Open Tee Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline.
Merged Tee Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines.The multiline is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the other multiline. ■ Select First Mline on page 1192 ■ Select Second Mline on page 1192 ■ First Mline on page 1192 ■ Undo on page 1193 Corner Joint Creates a corner joint between multilines. The multilines are trimmed or extended to their intersection.
■ First Mline on page 1192 ■ Undo on page 1193 Add Vertex Adds a vertex to a multiline. Select Mline Select a multiline Mline Edits another multiline. The Select Mline prompt is displayed again. ■ Undo on page 1193 Delete Vertex Deletes a vertex from a multiline.
Select Mline The vertex nearest to the selected point is deleted. ■ Mline on page 1196 ■ Undo on page 1193 Cut Single Creates a visual break in a selected element of a multiline. Select Mline The selection point on the multiline is used as the first cut point. Select Second Point Specify the second cut point on the multiline. ■ Mline on page 1196 ■ Undo on page 1193 Cut All Creates a visual break through the entire multiline.
■ Select Second Point on page 1197 ■ Mline on page 1196 ■ Undo on page 1193 Weld All Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut. Select Mline The selection point on the multiline is used as the start of the weld. Select Second Point. Specify the end of the weld on the multiline.
Summary For more information about the Command prompt options, see the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. CC Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines. OC Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. Breaks are inserted in all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements of the second multiline. MC Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines.
Creates multiple parallel lines. Access Methods Button Menu: Draw ➤ Multiline List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]: Specify a point or enter an option Start Point Specifies the next vertex of the multiline. If you create a multiline with two or more segments, the prompt includes the Close option. Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current multiline style and continues to prompt for points.
Justification Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify. ■ Top on page 1201 ■ Zero on page 1201 ■ Bottom on page 1201 Top Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with the most positive offset is at the specified points. Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor, so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of 0.0 is at the specified points.
multiline into a single line. For information about the multiline style definition, see MLSTYLE. Style Specifies a style to use for the multiline. See “Draw Multiline Objects” in the User's Guide, and see MLSTYLE. ■ Style Name on page 1202 ■ ? on page 1202 Style Name Specifies the name of a style that has already been loaded or that's defined in a multiline library (MLN) file you've created. ?—List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles.
Multiline Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Multilines Creates, modifies, saves, and loads multiline styles.
Summary The multiline style controls the number of elements and the properties of each element. MLSTYLE also controls the background color and the end caps of each multiline. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Multiline Style Displays the name of the current multiline style to be used for subsequently created multilines. Styles Displays a list of multiline styles that are loaded in the drawing.
Save Saves or copies a multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file. If you specify an MLN file that already exists, the new style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not erased. Create New Multiline Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Multilines Names the new multiline style and specifies the multiline style from which to start the new one.
Continue Displays the New Multiline Style dialog box. New, Modify Multiline Style Dialog Boxes Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Multilines Sets the properties and elements for a new multiline style, or changes them for an existing multiline style. Access Methods Button Menu: Format ➤ Multiline Style Command entry: mlstyle List of Options The following options are displayed.
Description Adds a description to a multiline style. Caps Controls the start and end caps of the multiline. Line Displays a line segment across each end of the multiline. Outer Arc Displays an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline. Inner Arcs Displays an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there's an odd number of elements, the center line is unconnected. For example, if there are six elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4.
Angle Specifies the angle of the end caps. Fill Controls the background fill of the multiline. Fill Color Sets the background fill color of the multiline. When you choose Select Color, the Select Color dialog box is displayed. Display Joints Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment. A joint is also known as a miter. Elements Sets element properties, such as the offset, color, and linetype, of new and existing multiline elements.
Color Displays and sets the color for elements in the multiline style. When you choose Select Color, the Select Color dialog box is displayed. Linetype Displays and sets the linetype for elements in the multiline style. When you choose Linetype, the Select Linetype Properties dialog box is displayed, which lists loaded linetypes. To load a new linetype, click Load. The Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box is displayed.
Access Methods Button Menu: Format ➤ Multiline Style Command entry: mlstyle Summary The default file name is acad.mln. If acad.mln does not exist, or if it exists but cannot be found, click File to specify another file or file location. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Displays a standard file selection dialog box in which you can locate and select another multiline library file. List Lists the multiline styles available in the current multiline library file.
For possible performance gains when you switch between layout tabs or between the Model tab and a layout tab, use the LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable to control how the display list is updated. MOVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Move Objects Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Menu: Modify ➤ Move Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Move.
The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects move 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position.
MSLIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Slides Creates a slide file of the current model viewport or the current layout. Summary The Create Slide File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter a file name or select a slide (SLD) file from the list. A slide file is a raster image of a viewport. In model space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the current viewport only.
Summary Commands operate in either model space or paper space. You use model space (the Model tab) to do drafting and design work and to create two-dimensional drawings or three-dimensional models. You use paper space (a layout tab) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting. When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace at the Command prompt to make the last viewport in the layout current, and then work in model space in that viewport within the layout.
Creates a multiline text object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Toolbar: Draw Pointing device: Double-click a multiline text object. Summary You can create several paragraphs of text as a single multiline text (mtext) object. With the built-in editor, you can format the text appearance, columns, and boundaries.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text. Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Toolbar: Draw Command entry: mtext List of Options The following options are displayed. Style Panel Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The Standard text style is active by default Annotative Turns Annotative on or off for the current mtext object. Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text.
Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. TrueType fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD LT compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Custom fonts and third-party fonts are displayed in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text. Background Mask Displays the Background Mask dialog box. (Not available for table cells.
■ Clear Paragraph Spacing: Removes line spacing settings from the selected or current paragraph. The paragraph defaults to the mtext space setting. Additional options in the Paragraph dialog box: ■ Exact: Defines the space with an arbitrary unit value the user specifies. Changing text height will not affect line spacing. ■ Multiple: Instead of assigning a value to line spacing, you specify spacing according to text height.
■ Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected items below the selected items continue the sequence. ■ Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).
that you want to use, click Copy to close the dialog box. In the editor, right-click and click Paste. Symbols are not supported in vertical text. Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box, where you can select a field to insert in the text. When the dialog box closes, the current value of the field is displayed in the text. Columns Displays the column flyout menu, which provides three column options: No Columns, Static Columns, and Dynamic columns. See Columns menu on page 1231.
Options Panel Undo Undoes actions in the Text Editor ribbon contextual tab, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Redo Redoes actions in the Text Editor ribbon contextual tab, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Ruler Displays a ruler at the top of the editor. Drag the arrows at the end of the ruler to change the width of the mtext object. Also displays height and column grips when column mode is active. You can also select tabs from the ruler.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Toolbar: Draw Command entry: mtext Summary You can import or paste text from other files to use in multiline text, set tabs, adjust paragraph and line spacing and alignment, and create and modify columns. The In-Place Text Editor includes a Text Formatting Toolbar on page 1223, a Paragraph Dialog Box on page 1229, a Columns Menu on page 1231, and an Options Menu.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Text Formatting Toolbar Controls the text style for a multiline text object and character and paragraph formatting for selected text. NOTE Text that you paste from other word processing applications such as Microsoft Word will retain most of its formatting. With the options in Paste Special, you can strip out paragraph formatting such as paragraph-based alignment or character formatting from the pasted text.
Undo Undoes actions in the In-Place Text Editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Redo Redoes actions in the In-Place Text Editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected.
Left, Center, Right, Justified and Distributed Sets the justification and alignment for the left, center, or right text boundaries of the current or selected paragraph. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included and affect the justification of a line. Line Spacing Displays suggested line spacing options or the Paragraph dialog box. Line spacing is set in the current or selected paragraph.
■ Lettered: Applies list formatting that uses letters with periods for the items in the list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the sequence continues by using double letters. ■ Numbered: Applies list formatting that uses numbers with periods for the items in the list. ■ Bulleted: Applies list formatting that uses bullets for the items in the list. ■ Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list formatting.
Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu, along with their control code or Unicode string. Click Other to display the Character Map dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system. Select a character and click Select to place it in the Characters to Copy box. When you have selected all the characters that you want to use, click Copy to close the dialog box. In the editor, right-click and click Paste. Symbols are not supported in vertical text.
Paragraph Alignment Sets alignment for the multiline text object. You can choose to align your text to the left, center, or right. You can justify your text, or align the first and last characters of your text with the margins of your mtext box, or center each line of text within the margins of your mtext box. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line. Paragraph Displays options for paragraph formatting.
Always Display As WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Controls display of the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it. When unchecked, text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. When this option is checked, the MTEXTFIXED system variable will be set to 0. Otherwise, MTEXTFIXED will be set to 2.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Toolbar: Draw Command entry: mtext Summary Specifies tab stops, indents, controls paragraph alignment, paragraph spacing, and paragraph line spacing. NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in AutoCAD 2007 and previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the User’s Guide.
Paragraph Spacing Specifies the spacing before or after the current or selected paragraphs. The distance between two paragraphs is determined by the total of the after paragraph spacing value of the upper paragraph and the before paragraph spacing value of the lower paragraph. Paragraph Line Spacing Sets the spacing between individual lines in the current or selected paragraphs. Columns Menu Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Allows you to format an mtext object into multiple columns.
To create multiple columns you always start with a single column. Depending on the column mode you choose, you have two different methods for creating and manipulating columns – static mode or dynamic mode. List of Options The following options are displayed. No Columns Specifies no columns for the current mtext object. Dynamic Columns Sets dynamic columns mode to the current mtext object. Dynamic columns are text driven.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Toolbar: Draw Command entry: mtext List of Options The following options are displayed. Column Type Displays choices for the type of columns you want to create. Column Number Sets the number of columns. This is only active when you select Static Columns. Height Displays mtext height when Auto Height with Dynamic or Static Columns is selected.
Also displays the total width value of the mtext object. Background Mask Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Controls using an opaque background behind multiline text. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Toolbar: Draw Command entry: mtext List of Options The following options are displayed. Use Background Mask Puts an opaque background behind the text.
Use Background Drawing Color Provides a background that is the same color as the background of the drawing. Color Specifies a color for the opaque background. You can select one of the colors in the list or click Select Color to open the Select Color dialog box. Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text.
Find Next Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What. Replace Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Match Whole Word Only Finds only whole words specified in Find What. Text that is part of another word is ignored.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Toolbar: Draw Command entry: mtext Summary To open the Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click, and click Properties on the shortcut menu. You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text. List of Options The following options are displayed.
NOTE Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do not support diagonal fractions. If a multiline text object contains diagonal fractions, the fractions are converted to horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to pre-AutoCAD 2000 releases. Diagonal fractions are restored when the drawing is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release.
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Multiline Text Sets the defaults for automatically stacking characters. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Toolbar: Draw Command entry: mtext Summary To display the AutoStack Properties dialog box when you have suppressed automatic display, select stacked text, right-click, and click Properties on the shortcut menu.
Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat, slash, or pound character. For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric character or space, the text is automatically stacked as a diagonal fraction. Remove Leading Blank Removes blanks between a whole number and a fraction. Convert It to a Diagonal Fraction Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction when AutoStack is on.
Opposite Corner As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. Arrows within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow. Height Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters. ■ Specify Height. The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is not . ■ Specify Paper Text Height.
Justify Options Option Meaning ML Middle Left MC Middle Center MR Middle Right BL Bottom Left BC Bottom Center BR Bottom Right The following illustrations show each justification option.
Line Spacing Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text. NOTE Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap. At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line.
Width Specifies the width of the text boundary. If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as the distance between the start point and the specified point. Words within each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text boundary. If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the width of the multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. You can end a line of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing Enter.
Unicode strings and control codes Control Codes Unicode Strings Result %%p \U+00B1 %%c \U+2205 Tolerance symbol ( ) Diameter symbol ( ) To insert the following text symbols, click Symbol on the expanded Text Formatting toolbar or enter the appropriate Unicode string: Text symbols and Unicode strings Name Symbol Unicode String Almost equal \U+2248 Angle \U+2220 Boundary line \U+E100 Centerline \U+2104 Delta \U+0394 Electrical phase \U+0278 Flow line \U+E101 Identity \U+2261 Initia
Text symbols and Unicode strings Name Symbol Unicode String Not equal \U+2260 Ohm \U+2126 Omega \U+03A9 Plate/property line \U+214A Subscript 2 \U+2082 Squared \U+00B2 Cubed \U+00B3 These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX fonts: ■ Simplex* ■ Romans* ■ gdt* ■ amgdt* ■ Isocp ■ Isocp2 ■ Isocp3 ■ Isoct ■ Isoct2 ■ Isoct3 1246 | Chapter 13 M Commands
■ Isocpeur (TTF only)* ■ Isocpeur italic (TTF only) ■ Isocteur (TTF only) ■ Isocteur italic (TTF only) * These fonts also include the Initial Length symbol used for arc length dimensions. MULTIPLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Enter Commands on the Command Line Repeats the next command until canceled. Summary The command that you enter is repeated until you press Esc. Because MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified each time.
Creates and controls layout viewports. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Viewports ➤ 1 Viewport, 2 Viewports, 3 Viewports, Summary In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64 viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP). Objects in model space are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank. Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Shadeplot Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted. As Displayed Specifies that a viewport is plotted the same way it is displayed. Wireframe Specifies that a viewport is plotted wireframe regardless of the current display. Hidden Specifies that a viewport is plotted with hidden lines removed regardless of the current display. All Visual Styles Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified visual style.
■ ? First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; the viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area. Layer Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer properties. ■ Reset Viewport Layer Property Overrides Back To Global Properties. Enter Y to remove all layer property overrides. ■ Select Viewports.
■ First Corner on page 1250 ■ Fit on page 1250 4 Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of equal size. ■ First Corner on page 1250 ■ Fit on page 1250 MVSETUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Layout Viewports Sets up the specifications of a drawing. Summary When you enter mvsetup, the prompts displayed depend on whether you are on the Model tab (model space) or on a layout tab (paper space).
MVSETUP on the Model Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Layout Viewports The Model tab is most useful for plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border. On the Model tab, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper size at the Command prompt using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide, a rectangular border is drawn at the grid limits.
MVSETUP on a Layout Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Layout Viewports On a layout tab, you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block. You can specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the layout and the drawing on the Model tab.
Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session. Create Creates viewports. Delete Objects Deletes existing viewports. Create Viewports Displays options for creating viewports. Layout Number to Load Controls creation of viewports. Entering 0 or pressing Enter creates no viewports. Entering 1 creates a single viewport whose size is determined by the following prompts. Entering 2 creates four viewports by dividing a specified area into quadrants.
Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session. Scale Viewports Adjusts the zoom scale factor of the objects displayed in the viewports. The zoom scale factor is a ratio between the scale of the border in paper space and the scale of the drawing objects displayed in the viewports.
Add Adds title block options to the list. Selecting this option prompts you to enter the title block description to be displayed in the list and the name of a drawing to insert. A line similar to the following example is added after the last entry in the mvsetup.dfs default file: A/E (24 x 18in),arch-b.dwg,(1.12 0.99 0.00),(18.63 17.02 0.00),in The last field of the line specifies whether the title block has been created in inches or in millimeters.
N Commands 14 NAVBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Navigation Bar Provides access to navigation and orientation tools from a single interface. Access Methods Ribbon: View Tab ➤ Windows Panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Navigation Bar Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Navigation Bar Summary Provides access to the ViewCube tool, SteeringWheels, 3Dconnexion, and product-specific navigation tools. Use these tools to navigate or reorient your model.
Off Hides the navigation bar. 3Dconnexion Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use 3Dconnexion 3D mouse to Navigate Views Controls the settings of 3Dconnexion navigation tools. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View Tab ➤ Windows Panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Navigation Bar ➤ 3Dconnexion Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Navigation Bar Command entry: navbar Summary Controls the settings for 3Dconnexion navigation tools which are available from the navigation bar.
Pan/Zoom Controls pan and zoom navigation. When this option is disabled, you can only rotate the model around the X,Y, and Z axes. Tilt/Spin/Roll Controls the rotation of the model around the X,Y, and Z axes. When this option is disabled, you can only pan and zoom. Restore Defaults Restores the default settings of the 3Dconnexion Settings dialog box.
NAVSMOTIONCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Define and Change Views with ShowMotion Closes the ShowMotion interface. Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ ShowMotion Toolbar: Navigation Bar ➤ ShowMotion Summary Closes the ShowMotion interface where you can navigate a drawing by selecting a named view. NAVSWHEEL Quick Reference See also: ■ Navigate with SteeringWheels Provides access to enhanced navigation tools that are quickly accessible from the cursor.
Menu: View ➤ SteeringWheels Toolbar: Navigation Bar ➤ SteeringWheels Shortcut menu: SteeringWheels Summary Selecting a tool on the wheel is different from the selection of a typical command. Press on a wedge and drag to use the desired navigation tool. Release the mouse button to return to the wheel and switch navigation tools. The NAVSWHEEL command displays the wheel as defined by the NAVSWHEELMODE system variable.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ 2D Wheel Menu: View ➤ SteeringWheels Toolbar: Navigation bar ➤ SteeringWheels Shortcut menu: SteeringWheels Command entry: navswheel List of Options The following options are displayed. Big Wheels Preview Thumbnail Displays a real-time preview of the big wheels based on the current settings. Wheel Size Specifies the size of the big SteeringWheels.
(NAVSWHEELSIZEBIG system variable) Wheel Opacity Controls the opacity of the big SteeringWheels. (NAVSWHEELOPACITYBIG system variable) Mini Wheels Preview Thumbnail Displays a real-time preview of the mini wheels based on the current settings. Wheel Size Specifies the size of the mini SteeringWheels. (NAVSWHEELSIZEMINI system variable) Wheel Opacity Controls the opacity of the mini SteeringWheels.
Keep Scene Upright Specifies whether the viewpoint of the model can be turned upside-down or not when using the Orbit tool. Rewind Thumbnail Controls when thumbnails are generated for view changes that are made without using a wheel. The generated thumbnails are used for the Rewind tool. (CAPTURETHUMBNAILS system variable) Never Specifies that no preview thumbnails are generated when a view change occurs outside the SteeringWheels.
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ ViewCube Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ ViewCube ➤ On Toolbar: Navigation Bar ➤ ViewCube Summary Click the ViewCube tool to rotate and fill the window with the entire model or an object selected in the view. The Home button displayed near the ViewCube tool rotates the model to a three-fourths view or a user-defined view while performing a fit-to-view. Use the ViewCube menu to define the Home view for the model.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View Tab ➤ Windows Panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ ViewCube Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ ViewCube ➤ Settings Toolbar: Navigation Bar ➤ ViewCube Command entry: navvcube List of Options The following options are displayed.
Display On-screen Position Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed. (NAVVCUBELOCATION system variable) ViewCube Size Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool. (NAVVCUBESIZE system variable) Select Automatic to have the size of the ViewCube tool adjust based on the current size of the active viewport, zoom factor of the active layout, or drawing window. Inactive Opacity Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive.
Show Compass Below the ViewCube Controls whether the compass is displayed below the ViewCube tool. The North direction indicated on the compass is the value defined by the NORTHDIRECTION system variable. Restore Defaults Applies the default settings for the ViewCube tool. NETLOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Loading Managed Applications in AutoCAD Loads a .NET application. Summary The Choose .NET Assembly dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box, is displayed.
Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ New Summary The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the STARTUP system variable. ■ 1: NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog box. ■ 0: NEW displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is displayed. If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is displayed regardless of the Startup setting.
Summary Defines the settings for a new drawing. Start from Scratch creates a new drawing using either imperial or metric default settings. Use a Template creates a new drawing using the settings defined in a drawing template you select. Use a Wizard creates a new drawing using the settings you specify in either the Quick or Advanced wizard. (The first option, Open a Drawing, is not available from the NEW command. To open an existing drawing, use OPEN.) List of Options The following options are displayed.
Use a Template Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file. Template drawings store all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers, dimension styles, and views. Template drawings are distinguished from other drawing files by the .dwt file extension. They are normally kept in the template directory. Several template drawings are included with this program. You can make additional template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file names to .dwt.
Use a Wizard Sets up a drawing using a step-by-step guide. You can choose from two wizards: Quick Setup and Advanced Setup. Quick Setup Displays the Quick Setup wizard, in which you can specify the units and area for your new drawing. The Quick Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text height and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale. Advanced Setup Displays the Advanced Setup wizard, in which you can specify the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area for your new drawing.
Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ New Toolbar: Standard Command entry: new List of Options The following options are displayed. The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next to switch between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you specified. Units Indicates the format in which you enter and in which the program displays coordinates and measurements. Several formats are available.
NOTE You control the precision (the number of decimal places displayed in all measurements) by using the Advanced Setup wizard or the UNITS command. The default precision used by Quick Setup is four (0.0000). Decimal Displays measurements in decimal notation. Engineering Displays measurements in feet and decimal inches. Architectural Displays measurements in feet, inches, and fractional inches. Fractional Displays measurements in mixed-number (integer and fractional) notation.
Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ New Toolbar: Standard Command entry: new Summary List of Options The following options are displayed. The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units, Angle, Angle Measure, Angle Direction, and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next to navigate between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you specified.
The Units page of the Quick Setup wizard includes the same formats. See Specify Units and Unit Formats for more information. The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional size for displaying linear measurements. Angle Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which the program displays angles. Decimal Degrees Displays partial degrees as decimals. Deg/Min/Sec Displays partial degrees as minutes and seconds. Grads Displays angles as grads.
NEW Command Prompt Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Starting a New Drawing Summary Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). If you turned off the display of the Create New Drawing dialog box, or if FILEDIA is set to 0, NEW displays the following prompt: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter template file name or [. (for none)] : Enter a name, enter a period (.
Summary The Create Sheet Set wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new sheet set. You can choose to create a new sheet set from existing drawings, or use an existing sheet set as a template on which to base your new sheet set. NEWSHOT Quick Reference See also: Create Preview Animations ■ Creates a named view with motion that is played back when viewed with ShowMotion.
Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Named Views Summary Displays the New view / Shot Properties dialog box on page 2028 with the View Properties tab on page 2031 active.
1280
O Commands 15 OBJECTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Annotation Scale Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales Shortcut menu: With an annotative object selected, right-click in the drawing area. Click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales.
If you enter objectscale, you are prompted to select annotative objects. The Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box on page 1282 is displayed. If you enter -objectscale at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 1285. Annotative Object Scale Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Adds or deletes supported scales for the selected object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Object Scale List Displays the list of scales supported by the selected object. Scale in Units (Unlabeled) Displays the scale (in units) of the named scale selected in the Object Scale List. List all scales for selected objects Specifies that all scales supported by the selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Add/Delete Scales Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales Shortcut menu: With an annotative object selected, right-click in the drawing area. Click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales. Command entry: objectscale (or 'objectscale for transparent use) List of Options The following option is displayed. Scale List Displays the list of scales that can be added to the selected annotative object.
-OBJECTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select annotative objects: Use an object selection method Enter an option [Add on page 1285/Delete on page 1285/? on page 1285] : Enter a or d or press Enter Add Adds an annotation scale to the selected objects. When created, an annotative object supports one annotation scale: the current annotation scale.
OFFSET Quick Reference See also: ■ Offset an Object Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset Menu: Modify ➤ Offset Toolbar: Modify Summary You can offset an object at a specified distance or through a point. After you offset objects, you can trim and extend them as an efficient method to create drawings containing many parallel lines and curves. The OFFSET command repeats for convenience.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Erase source = current Layer = current OFFSETGAPTYPE = current Specify Offset Distance on page 1287or [Through on page 1287/Erase on page 1287/Layer on page 1288] : Specify a distance, enter an option, or press Enter Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object. Exit Exits the OFFSET command.
Layer Determines whether offset objects are created on the current layer or on the layer of the source object. OLELINKS Quick Reference See also: ■ Link OLE Objects in Drawings Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links. Access Methods Menu: Edit ➤ OLE Links Summary The Links dialog box is displayed. If there is no existing OLE link in the drawing, OLE Links is not available on the Edit menu and the Links dialog box is not displayed.
Access Methods Menu: Edit ➤ OLE Links Command entry: olelinks List of Options The following options are displayed. Links Lists information about linked objects. The information listed depends on the type of link. To change information for a linked object, select the object. Source Displays the path name of the source file and the type of object. Type Displays the format type. Update: Automatic Updates the link automatically whenever the source changes.
Break Link Severs the link between the object and the original file. The object in your drawing is changed to WMF (Windows metafile format), which is not affected by future changes to the original file. Convert Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Link OLE Objects in Drawings Specifies a different source application for an embedded object. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click an embedded object and click OLE ➤ Convert.
Activate As Opens the embedded object as the type selected under Object Type but returns the object to its current type after editing. Display as Icon Displays the source application's icon in the drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information. Change Icon Displays the Change Icon dialog box. This option is available only if you select Display as Icon. Result Describes the result of the selected options.
Current Specifies the currently selected icon. Default Specifies the default icon for the source application. From File Specifies an icon from a file (valid types include EXE, DLL, and ICO). Label Specifies a caption for the icon. The file type is displayed unless you specify otherwise. Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select an icon from a file.
Maps the point size of one of the fonts in an OLE object to a text height in the drawing. Access Methods Shortcut menu: With an OLE object selected, right-click and click Text Size. Command entry: olescale Summary The OLE object is scaled automatically to accommodate the size of the text. List of Options The following options are displayed. OLE Font Displays a list of the fonts used in the OLE object. OLE Point Size Displays a list of the point sizes available for the selected font.
Summary OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command. You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK because these commands can erase the selected objects after creating a block. However, you cannot use OOPS to restore parameters, actions, or grips in the Block Editor on page 231. You cannot use OOPS to restore objects on a layer that has been removed with the PURGE command. OPEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing Opens an existing drawing file.
Summary The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. You can open and load a portion of a drawing, including geometry on a specific view or layer. In the Select File dialog box, click the arrow next to Open and choose Partial Open or Partial Open Read-Only to display the Partial Open dialog box. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a Command prompt. NOTE If the drawing you open contains macros, the AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box is displayed.
Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Toolbar: Standard Command entry: open ➤ Open ➤ Drawing List of Options The following options are displayed. Places List Provides quick access to predefined locations. You can reorder the icons in the Places list by dragging them to a new position. To add a new icon to Places, drag a folder from the list. Changes to Places affect all standard file selection dialog boxes. History Displays shortcuts to the files most recently accessed from the dialog box.
from the History list. Select History, then select the unwanted shortcuts in the Files list and click Delete. To sort the shortcuts by date, click Views ➤ Details, and then click the Modified column in the Files list. Personal/My Documents Displays the contents of the Personal or My Documents folder for the current user profile. Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder for the current user profile.
Search the Web Displays the Browse the Web dialog box, from which you can access and store files on the Internet. Delete Deletes the selected file or folder. Create New Folder Creates a new folder in the current path using a name that you specify. Views Controls the appearance of the Files list or Folders list and, for a Files list, specifies whether to show a preview image when a file is selected. List Displays a multi-column list. Details Displays a single-column list with file details.
Creates a shortcut to the current Look In location, or to the selected file or folder. The shortcut is placed in the Favorites folder for the current user profile, which you can access by choosing Favorites in the Places list. Look in Favorites Sets the Look In path to your system’s Favorites folder. Options Provides additional options for certain standard file selection dialog boxes. Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password that are invoked when you save a file.
Open/Save Depending on the purpose of the specific file selection dialog box, opens or saves the selected file or enters the path of the selected folder in the previous dialog box. Certain file selection dialog boxes may include additional options, accessed by clicking the arrow next to the Open button. Open Read-Only Opens a file in read-only mode. You cannot save changes to the file using the original file name. Partial Open Displays the Partial Open dialog box.
Buzzsaw Location Shortcuts Lists the location of existing Buzzsaw shortcuts. New Opens the Log In to Buzzsaw Site dialog box. Rename Renames the shortcuts you select. Modify Opens the Log In to Buzzsaw Site dialog box, where you can change settings for the selected shortcut. Delete Removes the selected shortcut. Close Closes the selected shortcut location.
Menu: Application menu Toolbar: Standard Command entry: open ➤ Open ➤ Drawing List of Options The following options are displayed. Buzzsaw Site Specifies the location of the most recently used Buzzsaw site. Enter any existing address or site name. Buzzsaw User Name Specifies the user name you use for the Buzzsaw site you want to access. Password Specifies your password for the Buzzsaw site.
Command entry: open Summary Provides access to a new Autodesk Buzzsaw location that you specify. You can open drawings or save drawings at this location. If a sheet set is open, the Autodesk Buzzsaw location is associated with your current sheet set. The only Buzzsaw locations displayed are those associated with the current sheet set. List of Options The following options are displayed. Buzzsaw Site Displays the name of the current Buzzsaw site.
Command entry: open List of Options The following option is displayed. List of Buzzsaw Projects and Folders Specifies Buzzsaw projects or folders that can be linked to the shortcut. Find Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Search Paths and File Locations Searches for files using name, location, and date modified filters.
Menu: Application menu Toolbar: Standard Command entry: open ➤ Open ➤ Drawing Summary To access the Find dialog box, in a standard file selection dialog box, click Tools menu ➤ Find. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name & Location Tab Filters the file search based on file type, file name, and location. Named Specifies the full or partial file names to include in the search. When entering multiple file names, enclose each name in quotation marks.
Include Subfolders Searches all subfolders within the Look In location. Date Modified Tab Filters the file search based on the file's creation or modified date. All Files Searches without a date filter. Find All Files Created or Modified Restricts the search to files created or modified within a specified time. ■ Between: Searches for files created or modified between two dates. Enter the dates or click the arrows to choose dates from a calendar.
Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing Defines the FTP sites that you can browse within standard file selection dialog boxes.
Summary To browse the sites that you add, select FTP from the Places list in the standard file selection dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name of FTP Site Specifies the site name for the FTP location (for example, ftp.autodesk.com). Log On As Specifies whether to log on to the FTP site anonymously or with a specific user name. Anonymous Logs you on to the FTP site as an anonymous user.
Partial Open Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) Displays the drawing views and layers available for specifying what geometry to load into the selected drawing.
Summary When working with large drawing files, you can select the minimal amount of geometry you need to load when opening a drawing. When a drawing is partially open, all named objects, as well as the specified geometry, are loaded into the file. Named objects include blocks, dimension styles, layers, layouts, linetypes, text styles, UCSs, views, and viewport configurations. List of Options The following options are displayed.
loaded. Xref-dependent layers are displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list only if the selected drawing was last saved with theVISRETAIN system variable set to 1. Any layers created in the xref since the xref was loaded into the selected drawing are not displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list. You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a partially open drawing.
Unload All Xrefs on Open Unloads all external references when opening the drawing. Selecting this option enhances the opening process. If you partially open a drawing that contains a bound xref, only the portion of the xref that is loaded (defined by the selected view) is bound to the partially open drawing. Open Opens the drawing file, loading only combined geometry from the selected view and layers.
OPENDWFMARKUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Respond to Markups Opens a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Load Markup Set Summary Displays the Open Markup DWF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a DWF or DWFx file that contains markups to load into the Markup Set Manager.
Menu: File ➤ Open Sheet Set Summary The Open Sheet Set dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. In this dialog box, you can select a sheet set data (DST) file to load sheet set information into the Sheet Set Manager. OPTIONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Customizes the program settings.
Access Methods Menu: Application menu ➤ Options Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and choose Options. Command entry: options List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Profile Displays the name of the current profile above the tabs. To set the current profile, create a new profile, or edit an existing profile, use the Profiles tab.
■ Selection on page 1348 ■ Profiles on page 1354 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Lists the folders in which the program searches for support, driver, menu, and other files. Also lists optional, user-defined settings such as which dictionary to use for checking spelling. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Project Files Search Path Specifies a project name for the drawing. The project name corresponds to a search path for external reference (xref) files associated with the project. You can create any number of project names with associated folders, but each drawing can have only one project name. (PROJECTNAME system variable) Customization Files Specifies the names and locations of various types of files. Main Customization File Specifies the default location of the main customization file (acad.cuix).
(FONTALT system variable) If you click Browse, the Alternate Font dialog box is displayed, from which you can choose an available font. Font Mapping File Specifies the font mapping file to be used. (FONTMAP system variable) Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names Specifies settings related to plotting. Plot File Name for Legacy Plotting Scripts Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier.
Color Book Locations Specifies the path for color book files that can be used when specifying colors in the Select Color dialog box. You can define multiple folders for each path specified. This option is saved with the user profile. Data Sources Location Specifies the path for database source files. Changes to this setting do not take effect until you close and restart the program. Template Settings Specifies the drawing template settings.
(ACTPATH system variable) Plot and Publish Log File Location Specifies the path for the log file that is created if you select the Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log option on the Plot and Publish tab. Temporary Drawing File Location Specifies the location to store temporary files. This program creates temporary files and then deletes them when you exit the program.
Move Up Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path. Move Down Moves the selected search path below the following search path. Set Current Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current. Display Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Customizes the display.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Window Elements Controls display settings specific to the drawing environment. Color scheme Controls color settings in a dark or light color for elements such as the status bar, title bar, ribbon bar, and the application menu frame. Display Scroll Bars in Drawing Window Displays scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the drawing area. Display Drawing Status Bar Displays the drawing status bar, which displays several tools for scaling annotations.
Display Screen Menu Displays the screen menu on the right side of the drawing area. The screen menu font is controlled by the Windows system font settings. If you use the screen menu, you should set the Windows system font setting to a font and font size that fits the screen menu size restrictions. (SCREENMENU on page 2502 system variable) Use Large Buttons for Toolbars Displays buttons in a larger format at 32 by 32 pixels.
Displays the layout and Model tabs at the bottom of the drawing area. When this option is cleared, the tabs are replaced by buttons on the status bar. Display Printable Area Displays printable area in a layout. The printable area is represented by the area within the dashed line and is determined by the selected output device. Objects drawn outside of the printable area are clipped or omitted when the drawing is plotted.
Contour Lines per Surface Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on objects. (ISOLINES system variable) Display Performance Controls display settings that affect performance. Pan and Zoom with Raster and OLE (RTDISPLAY system variable) If dragging display is turned on and you select Pan and Zoom with Raster and OLE, a copy of the object moves with the cursor as you reposition the original.
Specifies the fading intensity value for objects during in-place reference editing. Objects that are not being edited are displayed at a lesser intensity. (XFADECTL on page 2627 system variable) With in-place reference editing, you can edit a block reference or external reference from within the current drawing. The valid range is 0 through 90 percent. Open and Save Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls options that relate to opening and saving files.
List of Options The following options are displayed. File Save Controls settings related to saving a file. Save As Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file with SAVE, SAVEAS, QSAVE, SHAREWITHSEEK on page 1735 and WBLOCK. The file format selected for this option is the default format that all drawings are saved as when you use SAVE, SAVEAS, QSAVE, and WBLOCK. NOTE AutoCAD 2004 is the drawing file format used by the AutoCAD 2004, AutoCAD 2005, and AutoCAD 2006 releases.
becomes an issue, set the value to 25. If you set the value to 20 or less, performance of the SAVE and SAVEAS commands slows significantly. (ISAVEPERCENT system variable) File Safety Precautions Assists in avoiding data loss and in detecting errors. Automatic Save Saves your drawing automatically at the intervals you specify. You can specify the location of all Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable.SAVEFILE (read-only) stores the name of the Autosave file.
Provides options for a digital signature and password that are invoked when you save a file. Display Digital Signature Information Presents digital signature information when a file with a valid digital signature is opened. (SIGWARN on page 2513 system variable) File Open Controls settings that relate to recently used files and open files. Number of Recently Used Files Controls the number of recently used files that are listed in the File menu for quick access. Valid values are 0 to 9.
Allow Other Users to Refedit Current Drawing Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing. (XEDIT system variable) ObjectARX Applications Controls settings that relate to AutoCAD Runtime Extension applications and proxy graphics. Demand Load ObjectARX Apps Specifies if and when to demand-load certain applications. (DEMANDLOAD system variable) ■ Disable Load on Demand: Turns off demand-loading.
Controls options related to plotting and publishing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Default Plot Settings For New Drawings Controls default plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format. Use As Default Output Device Sets the default output device for new drawings and for drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later format.
Add or Configure Plotters Displays the Plotter Manager (a Windows system window). You can add or configure a plotter with the Plotter Manager. Plot To File Specifies the default location for plot to file operations. Background Processing Options Controls whether background plotting is turned on or off for plotting and publishing. You can use background plotting to start a job you are plotting or publishing and immediately return to work on your drawing while your job is plotted or published as you work.
■ Date and time started and completed ■ Sheet name ■ Full file path ■ Selected layout name ■ Page setup name ■ Named page setup path ■ Device name ■ Paper size name ■ Final status Automatically Save Plot and Publish Log Specifies that a log file that contains information about all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved. Save One Continuous Plot Log Specifies that a single log file that contains information about all plot and publish jobs is automatically saved.
Uses the paper size specified in the Page Setup dialog box as long as the selected output device can plot to this paper size. If the selected output device cannot plot to this paper size, the program displays a warning message and uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer.
You can control the size of the list of devices in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes by moving a device's PC3 file out of the Plotters folder and its subfolders. Specify Plot Offset Relative To Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper. (PLOTOFFSET system variable). Printable Area Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the printable area. Edge of Paper Specifies that the plot offset is relative to the edge of the paper.
List of Options The following options are displayed. 3D Performance Controls settings that relate to configuration of the 3D graphics display system. 3D Performance Settings Displays the Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning dialog box on page 21. Current Pointing Device Controls options that relate to the pointing device. Current Pointing Device Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers. ■ Current System Pointing Device: Sets the system pointing device as current.
Accept Input From Specifies whether the program accepts input from both a mouse and a digitizer or ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set. Layout Regen Options Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. For each tab, the display list is updated either by regenerating the drawing when you switch to that tab or by saving the display list to memory and regenerating only the modified objects when you switch to that tab. Changing these settings can improve performance.
Displays the OLE Text Size dialog box when OLE objects are inserted into drawings. Beep on Error in User Input Sounds an alarm beep when an invalid entry is detected. Load acad.lsp with Every Drawing Controls whether the acad.lsp file is loaded into every drawing or just the first drawing opened in a session. Clear this option if you do not want to run certain LISP routines in specific drawing files.
User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls options that optimize the way you work. List of Options The following options are displayed. Windows Standard Behavior Controls keystroke and right-click behavior. Double-click Editing Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area.
(DBLCLKEDIT system variable) Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are available in the drawing area. If this option is cleared, right-click is interpreted as Enter. (SHORTCUTMENU system variable) Right-Click Customization Displays the Right-Click Customization dialog box. This dialog box provides further definition for the Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area option.
Specifies that running object snaps override coordinate entry at all times. (OSNAPCOORD system variable = 0) Keyboard Entry Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps at all times. (OSNAPCOORD system variable = 1) Keyboard Entry Except Scripts Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps, except in scripts.
Initial Setup Displays the Initial Setup dialog box on page 1376 which is used to perform some basic customization of AutoCAD LT. For information, see Customize AutoCAD LT with Initial Setup. Block Editor Settings Displays the Block Editor Settings dialog box on page 241. Use this dialog box to control the environment settings of the Block Editor. Lineweight Settings Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box.
List of Options The following options are displayed. AutoSnap Settings Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. When the cursor, or aperture box, is on an object, you can press Tab to cycle through all the snap points available for that object. Marker Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker. The marker is a geometric symbol that is displayed when the crosshairs move over a snap point. (AUTOSNAP system variable) Magnet Turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off.
Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip. The tooltip is a label that describes which part of the object you are snapping to. (AUTOSNAP system variable) Display AutoSnap Aperture Box Turns the display of the AutoSnap aperture box on or off. The aperture box is a box that appears inside the crosshairs when you snap to an object. (APBOX system variable) Colors Displays the Drawing Window Colors dialog box. AutoSnap Marker Size Sets the display size for the AutoSnap marker.
(TRACKPATH system variable = 2) Display Full-Screen Tracking Vector Tracking vectors are construction lines from which you can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects. If this option is selected, alignment vectors are displayed as infinite lines. (TRACKPATH system variable = 1) Display AutoTrack Tooltip Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet.
3D Modeling Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Sets options for working with solids and surfaces in 3D. List of Options The following options are displayed. 3D Crosshairs Controls settings for the display style of the crosshairs pointer in 3D operations. Show Z Axis in Crosshairs Controls whether the Z axis is displayed by the crosshairs pointer. Label Axes in Standard Crosshairs Controls whether axis labels are displayed with the crosshairs pointer.
In 2D Model Space Controls the display of ViewCube and the UCS icon in 2D model space. In 3D Model Space Controls the display of the ViewCube and UCS icon in 3D model space. Dynamic Input Controls the display of dynamic input fields for coordinate entry. Show Z Field for Pointer Input Displays a field for the Z coordinate when using dynamic input. 3D Objects Controls settings for the display of 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes.
Surface Analysis Opens the Analysis Options dialog box on page 113, where you can set options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. 3D Navigation Sets walk, fly, and animation options for displaying 3D models. Reverse Mouse Wheel Zoom Toggles the direction of transparent zoom operations when you scroll the middle mouse wheel. (ZOOMWHEEL system variable) Walk and Fly Displays the Walk and Fly Settings dialog box. Animation Displays the Animation Settings dialog box.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Pickbox Size Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. The pickbox is the object selection tool that appears in editing commands. (PICKBOX system variable) Selection Preview Highlights objects as the pickbox cursor rolls over them. (PREVIEWEFFECT system variable) When a Command Is Active Displays selection previewing only when a command is active and the Select Objects prompt is displayed.
Displays selection previewing when no commands are active. (SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable) Visual Effect Settings Displays the Visual Effect Settings dialog box. Selection Modes Controls settings that relate to object selection methods. Noun/Verb Selection Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command. The command affects the previously selected object or objects.
Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you select a point outside an object. Drawing the selection window from left to right selects objects that are entirely inside the window's boundaries. Drawing from right to left selects objects within and crossing the window's boundaries. (PICKAUTO system variable) Object Grouping Selects all objects in a group when you select one object in that group. With GROUP you can create and name a set of objects for selection.
Show Grip Tips Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. This option has no effect on standard objects. (GRIPTIPS system variable) Show Dynamic Grip Menu Controls the display of dynamic menu when pausing over a multi-functional grip. (GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL on page 2338 system variable) Allow Ctrl-cycling Behavior Allows the Ctrl-cycling behavior for multi-functional grips.
Sets the color properties of the grip. List of Options The following options are displayed. Settings Controls the color settings of the grip. Unselected Grip Color Controls the color of unselected grips. An unselected grip is displayed as a small, filled square. (GRIPCOLOR on page 2336 system variable) Selected Grip Color Controls the color of selected grips. A selected grip is displayed as a small, filled square.
Profiles Tab (Options Dialog Box) Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls the use of profiles. A profile is a configuration you define. List of Options The following options are displayed. Available Profiles Displays a list of the available profiles. Set Current Makes the selected profile the current profile.
Add to List Displays the Add Profile dialog box to save the selected profile under a different name. Rename Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name and description of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profile but keep its current settings. Delete Deletes the selected profile (unless it is the current profile). Export Exports a profile as a file with an .arg extension so the file can be shared with other users.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, Files tab) Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and choose Options. Command entry: options Summary You can also set the location of Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT system variable.
Drawing Window Colors Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Sets the display colors of the interface elements for each context in the application. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, Display tab) Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and then click Options.
Summary A context is an operating environment such as model space. An interface element is an item that is visible in that context such as the crosshairs pointer or the background color. List of Options The following options are displayed. Context A context is an operating environment such as model space. Interface elements can have different colors assigned depending on the context.The context you select displays a list of associated elements. Select a context, an interface element, and then a color.
Restore Classic Colors Restores only the interface elements of 2D model space back to the AutoCAD 2008 classic color settings. Preview Displays a preview of the drawing based on defined settings. Command Line Window Font Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Application Fonts Sets the font displayed in the command window.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Font Lists the system fonts available for selection. Font Style Lists the styles available to apply to the current font. Size Lists the font sizes available for the current font. Light Glyph Appearance Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Specifies the appearance of the light glyphs. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, Drafting tab) List of Options The following options are displayed.
Glyph Size Adjusts the size of the glyph. Camera Glyph Appearance Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Specifies the appearance of the camera glyphs. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, Drafting tab) List of Options The following options are displayed. Glyph Preview Shows the current appearance of the glyph and updates as you make changes. Edit Glyph Colors Displays the Drawing Window Colors dialog box on page 1357.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, Open and Save tab) Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and choose Options. Command entry: options List of Options The following options are displayed. Drawing Save a Thumbnail Preview Image Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
Information Panel Displays information about the current position of the slider. Named Views Sets the size for thumbnails created for named views. Named views Sets the maximum size of the named views. Plot Style Table Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Specifies settings for plot style tables.
Control is available when you select the Use Named Plot Styles option and open a new drawing. (PSTYLEPOLICY system variable) Use Color Dependent Plot Styles Uses color-dependent plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier. Color-dependent plot styles use the numbers from the AutoCAD Color Index to create a plot style table with a .ctb file extension. Each color is defined by a name or number ranging from 1 to 255.
Specifies the default plot style for all layers in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or for Layer 0 when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. (DEFLPLSTYLE system variable) Default Plot Style for Objects Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Turn on Time-Sensitive Right-Click Controls right-click behavior. A quick click is the same as pressing Enter. A longer click displays a shortcut menu. You can set the duration of the longer click in milliseconds. Default Mode Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when no objects are selected and no commands are in progress. Repeat Last Command Disables the Default shortcut menu.
Enables the Command shortcut menu only when options are currently available at the Command prompt. At the Command prompt, options are enclosed in square brackets. If no options are available, right-clicking is the same as pressing Enter.
Automatically updates fields when the file is regenerated. Visual Effect Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls the appearance of selection previewing. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, Selection tab) Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and click Options. List of Options The following options are displayed.
■ Both. Displays thickened, dashed lines when the pickbox cursor rolls over an object. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if you clicked. (PREVIEWEFFECT system variable = 2) Advanced Options Displays the Advanced Preview Options dialog box. Selection Area Effect Controls the appearance of selection areas during selection preview. Preview Area Displays the effect of the current settings.
Access Methods Menu: Application menu tab) Command entry: options ➤ Options (Options dialog box, Selection List of Options The following options are available in this dialog box. Contextual Tab Display Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object.
Advanced Preview Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Allows you to turn selection cycling on and off and configure selection cycling display options. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, Selection tab) Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and click Options.
Excludes objects in groups from selection previewing. This option is off by default. (PREVIEWFILTER system variable) Multiline Text Excludes multiline text objects from selection previewing. This option is off by default. (PREVIEWFILTER system variable) Hatches Excludes hatch objects from selection previewing. This option is off by default. (PREVIEWFILTER system variable) Add or Change Profile Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Creates a new profile from an existing one.
Assigns a new or updated description for the selected profile. Transparency Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Controls transparency for dockable windows. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click the title bar on the dockable window and click Transparency. List of Options The following options are displayed. How transparent should the palette be? Sets the degree of transparency for the palette. The palette has maximum transparency when the slider is at Clear.
Disable all window transparency (global) Disables transparency for all palettes. (GLOBALOPACITY on page 2332 system variable) Hidden Message Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Displays all dialog boxes that you marked to not display again or to always use a specified option in them.
Default Scale List Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Controls the default list of scales stored in the registry. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, User Preferences tab) Summary When the scale list in a drawing is reset, the list is restored to the default list of scales defined in the Default Scale List dialog box on page 1375. List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale List Metric Displays the default list of metric scales.
Delete Removes all unreferenced scales from the scale list and leaves the referenced scale when multiple scales are selected. Reset Deletes all scales and restores the default list of scales defined in AutoCAD LT. Initial Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize AutoCAD LT with Initial Setup Allows you to perform some basic customization of AutoCAD LT.
Specify Industry Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize AutoCAD LT with Initial Setup Specifies an industry that best describes your work. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Options (Options dialog box, User Preferences tab) Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and click Options.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Task-based Tools Displays a list of the available task-based tools that can be displayed with Initial Setup. 3D Modeling Displays user interface elements related to creating 3D models. Photorealistic Rendering Displays user interface elements related to creating photorealistic renderings. Review and Markup Displays the Markup Set Manager palette that you use to review and mark up DWF and DWFx files.
Use AutoCAD LT 2011’s default drawing template file Designates acad.dwt as the default drawing template file. Use my existing drawing template file Designates the drawing template file of your choosing. Use the default drawing template file based on my industry and unit format Specifies the default drawing template file based on the industry selected on the Specify Industry page and a unit value of Imperial (Feet and Inches) or Metric.
Ortho mode is used when you specify an angle or distance by means of two points using a pointing device. In Ortho mode, cursor movement is constrained to the horizontal or vertical direction relative to the UCS. Horizontal is defined as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and vertical as being parallel to the Y axis. In a 3D view, ORTHO is additionally defined as being parallel to the Z axis of the UCS, and the tooltip displays +Z or -Z for the angle depending on the direction along the Z axis.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current osnap modes: current Enter list of object snap modes on page 1381: Enter names of object snap modes separated with commas, or enter none or off Object Snap Modes Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first three characters of the name. If you enter more than one name, separate the names with commas.
1382
P Commands 16 PAGESETUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Page Setup Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Page Setup Manager. Summary The Page Setup Manager is displayed.
A page setup is a collection of plot device and other settings that determine the appearance and format of your final output. These settings are stored in the drawing file and can be modified and applied to other layouts. Page Setup Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings Specifies the page setup for the current layout or drawing sheet.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Layout or Current Sheet Set Lists the current layout to which the page setup will be applied. Layout icon Displayed when the Page Setup Manager is opened from a layout. Sheet set icon Displayed when the Page Setup Manager is opened from the Sheet Set Manager. Page Setups Displays the current page setup, sets a different page setup as current, creates a new page setup, modifies an existing page setup, and imports page setups from other drawings.
in asterisks, with the named page setup in parentheses; for example, *Layout 1 (System Scale-to-fit)*. If the Page Setup Manager is opened from the Sheet Set Manager, only named page setups in the page setup overrides file (a drawing template [.dwt] file) that have Plot Area set to Layout or Extents are listed. Any of these page setups can be applied temporarily for a PUBLISH operation. The shortcut menu also provides options for removing and renaming page setups.
Displays the plot size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Display When Creating a New Layout Specifies that the Page Setup dialog box is displayed when a new layout tab is selected or a new layout is created.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Page Setup Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Page Setup Manager Command entry: pagesetup List of Options The following options are displayed. New Page Setup Name Specifies the name for the new page setup. Start With Specifies a page setup to use as a starting point for the new page setup.
Page Setup Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings Specifies page layout and plotting device settings. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Page Setup Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Page Setup Manager.
Summary The Page Setup dialog box is displayed in the following cases: ■ When you create a new page setup through the Page Setup Manager ■ When you modify an existing page setup through the Page Setup Manager The page setup settings that you specify are stored with the layout and can be applied to other layouts or imported into other drawings. List of Options The following options are displayed. Page Setup Name Displays the name of the current page setup.
Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. You can edit this text in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Partial Preview Shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper size and printable area. The tooltip displays the paper size and printable area. Paper Size Displays standard paper sizes that are available for the selected plotting device.
Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects. All geometry in the current space is plotted. The drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting. Display Plots the view in the current viewport in the Model tab or in the current paper space view in a layout tab. View Plots a view that was previously saved with the VIEW command. Window Plots any portion of the drawing that you specify.
NOTE If the Layout option is specified in Plot Area, the layout is plotted at 1:1 regardless of the setting specified in Scale. Fit to Paper Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom scale factor in the Scale, Inch =, and Units boxes. Scale Defines the exact scale for the plot. Custom defines a user-defined scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters) equal to the number of drawing units.
Edit Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, in which you can view or modify plot styles for the currently assigned plot style table. Display Plot Styles Controls whether the properties of plot styles assigned to objects are displayed on the screen. Shaded Viewport Options Specifies how shaded and rendered viewports are plotted and determines their resolution levels and dots per inch (dpi). Shade Plot Specifies how views are plotted.
You can select from the following options: ■ Draft: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted as wireframe. ■ Preview: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one quarter of the current device resolution, to a maximum of 150 dpi. ■ Normal: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one half of the current device resolution, to a maximum of 300 dpi.
Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. Hide Paper Space Objects Specifies whether the HIDE operation applies to objects in the paper space viewport. This option is available only from a layout tab. The effect of this setting is reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout. Drawing Orientation Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support landscape or portrait orientation.
Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration (PC3) file. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Page Setup Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Page Setup Manager. Command entry: pagesetup Summary You can cancel your changes, click OK to overwrite the PC3 file, or specify a new file name for the modified PC3 file. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Page Setup Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Page Setup Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Page Setup Manager. Command entry: pagesetup Summary List of Options The following options are displayed. Source Drawing Displays the source drawing that contains the listed page setups that are available to import. Page Setups Lists the page setups that are available to import and their location in the source drawing.
Plot Size Displays the plot size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. PAN Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Moves the view planar to the screen.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Press Esc or Enter to exit, or right-click to display a shortcut menu. If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN displays command prompts, and you can specify a displacement to pan the drawing display. Position the cursor at the start location and press the mouse button down. Drag the cursor to the new location. You can also press the mouse scroll wheel or middle button down and drag the cursor to pan.
When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on that edge. Depending on whether the logical extent is at the top, bottom, or side of the drawing, the bar is either horizontal (top or bottom) or vertical (left or right side). When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again to pan the display from that location.
You cannot use PAN transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW, or while another ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW command is in progress. Pan Shortcut Menu Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View To access the Pan shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while PAN is active. List of Options The following options are displayed. Exit Cancels PAN or ZOOM. Pan Switches to PAN. Zoom Switches to ZOOM in real time. 3D Orbit Switches to 3DORBIT. Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Parametric tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager Menu: Parametric ➤ Parameters Manager Toolbar: Parametric Summary The Parameters Manager palette displays relevant parametric information based on whether you access it from within the drawing or from within the Block Editor.
Summary The Parameters Manager palette displays all associative variables (dimensional constraint variables and user-defined variables) available in the drawing. You can create, edit, rename, group, and delete associative variables. The Parameters Manager palette includes a grid control with three columns, by default. You can also add two columns (Description, Type) using the shortcut menu. List of Options The following options are displayed.
User variables have the following characteristics: ■ Default values are: Name = user1, Expression = 1, and value = 1.00. ■ Name should be alphanumeric and cannot begin with a number, contain spaces, or exceed 256 characters. ■ Expression values should be within the range of -1e100 and 1e100. Edit a Dimensional Variable You can edit the dimensional variable name and expression. To do so: ■ Double-click the name or expression box. ■ Select the row and press F2.
subset of all parameters defined for the current space, but the group can also be empty. Click the Filter icon to create a group, which displays a filter tree on the left vertical panel of the palette where you can show, hide, or expand the group filters. Drag and drop the parameters from the grid control into a parameter group. The Invert Filter check box displays all the parameters which do not belong in the group.
Description Displays or hides the Description column Maximize All Columns Displays all columns using the maximum value in each column as the base. Row Shortcut Menu Show Filter Tree Expands and displays the Filter Tree. Remove from Group Filter Removes the selected parameters from the group filter. Delete Parameter Deletes the selected parameters from the drawing and the Parameters Manager. Cell Shortcut Menu Cut Removes the value from the cell and pastes it to the clipboard.
Parameters Manager - Block Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks Controls the associative parameters used in the Block Editor. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Block Editor tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Parameters Manager Command entry: parameters Summary In the Block Editor, the Parameters Manager displays a consolidated view of all parameters and user-defined properties for the block definition.
Column Description Order Controls the order properties are displayed in the Properties palette Show Displays the parameter as a property of the block reference Description Displays the comments or notes associated with the user variable The Type column affects the formatting of the parameter in the Parameters Manager and Properties palette. It also affects the value of the parameter when the block is scaled.
■ Reference Parameters ■ User Parameters ■ Attributes You can only add user parameters to the table. When you delete any item from the table, the item is automatically deleted from the block definition. Create a Dimensional Variable To create a dimensional variable, you apply a dimensional constraint to an object in the Block Editor. Dimensional variables are displayed under the Dimensional Constraint Parameters group header in the Parameters Manager palette.
Delete a Dimensional Variable The following are the current behavioral changes in the drawing when you delete a dimension variable: ■ The associated dimensional constraint in the drawing is removed. ■ The variables retain the value calculated by the expression as a constant. This action is for variables referenced by other variables, and ensures that the geometry does not change.
created in the Block Editor only. This property is read-only and is set to No for dimensional contraint parameters and user parameters which are created in the drawing editor. Order Displays or hides the Order column. Description Displays or hides the Description column. Maximize All Columns Displays all columns using the maximum value in each column as the base. Row Shortcut Menu Delete Parameter Deletes the selected parameters from the drawing and the Parameters Manager.
-PARAMETERS Quick Reference See also: ■ Work With Constraint Parameters in Blocks Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter a parameter option [New on page 1413/Edit on page 1413/Rename on page 1413/Delete on page 1413/? — List Parameters on page 1413 ]: NOTE You cannot use the -PARAMETERS command in the Block Editor on page 231. New Creates a user variable. Edit Edits the expression of the specified user variable.
PARTIALOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) Loads additional geometry into a partially opened drawing. Access Methods Menu: File menu ➤ Partial Load Summary The Partial Load dialog box is displayed. PARTIALOAD can be used only in a partially open drawing. To partially open a drawing, use OPEN and choose Partial Open in the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
Access Methods Menu: File menu ➤ Partial Load Command entry: partiaload Summary You can select and load geometry from a view or a selected area and from layers. You cannot unload any information that is currently loaded in the drawing. If the drawing contains attached xrefs that were not loaded at the time that the drawing was partially opened, you can reload the xrefs by using the External References palette. See XREF. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Displays all the model space views available in the selected drawing file. When a view is selected, only the geometry in the selected view is loaded. You can select to load geometry from only one view. Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing. Any information currently loaded into the file cannot be unloaded. Pick Window Prompts you to use the pointing device to specify an area using window selection.
-PARTIALOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner on page 1417 or [View on page 1417]: Specify a point or enter v First Corner Specifies the first corner of a user-defined view. Geometry from the defined view is loaded into the partially open drawing. Layers to Load Loads geometry from the selected layers into the current drawing, including both model space and paper space geometry.
geometry is loaded into the drawing, including geometry specified to load from a view. View: ?—List Views Displays a list of model space views available in the selected drawing. Enter a view name. Layers to Load Loads geometry from one or more layers into the current drawing. To load geometry from multiple layers into the drawing, use a comma between layer names. If no layer geometry is specified, no layer geometry is loaded into the drawing, including geometry specified to load from a view.
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File dialog box. In the Select File dialog box, select a file and choose Partial Open to display the Partial Open dialog box. If you enter a file name at the Command prompt, additional prompts are displayed. Enter view to load on page 1419 or [? on page 1419] <*Extents*>: Enter a view name, enter ?, or press Enter to load the Extents view View to Load Opens the drawing with the geometry from the selected view loaded.
■ No on page 1419 PASTEASHYPERLINK Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing Creates a hyperlink to a file, and associates it with a selected object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste as Hyperlink Menu: Edit ➤ Paste as Hyperlink Summary First, select a document, such as a text, spreadsheet, drawing, or image file, and copy it to the Clipboard. Then, use this command to associate a hyperlink to that document with any selected object.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Paste as Block Menu: Edit ➤ Paste as Block Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Paste as Block from Clipboard. Summary The objects copied to the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing as a block at the specified insertion point. The block is given a random name. PASTECLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing.
Summary If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, the text is inserted as a multiline text (mtext) object using the MTEXT defaults. A spreadsheet is inserted as a table object. All other objects, except AutoCAD LT objects, are inserted as embedded or linked (OLE) objects. You can edit these OLE objects by double-clicking them in the drawing to open the application in which they were created. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats.
Summary The objects copied to the Clipboard are pasted into the current drawing at the same coordinates used in the original drawing. This command functions only when the Clipboard contains AutoCAD LT data from a drawing other than the current drawing. PASTESPEC Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing and controls the format of the data.
Sets file formats and linking options for data pasted from the Clipboard. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Paste Special Menu: Edit ➤ Paste Special Command entry: pastespec Summary You can either embed file data or link file data. Linked data is updated when you open the drawing. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, you can choose from the available formats.
As Displays applicable formats in which you can paste the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing. If you select the AutoCAD Entities option, the metafile graphics in the Clipboard are converted to AutoCAD objects. If the metafile graphics are not converted, the metafile is displayed as an OLE object. Display as Icon Inserts a picture of the application icon instead of the data. To view or edit the data, double-click the icon.
PDFADJUST Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Underlay Contrast, Fade, Monochrome, and Colors for the Background Adjust the fade, contrast, and monochrome settings of a PDF underlay. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Adjust Summary If you select a single PDF underlay, the default values for Fade, Contrast, and Monochrome are the current property settings of the selected underlay.
Monochrome Controls the color saturation of all linework while maintaining the luminance. When turned on, the linework appears in varying shades of gray starting at black if the background color luminance is 50 percent or more. If the background color luminance is less than 50 percent, then the colors are inverted, with the darkest linework displaying in white, and the lightest linework displaying in black.
-PDFATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Files as Underlays Attach a PDF underlay from the command line. Summary When you attach a PDF file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. TIP You can drag a PDF file onto the drawing window to start the PDFATTACH command. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Scale Factor Specifies the scale factor of the selected PDF underlay and the scale factor units. If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the underlay does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the underlay width in AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined.
Select one of more pages from the PDF file Displays all of the pages that are found in the PDF file. If the PDF file only contains a single page, that page is listed. You can select multiple pages by holding Shift or Ctrl and selecting the pages to attach. Path Type Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the PDF file, or No Path, and the name of the PDF file. For the No Path option, the PDF file must be located in the same folder as the current drawing file.
Specify on-screen If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value at the Command prompt. Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0. Show Details Found In Displays the path to the PDF file. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the PDF file is attached.
Summary When you select a PDF underlay, the PDF Contextual tab is displayed on the ribbon. Adjust Panel Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the underlay. Fade Controls the appearance of the linework. The greater the value, the lighter the linework in the underlay is displayed. Display in Monochrome Displays the underlay in black and white. Clipping Panel Create Clipping Boundary Deletes the old clipping boundary (if one exists) and create a new one.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Clip. Shortcut menu: Select a PDF underlay to clip, right-click and click PDF Clip. Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of an image outside the boundary that is hidden. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the FRAME system variable. The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the PDF underlay.
Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points that you specify for the vertices of a polygon. Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify for opposite corners. Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped either outside the boundary or inside the boundary. NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected PDF underlay when the old boundary is deleted.
PEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Polylines Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Polyline Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Polyline Toolbar: Modify II Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Polyline Edit. Summary Common uses for PEDIT include joining 2D polylines, converting lines and arcs into 2D polylines, and converting polylines into curves that approximate B-splines (spline-fit polylines).
If you enter y, the object is converted into a single-segment 2D polyline that you can edit. You can use this operation to join lines and arcs into a polyline. Before the selected spline is converted to a polyline, the following prompt is displayed: Specify a precision <10>: Enter a new precision value or press Enter The precision value determines how accurately the resulting polyline is to fit to the source spline. Valid value is an integer between 0 and 99.
2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) Quick Reference If you select a 2D polyline, the following prompt is displayed: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/Reverse/Undo]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command NOTE You can select a single arc or line segment, also called a subobject, within a polyline by pressing the Ctrl key when you click over it.
Add Joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the nearest endpoints. Both Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming if possible. Otherwise joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the nearest endpoints. Width Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline. You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option to change the starting and ending widths of a segment.
If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the result is one truncated polyline. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline, or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break. ■ Next on page 1438 ■ Previous on page 1438 Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode. Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
Straighten Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex. If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex.
Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode. Fit Creates an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices. The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses any tangent direction you specify. Spline Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed.
When a spline-fit curve is fit to a polyline, the spline-fit curve's frame is stored so that it can be recalled by a subsequent decurving. You can turn a spline-fit curve back into its frame polyline by using the PEDIT Decurve option. This option works on fit curves in the same manner as it does on splines. Most editing commands act the same when applied to spline-fit polylines or fit curves.
The SPLINETYPE system variable controls the type of spline curve approximated. Setting SPLINETYPE to 5 approximates a quadratic B-spline. Setting SPLINETYPE to 6 approximates a cubic B-spline. You can examine or change the fineness or coarseness of the spline ® approximation with the SPLINESEGS system variable, or you can use AutoLISP . The default value is 8. If you set the value higher, a greater number of line segments are drawn and the approximation to the ideal spline becomes more precise.
Reverse Reverses the order of vertices of the polyline. Use this option to reverse the direction of objects that use linetypes with included text. For example, depending on the direction in which a polyline was created, the text in the linetype might be displayed upside down. Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.
Edit Vertex Performs various editing tasks on one vertex of the polyline and segments that follow it. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed. Break Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex.
mode. If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X marker, the segment following that vertex is made straight if it is an arc. Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode. To remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then to extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0. Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode. Spline Curve Fits a 3D B-spline curve to its control points.
3D Polygon Mesh Selection (PEDIT) Quick Reference If you select a polygon mesh, the following prompt is displayed: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Edit vertex/Smooth surface/Desmooth/Mclose/Nclose/Undo]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command Mclose and Nclose are replaced by Mopen and Nopen if the polygon mesh is currently closed in the M or N direction.
Up Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the M direction. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Down Moves the X marker to the previous vertex in the M direction. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Move Repositions the vertex and moves the editing mark. Regen Regenerates the polygon mesh. Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode. Smooth Surface Fits a smooth surface.
Nopen Opens the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the N direction. Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session. PFACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
To make an edge invisible, you can enter a negative vertex number for the beginning vertex of the edge. You can create polygons with any number of edges. PFACE automatically breaks them into multiple face objects with the appropriate invisible edges. Faces with one or two vertices behave like point or line objects without the special properties of Point Display modes or linetypes. You can use them to embed wireframe images within a mesh.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current UCS Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit in the current viewport of the current UCS. UCS Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and regenerates the display.
World Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit on the screen of the world coordinate system. PLANESURF Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Creating Surfaces ■ Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces Creates a planar surface.
of the surface through the command, the surface is created parallel to the workplane. The SURFU and SURFV system variables control the number of lines displayed on the surface. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Object]: Specify the first point for the planar surface Specify other corner: Specify second point (other corner) for the planar surface Object Creates a planar or trimmed surface by object selection.
Toolbar: Draw Summary A 2D polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single planar object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two. NOTE At least two points must be specified to use the Close option. The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around and the smoothness of the vertices of a 2D polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 1 generates new polylines in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the completed polyline.
Endpoint of Arc Draws an arc segment. The arc segment is tangent to the previous segment of the polyline. The previous prompt is repeated. Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point. Specify included angle: Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering a negative number creates clockwise arc segments. Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point. Specify included angle: Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc segment. Specify length of chord: Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option.
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline. Width Specifies the width of the next arc segment. Specify starting width : Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending width : Enter a value or press ENTER The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, options are displayed. NOTE When Texture Compression is turned on, there is a reduction in the quality of the images in the drawing when they are plotted. Texture Compression does not affect viewports that are rendered. To identify if Texture Compression is enabled, enter 3dconfig, and click Manual Tune. Look at the Hardware Effects List in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box.
You can display more options in the Plot dialog box by clicking the More Options button.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Page Setup Displays a list of any named and saved page setups in the drawing. You can base the current page setup on a named page setup saved in the drawing, or you can create a new named page setup based on the current settings in the Plot dialog box by clicking Add. Name Displays the name of the current page setup. Add Displays the Add Page Setup dialog box, in which you can save the current settings in the Plot dialog box to a named page setup.
Plotter Displays the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. You can edit this text in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Plot to File Plots output to a file rather than to a plotter or printer.
select in the Page Setup dialog box is saved with the layout and overrides the PC3 file settings. The actual printable area of the page, which is determined by the selected plotting device and paper size, is indicated in the layout by a dashed line. If you are plotting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, the size of the plot is specified in pixels, not in inches or millimeters. Number of Copies Specifies the number of copies to plot. This option is not available when you plot to file.
Specify other corner: Specify a point Plot Offset Specifies an offset of the plot area relative to the lower-left corner of the printable area or to the edge of the paper, depending on the setting made in the Specify Plot Offset Relative To option (Options dialog box, Plot and Publish tab). The Plot Offset area of the Plot dialog box displays the specified plot offset option in parentheses.
Inch(es) =/mm =/Pixel(s) = Specifies the number of inches, millimeters, or pixels equal to the specified number of units. Inch/mm/pixel Specifies inches or mm for display of units in the Plot dialog box. The default is based on the paper size and changes each time a new paper size is selected. Pixel is available only when a raster output is selected. Units Specifies the number of units equal to the specified number of inches, millimeters, or pixels.
Name (Unlabeled) Displays the plot style table that is assigned to the current Model tab or layout tab and provides a list of the currently available plot style tables. If you select New, the Add Plot Style Table wizard is displayed, which you can use to create a new plot style table. The wizard that is displayed is determined by whether the current drawing is in color-dependent or named mode.
■ Wireframe. Plots objects in wireframe regardless of the way they are displayed on the screen. ■ Hidden. Plots objects with hidden lines removed regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. ■ Conceptual. Plots objects with the Conceptual visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. ■ Realistic. Plots objects with the Realistic visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. ■ Shades of Gray.
You can select from the following options: ■ Draft: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted as wireframe. ■ Preview: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one quarter of the current device resolution, to a maximum of 150 dpi. ■ Normal: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one half of the current device resolution, to a maximum of 300 dpi.
By default, the system variable honors the setting in the Page Setup and the Plot dialog boxes. Plot with Plot Styles Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and layers are plotted. When you select this option, Plot Object Lineweights is automatically selected also. Plot Paperspace Last Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. Hide Paperspace Objects Specifies whether the HIDE operation applies to objects in the paper space viewport.
Portrait Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Plot Upside-Down Orients and plots the drawing upside down. Icon Indicates the media orientation of the selected paper and represents the orientation of the drawing on the page as a letter on the paper. NOTE Drawing orientation is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system variable.
Access Methods Toolbar: Standard Menu: File ➤ Plot Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and click Plot. Command entry: plot Summary You can modify this page setup through the Page Setup Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed. New Page Setup Name Specifies a name for the new page setup. You can modify the new named page setup later through the Page Setup Manager.
Uses the changes you've made to the PC3 file in the current plot but does not save them in the PC3 file. Save Changes to the Following File Specifies the path of the PC3 file that you have changed. To preserve the original PC3 file, specify a new file name. Plot Job Progress Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Provides information about the status and progress of your plot job.
Summary A device can be a plotter or printer. With this dialog box, you can select a valid plotter or printer and update the existing PC3 file; you can also save a modified copy as a new PC3 file. The dialog box is displayed in the PLOT or PAGESETUP command in a layout configured for a PC3 file that contains an invalid or missing plotter or printer name. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Device For each selection you make under Printer Name, the corresponding device driver name is displayed in this column, as follows: ■ For a selected plotter or printer, this column displays the device driver name stored in the plotter or printer's PC3 file. ■ For a selected PC3 file, this column displays the device driver name stored in the PC3 file. ■ For a selection of None, this column displays no device name. No device will be substituted for the missing printer specified in the PC3 file.
Enter a layout name or [?] : Enter a page setup name < >: Enter an output device name or [?] : Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] : Enter file name: : Save changes to layout [Yes/No] : Proceed with Plot [Yes/No] : For information about these prompts, see the description for Yes. Yes Specifies detailed page settings for the Model tab or layout tab you are plotting.
Enter plot area [Display/Extents/Limits/Layout/View/Window] : Display Plots the view in the current viewport on the Model tab or the current view in the layout, depending on which tab you select to plot. Extents Plots all of the objects in the current viewport, except objects on frozen layers. From a layout tab, plots all the geometry in paper space. The drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting.
Enter plot style table name or [?] (enter . for none) : Enter a plot style table name, ? to view plot style tables, or . (period) for none All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the current plot style table and can be attached to the geometry. This setting replaces pen mapping in earlier versions of the program.
If you enter y, the current settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved. If you enter q, you are prompted for the shaded plotting quality and are given the option of providing a custom dpi. Then you are prompted to save the page setup with the added quality settings.
If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Plot Stamp Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Options for Plotted Objects Specifies the information for the plot stamp. Access Methods Command entry: plotstamp List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Stamp Fields Specifies the drawing information you want applied to the plot stamp. The selected fields are separated by commas and a space.
Includes the current plotting device name in the plot stamp information. Paper Size Includes the paper size for the currently configured plotting device in the plot stamp information. Plot Scale Includes the plot scale in the plot stamp information. Preview Provides a visual display of the plot stamp location based on the location and rotation values you have specified in the Advanced Options dialog box. You cannot preview the plot stamp any other way. This is not a preview of the plot stamp contents.
Save As Saves the current plot stamp settings in a new parameter file. Advanced Displays the Advanced Options dialog box, in which you can set the location, text properties, and units of the plot stamp. You can also create a log file, and set its location.
Advanced Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Options for Plotted Objects Determines the location, text properties, and units of the plot stamp. Access Methods Command entry: plotstamp Summary You can also create a log file and set its location. The dialog box is displayed when you choose the Advanced button in the Plot Stamp dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Determines the X offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the paper or the corner of the printable area, depending on which setting you specify. If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset value is calculated so that the plot stamp information fits within the designated paper size. If the offset value positions the plot stamp information beyond the printable area, the plot stamp text is cut off.
Plot Stamp Units Specifies the units used to measure X offset, Y offset, and height. You can define units using inches, millimeters, or pixels. Two sets of values for the plot stamp size and location are saved in the PSS file: one for the dimensionless file formats and the other for dimensional file formats. If the units you select in the dialog box are dimensional, then the dimensional values are displayed and modified.
-PLOTSTAMP Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Options for Plotted Objects If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. The settings in the PSS file are displayed as defaults for each prompt. You can use -PLOTSTAMP as part of a plotting script to modify plot stamp information for a drawing. LIst of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Write plot stamp to log file? [Yes/No] : Enter log file path : Location Determines the location of the plot stamp on the page based on offset, orientation, and relationship to either the printable area or the border of the paper. Location selections include and are relative to the printable area or the border of the paper, depending on what you specify at the prompt.
Enter measurement units [Inches/Millimeters/Pixels] : PLOTSTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Controls the named plot styles that are attached to the current layout and can be assigned to objects. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Edit Plot Style Tables Summary To use the PLOTSTYLE command, the drawing must be configured to use named plot styles.
Current Plot Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Specifies the plot style for new objects. Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Command entry: plotstyle ➤ Print ➤ Edit Plot Style Tables List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Plot Style Displays the current plot style.
Displays the available plot styles that can be assigned to an object, including the default plot style, NORMAL. A plot style is a collection of overrides for color, dithering, gray scale, pen assignments, screening, linetype, lineweight, end styles, join styles, and fill styles. Active Plot Style Table Sets the plot style table attached to the current layout. A plot style table is a collection of plot style definitions.
Access Methods Menu: Application menu Command entry: plotstyle ➤ Print ➤ Edit Plot Style Tables List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Styles Displays the available plot styles, including the default plot style, NORMAL. A plot style is a collection of property settings used in plotting. Original Displays the originally assigned plot style. New Displays the new plot style to be assigned. Active Plot Style Table Sets the plot style table attached to the current drawing.
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor. Attached To Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot style table is attached to. -PLOTSTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current plot style is "current" Enter an option [?/Current]: ?—List Plot Styles Lists the plot styles in the attached plot style table. Current Specifies the plot style to use for new objects.
Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Manage Plotters Menu: Application menu ➤ Print ➤ Manage Plotters Summary In the folder, you can start the Add-a-Plotter wizard, or double-click a PC3 file to open the Plotter Configuration Editor. ■ Double-click the Add-a-Plotter wizard to add and configure plotters and printers. ■ Double-click a plotter configuration (PC3 file) to start the Plotter Configuration Editor.
Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plotter Manager Command entry: plottermanager Plotter Configuration Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Modifies a PC3 file's plotter port connections and output settings, including media, graphics, physical pen configuration, custom properties, initialization strings, calibration, and user-defined paper sizes. You can drag these configuration options from one PC3 file to another.
Depending on your configured plotting device, additional options may be available on the Device and Document Settings tab. For example, when you configure a nonsystem plotter, you can modify the pen characteristics. ■ General ■ Ports on page 1497 ■ Device and Document Settings on page 1499 General Tab (Plotter Configuration Editor) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Contains basic information about the plotter configuration (PC3) file.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Plotter Configuration File Name Displays the file name you assigned in the Add-a-Plotter wizard. Description Displays information you want to include about the plotter.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot to the Following Port Sends the drawing to the plotter through the selected port. Plot to File Sends the drawing to the file specified in the Plot dialog box. AutoSpool Uses the AutoSpool utility to plot the drawing. AutoSpool is specified on the Files tab in the Options dialog box. Port List Displays a list and description of available ports, both local and network. If the port is a network port, the name of the network printer is also displayed.
Displays the network choices so you can connect to another instance of a nonsystem plotter. Configure Port Displays either the Configure LPT Port dialog box or the Settings for COM Port dialog box. Device and Document Settings Tab (Plotter Configuration Editor) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Controls many of the settings in the PC3 file. Click the icon for any of the nodes to view and change the specific settings.
NOTE Only the settings available for the configured device are displayed in the tree view. In addition, you might not be able to edit some settings if the device handles the setting through Custom Properties or doesn't support the capability. List of Options The following options are displayed. Media Node Specifies a paper source, size, type, and destination. Available settings depend on the supported features of your configured plotter.
Displays a list of available media destinations for the configured plotter, such as collating, cutting, and stapling. These options are available only for plotters that support this function. Physical Pen Configuration Node (for Pen Plotters Only) Controls the specific pens in the pen plotter. The lower pane of the Device and Document Settings tab displays a table used to describe the color, width, and speed of each pen in the plotter.
Black, or Other. If you choose Other, the Select Color dialog box is displayed, providing access to the full color palette. Use No Pen to indicate that there is no pen in a particular position. ■ Speed: Adjusts pen speed on a pen-by-pen basis. This feature is useful, for example, for slowing down pens that are skipping. Each pen manufacturer recommends a pen speed for each type of media. For best results, use those values. You can specify a pen speed in millimeters or inches per second.
Provides options for specifying the color depth, resolution, and dithering of vector output. Some of the Vector Graphics options are closely interrelated; changing an option can affect other available options. ■ Color Depth: Displays a list for choosing color depth for the configured plotter. The color depth options change as you change the resolution and dithering values. More color depth uses more memory and takes longer to plot. You can specify either color or monochrome output.
memory. Plotting as TrueType text prints faster and uses less memory; the plotter may use a different font for printing. ■ TrueType as Text: Plots TrueType text as text. ■ TrueType as Graphics: Plots TrueType text as graphics. Merge Control On raster plotters, controls the appearance of lines that cross. Merge control is not effective if your plotter is configured to plot everything as black or if you are using PostScript language.
\027 is interpreted and sent as a single character whose value is 27. The number 27 is the escape character. For example, \27%-12345X PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = PostScript\10 sends an HP PJL command to a dual-language laser printer before it's initialized and switches the printer into PostScript mode. The \027 sends an escape character and the \010 sends a line feed character. The remainder of the text string is sent literally.
Creates a customized paper size or changes the printable area of a standard or nonstandard paper size. With the Custom Paper Size wizard you can create a new paper size, or select from a list of available paper sizes (from a PMP file) if the plotter is not a Windows system printer. If the plotter is a Windows system printer, use Custom Properties. You can add, delete, and edit your paper size.
Plotter Calibration Starts the Plotter Calibration wizard. If you need to correct scaling discrepancies, you can adjust the plotter calibration using the Plotter Calibration wizard. See “Calibrate Plotters and Work with Custom Paper Sizes” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. NOTE You should perform a plotter calibration only if your drawings must be exactly to scale and your plotter or printer produces inaccurate plots. Plotter Calibration causes the program to rescale all plots sent to your plotter.
Configure LPT Port Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Specifies the time that the program waits for the plotter buffer to empty before sending more data. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plotter Manager Command entry: plottermanager Summary You specify how much time you want to elapse before you are prompted to cancel the plot. If your drawings are complex or your pen speed is very slow, set the timeout value higher than the default (30 seconds).
Specifies the baud rate, protocol, flow control, and hardware handshaking for serial ports on plotters that support these settings. NOTE The settings on your plotter must match the settings in the program or you cannot plot. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plotter Manager Command entry: plottermanager List of Options The following options are displayed. Baud Rate Specifies the baud rate. Use the fastest available baud rate. Protocol Displays the protocol settings available for your plotter.
Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plotter Manager Command entry: plottermanager List of Options The following options are displayed. CTS Enables Clear To Send handshaking. This monitors pin 5 of a 25-pin serial port or pin 8 of a 9-pin serial port. CTS is an input bit, monitored for an output from the plotter or printer. DSR Enables Data Set Ready handshaking. This monitors pin 6 of a 25-pin serial port, or pin 6 of a 9-pin serial port. DSR is an input bit, monitored for an output from the printer or plotter.
DTR Controls the Data Terminal Ready output pin. This sends a signal to the printer or plotter on pin 20 of a 25-pin serial port or on pin 4 of a 9-pin serial port. Disabled Disables the DTR line when the device is opened. Enabled Enables the DTR line when the device is opened. Handshake Enables DTR handshaking. PNGOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export Raster Files Saves selected objects to a file in a Portable Network Graphics format.
POINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Reference Points Creates a point object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Multiple Points Toolbar: Draw Menu: Draw ➤ Point Summary Points can act as nodes to which you can snap objects. You can specify a full three-dimensional location for a point. The current elevation is assumed if you omit the Z coordinate value. The PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables control the appearance of point objects.
PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and 1. A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height. A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures. A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size. After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE, the appearance of existing points changes the next time the drawing is regenerated. You can use MEASURE and DIVIDE to create points along an object.
Provides options to create and attach an indexed point cloud file. Summary The options in this command are the same options provided by the following commands and system variables: ■ POINTCLOUDATTACH on page 1514 ■ POINTCLOUDINDEX on page 1518 ■ POINTCLOUDDENSITY on page 2459 ■ POINTCLOUDLOCK on page 2459 List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Point Cloud panel ➤ Attach Point Cloud Menu: Insert ➤ Point Cloud ➤ Attach Toolbar: Insert Summary Opens the Select Point Cloud File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295. After you select a file and click OK, the Attach Point Cloud dialog box on page 1515 is displayed.
Summary Specifies the insertion point for the point cloud. The point cloud is inserted at the specified coordinates, based on the location of the Insertion object snap. If geographic location information exists in both the current drawing and the point cloud file, then you can insert the file based on that data. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the point cloud file attach. Browse Opens the Select Point Cloud dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295.
Inserts the point cloud based on the geographic data in the point cloud file and the drawing file. Lock Point Cloud Controls whether an attached point cloud can be moved or rotated. (POINTCLOUDLOCK on page 2459 system variable) -POINTCLOUDATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Import 3D Point Cloud Files Inserts an indexed point cloud (PCG or ISD) file into the current drawing from the Command prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
POINTCLOUDINDEX Quick Reference See also: ■ Import 3D Point Cloud Files Creates an indexed point cloud (PCG or ISD) file from a scan file. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Point Cloud panel ➤ Index Point Cloud Menu: Insert ➤ Point Cloud ➤ Index Toolbar: Insert Summary Displays the Select Data File and Create Indexed Point Cloud File dialog boxes, which are standard file selection dialog boxes on page 1295.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Lights panel ➤ Point Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ New Point Light Toolbar: Lights Summary Use point lights for general lighting effects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Enter intensity (0.00-max float) <1.0000>: Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect Enter status [oN/oFf] : Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources.
Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter color name(s) to list <*>: Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Enter Kelvin temperature <3600.0000>: Exit Exits the command option. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows.
Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a point light, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay. Enter attenuation type [None/Inverse linear/inverse Squared] : ■ None. Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the point light are as bright as objects close to the light. ■ Inverse Linear. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light.
Enter Color Book name: Exit Exits the command. POLYGON Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Rectangles and Polygons Creates an equilateral closed polyline. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Polygon Menu: Draw ➤ Polygon Toolbar: Draw List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Center of Polygon Defines the center of the polygon. Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle] : Enter i or c or press ENTER Inscribed in Circle Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the polygon lie. Specify radius of circle: Specify a point (2) or enter a value Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon.
You can specify the different parameters of the polygon including the number of sides. The difference between the inscribed and circumscribed options is shown. POLYSOLID Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Polysolid Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Polysolid Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Polysolid Toolbar: Modeling Summary You can create walls with straight and curved segments of constant height and width.
With the POLYSOLID command, you can convert an existing line, 2D polyline, arc, or circle to a solid with a rectangular profile. A polysolid can have curved segments, but the profile is always rectangular by default. You can draw a solid with POLYSOLID just as you would a polyline. The PSOLWIDTH system variable sets the default width for the solid. The PSOLHEIGHT system variable sets the default height for the solid. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Height Specifies the height of the solid. The default height is set to the current PSOLHEIGHT setting. Specify height : Specify a value for the height, or press ENTER to specify the default value The specified height value will update the PSOLHEIGHT setting. Width Specifies the width of the solid. The default width is set to the current PSOLWIDTH setting.
Specify second point on arc: Specify a point Specify end point of arc: Specify a point ■ Undo. Removes the most recent arc segment added to the solid. Close Closes the solid by creating a line or arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point of the solid. At least three points must be specified to use this option. Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the solid. Arc Adds an arc segment to the solid.
PRESSPULL Quick Reference See also: ■ Press or Pull Bounded Areas Presses or pulls bounded areas. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Press/Pull Toolbar: Modeling Summary Press or pull a bounded area by clicking inside the area. Then drag or enter a value to indicate the amount of extrusion. As you move the cursor, the extrusion changes dynamically. You can also press Ctrl+Shift+E and click inside an area to initiate the press or pull activity.
You can press or pull any of the following types of bounded areas: Bounded areas that can be pressed or pulled Areas that can be hatched by picking a point (with zero gap tolerance) Areas enclosed by crossing coplanar, linear geometry, including edges and geometry in blocks Closed polylines, regions, 3D faces, and faces of 2D solids that have coplanar vertices Areas enclosed by geometry (including 2D objects and edges of faces) that is coplanar to the face of a 3D solid.
PREVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Preview a Plot Displays the drawing as it will be plotted. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Preview Menu: Application menu Toolbar: Standard ➤ Print ➤ Plot Preview Summary The preview is based on the current plot configuration, as defined by the settings in the Page Setup or Plot dialog box. It shows exactly how the drawing will look when plotted, including lineweights, fill patterns, and other plot style options.
previewed. Texture Compression does not affect viewports that are rendered. To identify whether Texture Compression is turned on, look at the Hardware Effects List in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box. ■ Hardware Acceleration. When hardware acceleration is turned on or off, but does not support shadows, it is possible to preview a drawing that contains shaded viewports with unsupported hardware effects by the graphics card through software emulation.
Zoom Original Restores the initial full-sheet preview. Zoom Original works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor. Close Preview Window Closes the Preview window. PROJECTGEOMETRY Quick Reference See also: ■ Trim and Untrim Surfaces Projects points, lines, or curves onto a 3D solid or surface from different directions.
You can project any curve (line, arc, circle, ellipse, 2D polyline, 2D spline-fit polyline, 2D curve-fit polyline, 3D polyline, 3D spline-fit polyline, spline, or helix) onto any type of surface or solid. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Project to UCS Surface Modeling tab ➤ Project Geometry panel ➤ Project to UCS Projects the geometry along the positive or negative Z axis of the current UCS.
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties Menu: Modify ➤ Properties Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or modify, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties. Summary When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed. When no objects are selected, only the current settings of general properties are displayed. The Properties palette is displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Properties Menu: Modify ➤ Properties Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or modify, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties. Command entry: properties Summary When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed. When no objects are selected, only the current settings of general properties are displayed.
■ Click the Pick Point button to use the pointing device to change a coordinate value. ■ Click the QuickCalc calculator button to calculate a new value. ■ Click the left or right arrow to increase or decrease the value. ■ Click the {...} button and change the property value in a dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. Object Type Displays the type of object that is selected. Toggle Value of PICKADD Sysvar Turns the PICKADD system variable on (1) and off (0).
Anchor Right/ Anchor Left Attaches the Properties palette to an anchor tab base at the right or left side of the drawing area. The palette rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored palette is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. An anchored palette cannot be set to stay open. Auto-hide Causes a floating palette to roll open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When this option is cleared, the palette stays open.
Linetype Scale Specifies the linetype scale factor of the object (see LTSCALE). Plot Style Lists NORMAL, BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, plus any plot styles contained in the current plot style table (see PLOTSTYLE). Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the object. The list shows all available lineweights in the current drawing (see LWEIGHT). Hyperlink Attaches a hyperlink to a graphical object. If a description has been assigned to the hyperlink, the description is displayed.
Border Properties Controls the properties of the borders of the selected table cells. Lineweight Sets the lineweight to be used for borders that are displayed. If you use a heavy lineweight, you may have to change the cell margins. Linetype Sets the linetype to be used for borders that are displayed. Color Sets the color to be used for borders that are displayed. Double Line When checked, a double line border will be added to the selected cells. Spacing Determines the spacing of double-line borders.
Inside Horizontal Border Applies the border properties setting to the inside horizontal borders of the selected table cells. Bottom Border Applies the border properties setting to the bottom borders of the selected table cells. Left Border Applies the border properties setting to the left borders of the selected table cells. Inside Vertical Border Applies the border properties setting to the inside vertical border of the selected table cells.
Lighting Properties Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Light Properties Sets the properties of the lights. Summary Different properties area available depending on the lighting units (standard or photometric) and lighting type (Spotlight on page 1839, Pointlight on page 1518, or Weblight on page 2090). Other lighting types such as Freespot on page 817, Targetpoint on page 1928, and Freeweb on page 820 display similar properties.
Falloff angle (Spotlight and Freespot only) Specifies the outer extremity of the light, where it meets the darkness. Intensity Factor Magnifies the effect of the skylight. Filter Color Specifies the secondary color of the light. Represents the color of a physical filter over the lamp. Default color is white. When lighting is set to photometric units this represents a secondary color filter on the light. When lighting is set to generic lighting this represents the total color of the light.
Rotation Y Specifies a rotational offset of the web about the optical Y axis. Settings can be calculated by using the QuickCalc Calculator on page 1589 or by selecting a point. Rotation Z Specifies a rotational offset of the web about the optical Z axis. Settings can be calculated by using the QuickCalc Calculator on page 1589 or by selecting a point. Geometry Under the Geometry panel, the following property settings are available: Position X Specifies the X coordinate position of the light.
Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a spotlight, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay. ■ Inverse Linear (Standard lights only). Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is half as strong as at the point light; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter as strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity.
Samples (Soft sampled type only) Specifies the number of shadow rays for the light. Settings can be calculated by using the QuickCalc Calculator on page 1589. Visible Render (Soft sampled type only) Specifies whether the light shape is actually rendered. The default is No. Shape (Soft sampled type only) Specifies the shape of the lamp bulb. For the Spotlight distribution type selection under the General panel, options are Rectangle (default) and Disk.
Summary Dialog box for setting the Lamp Intensity for a photometric light. List of Options The following options are displayed. Lamp Intensity Represents the brightness of a lamp. More specifically, it represents the luminous intensity, or power in a particular direction. It is specified in candela by default (in both the SI and American units systems). Must select from one of the following radial buttons: ■ Intensity (Candela).
to talk about the illuminance at a specific distance from the lamp. So this requires an extra control to specify this distance and an additional affordance in the viewport to show the distance. Intensity Input Control Controls the intensity value. Distance When Illuminance is selected, displays the lux as a distance glyph in the viewport for the given light. Note: the text for the illuminance radio button will depend on the current lighting units.
Summary Dialog box for setting the Lamp Color for a photometric light. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Type In photometric mode specifies lamp color either as a CIE standard illuminant (D65 standard daylight) or as a Kelvin color temperature. ■ Standard Colors. Provides a fixed list of standard colors (spectra). ■ Kelvin Colors. Specifies a single temperature value for the color. (The color corresponds to the glow of an ideal blackbody at that temperature.
PROPERTIESCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Closes the Properties palette. Summary The Properties palette closes. PSETUPIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout. Summary The Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed in which you can select the drawing (.dwg), template (.dwt), or drawing interchange format (.
-PSETUPIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Page Setup Settings If you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. Enter file name: Enter user defined page setup to import or [?]: PSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work on the Model Tab In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. Summary The program switches from model space to paper space when you are working on a layout tab.
space to model space (see MSPACE), you can edit the model and views within the current layout viewport. You can make a viewport current by double-clicking inside it. You can switch to paper space by double-clicking an area of the paper space layout that is not within a viewport. When in paper space, you can also switch to model space by clicking Model on the status bar. If you are in model space, you can switch to the last paper space b clicking Paper on the status bar.
DWF and DWFx files can be viewed or plotted using Autodesk Design Review. PDF files can be viewed with a PDF viewer. Select an Exising Drawing Set Description If you enter +publish at the Command prompt, you can select an existing Drawing Set Descriptions (DSD) file from the Select List of Sheets dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295). The Publish dialog box opens and displays the drawing set saved in the DSD file under Sheets to Publish.
set to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file or sent it to the plotter named in the page setup for hardcopy output or as a plot file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Sheet List Displays the current drawing set (DSD) or batch plot (BP3) file. Load Sheet List Button Displays the Load Sheet List dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295), in which you can select a DSD file or a BP3 (Batch Plot) file to load.
Displays the Select Drawings dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box on page 1295), in which you can select drawings to add to the list of drawing sheets. The layout names from those files are extracted, and one sheet is added to the list of drawing sheets for each layout and model. The initial drawing sheet names are constructed from the base drawing name and the layout name or the word Model separated by a dash (-). Remove Sheets Button Deletes the selected drawing sheets from the list of sheets.
layouts. Select Import to import page setups from another DWG file through the Import Page Setups for Publishing dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). You have the option to set the page setup for model space sheets to 3D DWF or 3D DWFx. The 3D DWF option is not available for layout entries in the sheet list. Status Displays the status of the sheet when it is loaded to the list of sheets. Show Details Displays and hides the Selected Sheet Information and Selected Page Setup Information areas.
While this check box remains active for sheets that are set for 3D DWF publishing, no plot stamp is added to 3D DWF or 3D DWFx files even if the check box is checked. Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp Dialog Box on page 1481, in which you can specify the information, such as drawing name and plot scale, that you want applied to the plot stamp Publish in Background Toggles background publishing for the selected sheet/s.
Specifies options for publishing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Batch Plot Menu: File ➤ Publish Command entry: publish Summary Specifies general options for the published DWF, DWFx, or PDF file such as the file name, the save location, and layer information. List of Options Default Output Location (Plot to File) Specifies the output folder location where DWF, DWFx, PDF, and plot files are saved when you publish drawing sheets.
Merge Control Specifies whether overlapping lines merge (the colors of the lines blend together into a third color) or overwrite (the last plotted line obscures the line beneath it). DWF Data Options Lists and enables you to specify the data that you can optionally include in the DWF or DWFx file. Password Protection Specifies the following options for protecting DWF or DWFx files with passwords: ■ DisabledSpecifies that no password is required.
3D DWF Options Group By Xref Hierarchy Arranges objects by xref hierarchy in the viewer. If set to No, xrefs are listed in the viewer like any other objects. Default = No. Publish With Materials Most materials you have assigned to your model will be published to the 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file. If your material contains texture mapping, only the Diffuse Map is published along with its scale and orientation data. Default = Yes.
Block Source Drawings Displays all block source drawings that have been loaded into the Publish Block Template dialog box. Add Adds drawings to the list of block source drawings. Remove Removes selected drawings from the list of block source drawings. Scan for Blocks Scans block source drawings for unique definitions of blocks and their properties and attributes. Block Data to Publish Displays block data to publish.
Block Template Options Dialog Box (Publish) Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Batch Plot Menu: File ➤ Publish Command entry: publish Summary Specifies optional settings to include blocks within blocks and to include blocks within xrefs in the published DWF or DWFx file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Include Nested Blocks Includes blocks within blocks in the published DWF or DWFx file.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ Batch Plot Menu: File ➤ Publish Command entry: publish Summary Specifies the password to apply to the DWF or DWFx file. DWF or DWFx passwords are case sensitive. The password or phrase can be made up of letters, numbers, punctuation, or non-ASCII characters. WARNING If you lose or forget the password, it cannot be recovered. Keep a list of passwords and their corresponding DWF or DWFx file names in a safe place.
Summary Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the DWF Password dialog box. If the two passwords do not match, you must click Publish again to reenter the correct password.
-PUBLISH Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Publishing Access Method Command entry: -publish Summary The Command prompt version of PUBLISH provides an interface for publishing drawing sheets that can be controlled by a script. It also provides a simplified method for regenerating DWF or DWFx files or plotted output from existing DSD files. With the FILEDIA system variable set to 0 (or if you are running a script or other automation), enter -publish or +publish at the Command prompt.
When the publish job is complete, the details can be viewed in the Plot and Publish Details dialog box. A log file is written during the publish operation. The log file contains the drawing sheet name, layout name, full drawing name, path name, and status. The log file name is derived from the name of the sheet list file with CSV replacing the DSD file extension. NOTE Any existing log file is overwritten by a new log file without any warning message being displayed.
Publish to Web Wizard Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages Creates a formatted HTML page. Access Methods Button Menu: File ➤ Publish to Web Command entry: publishtoweb Summary You can choose from a number of different formatting options that control the layout of your completed HTML page. After creating an HTML page, you can use the wizard to publish the page to an Internet or intranet location.
Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu ➤ Drawing Utilites ➤ Purge Summary The Purge dialog box is displayed. If you enter -purge at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Unused named items can be removed from the current drawing. These include include block definitions, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles. Zero-length geometry and empty text objects can also be removed.
Summary Displays items that can be purged. List of Options The following options are displayed. Named Objects View Items You Can Purge Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current drawing that you can purge. Items Not Used in Drawing Lists the named objects that are not used in the current drawing and that can be purged. You can list the items for any object type by clicking the plus sign or by double-clicking the object type. You purge items by selecting the item to purge.
Purge Nested Items removes items only when you select one of the following options: ■ All Items or Blocks in the tree view ■ The Purge All button View Items You Cannot Purge Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current drawing that you can't purge. Items Currently Used in Drawing Lists named objects that cannot be removed from the drawing. Most of these objects are currently used in the drawing or are default items that cannot be removed.
Purge All Purges all unused items. -PURGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing. Summary The -purge command provides the ability to remove unused items from a drawing through scripts. -PURGE removes only one level of reference. Repeat -PURGE until there are no unreferenced, named objects. You can use PURGE or -PURGE at any time during a drawing session.
PYRAMID Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid Pyramid Creates a 3D solid pyramid. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Pyramid Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Pyramid Toolbar: Modeling Summary By default, a pyramid is defined by the center of the base point, a point on the middle of the edge, and another point that determines the height.
Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive. Use the Top Radius option to create a pyramid frustum. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Edge Specifies the length of one edge of the base of the pyramid; you pick two points.
Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive. Specify height or [2Point (Two Points)/Axis Endpoint] : Specify a height, enter an option, or press ENTER to specify the default height value ■ 2Point. Specifies that the height of the pyramid is the distance between two specified points.
Q Commands 17 QCCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of QuickCalc Closes the QuickCalc calculator. Summary Closes the QuickCalc calculator. QDIM Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Dimensioning Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Quick Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Quick Dimension Toolbar: Dimension Summary This command is particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions, or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
QLEADER Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Leaders Creates a leader and leader annotation. Summary It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER on page 1174 command to create leader objects. For more information about multileader objects, see Create and Modify Leaders.
Width If you set the text width value to 0.00, the width of the multiline text is unlimited. Tolerance If Tolerance is selected on the Annotation tab, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box is displayed. Use the dialog box to create the tolerance feature control frame. Enter block name or [?]: Enter the name, or enter ? to display a list of blocks defined in the drawing Insertion Point For a description of the insertion options, see -INSERT on page 944. Settings Displays the Leader Settings dialog box.
Annotation Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box) Annotation Type Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER leader annotation prompt. MText Prompts you to create multiline text (mtext) annotation. Copy an Object Prompts you to copy a multiline text, single-line text, tolerance, or block reference object and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it.
MText Options The options are available only when the multiline text annotation type is selected. Prompt for Width Prompts you to specify the width of the multiline text annotation. Always Left Justify Left-justifies the multiline text annotation, regardless of leader location. Frame Text Places a frame around multiline text annotation. Annotation Reuse Sets options for reusing leader annotation. None Does not reuse leader annotation.
Straight Creates straight-line segments between the points you specify. Spline Creates a spline object using the leader points you specify as control points. Arrowhead Defines the leader arrowhead. The arrowheads are also available for dimension lines (DIMSTYLE command). If you select User Arrow, a list of blocks in the drawing is displayed. Number of Points Sets the number of leader points that QLEADER prompts you to specify before prompting for the leader annotation.
Top of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the top of the top multiline text line. Middle of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the middle of the top multiline text line. Middle of Multiline Text Attaches the leader line at the middle of the multiline text. Middle of Bottom Line Attaches the leader line at the middle of the bottom multiline text line. Bottom of Bottom Line Attaches the leader line at the bottom of the bottom multiline text line.
Access Methods Button Menu: Application menu Toolbar: Standard ➤ New ➤ Drawing Summary QNEW starts a new drawing from the current default drawing template file and folder path specified in the Options dialog box on the Files tab. You can set the default drawing template file to any drawing template file or to None. When a default drawing template file is set to None or is not specified, QNEW displays the Select Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
Saves the current drawing using the file format specified in the Options dialog box. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Standard Menu: File ➤ Save Summary The QSAVE command is equivalent to clicking Save on the File menu. If the drawing is named, the program saves the drawing using the file format specified on the Open and Save tab of the Options dialog box and does not request a file name.
Menu: Tools ➤ Quick Select Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Quick Select. Summary The Quick Select dialog box is displayed. QSELECT filters selection sets by object type and property. For example, you can select all of the multiline text objects in a drawing that use a specified text style.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Utilities panel ➤ Quick Select Menu: Tools ➤ Quick Select Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Quick Select. Command entry: qselect List of Options The following options are displayed. Apply To Applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing or to the current selection set (if one exists). If Append to Current Selection Set is selected, the filtering criteria is applied to the entire drawing.
Operator Controls the range of the filter. Depending on the selected property, options can include Equals, Not Equal To, Greater Than, Less Than, and *Wildcard Match. *Wildcard Match is available only for text fields that can be edited. Use the Select All option to ignore all properties filters. For more information, see “Filter and Sort the List of Layers”. Value Specifies the property value for the filter.
Summary When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, each text and attribute object is displayed as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on reduces the time it takes the program to redraw and regenerate drawings that contain many text objects. QUICKCALC Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of QuickCalc Opens the QuickCalc calculator.
QuickCalc Calculator Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of QuickCalc Performs a full range of mathematical, scientific, and geometric calculations, creates and uses variables, and converts units of measurement. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ QuickCalc Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ QuickCalc Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: Right-click and click QuickCalc. Command entry: quickcalc List of Options The following options are displayed.
Angle of Line Defined by Two Points Calculates the angle of two points. Two Lines Defined by Four Points Calculates the intersection of four points. History Area Displays a running list of previously evaluated expressions. The History area shortcut menu provides several options, including copying a selected expression to the Clipboard. Input Box Provides a box where you enter and retrieve expressions. More/Less Button Hides or Displays all QuickCalc function areas.
Shortcut functions are common expressions that combine a function with an object snap. The following table describes the predefined shortcut functions in the list.
Defines a variable to store in the variables tree. List of Options The following options are displayed. Variable Type Specifies the type of variable. Constant Stores the new variable as a constant. Function Stores the new variable as a function. Variable Properties Defines the properties of a new variable. Name Stores the name of the variable. Names of constants cannot include spaces. Group With Stores the named variable in the selected category.
Settings The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the title bar. Move Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to move the dialog box. The dialog box does not dock. Size Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to drag an edge or a corner to make the smaller or larger. Close Closes the Markup Set Manager. Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor the calculator.
OK Closes the dialog box and applies the current settings to the variable. Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the current settings. Help Displays Help. QUICKCUI Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Edit Toolbars Displays the Customize User Interface Editor in a collapsed state. Summary The Customize User Interface Editor on page 376 is displayed in a collapsed state. Only the Customizations In and Command List panes are displayed.
Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Exit Summary Quits the program if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved. If the drawing has been modified, you are prompted to save or discard the changes before quitting. You can quit a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made no modifications or if you are willing to discard them. To save modifications to a read-only drawing, use the SAVEAS command to save the drawing under another name.
QVDRAWINGCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Open Drawings Closes preview images of open drawings and layouts in a drawing. Access Methods Button Shortcut menu: Click on the Quick View drawings toolbar. Summary Closes preview images of open drawings and layouts in a drawing. QVLAYOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing Displays preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing. Access Methods Buton Shortcut menu: Click on the status bar.
Summary Displays preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing in a row at the bottom of the application. QVLAYOUTCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing Closes preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing Access Methods Button Shortcut menu: Click on the Quick View drawings toolbar. Summary Closes preview images of model space and layouts in a drawings.
1598
R Commands 18 RAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Ray Menu: Draw ➤ Ray Summary The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the starting point and the through point. The prompt for a through point is redisplayed so you can create multiple rays. Press Enter to end the command.
Lines that extend to infinity in one direction, known as rays, can be used as references for creating other objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point: Specify a point (1) Specify through point: Specify a point for the ray to pass through (2) RECOVER Quick Reference See also: ■ Repair a Damaged Drawing File Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file.
Menu: File ➤ Drawing Utilities ➤ Recover Summary The program extracts as much material as it can from the damaged file. Files that can be recovered include DWG, DWT, and DWS files. Performing a recover on a DXF file will only open the file. In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), enter the drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. Results are displayed in the text window. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), RECOVER displays the following command prompt.
Results are displayed in the Drawing Recovery Log window. Each drawing file checked includes a Drawing Recovery Log that can be expanded or collapsed. The entire log can be copied to the Windows clipboard with the Copy to Clipboard button. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), RECOVERALL displays the following command prompt. Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File dialog box. NOTE The RECOVERALL command recovers or audits DWG, DWT, and DWS files.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Rotation = 0 Specify “first corner point” or [“Chamfer”/“Elevation”/“Fillet”/“Thickness”/“Width”]: Specify a point or enter an option First Corner Point Specifies a corner point of the rectangle. Other Corner Point Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally opposite corners. Area Creates a rectangle using the area and either a length or a width.
REDEFINE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Built-in Commands in Macros Restores AutoCAD internal commands overridden by UNDEFINE. Summary If a command has been undefined, you can still use it if you precede the command name with a period. Enter the name of an AutoCAD command turned off by the UNDEFINE command. REDO Quick Reference See also: ■ Correct Mistakes Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U command.
REDRAW Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Refreshes the display in the current viewport. Access Methods Command entry: 'redraw for transparent use Summary When BLIPMODE is on, marker blips left by editing commands are removed from the current viewport. REDRAWALL Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Refreshes the display in all viewports.
Summary When BLIPMODE is on, marker blips left by editing commands are removed from all viewports. REFCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Save Back Edited Referenced Drawings and Blocks Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [Save/Discard reference changes] : Saves back to the xref source drawing or to the block definition Save in the current drawing all changes made to objects in the working set. If you remove an object from the working set and save changes, the object is deleted from the reference and added to the current drawing. The Save Back Changes to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar automatically saves reference editing changes.
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Edit Reference Menu: Tools ➤ Xref and Block In-place Editing ➤ Edit Reference In-Place Toolbar: Refedit Summary The objects that you select from the selected xref or block are temporarily extracted and made available for editing in the current drawing. The set of extracted objects is called the working set, which can be modified and then saved back to update the xref or block definition. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Reference Editing Panel Save or Discard Changes (REFCLOSE on page 1606) Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. Add to or Remove From Working Set (REFSET on page 1613) Adds or removes objects from a working set during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. Reference Edit Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks Specifies the reference to edit.
Identify Reference Tab (Reference Edit Dialog Box) Provides visual aids for identifying the reference to edit and controls how the reference is selected. Reference Name Displays the reference selected for in-place editing and any references nested within the selected reference. Nested references are displayed only if the selected object is part of a nested reference. If multiple references are displayed, choose a specific xref or block to modify. Only one reference can be edited in place at a time.
If this option is checked, all the objects in the selected reference will be automatically included in the reference editing session. Prompt to Select Nested Objects Controls whether nested objects must be selected individually in the reference editing session. If this option is checked, after you close the Reference Edit dialog box and enter the reference edit state, you are prompted to select the specific objects in the reference that you want to edit.
-REFEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select reference: Select an xref or block in the current drawing Select nesting level [“OK”/“Next”] : Enter an option or press Enter OK Accepts the currently highlighted reference for in-place reference editing. If you are editing a block reference with attributes, you can enter y to display the attribute definitions and make them available for editing.
You can select objects in xrefs for editing even if they are on a locked layer in the reference file. When a reference object is part of the working set, you can unlock the object's layer and make changes to the object. Only the changes made to the object are saved back to the reference file; the xref layer remains locked in the reference file. NOTE Objects outside of the working set are not faded unless the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe during in-place reference editing.
Remove Removes objects from the working set. An object that is removed from the working set is removed from the reference when changes are saved back; the object is also removed from the current drawing. The Remove from Working Set button on the Refedit toolbar prompts you to remove objects from the working set without using REFCLOSE. REGEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport.
REGENALL Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text Regenerates the drawing and refreshes all viewports. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Regen All Summary REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in all viewports. It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance.
Access Methods Command entry: 'regenauto for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter mode [ON/OFF] : Enter on or off, or press Enter On Regenerates the drawing immediately if any suppressed regenerations exist in the queue and continues to regenerate automatically whenever you perform an action that requires regeneration. Off Inhibits regeneration of the drawing until you use the REGEN or REGENALL command, or set REGENAUTO to on.
Menu: Draw ➤ Region Toolbar: Draw Summary Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops. Closed polylines, lines, and curves are valid selections. Curves include circular arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, ellipses, and splines. You can combine several regions into a single, complex region.
Reinitializes the digitizer, digitizer input/output port, and program parameters file. Summary The Re-initialization dialog box is displayed. Re-initialization Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Digitizing Tablets Defines the I/O port and the device file for reinitialization. Access Methods Command entry: reinit List of Options The following options are displayed. I/O Port Initialization Reinitializes the I/O port for the digitizer.
RENAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Resolve Name Conflicts in External References Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles. Access Methods Button Menu: Format ➤ Rename Summary Named objects are categories of items such as layers, dimension styles, table styles, text styles, and so on. It is strongly recommended that you create standard naming conventions for them and save them in drawing template files. The Rename dialog box is displayed.
Access Methods Button Menu: Format ➤ Rename Command entry: rename List of Options The following options are displayed. Named Objects Lists named objects in a drawing by category. Items Displays items of the type specified in Named Objects. Old Name Specifies the item to be renamed. You can use the wild-card characters * and ? to rename groups of items. You can't rename some standard items, such as layer 0 and the CONTINUOUS linetype. Rename To Specifies the new name you want to assign to the item.
-RENAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Resolve Name Conflicts in External References List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary The RENDER command begins the rendering process and displays the rendered image in the Render Window on page 1622 or the viewport. By default, all objects in the current view in the drawing are rendered. If a named view or a camera view is not specified, the current view is rendered. If you enter -render at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Render Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Render Toolbar: Render Command entry: render Summary The Render Window is divided into the following three panes: ■ Image pane. Displays the rendered image. ■ Statistics pane. On the right side; shows the current settings used for the rendering.
■ History pane. At the bottom; provides a recent history of images rendered from the current model and a progress meter to display rendering progress. Separate render windows open for each drawing from which you are creating renderings. Rendering from any drawing always appears in its corresponding render window. From the Render Window, you can ■ Save the image to a file. ■ Save a copy of the image to a file. ■ Review the settings used for the current rendering.
Tools Menu Provides commands for zooming into and out of a rendered image. Zoom + Zooms into the rendering in the Image pane. When zoomed in, you can pan around the image. Zoom - Zooms out of the rendering in the Image pane. Image Pane Primary output target of the renderer. Zoom factor The zoom factor ranges from 1:64 to 64:1 in powers of two. You can change the zoom factor with the mouse wheel.
Any history entry that has a file name will be saved. History Pane - Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a history entry displays a menu that contains the following options: Render Again Restarts the renderer for the selected history entry. Save Displays the Render Output File dialog box where you can save the image to disk. If you’ve selected a temporary entry, saving converts it to a normal entry. Save Copy Saves the image to a new location without affecting the location stored in the entry.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Render Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Render Toolbar: Render Command entry: render Summary This dialog appears when you attempt to render a scene with texture maps whose path is no longer current. This can happen if the texture maps have been moved or deleted, or if the model has been placed on a system with a different drive mapping than the system on which it was created.
Render Output File Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Rendered Image Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Advanced Render Settings Toolbar: Render Command entry: rpref Summary The Render Output File dialog box is a standard file selection dialog boxes. You specify the file name of the image you want to save and the output file format. In this dialog box, you can only choose from raster image output file formats.
Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the Targa Image Options dialog box. TIF (*.tif) TIF (Tagged Image File) format is a multiplatform bitmap format. TIF is a common choice if you plan to send your output to a print service bureau or import the image into a page-layout program. Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the TIFF Image Options dialog box. JPEG (*.jpg) JPEG (.jpeg or .jpg) files follow the standards set by the Joint Photography Experts Group.
Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Advanced Render Settings Toolbar: Render Command entry: rpref Summary When BMP is chosen as the output format, the BMP Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 24 Bits (16.
Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Advanced Render Settings Toolbar: Render Command entry: rpref Summary When PCX is chosen as the output format, the PCX Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors.
Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Advanced Render Settings Toolbar: Render Command entry: rpref Summary When TGA is chosen as the output format, the Targa Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 24 Bits (16.7 Million Colors) Creates a 24 bit color image that uses a 16.
TIFF Image Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Rendered Image Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Advanced Render Settings Toolbar: Render Command entry: rpref Summary When TIF is chosen as the output format, the TIFF Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray.
8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 24 Bits (16.7 Million Colors) Creates a 24 bit color image that uses a 16.7 million color palette. 32 Bits (24 Bits + Alpha) Creates a 24 bit color image that includes an 8 bit alpha channel. Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit image files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image. Compressed Applies lossless compression to the file. Dots Per Inch Sets the dots per inch (dpi) for the saved image.
Toolbar: Render Command entry: rpref Summary When JPG is chosen as the output format, the JPEG Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Image Control Quality Sets the level of quality: the higher the quality, the larger the file size. In general, files compressed with the slider set to Best have compression ratios between 5:1 and 15:1. File Size Sets the size of file you want: the larger the file, the higher the quality.
Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Advanced Render Settings Toolbar: Render Command entry: rpref Summary When PNG is chosen as the output format, the PNG Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify render preset [Draft/Low/Medium/High/Presentation/Other] : Enter an option or press Enter Specify render destination [Render Window/Viewport] : Enter an option or press Enter Draft Draft is the lowest level standard render preset. This setting is intended for very fast, test renderings where anti-aliasing is bypassed and sample filtering is very low.
High The High we preset matches the Medium preset settings with regards to anti-aliasing, but sample filtering and raytracing is improved. Due to the improved sample filtering and raytracing, rendered images take longer to process, but the image quality is much better. Presentation The Presentation render preset is used for high quality, photo-realistic rendered images and takes the longest to process. Sample filtering and raytracing is further improved.
RENDERCROP Quick Reference See also: ■ Render Views, Selected Objects, or Cropped Content Renders a specified rectangular area, called a crop window, within a viewport. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Render Region Summary Renders what is inside a specified rectangular region within the viewport, and leaves the remainder of the render window intact. Use this command when you need to render a part of the model for testing settings and effects.
The current render destination and rendering procedure is ignored. After the second corner of the render region is selected, the rendering task proceeds and displays a viewport rendering with cropping. RENDERENVIRONMENT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Rendering Environment Controls visual cues for the apparent distance of objects.
Render Environment Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Rendering Environment Defines the cues for distance between objects and the current viewing direction. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Environment Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Render Environment Toolbar: Render Command entry: renderenvironment Summary Fog and depth cueing are atmospheric effects that cause objects to appear to fade as they increase in distance from the camera.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Fog and Depth Cue Enable Fog Turns fog on and off without affecting the other settings in the dialog box. Color Specifies the color of the fog. Fog Background Applies fog to the background as well as to the geometry. Near Distance Specifies the distance from the camera where the fog begins. It is specified as a percentage of the distance to the far clipping plane. The Near Distance setting cannot be greater than the Far Distance setting.
Summary The Adjust Rendered Exposure dialog box is displayed. When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the Adjust Render Exposure dialog box is not available because the exposure control is not turned on. Adjust Rendered Exposure Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow Defines the brightness, contrast, mid tones, and exterior daylight for the current viewport when rendering.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Adjust Exposure Command entry: renderexposure Summary Adjusts the render exposure settings for the current viewport using the most recent rendered output as a reference, without the need to wait for a new rendering. List of Options The following options are displayed. Adjust Render Exposure Brightness Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using photometric lighting.
RENDERPRESETS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Render Presets Specifies render presets, reusable rendering parameters, for rendering an image. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Render Presets Toolbar: Render Summary The Render Presets Manager is displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render ➤ Render Presets Toolbar: Render Command entry: renderpresets Summary Reusable rendering parameters are stored as render presets. You can choose from among a set of installed render presets or you can create your own custom render presets. Render presets are normally tailored for relatively quick, preview renderings. Others might be created for slower but higher quality renderings. List of Options The following options are displayed.
The Standard and Custom Render Presets trees can be re-ordered by dragging. Likewise, if you have multiple custom presets, you can re-order them in the same way. You cannot re-order the Standard presets inside the Standard Render Presets list. Property Panel Provides settings that are similar to the properties on the Advanced Render Settings palette. Preset Info Name Specifies the name of the selected render preset. You can also rename a custom preset. Standard presets cannot be renamed.
The values of the Min Samples and Max Samples lists are "locked" together so that the value of Min Samples can't exceed the value of Max Samples. An error dialog box is displayed if the Min Samples value is greater than the Max Samples value. Filter Type Determines how multiple samples are combined into a single pixel value. The filter types are: ■ Box. Sums all samples in the filter area with equal weight. This is the quickest sampling method. ■ Gauss.
■ Sort. Generates shadow shaders in order, from the object to the light. ■ Segments. Generates shadow shaders in order along the light ray from the volume shaders to the segments of the light ray between the object and the light. Shadow Map Controls if shadow mapping is used to render shadows. When on, the renderer renders shadow-mapped shadows. When off, all shadows are ray-traced. Sampling Multiplier Globally limits shadow sampling for area lights. This is part of the rendering preset data.
Radius Specifies the area within which photons will be used when illuminance is computed. Max Depth Limits the combination of reflection and refraction. Reflection and refraction of a photon stop when the total number of both equals the Max Depth setting. For example, if Max Depth equals 3 and the trace depths each equal 2, a photon can be reflected twice and refracted once, or vice versa, but it can’t be reflected and refracted four times. Max Reflections Sets the number of times a photon can be reflected.
Max Radius Sets the maximum radius within which final gathering is used. Reducing this value can improve quality at a cost of increased rendering time. Use Min Controls whether the Min Radius setting is used during final gather processing. When on, the minimum radius setting is used for final gather processing. When off, the minimum radius is not used. Min Radius Sets the minimum radius within which final gathering is used. Increasing this value can improve quality but increase rendering time.
■ Irradiance. Similar to the Density rendering, but shades the photons based on their irradiance. The maximum irradiance is rendered in red, and lower values render in increasingly cooler colors. BSP Renders a visualization of the parameters used by the tree in the BSP raytrace acceleration method. If a message from the renderer reports excessively large depth or size values, or if rendering seems unusually slow, this can help you locate the problem. ■ Depth.
reached, the geometry for some objects is discarded in order to allocate memory for other objects. Set Current Sets the selected render preset as the preset to be used by the renderer. Create Copy Copies a preset. The Copy Render Preset dialog box is displayed. Delete Deletes the selected custom render preset. Standard presets cannot be deleted. Thumbnail Viewer Displays a thumbnail image that is associated with the selected render preset.
Toolbar: Render Command entry: renderpresets Summary You can define your own custom presets by creating a copy based upon an existing render preset. You can specify a name and description of the copied preset. The new preset shows up as one of your Custom Render Presets in the Render Presets list in the Render Presets Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Give the copied preset a name. Preset names must be unique. Description Add a description of the custom preset.
Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Render Window Summary The Render Window is displayed, but a rendering of the current drawing is not initiated. If the drawing has a render history, you can view images that were previously rendered. RESETBLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a dynamic block reference in a drawing.
Summary You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing Esc or Backspace. Any error encountered while processing input from a script file causes the script to be suspended. If a script is suspended while the program is active, you can use RESUME to continue the script. REVCLOUD Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Revision Clouds Creates a revision cloud using a polyline.
NOTE REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value is multiplied by DIMSCALE to provide consistency when the program is used with drawings that have different scale factors. You can create a new revision cloud by dragging your cursor, or you can convert a closed object such as an ellipse or polyline into a revision cloud. Use revision clouds to highlight parts of a drawing that are being reviewed. The resulting object is a polyline.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Reverse Summary For example, when a linetype with text is specified with relative rotation in a LIN file, the text in the linetype might be displayed upside down. Reversing the vertices of the object changes the orientation of the text. The REVERSE command does not change the orientation of text where rotation is specified as upright For more information, see Text in Custom Linetypes.
Revolve path and profile curves can be: ■ Open or closed ■ Planar or non-planar ■ Solid and surface edges ■ A single object (to extrude multiple lines, convert them to a single object with the JOIN on page 959 command) ■ A single region (to extrude multiple regions, convert them to a single object with the REGION command) To automatically delete the profile, use the DELOBJ system variable.
NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. You cannot revolve objects contained within a block or objects that will self-intersect. REVOLVE ignores the width of a polyline and revolves from the center of the path of the polyline. The right-hand rule determines the positive direction of rotation. For more information, see Control the User Coordinate System in 3D. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
You can use lines, linear polyline segments, and linear edges of solids or surfaces as an axis. NOTE Select an edge subobject by pressing Ctrl while you select an edge. X (Axis) Sets the positive X axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction. Y (Axis) Sets the positive Y axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction. Z (Axis) Sets the positive Z axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction.
Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the revolve angle. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. REVSURF Quick Reference See also: ■ Construct Meshes from Other Objects Creates a mesh by revolving a profile about an axis.
The MESHTYPE system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default. Set the variable to 0 to create legacy polyface or polygon mesh. The density of the generated mesh is controlled by the SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 system variables. SURFTAB1 specifies the number of tabulation lines that are drawn in the direction of revolution.
The path curve is swept about the selected axis to define the mesh. The path curve defines the N direction of the mesh. Selecting a circle or a closed polyline as the path curve closes the mesh in the N direction. The vector from the first to the last vertex of the polyline determines the rotation axis. Any intermediate vertices are ignored. The axis of revolution determines the M direction of the mesh.
The point you use to select the axis of revolution affects the direction of revolution. The mesh in the following example was created by specifying a start angle of 0 degrees and an included angle of 90 degrees. RIBBON Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize the Ribbon Opens the ribbon window. RIBBONCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize the Ribbon Closes the ribbon window.
ROTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Rotate Objects Rotates objects around a base point. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate Menu: Modify ➤ Rotate Toolbar: Modify Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Rotate. Summary You can rotate selected objects around a base point to an absolute angle. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The axis of rotation passes through the specified base point and is parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS. Copy Creates a copy of the selected objects for rotation. Reference Rotates objects from a specified angle to a new, absolute angle. When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain parallel to the edges of the drawing area. ROTATE3D Quick Reference See also: ■ Rotate Objects Moves objects about a 3D axis.
Line Aligns the axis of rotation with the line selected. Rotation Angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified amount from the current orientation. Reference Specifies the reference angle and the new angle. The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle. Circle Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the circle (perpendicular to the plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle).
Last Uses the last axis of rotation. ■ Rotation Angle on page 1668 ■ Reference on page 1668 View Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction of the current viewport that passes through the selected point. ■ Rotation Angle on page 1668 ■ Reference on page 1668 X Axis, Y Axis, Z Axis Aligns the axis of rotation with one of the axes (X, Y, or Z) that pass through the selected point.
RPREF Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Render Settings Palette Displays or hides the Advanced Render Settings palette for access to advanced rendering settings. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ ➤ Advanced Render Settings Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Advanced Render Settings Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Advanced Render Settings Toolbar: Render Summary The Advanced Render Settings palette contains all of the primary controls for the renderer.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ ➤ Advanced Render Settings Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Advanced Render Settings Advanced Render Settings Palette | 1671
Toolbar: Render Command entry: rpref Summary You use the Advanced Render Settings palette to make rendering settings. You can also access the Render Presets Manager from the Render Settings palette. List of Options The following options are displayed. Render Preset List / Select Render Preset Lists standard render presets ranging from lowest to highest quality, up to four custom render presets and allows access to the Render Presets Manager.
■ TIF (*.tif). Multiplatform bitmap format. ■ JPEG (*.jpg). Popular format for posting image files on the Internet for minimum file size and minimum download time. ■ PNG (*.png). Still-image file format developed for use with the Internet and World Wide Web. Output Size Shows the current output resolution setting for the rendered image. Opening the Output Size list displays the following: ■ Up to four custom size settings.
Min Samples Sets the minimum sample rate. The value represents the number of samples per pixel. A value greater than or equal to 1 indicates that one or more samples are computed per pixel. A fractional value indicates that one sample is computed for every N pixels (for example, 1/4 computes a minimum of one sample for every four pixels). Default=1/4. Max Samples Sets the maximum sample rate.
Shadows Contains settings that affect how shadows appear in the rendered image. Enable Specifies if shadows are computed during rendering. Mode ■ Simple. Generates shadow shaders in a random order. ■ Sort. Generates shadow shaders in order, from the object to the light. ■ Segments. Generates shadow shaders in order along the light ray from the volume shaders to the segments of the light ray between the object and the light. Shadow Map Controls if shadow mapping is used to render shadows.
Photons/Samples Sets how many photons are used to compute the intensity of the global illumination. Increasing this value makes global illumination less noisy but also more blurry. Decreasing this value makes global illumination more noisy but less blurry. The larger the Samples value, the greater the rendering time. Use Radius Determines the size of photons. When on, the spinner value sets the size of photons. When off, each photon is calculated to be 1/10 of the radius of the full scene.
■ Off. Specifies the maximum radius is the default value of 10 percent of the maximum model radius, in world units. ■ View. Specifies the Max Radius setting in pixels instead of world units and is used for final gather processing. Max Radius Sets the maximum radius within which final gathering is processed. Reducing this value can improve quality at a cost of increased rendering time. Use Min Controls whether the Min Radius setting is used during final gather processing.
Photon Renders the effect of a photon map. This requires that a photon map be present. If no photon map is present, the Photon rendering looks just like the nondiagnostic rendering of the scene: the renderer first renders the shaded scene, then replaces it with the pseudocolor image. ■ Density. Renders the photon map as it is projected into the scene. High density is displayed in red, and lower values render in increasingly cooler colors. ■ Irradiance.
■ Top to Bottom. Tiles are rendered in rows, from right to left, top to bottom. ■ Bottom to Top. Tiles are rendered in rows, from right to left, bottom to top. Memory Limit Determines the memory limit for rendering. The renderer keeps a count of the memory it uses at render time. If the memory limit is reached, the geometry for some objects is discarded in order to allocate memory for other objects.
Summary The Output Size dialog box is displayed when you choose Specify Output Size from the Output Size list. From the dialog box, you set the output resolution of the rendered image. When you set a unique output size, it gets added to the Output Size list of the Render Settings palette. Four unique output sizes can populate the output size list, but they do not get saved with the current drawing and they are not maintained from one drawing session to the next.
RPREFCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Render Settings Palette Closes the Render Settings palette. Summary The RPREFCLOSE command closes the Render Settings palette. If the Render Settings palette is currently displayed, either in an auto-hidden state or open state, it is closed. RSCRIPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Run Slide Shows from Scripts Repeats a script file.
RULESURF Quick Reference See also: ■ Construct Meshes from Other Objects Creates a mesh that represents the surface between two lines or curves. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Primitives panel ➤ Modeling, Meshes, Ruled Surface Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Ruled Mesh Summary Select two edges that define the mesh. The edges can be lines, arcs, splines, circles, or polylines. If one of the edges is closed, then the other edge must also be closed.
X axis plus the current value of the SNAPANG system variable. For closed polylines, the ruled mesh starts at the last vertex and proceeds backward along the segments of the polyline. Creating a ruled mesh between a circle and a closed polyline can be confusing. Substituting a closed semicircular polyline for the circle might be preferable. The ruled mesh is constructed as a 2 by N polygon mesh.
First defining curve Specifies an object and start point for the new mesh object. Second defining curve Specifies an object and start point for the sweep of the new mesh object.
S Commands 19 SAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name. Summary The Save Drawing As dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Save the drawing under the current file name, or enter a different file name to save a copy of the drawing under that name. SAVEAS Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name.
Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Save As Summary The Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Enter a ™ file name and type. Saving a drawing to any DXF format affects performance. See Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats for a description of the limitations that result from saving to an earlier version. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, Tools ➤ Options displays the Saveas Options dialog box, which controls various DWG and DXF settings.
Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Save As Command entry: saveas Summary The Template Options dialog box displays automatically after you specify the files of type as *.dwt, enter the template file name, and click Save. List of Options The following options are displayed. Description Specifies a description for the drawing template. This description is displayed when you choose the template in the Startup dialog box or in the Create New Drawing dialog box.
Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Save As Command entry: saveas List of Options The following options are displayed. ■ DWG Options ■ DXF Options DWG Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box) Controls the drawing index and display of custom objects and specifies the default file format for saving drawings.
Layer Loads only layers that are on and thawed. Spatial Loads only the portion of the drawing within a clipped boundary. Layer & Spatial Optimizes performance by specifying that the program loads only layers that are on, thawed, and within a clipped boundary area. Save All Drawings As Specifies the default file format that drawings are saved to. If you change the specified value, all subsequent uses of SAVE and QSAVE save the drawing to the new file format.
Decimal Places of Accuracy Saves the file using the specified number of bits of precision. The default precision is adequate in most cases; however, you might need to increase this value for certain drawings and for certain applications. If you encounter problems loading a DXF file you create, try increasing the precision. The only disadvantage of higher precision is increased file size. SAVEAS Command Prompts Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Save. Menu: Tools ➤ Display Image ➤ Save Summary The Save Rendered Image dialog box is displayed. NOTE SAVEIMG is not available if the current rendering device does not support scan-line images. SCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Resize or Reshape Objects Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling.
greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish Specify base point: Specify a point The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same location as the selected objects change size (and thus move away from the stationary base point).
SCALELISTEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Scale List Menu: Format ➤ Scale List Command entry: 'scalelistedit for transparent use Summary A list of predefined scales are displayed in the Properties palette, the status bar, and other locations within the program.
Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Scale List Menu: Format ➤ Scale List Command entry: scalelistedit (or 'scalelistedit for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale List Displays the list of currently defined scales. Also displays temporary scales that are imported when xrefs are attached.
Delete Removes all unreferenced scales from the scale list and leaves the referenced scale when multiple scales are selected. NOTE You cannot delete a scale that is referenced by an object. Reset Deletes all custom scales and unused scales and restores the default list of scales defined in the Default Scale List dialog box on page 1375. Add Scale Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Scale Views in Layout Viewports Adds a new scale to the scale list.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale Name Name Appearing in Scale List Specifies the scale name to add to the scale list. Scale Properties Sets the ratio of paper units to drawing units. Paper Units When combined with the value of the drawing units, determines the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting. Drawing Units When combined with the value of the paper units, determines the ratio that defines the scale for viewing or plotting.
Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Annotation Scaling panel ➤ Scale List Menu: Format ➤ Scale List Command entry: scalelistedit (or 'scalelistedit for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale Name Lists the name of the currently selected scale in the Scale List area. NOTE You cannot change the name of a scale that is referenced by an xref. Name Appearing in Scale List Enter a descriptive or numeric name.
Add Adds a new scale to the scale list. Enter a ratio in the format n:m, where n is the number of paper units and m is the number of drawing units Delete Removes a specified scale. If a scale is current or supported by an object, it cannot be deleted. Reset Deletes all custom scales as a result and restores the default list of scales. SCALETEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Text Scale and Justification Enlarges or reduces selected text objects without changing their locations.
The base point options shown above are described in the TEXT command. The base point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline text except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are equivalent to the bottom left (BL) multiline text attachment point. Specify new model height or [“Paper height”/“Match object”/“Scale factor”]<0.5000>: Specify a text height or enter an option NOTE You can only specify a model height for non- objects.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Run Script Menu: Tools ➤ Run Script Command entry: 'script for transparent use Summary A script is a text file with an .scr file extension. Each line of the script file contains a command that can be completed at the Command prompt, including alternative versions of commands that normally display dialog boxes. The Select Script File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Selects one or more 3D objects. Selecting several objects creates separate regions for each object. Specify the first point on the sectioning plane using one of the following methods: ■ Object ■ Z Axis ■ View ■ XY ■ YZ ■ ZX ■ 3points Object Aligns the sectioning plane with a circle, ellipse, circular or elliptical arc, 2D spline, or 2D polyline segment.
■ Point on the section plane. Sets the first point on the plane. ■ Point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane. Specifies a point that defines the axis that is perpendicular to the plane. View Aligns the sectioning plane with the viewing plane of the current view. XY Aligns the sectioning plane with the XY plane of the current UCS. YZ Aligns the sectioning plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS. ZX Aligns the sectioning plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS.
3points Uses three points to define the sectioning plane: SECTIONPLANE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Section Objects Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
Summary Section plane objects create sections of 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. Use live sectioning with section plane objects to analyze a model, and save sections as blocks for use in layouts. List of Options The following options are displayed. Face or Any Point to Locate Section Line Specifies a face to establish the plane of the section object. Alternatively, you can select any point on the screen that is not on a face to create a section object independent of the solid or surface.
A section object that contains all 3D objects is created with the specified orientation relative to the UCS (not the current view). This option creates a section object in the Section Plane state with live sectioning turned on. ■ Align section to.
Section Plane Ribbon Contextual Panel Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify a Section View Provides ribbon access to tools that modify section plane objects. Access Methods Pointing device: Select a section line Section Panel Live Section (LIVESECTION command) Turns on live sectioning for a selected section object. Add Jog (SECTIONPLANEJOG command) Adds a jogged segment to a section object. Generate Section (SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK command) Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks.
Adds a jogged segment to a section object. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane Jog Shortcut menu: Right-click a section line ➤ Add Jog to Section Summary You can insert a jog, or angle, into a section object as you create it. The jog is created on the section line. The jogged segment is created at a 90-degree angle to the section line. NOTE The SECTIONPLANEJOG command was previously called JOGSECTION.
SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Section Object States and Properties Sets display options for the selected section plane. Access Methods Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ ➤ Section Plane Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click a section line. Click Live Section Settings. Summary The Section Settings dialog box is displayed. Section Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Section Object States and Properties Sets display options for section planes.
Access Methods Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Section panel ➤ ➤ Section Plane Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click a section line. Click Live Section Settings. Command entry: sectionplanesettings Summary The Section Settings dialog box contains display settings for creating 2D and 3D sections from the Generate Section / Elevation dialog box and for live sectioning. All settings are stored with the section object. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Select Section Plane Temporarily closes the Section Settings dialog box so that you can select a section object in the drawing area. Setting type Specifies which setting types are displayed in the properties list. 2D Section / Elevation Block Creation Settings Determines how a 2D section from a 3D object is displayed when generated. 3D Section Block Creation Settings Determines how a 3D object is displayed when generated.
■ Show. (Available for 3D section blocks only.) Sets whether the intersection boundary is displayed. Intersection Fill Sets the optional fill that is displayed inside the boundary area of the cut surface where the section object intersects the 3D object. ■ Show. Sets whether the intersection fill is displayed. ■ Face Hatch. Sets the hatch pattern to be used for the face of the cut surface. To select a pattern from a list, click Select Hatch Pattern Type. ■ Angle. Sets the hatch angle.
■ Layer. Sets the layer of the component. Select an existing layer, or select *LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box. ■ Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. ■ Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. ■ Plot Style. (Available for 2D and 3D section blocks only.
*LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box. ■ Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. ■ Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. ■ Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value. ■ Face Transparency. (Live Section only.) Sets the percentage of transparency of the face created where the live section object interfaces with the 3D objects. ■ Edge Transparency.
Access Methods Pointing device: In the Section Settings dialog box, Layer list, click New Layer Name Settings. Summary By default, all section block geometry is placed on Layer 0 (zero). However, you can specify suffix or prefix labels to help organize section block components, such as intersection boundaries and fill.
Added Text Type Specifies whether or how identifying text is added to the layer name for the section block component. ■ None. No additional text is added to the layer name. The section block geometry is placed on the same layer as the original geometry. ■ Prefix. If the Layer property is specified as *ObjectByLayer* in the Section Settings dialog box, the label is added in front of the layer name. ■ Suffix.
Generate Section / Elevation Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Section Objects Saves 2D and 3D sections as blocks, Access Methods Button 1716 | Chapter 19 S Commands
Ribbon: Mesh Modeling ➤ Section ➤ Generate Section Shortcut menu: Right-click a section line. Click Generate 2D/3D Section. Command entry: sectionplanetoblock Summary Specify the display settings for the cross sections that you save and reuse. List of Options The following options are displayed. Section Plane Select Section Plane Closes the dialog box so that you can select a section plane to modify or save as a block.
Replace Existing Block Replaces an existing block in the drawing with the newly generated section. Select Block Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the block to be replaced in the drawing. When you finish selecting the block, press Enter to redisplay the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box. Export to a File Saves the section to an external file. Filename and Path Specifies a file name and path where the section will be saved. Buttons Section Settings Opens the Section Settings Dialog Box.
Security Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Protect and Sign Drawings Specifies security settings to be used when your drawing is saved. Access Methods Command entry: securityoptions List of Options The following options are displayed. Password Tab (Security Options Dialog Box) Adds a password to a drawing when the drawing is saved. Password or Phrase to Open This Drawing Adds, changes, or removes a password the next time the drawing is saved.
Attach Digital Signatures After Saving Drawing Attaches a digital signature to a drawing when the drawing is saved. Select a Digital ID (Certificate) Displays a list of digital IDs that you can use to sign files. Includes information about the organization or individual to whom the digital ID was issued, the digital ID vendor who issued the digital ID, and when the digital ID expires.
Advanced Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Protect Drawings with Encryption Selects an encryption provider and key length for drawings that you protect with a password. Access Methods Command entry: securityoptions List of Options The following options are displayed. Choose an Encryption Provider Sets a level of encryption for a drawing. You can choose from encryption providers supplied by your operating system. Choose a Key Length Sets a key length.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Content panel ➤ Seek Design Content. Shortcut menu: Right-click on the Tool palette, or a block, and click Seek Design Content. Summary Product design information that is available on Autodesk Seek depends on what content providers, both corporate partners and individual contributors, publish to Autodesk Seek. Content could include 3D models and 2D drawings, specifications, brochures, or descriptions of products or components.
At the Select Objects prompt in a subsequent command, use the Previous option to retrieve the previous selection set. You can also press and hold the Ctrl key to select original individual forms that are part of composite solids or vertices, edges, and faces on 3D solids. You can select one of these subobjects, or create a selection set of more than one subobject. Your selection set can include more than one type of subobject. To view all options, enter ? at the Command prompt.
Crossing Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by two points. A crossing selection is displayed as dashed or otherwise highlighted to differentiate it from window selection. Box Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points. If the rectangle's points are specified from right to left, Box is equivalent to Crossing. Otherwise, Box is equivalent to Window.
CPolygon Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined by specifying points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. The last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times. CPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable. Group Selects all objects within a specified group. Add Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be added to the selection set by using any of the object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default methods.
Previous Selects the most recent selection set. The Previous selection set is cleared by operations that delete objects from the drawing. NOTE The Previous selection set is ignored if you switch spaces. Undo Cancels the selection of the object most recently added to the selection set. Auto Switches to automatic selection: pointing to an object selects the object. Pointing to a blank area inside or outside an object forms the first corner of a box defined by the Box method.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select an object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Select Similar. Command entry: selectsimilar Summary Selects similar objects of the same type based on specified matching properties, such as the color or block name. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects or [SEttings]: Use an object selection method and press Enter The Settings option displays the Select Similar Settings dialog box.
Plot style Considers objects with matching plot styles to be similar. Object style Considers objects with matching styles (such as text styles, dimension styles, and table styles) to be similar. Name Considers referenced objects (such as blocks, xrefs, and images) with matching names to be similar. SETBYLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Changes the property overrides of selected objects to ByLayer.
You can specify which properties are changed to ByLayer, including color, linetype, lineweight, and materials. SetByLayer Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Changes property overrides for color, linetype, lineweight, material, plot style, and transparency to ByLayer for selected objects and inserted blocks on unlocked layers.
Changes the color of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=1) Linetype Changes the linetype of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=2) Lineweight Changes the lineweight of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=4) Material Changes the material of selected objects to ByLayer. (SETBYLAYERMODE=8) Plot Style Changes the plot style of selected objects to ByLayer. This option is available in named plot style drawings.
Set Default i-drop Content Type Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use i-drop Access Methods Command entry: setidrophandler Summary Specifies the default type of i-drop content accepted by the current Autodesk application. The list contains the available content types for installed Autodesk products that provide this i-drop functionality. The default content type determines the type of content that is inserted in your drawing.
List of Options The following options are displayed. SETVAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Enter Commands on the Command Line Lists or changes the values of system variables. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Set Variable Command entry: 'setvar for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter variable name or [?] : Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press Enter Variable Name Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set.
SHADEMODE Quick Reference See also: See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Starts the VSCURRENT command. Summary Prompts for the VSCURRENT command are displayed. -SHADEMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model See also: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [2D wireframe/3D wireframe/Hidden/Flat/Gouraud/fLat+edges/gOuraud+edges] : 2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries.
Flat Shaded Shades the objects between the polygon faces. The objects appear flatter and less smooth than Gouraud-shaded objects. Materials that you have applied to the objects show when the objects are flat shaded. Gouraud Shaded Shades the objects and smooths the edges between polygon faces. This gives the objects a smooth, realistic appearance. Materials that you have applied to the objects show when the objects are Gouraud shaded. Flat Shaded, Edges On Combines the Flat Shaded and Wireframe options.
SHAREWITHSEEK Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Autodesk Seek to Add and Share Drawings Uploads blocks or drawings to the Autodesk Seek website. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Autodesk Seek panel ➤ Share with Autodesk Seek Menu: File ➤ Share with Autodesk Seek Shortcut menu: Right-click on a block and click Share with Autodesk Seek Summary Publish single blocks or entire drawings to Autodesk Seek.
Uploads the chosen block or current drawing to the Autodesk Seek website. Drawings can include 3D models and 2D drawings. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Autodesk Seek panel ➤ Share with Autodesk Seek Menu: File ➤ Share with Autodesk Seek Shortcut menu: Right-click on a block and click Share with Autodesk Seek Command entry: sharewithseek List of Options The following options are displayed. Share the Selected Block Select a block to upload to the Autodesk Seek website.
Selects the current drawing (not including external references) for upload to the Autodesk Seek website. If you choose to use the last saved version of the file, it uploads the file in its current file format. Preview Displays a preview image of the selected block or the current drawing (if available). SHEETSET Quick Reference See also: ■ Quick Start for Sheet Sets Opens the Sheet Set Manager.
Sheet Set Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Sheet Set Displays and organizes named collections of drawing sheets Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Summary The Sheet Set Manager is not fully functional if ■ The command is active; ■ No drawing is open; ■ The sheet set is locked by another user; or ■ A lock icon displayed in front of the sheet set name in the Sheet Set Manager indicates that the sheet s
Sheet List Control The Sheet List control displays the name of the current sheet set, or, if no sheet sets are open, the Open option. The Sheet List control provides the following options for all tabs: Names of Open Sheet Sets Lists all open sheet sets, if any. A check is displayed next to the current sheet set. Recent Displays a list of recently opened sheet sets. New Sheet Set Starts the Create Sheet Set wizard. Open Displays the Open Sheet Set standard file selection dialog box.
Publish to DWF Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWF file. Publish to DWFx Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWFx file. Publish to PDF Publishes selected sheets or a sheet set to a specified DWFx file. Publish to Plotter Automatically publishes the selected sheets to the default plotter or printer.
Import Layout as Sheet Displays the Import Layouts as Sheets dialog box. Include Plot Stamp Turns the plot stamp on or off for the selected sheet set, subset, or sheet. Include for Publish Includes the sheet for publishing. Insert Sheet List Table Displays the Insert Sheet List Table dialog box. Manage Page Setups Displays the Page Setup Manager dialog box. New Sheet Displays the New Sheet dialog box.
template (DWT) file designated to be the source of the page setup override information. Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp dialog box. Publish to DWF Publishes the selected sheets or the sheet set to a specified DWF file. Publish to Plotter Automatically publishes the selected sheets to the default plotter or printer. Remove Subset Removes the currently selected subset from the organization of the sheet set. Rename & Renumber Displays the Rename & Renumber Sheet dialog box.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset Summary The Sheet Views tab displays an ordered list of views used in the current sheet set. You can organize these views under headings, called categories, that you create. NOTE Only sheet views created in AutoCAD 2005 or later are listed on the Sheet Views tab.
Properties (View Category) Displays the View Category dialog box. Rename Renames the selected sheet view category. Rename & Renumber Displays the Rename and Renumber View dialog box where you can renumber and retitle the selected sheet view. Set Category Reassigns the selected sheet view to a category that you specify.
checks all drawing files that are expanded for new or removed model space views. Add New Location Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection dialog box, in which you can add a folder location to the sheet set. Shortcut Menu Options Add New Location Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection dialog box where you can add a folder location to the sheet set. eTransmit Displays the Create Transmittal dialog box. Open File Opens the selected drawing (DWG) file.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset Summary You can organize sheets by dragging them to different subsets. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Specifies the name of this subset and the name of the sheet storage folder for this subset if Create Folders Relative to Parent Subset Storage Location is selected. Publish Sheets in Subset Conforms to the current settings for sheet set publishing. New Sheet Location Specifies the folder location for all new drawing (DWG) files containing sheets that are associated with this subset.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset Summary When a sheet is selected, it is included for publishing.
Select Layout as Sheet Template Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Specifies the folder path, drawing template (DWT) file, and layout name to be used for creating new sheets. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset List of Options The following options are displayed.
Select a Layout to Create New Sheets Lists and specifies the name of the layout in the drawing template file to be used for new sheets. New Sheet Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Creates a new sheet in the current sheet set by creating a new drawing (DWG) file that includes a layout tab with the same name as the drawing.
Number Specifies the sheet number. It is recommended that you do not fill in the sheet number when you first create a sheet. By default the drawing name and layout name of the new sheet will be the sheet number together with sheet title. You can remove the sheet number from the file name when you create the new sheet, but the sheet number will still be in the layout name. Sheet Title Specifies the sheet title, which corresponds to an identically named layout tab in the new drawing.
Specifies a sheet number, sheet title, and other properties for a sheet in a sheet set. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset List of Options The following options are displayed. Number Specifies the sheet number of the selected sheet. Sheet Title Specifies the sheet title of the selected sheet. Layout Name Specifies the name of the layout associated with the selected sheet.
Specifies the name of the drawing file associated with the selected sheet. Folder Path Displays the folder path for the drawing file. Rename Layout to match Sheet Title When checked, changes the layout name to match the sheet title. Prefix with Sheet Number When checked, changes the layout name to a new name formed by adding the sheet number to the beginning of the sheet title. Rename Drawing File to match Sheet Title When checked, changes the drawing file name to match the sheet title.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset List of Options The following options are displayed. Number Specifies the sheet number of the selected view. View Title Specifies the view title of the selected view. Previous Loads the previous view into this dialog box. Next Loads the next view into this dialog box.
Provides a method for quickly importing layouts into a sheet set, and specifying which layout tab is to be used as the sheet. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset Summary If a layout already belongs to a sheet set, you must create a copy of the drawing containing the layout to import it. List of Options The following options are displayed.
List of Layouts in Selected Drawing Lists all available layouts in the specified drawing file. Click a check box to select a layout. Prefix Sheet Titles with File Name When checked, automatically adds the drawing file name to the beginning of the sheet title. Import Checked Imports a layout from the list only if it displays a check mark. Insert Sheet List Table Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Creates a table listing the sheets in the sheet set.
NOTE Insert Sheet List Table on the sheet set shortcut menu is not available if the Model tab is active, or if the current layout is not a sheet in the current sheet set. List of Tabs This dialog box contains the following tabs. ■ Table Data Tab ■ Subsets and Sheets Tab List of Options The following options are displayed. Table Style Name Specifies the table style to be used for the table. Table Style Preview Displays a preview of the currently selected table style.
Table Data Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Displays options for the table data. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset List of Options The following options are displayed. Title Text Specifies the name of the title of the sheet list table.
Column Settings Area Displays a list of the column definitions in the sheet list table. Each line in the list represents a column. The top-to-bottom order of the list represents how the columns will be displayed in the table (left to right). Data Type Column Selecting a column definition and then clicking on an entry in the Data Type column displays a list. From this list, you can change the type of information that is going to be displayed in the columns of the sheet list table.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset List of Options The following options are displayed. Populate From Sheet Selection Drop-Down Menu Sets the check state of the items in the view based on a previous saved sheet selection. Sheet Set Tree View Displays the sheet set subsets that are to be updated automatically.
Edit Sheet List Table Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Allows you to edit a sheet list table that exists in the current drawing. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select any cell in Sheet List Table ➤ Right-click to open the shortcut menu ➤ Edit Sheet List Table Settings Summary The Edit Sheet List Table Settings dialog box gives you access to all the settings found on the Insert Sheet List Table dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Specifies the table style to be used for the table. The Browse button displays the Table Style dialog box. Table Style Sample Area Displays a sample of the currently selected table style. Show Subheader When checked, displays the names of the subsets, dividing the sheet list table into sections. Table Data Settings Displays options for the table data. Title Text Specifies the name of the title of the sheet list table. Column Settings Area Displays a list of the column definitions in the sheet list table.
Sheet Set Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Displays information that is specific to the selected sheet set.
Summary You can click on each field to display a description at the bottom of the dialog box. This includes information such as the path and file name of the sheet set data (DST) file, the paths of the folders that contain the drawing files associated with the sheet set, and any custom properties associated with the sheet set List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Displays the name of the sheet set. Sheet Set Data File Displays the path and file name of the sheet set data (DST) file.
Edit Custom Properties Displays the Sheet Set Custom Properties dialog box. Sheet Set Custom Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets Lists the custom properties associated with the current sheet set. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset List of Options The following options are displayed.
Delete Removes the selected custom property from the sheet set. Add Custom Property Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets Creates a custom property to be associated with the current sheet set or with each sheet.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Specifies the name of a new custom property. Default Value Specifies a value for the custom property. Owner Specifies whether the custom property belongs to the sheet set or to a sheet. Resource Drawing Locations Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize a Sheet Set Displays a list of folders that are available for the current sheet set.
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset Summary You can add and remove folder locations to control which drawing files are available for the current sheet set. List of Options The following options are displayed. Add Displays the Browse for Folder standard file selection dialog box, in which you can add a folder location to the list. Delete Removes the selected folder from the list.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset Summary You can enter a new value to modify any available sheet property. List of Options The following options are displayed. Sheet and Sheet Custom Properties Displays the properties of the selected sheet. Also displays custom properties, if any. You can enter a new value to modify any sheet property.
you can modify the path and file name in Expected Layout. This operation reassociates the sheet with the sheet set. Rename Options Displays the options for renaming the selected sheet. These settings are the same as those in Rename & Renumber Sheet dialog box on page 1751. New Sheet Selection Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets Saves a named selection of sheets for future operations.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Enter the Sheet Selection Name Specifies a name for the sheet selection. Sheet Selections Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets Renames or deletes saved sheet selections. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset List of Options The following options are displayed.
Sheet Selections Specifies the sheet selection that you want to rename or delete. Rename Renames the selected sheet selection. Delete Deletes the selected sheet selection. View Category Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize a Sheet Set Creates a new view category in a sheet set.
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset Summary You can organize views by dragging them under different view categories. List of Options The following options are displayed. Category Name Specifies the name of a new view category. Select the Callout Blocks to be Used in this Category Provides a method for listing the callout blocks appropriate to the current view category.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset Summary This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Add Blocks button in the View Category dialog box, or by clicking the [...] button next to Callout blocks in the Sheet Set Properties dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed. List of Blocks Displays the list of blocks available for use with the current sheet set.
Select Block Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Adds a new label block or callout blocks for use in the current sheet set. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Sheet Set Manager Toolbar: Standard Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Sheet Set Manager Command entry: sheetset List of Options The following options are displayed.
Uses the entire specified drawing file or drawing template file as the block definition. Choose Blocks in the Drawing File Uses a selected block definition from the specified drawing file or drawing template file. Preview Displays a preview image when a single block is selected. SHEETSETHIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Sheet Set Closes the Sheet Set Manager. SHELL Quick Reference See also: ■ Define External Commands Accesses operating system commands.
WARNING Do not use the SHELL command to delete lock files (file name extension .??k) or temporary files (file name extensions .ac$ or .$a). Do not use SHELL to run chkdsk, reset the serial I/O ports, or run external programs that require disk swapping while editing a drawing stored on a floppy disk. Load Terminate-and-Stay-Resident programs into memory before starting this program. SHOWPALETTES Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows Restores the display of hidden palettes.
Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ View Digital Signature Details Displays information about a digital signature. Access Methods Command entry: sigvalidate Summary You can determine if a digital signature is valid and if the signed file has been modified since it was signed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being viewed.
File Status Displays the status of the signed file. View Base Signature Displays the Digital Signature Contents dialog box. This option is available only if the digital signature is valid and the file has not been modified since it was signed. Xref Drawings Contains detailed information about any xrefs in the signed file. View Xref Drawings Displays the xref drawings contained in a file's base drawing. View Xref List Contains a list of the xref drawings in a signed file.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being viewed. Digital Signature Status Displays the status of the digital signature. File Status Displays the status of the signed file. Signed By Displays the name of the organization or individual who attached a digital signature to the current file. Other Fields Displays the subject, issuer, valid from date, valid to date, or serial number in the Values box.
Signature Date and Time Displays the date and time that the digital signature was attached to the current file. The date and time are based on the time service used when the signature was attached. Time Service Used Displays the time service used to add the time stamp to the current file. Skip Xref Warnings Determines if the Digital Signature Contents dialog box is displayed for signed xrefs. This check box is displayed only in the Digital Signature Contents dialog box when a signed drawing is opened.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Sketch on page 1782 or [Type on page 1782/Increment on page 1782/toLerance on page 1782]: Sketch Creates a sketch. Type Specifies the object type for the sketch line. (SKPOLY on page 2514 system variable) ■ Line on page 1041 ■ Polyline on page 1453 ■ Spline on page 1828 Increment Defines the length of each freehand line segment. You must move the pointing device a distance greater than the increment value to generate a line.
Creates new 3D solids and surfaces by slicing, or dividing, existing objects. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Solid Editing panel ➤ Slice Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Slice Summary The cutting plane is defined with 2 or 3 points, by specifying a major plane of the UCS, or by selecting a surface object (but not a mesh). Either one or both sides of the sliced 3D solids can be retained. The sliced objects retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Objects that can be sliced Objects that can be used as cutting planes Ellipses Circular or elliptical arcs 2D splines 3D polyline segments List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Objects to slice Specifies the 3D solid or surface object that you want to slice. If you select a mesh object, you can choose to convert it to a 3D solid or surface before completing the slice operation.
■ Select a circle, ellipse, arc, 2D-spline, or 2D-polyline. Specifies the object to use for alignment. Surface Aligns the cutting plane with a surface. ■ Select a surface. Specifies a surface to be used for alignment. NOTE You cannot select meshes created with the EDGESURF, REVSURF, RULESURF, and TABSURF commands. ■ Point on desired side ■ Keep both sides Z axis Defines the cutting plane by specifying a point on the plane and another point on the Z axis (normal) of the plane.
■ Specify a point on the section plane. Sets a point on the slicing plane. ■ Specify a point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane. Specifies a point that defines the axis that is perpendicular to the slicing plane. ■ Point on desired side ■ Keep both sides View Aligns the cutting plane with the current viewport's viewing plane. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane. ■ Specify a point on the current view plane. Sets a point on the object to start the slice.
■ Point on the XY-plane. Sets the location of the slice. ■ Point on desired side ■ Keep both sides YZ Aligns the cutting plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane. ■ Point on the YZ-plane. Sets the location of the slice. ZX Aligns the cutting plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane. ■ Point on the ZX-plane. Sets the location of the slice.
3points Defines the cutting plane using three points. Point on desired side Uses a point to determine which side of the sliced solids your drawing retains. The point cannot lie on the cutting plane. Keep both sides Retains both sides of the sliced solids. Slicing a single solid into two pieces creates two solids from the pieces on either side of the plane. SLICE never creates more than two new composite solids for each selected solid.
SNAP Quick Reference See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap ■ Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. Access Methods Buton Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Snap Command entry: snap or ‘snap for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Off Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings. Aspect Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions. Style Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric. Standard Sets a rectangular snap grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. X and Y spacing may differ. Spacing Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid. Aspect Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap grid separately.
ISOPLANE determines whether the crosshairs lie in the top isometric plane (30- and 150-degree angles), the left isoplane (90- and 150-degree angles), or the right isoplane (30- and 90-degree angles). Type Specifies the snap type, polar or rectangular. This setting is also controlled by the SNAPTYPE system variable. Polar Sets the polar angle increment. (POLARANG system variable) Grid Sets the snap to Grid. When you specify points, the cursor snaps along vertical or horizontal grid points.
Select objects: Select the viewports to be drawn SOLDRAW can only be used in viewports that have been created with SOLVIEW. Visible and hidden lines representing the silhouette and edges of solids in the viewport are created and then projected to a plane perpendicular to the viewing direction. Silhouettes and edges are generated for all solids and portions of solids behind the cutting plane.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First point Sets the first point in the 2D solid. Second point Sets the first edge of the 2D solid. Third point Sets the corner that is opposite the second point. Fourth point or The fourth point is diagonally opposite the first point. Pressing Enter at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle. Specifying a fifth point creates a quadrilateral area.
Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing Summary You can extrude, move, rotate, offset, taper, copy, delete, and assign colors and materials to faces. You can also copy and assign colors to edges. You can imprint, separate, shell, clean, and check the validity of the entire 3D solid object (body). You cannot use SOLIDEDIT with mesh objects. However, if you select a closed mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Remove Removes previously selected faces from the selection set. ■ Remove faces. Removes the selected face from the solid object. ■ Undo ■ Add ■ All Undo Cancels the selection of the faces you added most recently to the selection set and redisplays the prompt. Add Adds faces you select to the selection set. ■ Undo ■ Remove ■ All All Selects all faces and adds them to the selection set.
■ Select faces. Selects specific faces (instead of all of them). ■ Undo ■ Remove Height of extrusion Sets the direction and distance of the extrusion. Entering a positive value extrudes the face in the direction of its normal. Entering a negative value extrudes the face in the direction opposite to its normal. ■ Angle of taper for extrusion. Specify an angle between -90 and +90 degrees. Tapering the selected face with a positive angle tapers the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out.
Path Sets a path for the extrusion path based on a specified line or curve. All the profiles of the selected face are extruded along the chosen path to create the extrusion. ■ Select an extrusion path. Lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, or splines can be paths. The path should not lie on the same plane as the face, nor should it have areas of high curvature. The extruded face starts from the plane of the profile and ends on a plane perpendicular to the path at the path's endpoint.
■ Select faces ■ Undo. Cancels selection of the faces that you selected most recently. ■ Remove ■ All You can change the shape of the object by moving its faces. This option is recommended for minor adjustments. Select faces Specifies the face to be moved. ■ Base point of displacement. Sets the base point for the move. If you specify a single point, usually entered as a coordinate, and then press Enter, the coordinate is used as the new location.
■ Second point of displacement. Sets a displacement vector that indicates how far the selected face is moved and in what direction. Face: Rotate Rotate Rotates one or more faces or a collection of features on a solid about a specified axis. You can change the shape of the object by rotating its faces. This option is recommended for minor adjustments. ■ Select faces (rotate) ■ Undo. Cancels selection of the faces that you selected most recently.
■ Second point on the rotation axis. Sets the second point on the axis. ■ Rotation angle ■ Reference Axis by object Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object. You can select the following objects: ■ Line: Aligns the axis with the selected line. ■ Circle: Aligns with the 3D axis of the circle (perpendicular to the plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle).
Origin of rotation Sets the point of rotation. ■ Rotation angle ■ Reference Rotation angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified amount from the current orientation. Reference Specifies the reference angle and the new angle. ■ Reference (starting) angle. Sets the start point for the angle. ■ Ending angle. Sets the endpoint for the angle. The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle.
Face: Taper Taper Tapers faces on a 3D solid at a specified angle. The rotation of the taper angle is determined by the selection sequence of the base point and second point along the selected vector. A positive angle tapers the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane. All selected faces in the selection set are tapered to the same value.
■ All Select faces (taper) Specifies the faces to be tapered and then sets the slope of the taper. ■ Base point. Sets the first point for determining the plane. ■ Another point along the axis of tapering. Sets the orientation of the axis that determines the direction of the taper. ■ Taper angle. Specify an angle between -90 and +90 degrees to set the slope of the taper from the axis. Face: Delete Delete Deletes or removes faces, including fillets and chamfers.
Creates a new object with the original orientation and profile of the face. The result can be used as a reference to create a new 3D solid. ■ Select faces (copy) ■ Undo. Cancels the selection of the faces that you selected most recently. ■ Remove ■ All Select faces (copy) Specifies the face to be copied. ■ Base point or displacement. Sets the first point to determine the distance and direction for the placement of the copied face (displacement). ■ Second point of displacement.
Face: Material Material Assigns a material to selected faces. ■ Select faces (material) ■ Undo. Cancels the selection of the faces that you selected most recently. ■ Remove ■ All Select faces (material) Specifies the faces to be modified. The Select Color dialog box is displayed. ■ Enter new material name. Enter the name of the material to be assigned to the selected face.
Retains the angle of the edge and allows you to make modifications and extensions, and create new geometry based on the extracted edge. Provides a method for making modifications, extensions, and new 3D solids based on the extracted edge. ■ Select Edges (copy) ■ Undo ■ Remove Select Edges (copy) Specifies the edges to copy. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge. Then set the displacement: ■ Base point of displacement. Sets the first point for determining where the new object is placed.
■ Remove Select edges (color) Colored edges can be used to highlight intersections, interferences, or critical clearances. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge. Edge: Undo Reverses actions as far back as the beginning of the SOLIDEDIT session. Edge: Exit Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option prompt.
■ Delete the source object. Specifies whether the object to imprint is removed when the operation is complete. Body: Separate Solids Separates 3D solid objects with disjointed volumes (sometimes called lumps) into independent 3D solid objects. Combining discrete solid objects using a union operation (UNION) can result in disjointed volumes. A union or subtract operation can result in a single 3D solid that consists of more than one continuous volume.
Select a 3D solid (shell) Specifies a 3D solid. ■ Remove faces. Specifies the face subobjects to be removed when the object is shelled. ■ Undo. Reverses the last action. ■ Add. Press Ctrl+click an edge to indicate which faces to retain. ■ All. Temporarily selects all faces for removal. You can then use Add to add the faces you want to retain. Enter the shell offset distance Sets the size of the offset. Specify a positive value to create a shell to the inside perimeter of the solid.
Body: Check Validates the 3D solid object as a valid solid, independent of the SOLIDCHECK setting. ■ Select a 3D object (check). Specifies the 3D solid object to be validated. If the object is valid, the following prompt is displayed: This object is a valid ShapeManager solid. This option is used as a debugging tool to compare stages in a highly complex 3D solid model. Body: Undo Undoes the editing action. Body: Exit Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option prompt.
Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Setup ➤ Profile Summary The selected 3D solids are projected onto a 2D plane parallel with the current layout viewport. The resulting 2D objects are generated on separate layers for hidden and visible lines and are displayed only in that viewport. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
NOTE Solids that overlap each other (share some common volume) produce dangling edges if you request hidden-line removal. This happens because the edges must be broken at the point where they enter another solid to separate them into visible and hidden portions. You can eliminate dangling edges by combining the overlapping solids (using UNION) before generating a profile. Yes Creates the profile lines with 2D objects.
SOLVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Flattened View Creates orthographic views, layers, and layout viewports automatically for 3D solids. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Solid View. Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Setup ➤ View Summary This command automates the manual process of creating views, layers, and layout viewports for 3D models. For ongoing work, it is recommended that you create drawing template (DWT) files customized for 3D.
and a layer where you can place dimensions that are visible in individual viewports, view name-DIM. WARNING The information stored on these layers is deleted and updated when you run SOLDRAW. Do not place permanent drawing information on these layers. NOTE SOLVIEW is defined by the acsolids.arx application and is intended to be used only interactively. UCS Creates a profile view relative to a user coordinate system.
World Uses the XY plane of the WCS to create a profile view. Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The center is based on the current model space extents. ?—List Named UCSs Lists the names of existing user coordinate systems. The list is filtered using the wild-card combinations you enter (wild-card characters accepted by the UCS command are valid).
Auxiliary Creates an auxiliary view from an existing view. An auxiliary view is one that is projected onto a plane perpendicular to one of the orthographic views and inclined in the adjacent view. Two points define the inclined plane used for the auxiliary projection. Both points must be located in the same viewport. A rubber-band line perpendicular to the inclined plane helps you select the center of the new viewport. Section Creates a drafting sectional view of solids, complete with cross-hatching.
In the original viewport, specify two points to define the sectioning plane. Define the viewing side by specifying a point on one side of the cutting plane. Enter the scale of the new view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The default value is a 1:1 scale, which is equivalent to zoom 1.0xp. At the next prompt, specify the center of the new viewport.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Text List of Prompts In a layout, when in model space, the prompt is displayed as follows: Specify paper space distance <1.000>: Enter a length in paper space to convert to the equivalent length in model space In a layout, when in paper space, the prompt is displayed as follows: Select a viewport: Pick a layout viewport object (this prompt is displayed when more than one viewport object is available in the layout) Specify model space distance <1.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling Menu: Tools ➤ Spelling Toolbar: Text Command entry: 'spell for transparent use Summary When you enter spell at the Command prompt, the Check Spelling dialog box is displayed. Select the Start button to begin the spelling check. If Check Spelling is set to Entire Drawing, spelling is checked on model space, then on layouts 1 and 2 in paper space. If a flagged word is identified, the drawing area highlights and zooms to that word.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling Menu: Tools ➤ Spelling Toolbar: Text Command entry: spell (or 'spell for transparent use) Summary Checks the spelling in single-line text, multiline text, multileader text, text within block attributes, text within xrefs, and text added to dimensions. In block attributes, only the attribute values are checked.
Limits the spelling check to the selected single-line text, multiline text, dimension text, multileader text, text within block attributes, and text within xrefs. Not in Dictionary Displays the word identified as misspelled. Suggestions Displays a list of suggested replacement words from the current dictionary. You can select another replacement word from the list, or edit or enter a replacement word in the top Suggestions text area. Main Dictionary Lists the main dictionary options.
Reverses the previous check spelling action or series of actions, including Ignore, Ignore All, Change, Change All, and Add to Dictionary. Check Spelling Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Spelling Provides options to change the way the default behavior of the spelling checker dialog box.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Include Dimension Text Searches dimension text. Block Attributes Searches block attributes text for spelling errors. External References Specifies to search external references for spelling errors. Options Ignore Capitalized Words Specifies to ignore capitalized words. Ignore Words with Mix Cases Specifies to ignore words that contain uppercase and lowercase letters. Ignore Words in Uppercase Specifies to ignore words that are in all uppercase.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling Menu: Tools ➤ Spelling Toolbar: Text Command entry: spell (or 'spell for transparent use) Summary Manages dictionaries. During a spelling check, the words in the drawing are matched to the words in the current main and current custom dictionaries. Any spelling exceptions that you identify with the Add option are stored in the custom dictionary you are currently using.
Main Dictionary Displays a list of language-specific dictionaries from which you can choose a different main dictionary. This dictionary is used in conjunction with the custom dictionary. Custom Dictionary Displays the name of the current custom dictionary. The .cus extension is used for an AutoCAD custom dictionary. Current Custom Dictionary Displays the list from which you can select a custom dictionary file to use. The selected dictionary file is used until another file is selected.
Manages your custom dictionaries allowing you to add or remove a dictionary. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Check Spelling Menu: Tools ➤ Spelling Toolbar: Text Command entry: spell (or 'spell for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Custom Dictionaries List Displays the custom dictionaries list. Only one dictionary can be selected at a time. New Allows you to create a custom dictionary. The new dictionary is highlighted as the current one.
Remove Allows you to delete a custom dictionary file from your list. SPHERE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid Sphere Creates a 3D solid sphere. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ 3D Modeling panel ➤ Sphere Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Sphere Toolbar: Modeling Summary You can create a sphere by specifying a center point and a point on the radius. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a sphere, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.
Center Point Specifies the center point of the sphere. When you specify the center point, the sphere is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Latitudinal lines are parallel to the XY plane. Radius Defines the radius of the sphere. Diameter Defines the diameter of the sphere. 3P (Three Points) Defines the circumference of the sphere by specifying three points anywhere in 3D space.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline Menu: Draw ➤ Spline Toolbar: Draw Summary There are two methods for creating splines in AutoCAD: with fit points or with control vertices. Each method has different options. Control the display of the control vertices with the CVSHOW on page 407 and CVHIDE on page 401 command. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Method Controls whether the spline is created with fit points or control vertices. The options differ depending on whether you select Options for Splines with Fit Points on page 1832 or Options for Splines with Control Vertices on page 1833. Fit Draw a spline by specifying fit points. Changing the Method updates the SPLMETHOD on page 2525 system variable. Control Points Draw a spline by specifying control vertices. This is the preferred method if you are creating geometry to use with 3D NURBS surfaces.
Object Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines and (depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable) deletes the polylines. Next Point Enters additional curve segments until you press Enter. Undo Removes the last specified point. Close Closes the spline curve by defining the last point as coincident with the first and making it tangent to the joint.
Options for Splines with Fit Points Options specific to fit points are displayed when the Method option is set to Fit. (SPLMETHOD on page 2525 system variable) Knots Specifies the knot parameterization which affects the shape of the curve as it passes through a fit point. (SPLKNOTS on page 2525 system variable) ■ Chord - Numbers edit points with decimal values representing their location on the curve.
When you choose End Tangency, you are prompted for the last tangent of the last entered fit point. Tolerance Specifies the distance from specified fit points that the spline must pass through. Tolerance applies to all fit points except start and endpoints. Options for Splines with Control Vertices Options specific to control vertices are displayed when the Method option is set to CV.
SPLINEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Splines Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Edit Spline Menu: Modify ➤ Objects ➤ Spline Toolbar: Modify II Shortcut menu: Right-click a selected spline, and click Spline Edit. Summary Modifies a spline’s definition, such as the number and weight of control vertices, the fit tolerance, and the start and end tangents.
NOTE SPLINEDIT automatically converts spline-fit polylines to splines even if you immediately exit SPLINEDIT after selecting the spline-fit polyline. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select spline: Enter an option [Close on page 1835/Join on page 1836/Fit data on page 1836/Edit Vertex on page 1837/convert to Polyline on page 1839/Reverse on page 1839/Undo on page 1839] : Close/Open Switches between Close and Open, depending on whether the selected spline is closed.
Join Selected splines, lines, and arcs are joined to existing splines at coincident endpoints. After a valid object is selected, it is joined to the current spline with a kink at the join point. Fit Data Edits fit data using the following options: Enter a fit data option: [Add on page 1836/Delete on page 1836/Kink on page 1836/Move on page 1836/Purge on page 1837/Tangents on page 1837/toLerance on page 1837/eXit on page 1837] : Add Adds fit points to a spline.
Next Moves selection to the next point. Previous Moves selection to the previous point. Select Point Selects a point from the set of fit points. Purge Removes a spline's fit data from the drawing database. After purging the spline's fit data, the main SPLINEDIT prompt is displayed without the Fit Data option. Tangents Edits the start and end tangents of a spline. If the spline is closed, the prompt becomes Specify Tangent or [System Default]. The System Default option calculates the default end tangents.
SPLINEDIT adds a new control vertex close to the point you select, between the two control vertices affecting that portion of the spline. Delete Decreases the number of control vertices that define the spline. Elevate Order Increases the number of control vertices on the spline. Entering a value greater than the current value increases the number of control points uniformly across the spline for more localized control. The maximum value is 26.
Exit Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt. Convert to Polyline Converts the spline to a polyline. The precision value determines how accurately the resulting polyline is to fit to the source spline. Valid values are any integer between 0 and 99. NOTE A high precision value may cause performance problems. The PLINECONVERTMODE system variable determines whether the polylines are created with linear or arc segments. The conversion in both PEDIT and SPLINEDIT will obey the DELOBJ system variable.
Summary A spotlight distribution casts a focused beam of light like a flashlight, a follow spot in a theater, or a headlight. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
degrees or the equivalent values based onAUNITS. The falloff angle must be greater than or equal to the hotspot angle. Status Turns the light on and off. Photometry Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction.
Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. ■ Map Size. Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map. ■ Softness. Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources. Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape.
Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Color Book Specifies a color from a color book. Exit Exits the command. STANDARDS Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of CAD Standards Manages the association of standards files with drawings.
Configure Standards Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Standards Associates the current drawing with one or more standards (DWS) files and lists plug-ins used to check standards. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Standards panel ➤ Configure Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Configure Toolbar: CAD Standards Command entry: standards List of Options The following options are displayed. Check Standards Opens the Check Standards dialog box.
Standards Files Associated with the Current Drawing Lists all standards (DWS) files that are associated with the current drawing. If conflicts arise between multiple standards in this list (for example, if two standards specify layers of the same name but with different properties), the standards file that is shown first in the list takes precedence. You can use the shortcut menu to add, remove, or reorder files. Add Standards File Associates a standards (DWS) file with the current drawing.
CAD Standards Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Standards Specifies additional settings for the Configure Standards and Check Standards dialog boxes. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Tools tab ➤ Standards panel ➤ Configure Menu: Tools ➤ CAD Standards ➤ Configure Toolbar: CAD Standards Command entry: standards Summary Specifies additional settings for the Configure Standards dialog box and the Check Standards dialog box. List of Options The following options are displayed.
the standards violation. For drawings that use scripts and LISP routines, the alert is not displayed until the script or routine has been completed. (STANDARDSVIOLATION system variable) Display Standards Status Bar Icon Displays an icon in the status bar when you open a file associated with a standards file and when you create or modify non-standard objects. (STANDARDSVIOLATION system variable) Check Standards Settings Sets options for fixing violations and ignoring flagged problems.
STATUS Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain General Drawing Information Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Status Command entry: 'status for transparent use Summary All coordinates and distances are displayed by STATUS in the format specified by UNITS. STATUS reports the number of objects in the current drawing.
the limit's upper-right corner, stored in the LIMMAX system variable. The notation Off to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that limits checking is set to 0. Model or Paper Space Uses Displays the drawing extents, which includes all objects in the database and can exceed the grid limits. The first line shows the XY coordinate of the lower-left corner of the extents. The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper-right corner.
Thickness Sets the current 3D thickness. (THICKNESS system variable) Fill, Grid, Ortho, Qtext, Snap, Tablet Shows whether these modes are on or off. Object Snap Modes Lists the running object snap modes specified by OSNAP. Free Dwg Disk Space Lists the amount of disk space available on the drive specified for this program's temporary files. Free Temp Disk Space Lists the amount of disk space available on the drive specified for temporary files.
The file is created with the .stl file name extension. The STL file format is compatible with stereolithography apparatus (SLA). The solid data is transferred to the SLA as a faceted representation of the model. The facets consist of a set of triangles (with outward pointing normals) that approximate the faces of the model. From the faceted data, the SLA workstation produces a set of contours that defines a series of layers representing the part to be built.
Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Stretch Menu: Modify ➤ Stretch Toolbar: Modify Summary Objects that are partially enclosed by a crossing window are stretched. Objects that are completely enclosed within the crossing window, or that are selected individually, are moved rather than stretched. Several objects such as circles, ellipses, and blocks, cannot be stretched. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
STRETCH moves only the vertices and endpoints that lie inside the crossing selection, leaving those outside unchanged. STRETCH does not modify 3D solids, polyline width, tangent, or curve-fitting information.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style Menu: Format ➤ Text Style Toolbar: Text Command entry: 'style for transparent use Summary The Text Style dialog box is displayed. If you enter -style at the Command prompt, options are displayed. You can specify the current text style to determine the appearance of all new text. A text style includes the font, size, obliquing angle, orientation, and other text characteristics.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Text Style Menu: Format ➤ Text Style Toolbar: Text Command entry: style (or 'style for transparent use) Summary Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Text Style Lists the current text style. Styles Displays the list of styles in the drawing. A indicates that the style is . icon before the style name Style names can be up to 255 characters long.
NOTE If you change the orientation or font file of an existing text style, all text objects with that style use the new values when the drawing is regenerated. Font Name Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the Fonts folder. When you select a name from the list, the program reads the file for the specified font. The file's character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by another text style.
See “Set Text Height” for more information. Effects Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or vertically aligned. Upside Down Displays the characters upside down. Backwards Displays the characters backwards. Vertical Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType fonts.
Apply Applies style changes made in the dialog box to the current style and to the text of the current style in the drawing. -STYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Text Styles List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter name of text style or [?] : Enter a style name, enter ?, or press Enter Text Style Name Specifies the text style name. To define a style that uses Big Fonts, you can use long file names that do not contain commas.
0.0 sets the Text Height (Non annotative), entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the Paper Text Height (Annotative), for this style. Width Factor Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Obliquing Angle Entering a value between -85 and 85 obliques the text. Vertical Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. ?—List Text Styles Lists the text styles available in the drawing.
■ Double-click a plot style table (STB or CTB file) to start the Plot Style Table Editor. Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Type of Plot Style Table Adds new plot style tables. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plot Style Manager Command entry: stylesmanager Summary Plot style tables contain and define plot styles, which can be assigned to objects. When complete, the wizard produces an STB or CTB file depending on the type of table you are creating.
Plot Style Table Editor Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Plot Style Tables Modifies the plot styles in a plot style table. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plot Style Manager Command entry: stylesmanager Summary If the plot style table is attached to a layout or the Model tab, and you change a plot style, any objects that use that plot style are affected. If the plot style table is color-dependent, the file extension is CTB. If the plot style table is named, the file extension is STB.
General Tab (Plot Style Table Editor) Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Lists the plot style table file name, description, version number, location (path name), and table type. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plot Style Manager Command entry: stylesmanager List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Style Table File Name Displays the name of the plot style table file you are editing.
Provides a description area for a plot style table. File Information Displays information about the plot style table you are editing: number of plot styles, path, and version number of the Plot Style Table Editor. Apply Global Scale Factor to Non-ISO Linetypes Scales all the non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns in the plot styles of objects controlled by this plot style table. Scale Factor Specifies the amount to scale non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns.
Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plot Style Manager Command entry: stylesmanager Summary Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings. Plot styles are displayed in columns from left to right. In general, the Table View tab is convenient if you have a small number of plot styles. If you have a large number of plot styles, the Form view is more convenient because the plot style names are listed at the left and the properties of the selected style are displayed to the right.
Description Provides a description for each plot style. Properties Specifies the settings for the new plot style you are adding to the current plot style table. Color Specifies the plotted color for an object. The default setting for plot style color is Use Object Color. If you assign a plot style color, the color overrides the object's color at plot time.
you provided under Physical Pen Characteristics in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Virtual Pen Number Specifies a virtual pen number between 1 and 255. Many non-pen plotters can simulate pen plotters using virtual pens. For many devices, you can program the pen's width, fill pattern, end style, join style, and color/screening from the front panel on the plotter. Enter 0 or Automatic to specify that the program should make the virtual pen assignment from the AutoCAD Color Index.
Line End Style If you assign a line end style, the line end style overrides the object's line end style at plot time. Line Join Style If you assign a line join style, the line join style overrides the object's line join style at plot time. Fill Style If you assign a fill style, the fill style overrides the object's fill style at plot time. Add Style Adds a new plot style to a named plot style table.
Edit Lineweights Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Modifies the values of existing lineweights. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Plot Style Manager Command entry: stylesmanager List of Options The following options are displayed. Lineweights Lists the lineweights in the plot style table. You can modify existing lineweights, but you can't add or delete them. If you change a lineweight value, other plot styles that use the lineweight also change.
Makes the selected lineweight available for editing. Sort Lineweights Sorts the list of lineweights by value. If you change lineweight values, choose Sort Lineweights to resort the list. SUBTRACT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Composite Objects Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction.
Objects in the second selection set are subtracted from objects in the first selection set. A single new 3D solid, surface, or region is created. You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane. However, you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets of regions on different planes.
regions on each plane. Regions for which there are no other selected coplanar regions are rejected. You cannot use SUBTRACT with mesh objects. However, if you select a mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid or surface. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects (to subtract from) Specifies the 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to be modified by subtraction. Select objects (to subtract) Specifies the 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to subtract.
Sun Properties Window Quick Reference See also: ■ Sun and Sky Simulation Sets and modifies the properties of the sun.
List of Options The following options are displayed. General Sets the general properties of the sun. Status Turns the sun on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the sun. The range is from 0 (no light) to maximum. The higher the number, the brighter the light. Color (Standard lighting workflow only) Controls the color of the light. Shadows Turns display and calculation of shadows for the sun on and off.
Night Color Specifies the color of the night sky. Aerial Perspective Specifies if aerial perspective is applied. Values are On/Off. Visibility Distance Specifies the distance at which 10% haze occlusion results. Values are 0.0-MAX. Sun Disk Appearance This category of properties pertains to the background only. They control the appearance of the sun disk. Disk Scale Specifies the scale of the sun disk (1.0 = correct size). Glow Intensity Specifies the intensity of the sun glow. Values are 0.0-25.0.
Softness Displays the setting for the appearance of the edges of shadows. This setting is read-only when display of shadows is turned off. Values are 1-10. Geographic Location Displays the current geographic location settings. This information is read-only. When a city is not stored with latitude and longitude, the city does not appear in the list. Use the Edit Geographic Location button to open the Geographic Location dialog box.
Access Methods Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Blend Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Blend Toolbar: Surface Creation Summary When you blend two surfaces together, you specify surface continuity and bulge magnitude. Set SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 2537 to 1 to create a relationship between the blend surface and the originating curves. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
SURFEXTEND Quick Reference See also: ■ Extend a Surface Lengthens a surface by a specified distance. Access Methods Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ Extend Toolbar: Surface Creation Summary List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify Extension Distance Specifies the extension length. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the length of the surface extension. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations.
SURFFILLET Quick Reference See also: ■ Fillet a Surface Creates a filleted surface between two other surfaces. Access Methods Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Fillet Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Fillet Toolbar: Surface Creation Summary The fillet surface has a constant radius profile and is tangent to the original surfaces. The original surfaces are automatically trimmed to connect the edges of the fillet surface. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
First and Second Surface or Region Specifies the first and second surfaces or regions. Radius Specifies fillet radius. Use the Fillet grip or enter a value to change the radius. You cannot enter a value that is smaller than the gap between the surfaces. If no radius value is entered, the FILLETRAD3D on page 2321 system variable value is used. Trim Surface Trims the original surfaces or regions to the edges of the fillet surface. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the fillet radius.
The surface will be dependent on the curves or edges from which it was created if the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 2537 system variable is set to 1. List of Prompts The following prompts display: Select Curves or Surface Edges in the First Direction Select a network of open curves, open surface edges, or region edges (not the surfaces or regions) for the U or V direction.
SURFOFFSET Quick Reference See also: ■ Offset a Surface Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Offset Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Offset Toolbar: Offset Surface Summary Reverse the direction of the offset with the Flip Direction option.
List of Prompts The following prompts display. Specify Offset Distance Specifies the distance between the offset surface and the original surface. Flip Direction Reverses the offset direction shown by the arrows. Both Sides Offsets the surface in both directions (creates two new surfaces in instead of one). Solid Creates a solid from the offset. This is similar to the THICKEN on page 1942 command. Connect Connects multiple offset surfaces, if the original surfaces are connected.
Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the distance of the surface offset. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. SURFPATCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Patch a Surface Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop.
Summary You can also add an additional curve over the closed loop to constrain and guide the patch surface. When you create a patch surface, you can specify surface continuity and bulge magnitude. If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 2537 system variable is set to 1, associativity is maintained between the patch surface and the originating edges or curves. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Constrain Geometry Uses additional guide curves to shape the patch surface. Guide curves can be curves or points. SURFSCULPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Convert a Group of Surfaces to a 3D Solid Trims and combines surfaces that bound a watertight area to create a solid. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Sculpt Toolbar: Surface Editing Summary The SURFSCULPT command automatically combines and trims a collection of surfaces that enclose a watertight area to create a solid.
NOTE The area enclosed by the surfaces must be watertight and the surfaces must have a continuity of G0 or the SURFSCULPT command cannot complete. The SURFSCULPT command also works with solid and mesh objects. If you are working with meshes, the operation uses the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT on page 2515 setting. SURFTRIM Quick Reference See also: ■ Trim and Untrim Surfaces Trims portions of a surface where it meets another surface or type of geometry.
Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ Trim Toolbar: Surface Editing Summary Trims portions of a surface where it meets or bisects a curve, region, or another surface. If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 2537 system variable is set to 1, the trimmed surface updates whenever the trimming edges are modified. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select Surfaces or Regions to Trim Select one or more surfaces or regions to trim.
Extend Controls whether the cutting surface is trimmed to meet the edge of the trimmed surface. Projection Direction The cutting geometry is projected onto the surface. Controls the projection angle as follows: Automatic ■ When trimming a surface or region in plan, parallel view (for example, the default Top, Front, and Right view), the cutting geometry is projected onto the surface in the view direction.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Untrim Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ Untrim Toolbar: Surface Editing Summary If the trimmed edge is dependent on another surface edge that has also been trimmed, you may not be able to fully restore the trimmed area. NOTE SURFUNTRIM does not restore areas removed by the SURFAUTOTRIM system variable and PROJECTGEOMETRY. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
SWEEP Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Solid tab ➤ Solid panel ➤ Sweep Ribbon: Surface tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Sweep Toolbar: Modeling Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Sweep Summary Creates a solid or surface by sweeping an open or closed, planar or non-planar curve (profile) along an open or closed path.
Objects that Can Be Swept Objects that Can Be Used as a Sweep Path 2D polylines 2D and 3D polylines 2D solids Solid, surface and mesh edge subobjects 3D solid face subobjects Helices Arcs Arcs Circles Circles Ellipses Ellipses Elliptical arcs Elliptical arcs Lines Lines Regions Solid, surface and mesh edge subobjects Trace NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them.
Alignment Specifies whether the profile is aligned to be normal to the tangent direction of the sweep path. NOTE If the profile is not perpendicular (normal) to the tangent of the start point of the path, then the profile automatically aligns. Enter No at the alignment prompt to prevent this. Base Point Specifies a base point for the objects to be swept. Scale Specifies a scale factor for a sweep operation.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Cascade on page 1893/tile Horizontal on page 1893/tile Vertical on page 1893/Arrange icons on page 1893]: Enter an option Cascade Organizes a large number of windows by overlapping them for easier access. Tile Horizontal Arranges open drawings in horizontal, nonoverlapping windows. When several drawings are open, you can view them in rows. Additional columns are added only when there's not enough space.
1894
T Commands 20 TABLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Creates an empty table object. Access Methods Table Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Insert Table Menu: Draw ➤ Table Toolbar: Draw Summary A table is a compound object that contains data in rows and columns. It can be created from an empty table or a table style. A table can also be linked to data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
The Insert Table dialog box is displayed. If you select a table cell when the ribbon is active, the Table ribbon contextual tab displays. If you enter -table at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Insert Table Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Creates an empty table object. Access Methods Table Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Insert Table Menu: Draw ➤ Table Toolbar: Draw Command entry: table Summary Inserts an empty table in the drawing.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Table Style Choose a table style from within the current drawing from which to create a table. You can create a new table style by clicking the button next to the drop-down list. Insert Options Specifies the method for inserting your table. Start from Empty Table Creates an empty table that can be filled in with data manually. Start from Data Link Creates a table from data in an external spreadsheet.
Columns Icon Indicates columns. Rows Icon Indicates rows. Columns Specifies the number of columns. When the Specify Window option is selected and you specify a column width, the Auto option is selected, and the number of columns is controlled by the width of the table. If a table style containing a starting table has been specified, then you can choose the number of additional columns you would like added to that starting table. Column Width Specifies the width of the columns.
Second Row Cell Style Specifies a cell style for the second row in the table. The Header cell style is used by default. All Other Row Cell Styles Specifies a cell style for all other rows in the table. The Data cell style is used by default. Table Options For table styles that contain a starting table, specifies the table elements from the starting table that are retained upon insertion. Label Cell Text Retains text from the Header or Title rows in the starting table in the newly-inserted table.
Table Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Access Methods Table Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Annotation panel ➤ Insert Table Menu: Draw ➤ Table Command entry: table List of Options The following options are displayed. Rows/Columns Panel Insert Row Above Inserts a row above the currently selected cell or row. Insert Row Below Inserts a row below the currently selected cell or row Delete Row(s) Deletes the currently selected row(s).
Cell Styles Lists all cell styles contained within the current table style. The cell styles Title, Header, and Data are always contained within any table style, and cannot be deleted or renamed. Cell Borders Sets the properties of the borders of the selected table cells. Alignment Specifies alignment for the content within cells. Content is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the cell.
Examples For the Date data type only, displays a list of date display options for the date option you selected in the Format field. Click a date in the Format field to see an example. Insert Panel Block The Insert dialog box is displayed, where you can insert a block into the currently selected table cell. Field The Field dialog box is displayed, where you can insert a field into the currently selected table cell. Formula Inserts a formula into the currently selected table cell.
Number of Columns Specifies the number of columns. Number of Rows Specifies the number of rows. Insertion Point Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. If the table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up, the insertion point is the lower-left corner of the table. Width Specifies a width for the table columns. Height Specifies a height for the table rows. Style Specifies a table style for the table. The specified table style must contain a starting table.
Columns Specifies the number of columns you want to add to the table stored in the specified table style. The columns are added to the columns already in the specified table. Options Specifies special formatting options that can be inserted in the table. Label Text Retains rows with a cell type of Label found in the table style’s starting table. The cell type is set in the Properties palette. The Header and Title cell styles use the Label cell type by default.
Access Methods Toolbar: Table Shortcut menu: Right-click while editing any single cell, and click Manage Cell Content. List of Options The following options are displayed. Cell Content List Box Lists all text and/or blocks in the selected cell in order of appearance. Text is indicated with the label Table Cell Text. Blocks are indicated with Block preceding the name of the block. Content Order Buttons Move Up Moves the selected list box content up in the display order.
Layout Mode Options Changes the direction in which cell content will appear. Flow Places cell content based on the width of the cell. Stacked Horizontal Places cell content horizontally, regardless of cell width. Stacked Vertical Places cell content vertically, regardless of cell height. Content Spacing Determines the spacing between text and/or blocks within the cell. TABLEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables Edits text in a table cell.
TABLEEXPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Exports data from a table object in CSV file format. Access Methods Shortcut menu: With a table selected, right-click and click Export. Summary A standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Table data is exported in the comma-separated (CSV) file format. All formatting of the table and its text is lost. TABLESTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Creates, modifies, or specifies table styles.
Summary The Table Style dialog box is displayed. You can specify the current table style to determine the appearance of all new tables. A table style includes settings for background colors, margins, borders, text, and other table characteristics. Table Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Sets the current table style and creates, modifies, and deletes table styles.
Toolbar: Styles Command entry: tablestyle List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Table Style Displays the name of the table style that is applied to tables you create. Styles Displays a list of table styles. The current style is highlighted. List Controls the contents of the Styles list. Preview Of Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list. Set Current Sets the table style selected in the Styles list as the current style.
Create New Table Style Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Specifies a name for the new table style and specifies the existing table style on which the new table style will be based. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Table Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: tablestyle ➤ Table Style List of Options The following options are displayed. New Style Name Names the new table style.
New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles Defines a new table style or modifies an existing table style. Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Table Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: tablestyle ➤ Table Style List of Options The following options are displayed.
Starting Table Allows you to specify a table in your drawing to use as an example for formatting this table style. Once you select a table, you can specify the structure and contents you want copied from that table to the table style. With the Remove Table icon, you can remove a table from the current specified table style. General Table Direction Sets the direction of a table. Down creates a table that reads from top to bottom. Up creates a table that reads from bottom to top.
General Tab Properties Fill Color Specifies the background color of the cell. The default is None. You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. Alignment Sets justification and alignment for the text in the table cell. Text is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the cell. Text is center-justified, left-justified, or right-justified with respect to the left and right borders of the cell.
Sets the distance between the text or block in the cell and the left and right cell borders. Vertical Sets the distance between the text or block in the cell and the top and bottom cell borders. Merge cells on row/column creation Merges any new row or column created with the current cell style into one cell. You can use this option to create a title row at the top of your table. Text Tab Text Style Lists the available text styles.
Borders Tab Lineweight Sets the lineweight to be applied to the borders you specify by clicking a border button. If you use a heavy lineweight, you may have to increase the cell margins. Linetype Sets the linetype to be applied to the borders you specify. Choose Other to load a custom linetype. Color Sets the color to be applied to the borders you specify by clicking a border button. Choose Select Color to display the Select Color dialog box. Double Line Displays table borders as double lines.
Applies the border properties settings to the inside border. Bottom Border Applies the border properties settings to the bottom borders. Left Border Applies the border properties settings to the left borders. Top Border Applies the border properties settings to the top borders. Right Border Applies the border properties settings to the right borders. No Border Hides borders. Cell Style Preview Displays an example of the effect of the current table style settings.
Menu: Format ➤ Table Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: tablestyle List of Options The following options are displayed. New Style Name Names the new cell style. Start With Specifies an existing cell style whose settings are the default for the new cell style. Continue Returns you to the New Table Style dialog box, in which you define the new cell style.
Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Table Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: tablestyle ➤ Table Style List of Options The following options are displayed. Cell Styles Lists all cell styles contained within the current table style. The cell styles Title, Header, and Data are always contained within any table style. New Displays the Create New Cell Style dialog box. From here, you can create a new cell style to be contained within the current table style.
Table Cell Format Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Table Styles The options displayed here change based on the selected data type and format you select. Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Table Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: tablestyle ➤ Table Style List of Options The following options are displayed. Data Type Displays a list of data types (Angle, Date, Decimal Number, and so on) that you can format for table rows.
Format Depending on the data type you select, displays a list of relevant format types. For example, if you selected Angle as the data type, options such as Decimal Degrees, Grads, Radians, and so on are displayed. Precision For Angle, Decimal Number, and Points data types only, sets the precision for applicable formats. For example, if you select Angle as the data type and Radians as the format type, options such as Current Precision, 0.0r, 0.00r, 0.000r, and so on are displayed.
Access Methods Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Tables ➤ Menu: Format ➤ Table Style Toolbar: Styles Command entry: tablestyle ➤ Table Style List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Value Displays the value in base drawing units. Preview Displays updates to the format as you change the conversion factor and other settings. Conversion Factor Specifies the conversion factor to use on the current value. The default is 1 for no conversion.
TABLET Quick Reference See also: ■ Digitizing Tablets Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing tablet. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Tablet List of Options The following options are displayed. Enter an option [ON on page 1922/OFF on page 1922/CAL on page 1922/CFG on page 1925]: On Turns on Tablet mode. Setting the TABMODE system variable to 1 also turns on Tablet mode. Pressing Ctrl+T on some systems turns Tablet mode on and off. Off Turns off Tablet mode.
If you enter only two points, the program automatically computes an orthogonal transformation. If you enter three or more points, the program computes the transformation in each of the three transformation types (Orthogonal, Affine, and Projective) to determine which best fits the calibration points. If you enter more than four points, computing the best-fitting projective transformation can take a long time. You can cancel the process by pressing Esc.
Repeat Table Redisplays the computed table, which rates the transformation types. Transformation Table Reports the number of calibration points and provides information about each transformation type. Outcome of Fit Reports the outcome of fit for each of the transformation types. If the outcome of fit is not Success or Exact for any of the transformation types, the program reports failure of the entire calibration process and ends the command.
Cfg Designates or realigns the tablet menu areas or designates a small portion of a large tablet as a screen pointing area.
If you responded n to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompts: Digitize lower-left corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: Digitize a point Digitize upper-right corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: Digitize a point Respond to the following prompt: Would you also like to specify a button to toggle the Floating Screen Area? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press Enter If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompt: Press any non-pick button on the digitizer
The MESHTYPE system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default. Set the variable to 0 to create legacy polyface or polygon mesh. For polygon meshes, TABSURF constructs a 2 by n mesh, where n is determined by the SURFTAB1 system variable. The M direction of the mesh is always 2 and lies along the direction vector. The N direction lies along the path curve.
Only the first and last points on a polyline are considered, and intermediate vertices are ignored. The direction vector indicates the direction and length of the shape to be extruded. The end selected on the polyline or line determines the direction of the extrusion. The original path curve is drawn with wide lines to help you visualize how the direction vector dictates the construction of a tabulated mesh. TARGETPOINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Point Lights Creates a target point light.
Enter an option to change [Name on page 1929/Intensity factor on page 1929/Status on page 1929/Photometry on page 1929/shadoW on page 1930/Attenuation on page 1930/filterColor on page 1931/eXit on page 1931] : NOTE When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for scripting compatibility. Name Specifies the name of the light. Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light.
Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Exit Exits the command. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off the display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges.
Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits or not. Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time. Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light.
When TASKBAR is set to 1, drawings are displayed separately on the Windows taskbar. With Windows 7, preview images of each open drawing are displayed when the cursor is over the AutoCAD taskbar button. When TASKBAR is set to 0, only the name of the current drawing is displayed on the Windows taskbar buttons. TEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Single-Line Text Creates a single-line text object.
If TEXTED is set to 2, the In-Place Text Editor is displayed. When creating text, you can click anywhere in a drawing to create a new text block. You can also use the keyboard to move among text blocks (for example: for new text created using the TEXT command, you can navigate through text groups by pressing Tab or Shift+Tab, or edit a group of text lines by pressing Alt and clicking each text object.
The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their height. The longer the text string, the shorter the characters. Fit Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and a height. Available for horizontally oriented text only. The height is the distance in drawing units that the uppercase letters extend from the baseline. Designated text height is the distance between the start point and a point you specify.
TL (Top Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. TC (Top Center) Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. TR (Top Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. ML (Middle Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text.
BC (Bottom Center) Centers text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only. BR (Bottom Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Style Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text characters. Text you create uses the current text style. Entering ? lists the current text styles, associated font files, height, and other parameters.
Opaque Background When checked, makes the background of the editor opaque. Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box, where you can select a field to insert in the text. Find and Replace Displays the Replace dialog box. Select All Selects all the text in the single-line text object. Change Case Changes the case of selected text.
Control Codes and Special Characters Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Single-Line Text Summary In addition to using Unicode characters for entering special characters, you can also overscore text, underscore text, or insert a special character by including control information in the text string. Use a pair of percent signs to introduce each control sequence. You can use this control code with standard AutoCAD LT text fonts and Adobe PostScript fonts. List of Options The following options are displayed.
%%% Draws a single percent sign (%). This is valid for the TEXT command only. Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn off automatically at the end of the text string. You can use the %%nnn control sequence to display special characters using the PostScript fonts. A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing the character map for each font is provided in the sample folder.
The TEXT command honors the TEXTEVAL system variable setting only if used in a script or AutoLISP expression and all the TEXT command prompts are included within the script or AutoLISP expression. TEXTEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied Edits a dimensional constraint, dimension, or text object. Summary Displays the in-place text editor, and updates the dimension text on exit.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Views tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Text Window Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Text Window Command entry: 'textscr for transparent use Summary The Command prompt is displayed in a separate window. You can press F2 to switch between the drawing area and the text window. When the Command prompt is hidden, you can turn it back on by entering commandline in the text window. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems.
Both Brings all text and dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing. NOTE Text and dimensions that are contained within blocks and xrefs cannot be brought to the front apart from the containing object. Also, text in multileaders and tables are not supported. THICKEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Create 3D Solids from Objects Converts a surface into a 3D solid with a specified thickness.
List of Options The following prompts are displayed. Surfaces to thicken Specifies one or more surfaces to thicken into solids. Thickness Sets the height of the thickened object. TIFOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export Raster Files Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format. Summary The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
TIME Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain General Drawing Information Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Time Command entry: 'time for transparent use Summary List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current time: Wednesday, December 31, 2003 9:54:51:406 AM Times for this drawing: Created: Friday, December 12, 2003 1:21:36:203 AM Last Updated: Wednesday, December 31, 2003 9:49:19:208 AM Total Editing Time: 0 days 06:44:10.
Total Editing Time Displays the time spent editing the current drawing. This timer is updated by the program and cannot be reset or stopped. Plotting time is not included in the total editing time. If you quit the editing session without saving the drawing, the time you spent in the editing session is not added to the accumulated editing time. Elapsed Timer Runs as another timer while the program is running. You can turn it on and off or reset it whenever you like.
Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Text and Blocks to Tables Specifies options for inserting a block in a table cell. Access Methods Shortcut menu: With a cell in a table selected, right-click and click Insert Block on the shortcut menu. Command entry: tinsert List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale Specifies the scale for the block reference. Enter a value or select AutoFit to scale the block to fit in the selected cell.
Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Tolerance Menu: Dimension ➤ Tolerance Toolbar: Dimension Summary The Geometric Tolerance dialog box is displayed. Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout. Feature control frames can be created with leader lines using TOLERANCE, LEADER, or QLEADER.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Annotate tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Tolerance Menu: Dimension ➤ Tolerance Toolbar: Dimension Command entry: tolerance Summary After you select geometric characteristic symbols, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box closes and the following prompt is displayed: Enter tolerance location: Specify a location The feature control frame is placed at the specified location. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
from a perfect form. You can insert a diameter symbol before the tolerance value and a material condition symbol after it. First Box Inserts a diameter symbol in front of the tolerance value. Click the box to insert the diameter symbol. Second Box Creates the tolerance value. Enter a value in the box. Third Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box, in which you select a modifying symbol.
The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the primary datum reference in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. Datum 2 Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference. Datum 3 Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference. Height Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature control frame.
Symbol Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geometric Tolerances Displays the geometric characteristic symbols for location, orientation, form, profile, and runout.
The symbol is inserted into the Sym text box in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. The following table describes the symbols.
Geometric characteristic symbols Symbol Characteristic Type Circular runout Runout Total runout Runout Material Condition Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geometric Tolerances Specifies a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.
TOOLBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Toolbars Displays, hides, and customizes toolbars. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Toolbars Menu: View ➤ Toolbars Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize. Summary The Customize User Interface dialog box (see CUI) is displayed. If you enter -toolbar at the Command prompt, options are displayed. -TOOLBAR Quick Reference See also: ■ Toolbars List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Enter a valid toolbar name.
Float Changes the toolbar from docked to floating. Enter Number of Rows Specifies the number of rows in the floating toolbar. All Displays or closes all toolbars. Show Displays all toolbars. Hide Closes all toolbars. TOOLPALETTES Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Use Tools from Objects and Images Opens the Tool Palettes window.
Add Text Inserts a text entry box at the cursor location, where you can add a label that helps organize palette contents. Add Separator Adds a tool palette separator line at the location of the cursor. All Palettes Displays all tool palette tabs in the palette window. Allow Docking Toggles the ability to dock or anchor palette windows. A docked window adheres to the side of the application window and causes the drawing area to be resized.
Rename Renames the selected tool. Rename Palette Renames the current palette. Samples Displays the Samples tool palette. Sort By Specifies whether palette contents are sorted by name or by type. Size Changes the cursor to a four-direction arrow. Transparency Displays the Transparency dialog box. View Options Displays the View Options dialog box, where you can control how tools are displayed.
List View Displays the tool icon with the tool name to the right. Apply To Controls whether the view options are applied to the current tool palette or to all tool palettes in the Tool Palettes window. Tool Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Tool Palettes Controls the properties associated with the selected tool. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click a tool on a tool palette and click Properties.
Add Actions Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Tool Palettes Adds actions to a parameter or parameter set in the Block Authoring Palettes in the Block Editor. List of Options The following options are displayed. Action Object to Add Specifies the action to add to the parameter or parameter set. Action Object List Lists the actions associated with the selected parameter or parameter set. Add Adds the action specified in the Action Object to Add box to the parameter or parameter set.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Tool Palettes Window TORUS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid Torus Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Torus Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Torus Toolbar: Modeling Summary You can create a torus by specifying the center, then the radius or diameter of the torus, and then the radius or diameter of the tube that surrounds the torus.
When you specify the center point, the torus is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). The torus is parallel to and bisected by the XY plane of the current workplane. Specify radius on page 1962 or [diameter on page 1962] : Specify a distance or enter d 3P (Three Points) Defines the circumference of the torus with three points that you specify. The three specified points also define the plane of the circumference.
TPNAVIGATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Organize Tool Palettes Displays a specified tool palette or palette group. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify tool palette to display or [palette Group]: Enter a tool palette name, or enter g Tool Palette Name Displays the specified tool palette. Specifying a tool palette that is not part of the current group displays the specified palette and its palette group. Palette Group Displays the specified tool palette group.
Traces are solid filled when Fill mode is on. When Fill mode is off, only the outline of a trace is displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
NOTE The PALETTEOPAQUE system variable controls whether dockable windows can be made transparent. TRAYSETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Application Status Bar Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray. Access Methods Button Shortcut menu: Right-click the status bar and click Tray Settings. Summary The Tray Settings dialog box is displayed.
Access Methods Button Shortcut menu: Right-click the status bar and click Tray Settings. Command entry: traysettings List of Options The following options are displayed. Display Icons from Services Displays the tray at the right end of the status bar and displays icons from services. When this option is cleared, the tray is not displayed. Display Notifications from Services Displays notifications from services. Display Time Sets the time in seconds that a notification is displayed.
Summary The program indexes objects in a region by recording their positions in space. The result is called a spatial index. The spatial index is tree structured and has branching nodes to which objects are attached. The index has two major branches. The paper space branch is called a quad-tree and treats objects as two-dimensional. The model space branch is called an oct-tree and treats objects as either two- or three-dimensional.
Summary To trim objects, select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to trim. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select cutting edges...
Specify an object selection method to select the objects to trim. If more than one trim result is possible, the location of the first selection point determines the result. Object to Trim Specifies the object to trim. Shift-Select to Extend Extends the selected objects rather than trimming them. This option provides an easy method to switch between trimming and extending. Fence Selects all objects that cross the selection fence.
UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS. The command trims objects that do not intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space. View Specifies projection along the current view direction. The command trims objects that intersect the boundary in the current view. Edge Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object's extrapolated edge or only to an object that intersects it in 3D space. Extend Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space.
NOTE When trimming hatches, do not set Edge to Extend. If you do, gaps in the trim boundaries will not be bridged when trimming hatches, even when the gap tolerance is set to a correct value. Erase Deletes selected objects. This option provides a convenient method to erase unneeded objects without leaving the TRIM command. Undo Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM.
1972
U Commands 21 U Quick Reference See also: ■ Correct Mistakes Reverses the most recent operation. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Undo. Summary You can enter u as many times as you wish, backing up one step at a time, until the drawing is as it was when you began the current editing session. When an operation cannot be undone, the command name is displayed but no action is performed.
If you changed modes or used transparent commands during a command, their effects are undone, along with the effects of the main command. You can also press Ctrl+Z to undo. The U command is equivalent to entering undo 1. UCS Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) Manages user coordinate systems. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ World Menu: Tools ➤ New UCS ➤ World Toolbar: UCS List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
If you specify a third point, the UCS rotates around the X axis such that the positive Y half of the XY plane of the UCS contains the point. The three points specify an origin point, a point on the positive X axis, and a point on the positive XY plane. NOTE If you enter the coordinates for a point and you do not specify a Z coordinate value, the current Z value is used. Face Aligns the user coordinate system to a face on a 3D solid. Select a face by clicking within the boundary or on an edge of the face.
Restore Restores a saved UCS so that it becomes the current UCS. Name Specifies a named UCS. ?—List UCSs Lists the names of currently defined UCSs. Save Saves the current UCS to a specified name. Name Saves the current UCS with the specified name. Delete Removes the specified UCS from the list of saved user coordinate systems. If you delete a named UCS that is current, the current UCS is renamed UNNAMED.
The new UCS is defined as shown in the following table. Define a UCS by selecting an object Object Method of determining UCS Arc The center of the arc becomes the new UCS origin. The X axis passes through the arc endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Circle The center of the circle becomes the new UCS origin. The X axis passes through the selection point. Dimension The midpoint of the dimension text becomes the new UCS origin.
Previous Restores the previous UCS. The last 10 user coordinate systems created in model space and the last 10 created in paper space layouts are retained. Repeating this option steps back through one set or the other, depending on which space is current. If you have saved different UCS settings in individual viewports and you switch between viewports, the different UCSs are not retained in the Previous list.
Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Y axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis. Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Z axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis. You can define any UCS by specifying an origin and one or more rotations around the X, Y, or Z axis.
Z Axis Aligns the user coordinate system to a specified positive Z axis. The UCS origin is moved to the first point specified and its positive Z axis passes through the second point specified. Object Aligns the Z axis in the direction tangent to the endpoint nearest to where the object was selected. The positive Z axis points away from the object. Apply Applies the current UCS setting to a specified viewport or all active viewports when other viewports have a different UCS saved in the viewport.
UCSICON Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon Controls the visibility and placement of the UCS icon. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Display UCS icon Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ UCS Icon ➤ On Summary The UCS icon displays the orientation of the user coordinate system (UCS) axes and the location of the UCS origin.
If the UCS is rotated so that the Z axis lies in a plane parallel to the viewing plane—that is, if the XY plane is edge-on to the viewer—the 2D UCS icon is replaced by a broken pencil icon. The 3D UCS icon does not use a broken pencil icon. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [ON/OFF/All/Noorigin/ORigin/Properties] : Enter an option or press Enter On Displays the UCS icon. Off Turns off display of the UCS icon.
Origin Displays the icon at the origin (0,0,0) of the current coordinate system. If the origin is off the screen, or if the icon cannot be positioned at the origin without being clipped at the viewport edges, the icon is displayed at the lower-left corner of the viewport. Properties Displays the UCS Icon dialog box, in which you can control the style, visibility, and location of the UCS icon.
Command entry: ucsicon List of Options The following options are displayed. UCS Icon Style Specifies display of either the 2D or the 3D UCS icon and its appearance. 2D Displays a 2D icon without a representation of the Z axis. 3D Displays a 3D icon. Line Width Controls the line width of the UCS icon if the 3D UCS icon is selected. Preview Displays a preview of the UCS icon in model space. UCS Icon Size Controls the size of the UCS icon as a percentage of viewport size.
UCSMAN Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) Manages defined user coordinate systems. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named Menu: Tools ➤ Named UCS Toolbar: UCS Summary The UCS dialog box is displayed. UCS Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) Controls the UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports.
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named Menu: Tools ➤ Named UCS Toolbar: UCS Command entry: ucsman Summary Lists, renames, and restores previously defined user coordinate systems, and controls UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports. List of Tabs ■ Named UCSs on page 1986 ■ Orthographic UCSs on page 1987 ■ Settings on page 1989 Named UCSs Tab (UCS Dialog Box) Lists user coordinate systems and sets the current UCS. Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS.
UNNAMED is always the first entry if the current UCS is unnamed. World is always listed and cannot be renamed or deleted. If you define other coordinate systems for the active viewport during the current editing session, a Previous entry is next. You can step back through these coordinate systems by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly. To add a UCS name to this list, use the Save option of the UCS command. Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system.
Lists the six orthographic coordinate systems defined in the current drawing. The orthographic coordinate systems are defined relative to the UCS specified in the Relative To list. ■ Name. Specifies the name of the orthographic coordinate system. ■ Depth. Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system specified by the UCSBASE system variable.
Settings Tab (UCS Dialog Box) Displays and modifies UCS icon settings and UCS settings saved with a viewport. UCS Icon Settings Specifies the UCS icon display settings for the current viewport. On Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport. Display at UCS Origin Point Displays the UCS icon at the origin of the current coordinate system in the current viewport.
Restores Plan view when the coordinate system in the viewport is changed. (UCSFOLLOW system variable) Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) Specifies the depth for an orthographic UCS. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click in the Orthographic UCSs list. Click Depth. Summary List of Options The following options are displayed.
Displays information about the origin and axes of the selected UCS. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Coordinates panel ➤ Named Menu: Tools ➤ Named UCS Toolbar: UCS Command entry: ucsman Summary By default, the origin and the values for the X, Y, and Z axes are calculated relative to the world coordinate system. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Displays the name of the current named UCS. Origin Displays the UCS origin relative to the UCS selected in Relative To.
ULAYERS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Layers in an Underlay Controls the display of layers in a DWF, DWFx, PDF, or DGN underlay. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Layers Shortcut menu: Select an underlay, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DWF, PDF, or DGN Layers. Summary After selecting the underlay, the Underlay Layers dialog box is displayed.
Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Layers Shortcut menu: Select an underlay, right-click in the drawing area, and choose DWF, PDF, or DGN Layers. Command entry: ulayers Summary You can turn layers on and off to filter which layers display in an underlay. List of Options The following options are available in this dialog box. Reference Name Select the reference whose layers you want to manage. Search for layer Filters the layer list by name quickly as you enter characters.
Enter a command name to suppress that command. The suppressed command name can then be redefined to perform some other function. You can undefine only built-in AutoCAD commands. You cannot undefine ® commands defined by AutoLISP . This includes ObjectARX™ application commands registered by acedDefun(). You also cannot undefine external commands and aliases defined in the acad.pgp file.
Summary UNDO displays the command or system variable name at the Command prompt to indicate that you have stepped past the point where the command was used. NOTE UNDO has no effect on some commands and system variables, including those that open, close, or save a window or a drawing, display information, change the graphics display, regenerate the drawing, or export the drawing in a different format. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
a Control option or a single step of the UNDO command is available when the One option is in effect. Combine Controls whether multiple, consecutive zoom and pan commands are combined as a single operation for undo and redo operations. NOTE Pan and zoom commands that are started from the menu are not combined, and always remain separate actions. Layer Controls whether the layer dialog operations are combined as a single undo operation. Begin, End Groups a sequence of actions into a set.
Undocumented Command or System Variable Quick Reference This command or system variable is not documented in the Help system for one of several reasons, including ■ It is obsolete, but included in the product to maintain legacy script compatibility ■ It was included for testing purposes and has limited or no functionality ■ It is a special case of a similar, documented command and is used in the menu or the ribbon only Use Search to find additional information about the feature in which you are intere
Summary You can combine two or more 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions into a single, composite 3D solid, surface, or region. You must select the same type of objects to combine. Using the Union Command with Surfaces Although you can use the UNION command with surfaces, it will cause the surface to lose associativity.
You cannot use UNION with mesh objects. However, if you select a mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid or surface. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects Select the 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to be combined. UNISOLATEOBJECTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Objects Displays previously hidden objects. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation.
UNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Determine the Units of Measurement Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. Access Methods Button Menu: Format ➤ Units Command entry: 'units for transparent use Summary The format, precision, and other conventions to be used in displaying coordinates, distances, and angles are set and saved in drawing template files. These settings can also be changed in the current drawing file. The Drawing Units dialog box is displayed.
Access Methods Button Menu: Format ➤ Units Command entry: units (or 'units for transparent use) List of Options The following options are displayed. Length Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units. Type Sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, and Scientific. The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet-and-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch.
Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size displayed for linear measurements. Angle Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display. Type Sets the current angle format. Precision Sets the precision for the current angle display. The following conventions are used for the various angle measures: decimal degrees appear as decimal numbers, grads appear with a lowercase g suffix, and radians appear with a lowercase r suffix.
NOTE In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when, either in the source block or the target drawing, Insertion Scale is set to Unitless. Sample Output Displays an example of the current settings for units and angles. Lighting Controls the unit of measurement for the intensity of photometric lights in the current drawing.
Access Methods Button Menu: Format ➤ Units Command entry: units (or 'units for transparent use) Summary When prompted for an angle, you can locate a point in the desired direction or enter an angle. Base Angle Sets the direction of the zero angle. The following options affect the entry of angles, the display format, and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical coordinates. East Specifies the compass direction east (the default). North Specifies the compass direction north.
-UNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Determine the Units of Measurement List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Report formats: (Examples) 1. Scientific 1.55E+01 2. Decimal 15.50 3. Engineering 1'-3.50" 4. Architectural 1'-3 1/2" 5.
Direction for angle 0: East 3 o'clock = 0 North 12 o'clock = 90 West 9 o'clock = 180 South 6 o'clock = 270 Enter direction for angle 0 : Enter a value or press Enter The default direction for 0 degrees is to the east quadrant, or 3 o'clock. The default direction for positive angular measurement is counterclockwise.
UPDATETHUMBSNOW Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Open Drawings Manually updates thumbnail previews in the Sheet Set Manager and the Quick View tool. Summary The UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable controls how the thumbnail previews are updated.
2008
V Commands 22 VBAIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ AutoCAD LT VBA Displays the Visual Basic Editor. NOTE Microsoft® Visual Basic® for Applications software (VBA) is no longer installed with AutoCAD LT. For more information, visit http://www.autodesk.com/vba-download.
You can also debug and run projects from the Visual Basic Editor. VBALOAD Quick Reference See also: ■ AutoCAD LT VBA Loads a global VBA project into the current work session. NOTE Microsoft® Visual Basic® for Applications software (VBA) is no longer installed with AutoCAD LT. For more information, visit http://www.autodesk.com/vba-download.
If you select Open Visual Basic Editor, the Visual Basic Editor is opened after the selected project is loaded. For information about the Visual Basic Editor, see the ActiveX and VBA Developer's Guide. If FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), or if you enter -vbaload at the Command prompt, VBALOAD displays command prompts. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box that is displayed when you open a drawing or project file that contains macros gives you the opportunity to disable the macros. A macro virus can be harmful only if it is allowed to run. List of Options The following options are displayed. Always Ask Before Opening Projects with Macros When cleared, prevents the AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box from being displayed again. You can later enable macro virus protection using the VBA Options dialog box.
NOTE Microsoft® Visual Basic® for Applications software (VBA) is no longer installed with AutoCAD LT. For more information, visit http://www.autodesk.com/vba-download. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ VBA Manager Menu: Tools ➤ Macro ➤ VBA Manager Summary Loads, unloads, saves, creates, embeds, and extracts VBA projects. The VBA Manager is displayed.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ VBA Manager Menu: Tools ➤ Macro ➤ VBA Manager Command entry: vbaman List of Options The following options are displayed. Drawing Specifies the active drawing. Embedded Project Specifies the name of the embedded project for the drawing. If the drawing does not contain an embedded project, “(none)” is displayed. Extract Moves the embedded project out of the drawing and into a global project file.
If you choose No, the project is extracted and assigned a temporary project name. Projects Lists the name and location of all the projects currently available in the current work session. Embed Embeds the selected project in the specified drawing. A drawing can contain only one embedded project. You cannot embed a project in a drawing that already contains an embedded project. New Creates a new project with the default name “Global n,” where n is a session-based number incremented with each new project.
VBARUN Quick Reference See also: ■ AutoCAD LT VBA Runs a VBA macro. NOTE Microsoft® Visual Basic® for Applications software (VBA) is no longer installed with AutoCAD LT. For more information, visit http://www.autodesk.com/vba-download. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Run VBA Macro Menu: Tools ➤ Macro ➤ Macros Summary Runs, edits, or deletes a VBA macro. You can also create new macros, set the VBA options, and display the VBA Manager. The Macros dialog box is displayed.
Runs, edits, or deletes a VBA macro. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Run VBA Macro Menu: Tools ➤ Macro ➤ Macros Command entry: vbarun Summary You can also create new macros, set the VBA options, and display the VBA Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed. Macro Name Specifies the name of the macro you want to run, edit, delete, or create.
Lists all macros found in the drawing or project selected in Macros In. Macros In Specifies the project or drawing whose macros are available from the macro list. If your project or drawing is not listed, click VBA Manager to load it. Description Describes the selected macro. Run Runs the selected macro. Step Into Displays the Visual Basic Editor and begins execution of the macro. Execution is paused at the first executable line of code. Edit Displays the Visual Basic Editor and the selected macro.
Select Project Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of AutoCAD LT VBA Prompts you to select a project or drawing in which to create the new macro. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Run VBA Macro Menu: Tools ➤ Macro ➤ Macros Command entry: vbarun Summary The macro is created in the selected project or drawing, and the Visual Basic Editor is opened.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Run VBA Macro Menu: Tools ➤ Macro ➤ Macros Command entry: vbarun List of Options The following options are displayed. Enable Auto Embedding Automatically creates an embedded VBA project for all drawings when you open the drawing. Allow Break on Errors Break mode is a temporary suspension of program execution in the development environment. In Break mode, you can examine, debug, reset, step through, or continue program execution.
-VBARUN Quick Reference See also: ■ AutoCAD LT VBA Summary For embedded or loaded global projects, enter the name of the macro to run. If the macro name is not unique among all the currently loaded projects, you must also include the name of the project and module in which the macro is found. For example, to run a macro named Test in a project named Project1, and a module named Module1, enter the following information at the Macro name prompt: Project1.Module1.
NOTE Microsoft® Visual Basic® for Applications software (VBA) is no longer installed with AutoCAD LT. For more information, visit http://www.autodesk.com/vba-download. Summary A Visual Basic statement is a complete instruction that can contain keywords, operators, variables, constants, and expressions. A statement generally occupies a single line, although you can use a colon (:) to include more than one statement on a line. VBA statements are executed in the context of the current drawing.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ View panel ➤ Named Views Menu: View ➤ Named Views Toolbar: View Summary The View Manager on page 2023 is displayed. If you enter -view at the Command prompt, options are displayed. NOTE The VIEW command cannot be used transparently. View Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Creates, sets, renames, modifies, and deletes named views, including model named views and camera views, layout views, and preset views.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ View panel ➤ Named Views Menu: View ➤ Named Views Toolbar: View Summary Click a view to display the properties for that view. List of Options The following options are displayed. Views Displays a list of the available views. You can expand each node (except for the Current node) to display its views. ■ Current. Displays the current view and its View and Clipping properties ■ Model Views.
■ Layout Views. Displays a list of viewports on a layout that define a view, and lists General and View properties for a selected view. ■ Preset Views. Displays a list of orthogonal and isometric views, and lists the General properties for a selected view. General The following properties are available: Name Displays the name of a selected camera, model, or layout view.
Transition Type For model and layout views, displays the transition type assigned to the named view and is used when playing back the view. Transition Duration For model and layout views, displays the length of time for the transition that is assigned to the named view and is used when playing back the view. Movement For model views only, displays the movement assigned to a named view that is assigned the Cinematic view type.
View Camera X For current and model views only, displays the X coordinate of the view’s camera. Camera Y For current and model views only, displays the Y coordinate of the view’s camera. Camera Z For current and model views only, displays the Z coordinate of the view’s camera. Target X For current and model views only, displays the X coordinate of the view's target. Target Y For current and model views only, displays the Y coordinate of the view’s target.
Update Layers Updates layer information saved with a selected view to match the layer visibility in the current model space or layout viewport. Edit Boundaries Displays the selected view, with the rest of the drawing area displayed in a lighter color to show the boundaries of the named view. Delete Deletes a selected view. New View / Shot Properties Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Creates a named view.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ View panel ➤ Named Views Menu: View ➤ Named Views Toolbar: View List of Options The following options are displayed.
View Name Specifies the view’s name. View Category Specifies a category for the named view. View Type Specifies the type of view for the named view. Recorded Walk is available for model space views only. Boundary Defines the area of the drawing that is assigned to the named view. Current Display Uses the current display as the new view. Define Window Uses a window as the new view, which you define in the drawing area by specifying two opposite corners.
View Properties Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Defines the area of the drawing to display and controls the visual appearance of the objects in the view and the background assigned to a named view.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Boundary Defines the area of the drawing that is assigned to the named view. Current Display Uses the current display as the new view. Define Window Uses a window as the new view, which you define in the drawing area by specifying two opposite corners. Define View Window Button Temporarily closes the New View and View Manager dialog boxes so that you can use the pointing device to define the opposite corners of the New View window.
view. Opens the Background dialog box on page 2036 or the Adjust Sun & Sky Background dialog box on page 2038. NOTE The Sun & Sky option is only available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is not set to a value of 0. Save Sun Properties with View Specifies whether sun and sky data is saved with the named view. The option is automatically selected when choosing Sun & Sky for the background type. Saving sun and sky data to a named view is optional when using a background type other than Sun & Sky.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Transition Defines the transition to use when playing back a view. Transition Type Defines the transition type to use when playing back a view. Transition Duration Sets the length of time for the transition. Motion Defines the behavior of the motion to use when playing back a view.
Movement Sets the type of movement to use for a named view when the named view is assigned the Cinematic view type. Playback Duration Sets the length of time that the animation takes to play back. Distance Sets the distance that the motion takes to complete when the named view is assigned the Cinematic view type. Distance Up Sets the distance the camera can be moved upward. Applies to the Crane Up movement types. Distance Down Sets the distance the camera can be moved downward.
Sets the current position of the camera. Always Look at Pivot Point Locks the camera to the center-of-interest. Applies to the Track and Crane movement types. Preview Previews the transition and motion assigned to the named view. Loop Continuously plays back the transition and motion assigned to the named view. Background Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Defines the type, color, effects, and position of the background for a named view.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Type Lists background overrides (None, Solid, Gradient, Image, or Sun & Sky) that you can apply to a named view. Solid Selects a single-color, solid background. Gradient Specifies a two- or three-color gradient background. Image Uses an image file for the background. Sun & Sky Displays the Adjust Sun & Sky Background dialog box on page 2038 to specify the position, color and properties of the sun and sky for the background.
Filename Displays the image file's name and path. Browse Select an image file and click Open. Adjust Image Displays the Adjust Background Image dialog box. on page 2041 Adjust Sun & Sky Background Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Defines the position, color, and effects of the sun and sky for a view.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ View panel ➤ Named Views Menu: View ➤ Named Views Toolbar: View Summary Only available in photometric lighting workflow (LIGHTINGUNITS = 1 or 2). List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays the results of the current sun and sky settings for the current view. General Sets the general properties of the sun. Status Turns the sun on and off. Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the sun.
Height Determines the absolute position of the ground plane relative to world zero. This parameter represents a world-space length and should be formatted in the current length unit. Blur Determines the amount of blurring between ground plane and sky. Ground color Determines the color of the ground plane. Advanced This category of properties pertains to various artistic effects. Night Color Specifies the color of the night sky. Aerial Perspective Specifies if aerial perspective is applied.
Softness Displays the setting for the appearance of the edges of shadows. This setting is read-only when display of shadows is turned off. Geographic Location Displays the current geographic location settings. When a city is not stored with latitude and longitude, the city does not appear in the list. Adjust Background Image Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views Controls options for the background image applied to a model space named view.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ View panel ➤ Named Views Menu: View ➤ Named Views Toolbar: View List of Options The following options are displayed. Image Position Determines the image position in the named view. ■ Center. Centers the image without changing its aspect ratio or scale. ■ Stretch. Centers the image and stretches (scales) it along both the X and Y axes so that the image takes up the entire view. If you plan to plot the background image, set the image position to Stretch.
If the Offset option is chosen, offsets the image horizontally (the X offset). If Scale is chosen, adjusts the X scale of the image. Reset Resets the Offset or Scale settings to their default values. Maintain Aspect Ratio When Scaling Locks the X and Y axes together. If Tile is selected and you change the offset so that the bitmap rectangle appears outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap is not centered within the drawing area when you display the view.
The view orientation of the specified orthographic view is based on the UCSBASE system variable, which is set to the world coordinate system by default. When one of the orthographic views is restored, the program zooms to the extents in the current viewport. Restore Restores the view you specify to the current viewport. If a UCS setting was saved with the view, it is also restored. The center point and magnification of the saved view are also restored.
UCS Determines whether the current UCS and elevation settings are saved when a view is saved. (UCSVIEW system variable) Visual Style Sets or updates a visual style for a view. Window Saves a portion of the current display as a view. Restoring such a view may display objects outside the window you specified because the shape of the window may differ from that of the viewport in which you are restoring the view.
Summary Plays the animation associated to the named view entered. The command ends if the name entered does not match a view in the drawing or the view does not have any animation properties assigned to it. VIEWPLOTDETAILS Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Displays information about completed plot and publish jobs. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ View Details Menu: File ➤ View Plot and Publish Details Summary The Plot and Publish Details dialog box is displayed.
Displays information about plotting and publishing jobs that have been completed in the current session. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Output tab ➤ Plot panel ➤ View Details Menu: File ➤ View Plot and Publish Details Command entry: viewplotdetails Summary Plot and publish details are also available through the Plot and Publish status bar icon shortcut menu. List of Options The following options are displayed. View Specifies what is displayed.
Errors Lists errors that have occurred as jobs were plotted or published. Copy to Clipboard Copies all highlighted text in the Plot and Publish Details dialog box to the Clipboard. Details Area Lists details of completed plot and publish jobs.
View Plot and Publish Details Displays Plot and Publish Details dialog box. View .dwf Opens the most recently created DWF file. Enable Balloon Notification Turns on balloon notification of the status of jobs you have plotted and published. VIEWRES Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Views Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. Summary The model is regenerated. VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles, arcs, splines, and arced polylines using short vectors.
VISUALSTYLES Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Creates and modifies visual styles and applies a visual style to a viewport. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ View panel ➤ Visual Styles Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Visual Styles Toolbar: Visual Styles Summary The Visual Styles Manager on page 2051 is displayed. If you enter -visualstyles at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 2061.
Visual Styles Manager Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Creates and modifies visual styles.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Visual Styles panel ➤ Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Visual Styles Toolbar: Visual Styles ➤ Visual Styles Manager Summary Creates and modifies visual styles.
■ A drawing icon at center bottom indicates a visual style that is in use in the current drawing but not in the current viewport. ■ A product icon at lower right indicates a default visual style that is shipped with the product. Buttons in Tool Strip Provides button access to frequently used options. Create New Visual Style A new sample image is placed at the end of the panel and selected. Apply Selected Visual Style to Current Viewport Applies the selected visual style to the current viewport.
Highlight Intensity Button Changes the value for Highlight Intensity from positive to negative and vice versa. Opacity Button Changes the value for Opacity from positive to negative and vice versa. Face Style Defines the shading on faces. (VSFACESTYLE system variable) ■ Realistic. This default option is as close as possible to how the face would appear in the real world. ■ Gooch.
This default setting provides a smooth display without hardware acceleration. To display at this setting, the Per-Pixel Lighting setting needs to be turned on in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box from the 3DCONFIG command.
Color Controls the display of colors on faces. (VSFACECOLORMODE system variable) ■ Normal. Does not apply a face color modifier. ■ Monochrome. Displays the model in shades of the color you specify (VSMONOCOLOR on page 2606 system variable). ■ Tint. Changes the hue and saturation value of face colors. ■ Desaturate. Softens the color by reducing its saturation component by 30 percent. The monochrome color used is the color value stored in the VSMONOCOLOR system variable.
The tint color is determined by the hue and saturation settings of the color value stored in the VSMONOCOLOR system variable. The color saturation of 3D solids and surfaces is reduced by 30 percent.
Opacity Controls the opacity or transparency of faces in a viewport. (VSFACEOPACITY system variable) Materials and Color Controls the display of materials and color on faces. Materials Controls whether materials and textures are displayed. (VSMATERIALMODE system variable) Monochrome Color/Tint Color Displays the Select Color dialog box on page 337, where you select the monochrome or tint color, depending on the face color mode.
Show Sets edge display to Facet Edges, Isolines, or None. (VSEDGES system variable) Color Sets the color for edges. (VSEDGECOLOR system variable) Edge Modifiers Controls settings that apply to all edge modes except None. Line Extensions Makes lines extend beyond their intersection, for a hand-drawn effect. The button turns the overhang effect on and off. When it is on, you can change the setting. (VSEDGELEX system variable) Jitter Button and Setting Makes lines appear sketched.
Show Controls whether intersection edges are displayed. (VSINTERSECTIONEDGES system variable) NOTE To increase performance, turn off the display of intersection edges. Color Sets the color for intersection edges. (VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable) Linetype Sets a linetype for intersection edges. (VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE system variable) Lighting Settings Controls lighting-related effects. Exposure Control Controls the size of highlights on faces without materials.
Description Provides an optional description for the visual style. The description is displayed in a tooltip when the cursor hovers over the sample image. -VISUALSTYLES Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Creates and modifies visual styles from the command line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
VISUALSTYLESCLOSE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Closes the Visual Styles Manager. VLISP Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of AutoLISP and Visual LISP Displays the Visual LISP interactive development environment. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Manage tab ➤ Applications panel ➤ Visual LISP Editor Menu: Tools ➤ AutoLISP ➤ Visual LISP Editor Summary Use Visual LISP to develop, test, and debug AutoLISP programs.
VPCLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Layout Viewports Clips layout viewport objects and reshapes the viewport border. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Clip Shortcut menu: Select the viewport to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Viewport Clip. Summary You can either select an existing object to designate as the new boundary, or specify the points of a new boundary. The new boundary does not clip the old boundary, it redefines it.
Delete Deletes the clipping boundary of a selected viewport. This option is available only if the selected viewport has already been clipped. If you clip a viewport that has been previously clipped, the original clipping boundary is deleted, and the new clipping boundary is applied. VPLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Freeze Specified Layers in a Layout Viewport Sets layer visibility within viewports. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Ltype Changes the linetype associated with a layer. ■ All on page 2064 ■ Select on page 2064 ■ Current on page 2064 Lweight Changes the lineweight associated with a layer. If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, the current lineweight is set to the nearest fixed lineweight value. If you want to plot an object with a custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights.
Freeze Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, regenerated, or plotted. ■ All on page 2064 ■ Select on page 2064 ■ Current on page 2064 Thaw Thaws layers in specific viewports. ■ All on page 2064 ■ Select on page 2064 ■ Current on page 2064 Reset Sets the visibility of layers in specified viewports to their current default setting.
Access Methods Buton Toolbar: Status bar Shortcut menu: Right-click in a viewport and click Maximize Viewport. Summary The viewport is expanded to fill the screen and switched to model space for editing. VPMIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport Restores the current layout viewport. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Status bar Shortcut menu: Right-click in a maximized viewport and click Minimize Viewport.
VPOINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles Sets the viewing direction for a 3D visualization of the drawing. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify a view pointor [Rotate] : Specify a point, enter r, or press ENTER to display a compass and axis tripod View Point Creates a vector that defines a direction from which the drawing can be viewed.
Compass and Axis Tripod Displays a compass and axis tripod, which you use to define a viewing direction in the viewport. The compass is a two-dimensional representation of a globe. The center point is the north pole (0,0,n), the inner ring is the equator (n,n,0), and the entire outer ring is the south pole (0,0,-n). As you move the crosshairs, the axis tripod rotates to conform to the viewing direction indicated on the compass.
Ribbon: View tab ➤ Viewports panel ➤ Named Viewports Menu: View ➤ Viewports Toolbar: Layouts Summary The Viewports dialog box is displayed. If you enter -vports at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Viewports Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Model Space Viewports Creates new viewport configurations, or names and saves a model space viewport configuration.
New Viewports Tab—Model Space (Viewports Dialog Box) New Name Specifies a name for the new model space viewport configuration. If you do not enter a name, the viewport configuration is applied but not saved. If a viewport configuration is not saved, it cannot be used in a layout. Standard Viewports Lists and sets the standard viewport configurations, including CURRENT, which is the current configuration.
Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration. Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list. You can choose a named view, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can select from the list of standard views.
Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration. Viewport Spacing Specifies the spacing you want to apply between the layout viewports you are configuring. Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports.
-VPORTS - Model Space Viewports Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Model Space Viewports Summary The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are called viewport configurations. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Save/Restore/Delete/Join/Single/?/2/3/4] <3>: Enter an option Save Saves the current viewport configuration using a specified name. Restore Restores a previously saved viewport configuration.
?—List Viewport Configurations Displays the identification numbers and screen positions of the active viewports. The lower-left and upper-right corners of the viewport define its location. For these corners, values between 0.0,0.0 (for the lower-left corner of the drawing area) and 1.0,1.0 (for the upper-right corner) are used. The current viewport is listed first. 2 Divides the current viewport in half. 3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports.
On Turns on a viewport, making it active and making its objects visible. Off Turns off a viewport. When a viewport is off, its objects are not displayed, and you cannot make that viewport current. Fit Creates one viewport that fills the available display area. The actual size of the viewport depends on the dimensions of the paper space view. Shadeplot Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted.
Horizontal and Vertical split the area into thirds. The other options create one large viewport in half the available area and two smaller ones in the other half. Above, Below, Left, and Right specify where the larger viewport is placed. 4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal size. VSCURRENT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Sets the visual style in the current viewport. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
NOTE To display lighting from point lights, distant lights, spotlights, or the sun, set the visual style to Realistic, Conceptual, or a custom visual style with shaded objects. 2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Raster and OLE objects, linetypes, and lineweights are visible. Even if the value for the COMPASS on page 2192 system variable is set to 1, it does not appear in the 2D Wireframe view.
VSLIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ View Slides Displays an image slide file in the current viewport. Summary The Select Slide File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box, is displayed. To display a slide in a slide library (.slb extension), set FILEDIA to 0, enter vslide, and then specify the slide library file name followed by the slide file name enclosed in parentheses: slidelibrary (slide).
NOTE You must be in model space to save a visual style. If you enter a name that is already in use for a visual style, you can either replace the existing visual style or enter a different name. VTOPTIONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Displays a change in view as a smooth transition. Summary The View Transitions dialog box on page 2080 is displayed. View Transitions Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Controls when smooth view transitions are used.
Enable Animation for Pan and Zoom Makes a smooth view transition during panning and zooming. (VTENABLE system variable) Enable Animation When View Rotates Makes a smooth view transition when the view angle is changed. (VTENABLE system variable) Enable Animation During Scripts Makes smooth view transitions while a script is running. (VTENABLE system variable) Transition Speed Sets the speed of a smooth view transition in milliseconds.
2082
W Commands 23 WALKFLYSETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing Controls the walk and fly navigation settings. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render ➤ Animations panel ➤ Walk and Fly drop-down ➤ Walk and Fly Settings. Menu: View ➤ Walk and Fly ➤ Walk and Fly Settings Toolbar: 3D Navigation Summary The Walk and Fly Settings dialog box on page 2084 is displayed.
Walk and Fly Settings Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing Controls the walk and fly navigation settings Access Methods Walk and Fly Settings Ribbon: Render ➤ Animations panel ➤ Walk and Fly drop-down ➤ Walk and Fly Settings. Menu: View ➤ Walk and Fly ➤ Walk and Fly Settings Toolbar: 3D Navigation Command entry: walkflysettings List of Options The following options are displayed.
Settings Specifies settings related to the Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings balloon on page 77 and the Position Locator window on page 76. When Entering Walk and Fly Modes Specifies that the Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings balloon is displayed each time you enter walk or fly mode. Once Per Session Specifies that the Walk and Fly Navigation Mappings balloon is displayed the first time in each AutoCAD session that you enter walk or fly mode.
Summary The Write Block dialog box is displayed. Entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file, followed by command prompts. If FILEDIA is set to 0, the standard file selection dialog box is suppressed. Write Block Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks Saves objects or converts a block to a file.
Summary The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on whether nothing is selected, a single block is selected, or objects other than blocks are selected. List of Options The following options are displayed. Source Specifies blocks and objects, saves them as a file, and specifies insertion points. Block Specifies an existing block to save as a file. Select a name from the list. Entire Drawing Selects current drawing to save as another file.
Convert to Block Converts the selected object or objects to a block in the current drawing after saving them as a file. Delete from Drawing Deletes the selected objects from the current drawing after saving them as a file. Select Objects Button Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select one or more objects to save to the file. Quick Select Button Opens the Quick Select dialog box, which you can use to filter your selection set. Objects Selected Indicates the number of objects selected.
-WBLOCK Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks Summary If FILEDIA is set to 1, entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file. If FILEDIA is set to 0, entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a prompt. The new drawing is saved in the file format that is specified in Save As on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box.
WEBLIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Weblights Creates a web light Access Methods Button Ribbon: Render ➤ Lights panel ➤ Create Light ➤ Weblight. Toolbar: Lights List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power in per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the perceived power emitted in all directions.
Z Specifies the Z rotation for the web. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off the display and calculation of shadows for the light. Use this option to increase performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Map Size Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map. Softness Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map.
WEDGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid Wedge Creates a 3D solid wedge. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Modeling panel ➤ Wedge Menu: Draw ➤ Modeling ➤ Wedge Toolbar: Modeling Summary The direction of the taper is always in the positive X-axis direction of the UCS. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. Center Creates the wedge by using a specified center point. Cube Creates a wedge with sides of equal length. Length Creates a wedge with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.
Length Creates a wedge with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. 2Point Specifies that the height of the wedge is the distance between the two specified points. WHOHAS Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing Displays ownership information for opened drawing files. Summary You can use WHOHAS to track which users have certain drawing files open.
WIPEOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects Creates a wipeout object, and controls whether wipeout frames are displayed in the drawing. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Wipeout Menu: Draw ➤ Wipeout Summary Creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color. The wipeout area is bounded by a frame that you can turn on for editing and turn off for plotting. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
First Point Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout object from a series of points. Frames Determines whether the edges of all wipeout objects are displayed or hidden. Polyline Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout objects from a selected polyline. Erase Polyline Enter y to erase the polyline that was used to create the wipeout object. Enter n to retain the polyline. WMFIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert WMF Files Imports a Windows metafile.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify insertion point on page 2098 or [Scale on page 2098/X on page 2098/Y on page 2098/Z on page 2098/Rotate on page 2098/PScale on page 2099/PX on page 2099/PY on page 2099/PZ on page 2099/PRotate on page 2099]: Specify a point or enter an option Insertion Point Places a copy of the metafile with its base point at the specified insertion point. X Scale Factor Sets the X and Y scale factors.
PScale Sets the temporary scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the WMF file as it is dragged into position. ■ X Scale Factor on page 2098 ■ Corner on page 2098 ■ XYZ on page 2098 PX Sets the temporary scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the WMF file as it is dragged into position.
WMFOPTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert WMF Files Sets options for WMFIN. Summary The WMF In Options dialog box is displayed. WMF In Options Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert WMF Files Controls whether metafiles maintain relative line widths and whether they are imported as wireframes or solid objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Wire Frame (No Fills) Imports objects as wireframes. If you clear this option, objects are imported as filled objects.
Maintains the relative line width of lines and borders. If you clear this option, lines are imported with zero width. WMFOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Export WMF Files Saves objects to a Windows metafile. Summary The Create WMF standard file selection dialog box is displayed. WORKSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces Creates, modifies, and saves workspaces and makes a workspace current. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Delete Deletes a workspace. Settings Opens the Workspace Settings dialog box on page 2103, which controls the display, menu order, and Save settings of a workspace. ?—List Workspaces Lists all workspaces defined in the main and enterprise CUIx files. WSSAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces Saves a workspace. Summary If you enter -wssave at the Command prompt, WSSAVE displays prompts. The Save Workspace dialog box is displayed.
Name Displays a text box where you can specify a name for a newly saved workspace and view a list of existing workspaces. These workspaces can be overwritten if the CUIx file in which they are included is writable. Read-only files, such as CUIx files that are shared across a network (called enterprise CUIx files), are displayed with a “Read-Only” file name extension. WSSETTINGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces Sets options for workspaces.
Displays a list of workspaces from which you can choose a workspace to assign to the My Workspace toolbar button. Menu Display and Order Controls which workspace name you want to display in the Workspaces toolbar and menu, the order of those workspace names, and whether a separator line is added between each workspace name.
X Commands 24 XATTACH Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Inserts DWG files as an external reference (xref). Access Methods Button Ribbon: Insert tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Attach Menu: Insert ➤ External Reference Toolbar: Reference Summary When you attach a drawing file as an xref, you link that referenced drawing to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced drawing are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
box is displayed. After the files are attached, you can adjust and clip the xref through the External Reference ribbon contextual tab. Attach External Reference Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Attaches drawings as an external reference (xref).
Summary If you attach a drawing that contains an attached xref, the attached xref appears in the current drawing. You can select multiple DWG files to attach. Like blocks, attached xrefs can be nested. If another person is currently editing the xref, the attached drawing is based on the most recently saved version. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the DWG you have selected to attach.
Uniform Scale Sets the Y and X scale factors as the same as Z. Insertion Point Specify On-Screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value. Path Type Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the external reference file, or No Path, the name of the external reference (the file must be located in the same folder as the current drawing file).
Found In Displays the path where the external reference file is located. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the external reference is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting. External Reference Ribbon Contextual Tab Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Displays options for attaching external references.
Remove Clipping (XCLIP on page 2113) Deletes the clipping boundary. Options Panel External References (EXTERNALREFERENCES on page 771) Opens the External References palette. XBIND Quick Reference See also: ■ Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind) Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ External Reference ➤ Bind Toolbar: Reference Summary The Xbind dialog box is displayed.
Xbind Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind) Adds xref-dependent named objects (such as blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles) to your drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ External Reference ➤ Bind Toolbar: Reference Command entry: xbind List of Options The following options are displayed. Xrefs Lists the xrefs currently attached to the drawing.
Moves the named object definitions selected in the Xrefs list into the Definitions to Bind list. Remove Moves the xref-dependent named object definition selected in the Definitions to Bind list back to its xref-dependent definition table. -XBIND Quick Reference See also: ■ Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind) Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
XCLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Clip External References and Blocks Crops the display of a selected external reference or block reference to a specified boundary. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Inset tab ➤ Reference panel ➤ Clip. Toolbar: Reference Shortcut menu: Select an xref, right-click in the drawing area, and click Clip Xref. Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of an xref or block instance that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary.
Off Displays all of the geometry of the external reference or block in the current drawing, ignoring the clipping boundary. Clipdepth Sets the front and back clipping planes on an xref or block. Objects outside the volume defined by the boundary and the specified depth are not displayed. Regardless of the current UCS, the clip depth is applied parallel to the clipping boundary. Front Clip Point Creates a clipping plane passing through and perpendicular to the clipping boundary.
NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected XREF underlay when the old boundary is deleted. XEDGES Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Wireframe Models Creates wireframe geometry from the edges of a 3D solid, surface, mesh, region, or subobject.
Press and hold Ctrl to select faces, edges and component objects, repeating if necessary. Objects such as lines, arcs, splines, or 3D polylines are created along the edges of the selected objects or subobjects. XLINE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) Creates a line of infinite length.
Point Specifies the location of the infinite line using two points through which it passes. The xline is created through the specified point. Hor Creates a horizontal xline passing through a specified point. The xline is created parallel to the X axis. Ver Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point. The xline is created parallel to the Y axis. Ang Creates an xline at a specified angle. Angle of Xline Specifies the angle at which to place the line.
Reference Specifies the angle from a selected reference line. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the reference line. Bisect Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the angle between the first and second line. The xline lies in the plane determined by the three points. Offset Creates an xline parallel to another object. Offset Distance Specifies the distance the xline is offset from the selected object.
Open Reference Files Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit a Referenced Drawing in a Separate Window Opens a selected drawing reference (xref) in a new window. Access Methods Command entry: xopen Summary The Open Reference Files dialog box, displays a reference tree showing all nested xrefs. The source file for the selected xref opens in a separate drawing window, where you can edit, save, and then close the drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Reference Name Displays a reference tree of all nested xrefs for a specified reference. Highlight Selected Reference Highlights the selected xrefs in the drawing area. Preview Displays a preview of the selected reference. Zoom To... Temporarily closes the Open Reference Files dialog box and zooms the view in the drawing area to the selected reference. Press Enter to redisplay the dialog box. Open Opens the source file for the selected reference in a separate window.
Individually Applies changes to the selected objects one at a time. The following prompt is displayed for each object. All Sets the color, linetype, lineweight, and layer of the component objects after you explode them. The prompts associated with the Color, Linetype, Lineweight, and Layer options are displayed. Color Sets the color of the objects after you explode them. ■ Enter bylayer to inherit the color of the exploded object's layer. ■ Enter byblock to inherit the color of the exploded object.
XREF Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Starts the EXTERNALREFERENCES command. Summary The External References palette is displayed. If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Bind Xrefs Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Converts DWG references (xrefs) to standard local block definitions.
Shortcut menu: Select a DWG reference (xref), right-click in the drawing area, and choose External References. Command entry: externalreferences Summary If you bind an xref into the current drawing, the xref and all its dependent named objects become a part of the current drawing. Use XBIND to add individual xref-dependent named objects, such as blocks, text styles, dimension styles, layers, and linetypes, to the local definition table.
-XREF Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an Option ?—List Xrefs Lists the DWG reference name, path, and type and the number of DWG references currently attached to your drawing. Bind Converts a specified DWG reference into a block, making it a permanent part of the drawing. The xref-dependent named objects, such as layer names, of the former xref are added to your drawing.
Unlike blocks and attached xrefs, overlaid xrefs cannot be nested. If another person is currently editing the xref file, the program overlays the most recently saved version. If the xref you specify is not already overlaid, a new xref is crated, using the name of the referenced file. If FILEDIA is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter Name of File to Overlay. You can enter a tilde (~) to display a dialog box.
2126
Z Commands 25 ZOOM Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport. Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Realtime Menu: View ➤ Zoom ➤ Realtime Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and choose Zoom to zoom in real time.
the absolute size of objects in the drawing. It changes only the magnification of the view. In a perspective view, ZOOM displays the 3DZOOM prompts. NOTE You cannot use ZOOM transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW or while ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW is in progress. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or [All on page 2128/Center/Dynamic/Extents on page 2129/Previous/Scale/Window/Object]
Dynamic Pans and zooms using a rectangular view box. The view box represents your view, which you can shrink or enlarge and move around the drawing. Positioning and sizing the view box pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the view inside the view box. ■ To change the size of the view box, click, resize it, and click again to accept the new size of the view box. ■ To pan with the view box, drag it to the location you want and press Enter. Extents Zooms to display the maximum extents of all objects.
NOTE If you change the visual style, the view is changed. If you enter ZOOM Previous, it restores the previous view, which is shaded differently but not zoomed differently. Scale Zooms to change the magnification of a view using a scale factor. ■ Enter a value followed by x to specify the scale relative to the current view. ■ Enter a value followed by xp to specify the scale relative to paper space units. For example, entering .
Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the view. You can select objects before or after you start the ZOOM command. Real Time Zooms interactively to change the magnification of the view. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (-) signs. See Zoom Shortcut Menu on page 2131 for a description of the options that are available while zooming in real time.
Access Methods Button Ribbon: View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Realtime Menu: View ➤ Zoom ➤ Realtime Toolbar: Standard Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and choose Zoom to zoom in real time. Command entry: zoom (or 'zoom for transparent use) Summary When the ZOOM command is active, you can exit ZOOM or switch to PAN or 3DORBIT using the options on the Zoom shortcut menu. To access the Zoom shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while ZOOM is active.
Command Modifiers 26 You can use command modifiers to help you locate points or select objects while a command is in progress. Use the Coordinate Filter, Direct Distance Entry, From, MTP, and Tracking command modifiers at any prompt that requires point specification. Use the Selection Mode command modifiers at any prompt that requires object selection.
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Quick Reference See also: ■ Enter Direct Distances Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter a numeric value With direct distance entry, you can quickly specify a point relative to the last point you entered. At any prompt for a point location, you move the cursor first to specify the direction, and then enter a numeric distance.
At a prompt for locating a point, enter from, and then enter a temporary reference or base point from which you can specify an offset to locate the next point. Enter the offset location from this base point as a relative coordinate, or use direct distance entry. NOTE You cannot use this method during dragging in commands such as MOVE and COPY. Specifying an absolute coordinate, either by keyboard entry or with a pointing device, cancels the FROM command.
At any prompt to locate a point, enter tracking, track, or tk. First tracking point: Specify a location or distance Next point (Press ENTER to end tracking): Specify a second location or distance Tracking specifies a series of temporary points, each offset from the previous one. Thus, you specify a new point location from a series of directions and distances. To determine the location of each temporary point, you can use direct distance entry.
You can specify an object snap with any of the following methods: ■ Enter a object snap by typing its name. To see a list of valid object snaps, refer to the OSNAP on page 1380 command or the Drafting Settings Dialog Box on page 664. ■ Click an object snap from the Object Snap toolbar. ■ Click an object snap from the Object Snap shortcut menu. You can diisplay this shortcut menu by pressing SHIFT while you right-click.
2138
System Variables AutoCAD LT® stores the values for its operating environment and some of its commands in system variables. You can examine any system variable and change any writable system variable directly at the command prompt by entering the system variable name or by using the SETVAR command or the AutoLISP® getvar and setvar functions.
2140
3D System Variables 27 3DDWFPREC Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish 3D DWF Files Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls the precision of 3D DWF or 3D DWFx publishing. This system variable has a range from 1 to 6. Higher settings result in finer precision. 3DDWFPREC Value Deviation Value 1 1 2 0.5 3 0.2 4 0.1 5 0.01 6 0.
NOTE Setting a 3DDWFPREC value of 5 or 6 will create very large files or sheets in a multi-sheet DWF or DWFx.
Controls which 3D object snaps are enabled.
Controls the selection precedence of both visually and physically overlapping objects when using 3D visual styles. 0 Use legacy 3D selection precedence 1 Use line-of-sight 3D selection precedence for selecting 3D solids and surfaces. Also, a defining object associated with a surface is given selection precedence with this setting. 3DSELECTIONMODE has no effect when selecting 3D solids if they are displayed as 2D or 3D wireframes.
A System Variables 28 ACADLSPASDOC Quick Reference See also: ■ AutoLISP and Visual LISP Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the acad.lsp file is loaded into every drawing or just the first drawing opened in a session. 0 Loads acad.lsp into just the first drawing opened in a session 1 Loads acad.
(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the directory path, if any, specified by the ACAD environment variable, with path separators appended if necessary. ACADVER Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize the Drawing Environment (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the AutoCAD version number. This variable differs from the DXF file $ACADVER header variable, which contains the drawing database level number.
ACTPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Play Back an Action Macro Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: "" Specifies the additional paths to use when locating available action macros for playback. NOTE To specify more than one path, but you need to enter a semi-colon between each path. ACTRECORDERSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Action Macros (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies the current state of the Action Recorder.
ACTRECPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Action Macros Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Specifies the path used to store new action macros. ACTUI Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Action Macros Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 6 Controls the behavior of the Action Recorder panel when recording and playing back macros.
ADCSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Access Content with DesignCenter (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the DesignCenter window is open or closed. For developers who need to determine status through AutoLISP. 0 Closed 1 Open AFLAGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Block Attributes Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 16 Sets options for attributes.
4 Verify 8 Preset 16 Lock position in block 32 Multiple lines ANGBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Angular Dimensions Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. ANGDIR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Angular Dimensions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the direction of positive angles. Angle values are measured from angle 0 relative to the orientation of the current UCS.
1 Clockwise ANNOALLVISIBLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Annotative Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Hides or displays annotative objects that do not support the current annotation scale. 0 Only annotative objects that support the current are displayed 1 All annotative objects are displayed The ANNOALLVISIBLE setting is saved individually for model space and each layout.
Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the annotation scale is changed. When the value is negative, the autoscale functionality is turned off, but the settings are maintained: 1 Adds the newly set annotation scale to annotative objects that support the current scale except for those on layers that are turned off, frozen, locked or that are set to Viewport > Freeze. -1 ANNOAUTOSCALE is turned off, but when turned back on is set to 1.
ANNOTATIVEDWG Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies whether or not the drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into another drawing. 0 Nonannotative 1 Annotative NOTE The ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable becomes read-only if the drawing contains annotative objects.
1 On APERTURE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Snaps Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10 Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. Enter a value (1-50). The higher the number, the larger the target box. You can also change this setting in the Options dialog box, Drafting tab.
Applies transparency settings to all palettes. 0 Transparency settings off 1 Transparency settings on This system variable determines the default setting for the Transparency dialog box > Apply these settings to all palettes option on page 1373. APSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Custom Block Authoring Tools (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the Block Authoring Palettes window in the Block Editor is open or closed.
Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the GETVAR command to access this system variable. ATTDIA Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry.
1 Displays the full in-place editor with all formatting options Use the limited in-place editor when creating multiline attributes for best compatibility with releases prior to AutoCAD LT 2008. ATTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Define Block Attributes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls display of attributes.
Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. 0 Turns off all access methods for creating multiline attributes. They can still be viewed and edited. 1 Turns on all access methods for creating multiline attributes. ATTREQ Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks.
Controls whether AUDIT creates an audit report (ADT) file. 0 Prevents writing of ADT files 1 Writes ADT files AUNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Angular Unit Conventions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets units for angles.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the display precision for angular units and coordinates. However, the internal precision of angular values and and coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision. AUPREC does not affect the display precision of dimension text (see DIMSTYLE). Valid values are integers from 0 to 8.
AUTOMATICPUB Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Publish Options Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Controls whether electronic files (DWF/PDF) are created automatically when you save or close drawing (DWG) files. 0 Turns off automatic publishing to DWF/PDF files when a drawing is saved or closed 1 Turns on automatic publishing to DWF/PDF files when a drawing is saved or closed The AUTOPUBLISH command controls additional options.
Also turns on polar and object snap tracking, and controls the display of polar tracking, object snap tracking, and Ortho mode tooltips. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Turns off the AutoSnap marker, tooltips, and magnet.
B System Variables 29 BACKGROUNDPLOT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plotting Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls whether background plotting is turned on or off for plotting and publishing. By default, background plotting is turned off for plotting and on for publishing.
BACKZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a 3D Dynamic View (DVIEW) (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. Meaningful only if clipping is specified in CAMERA, DVIEW, or 3DCLIP. If there are several cameras, the value is the last back clipping plane that you set current.
NOTE The BACTIONSET,BASSOCIATE, and BLOOKUPTABLE on page 252 commands are disabled when the BACTIONBARMODE system variable is set to 1. BACTIONCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Actions and Parameters Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: 7 Sets the text color of actions in the Block Editor. Valid values include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and an integer from 1 to 255. Valid values for True Colors are a string of integers each from 1 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB.
When the display status is on, objects are shaded based on whether they are partially constrained, fully constrained, over constrained, or not constrained. 0 Turns off the constraint display status 1 Turns on the constraint display status You can turn the display status on or off using an icon in the drawing status bar. The colors corresponding to the constraint status can also be modified in the Block Editor Settings dialog box. When you enter the Block Editor, the value is always set to 0.
Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: 141 Sets the color of grips in the Block Editor. Valid values include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and an integer from 1 to 255. Valid values for True Colors are a string of integers each from 1 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB.
Controls how xref names are handled when binding xrefs or editing xrefs in place. 0 Traditional binding behavior ("xref1|one" becomes "xref$0$one") 1 Insert-like behavior ("xref1|one" becomes "one") BLIPMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Erase Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether marker blips are visible. This system variable has the same name as the BLIPMODE command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.
Initial value: 0 Disallows opening of the Block Editor and editing of dynamic block definitions. When BLOCKEDITLOCK is set to 1, double-clicking a dynamic block in a drawing opens the Properties palette. If the dynamic block contains attributes, double-clicking the block reference opens the Enhanced Attribute Editor. Double click actions can be customized using the Double Click Actions.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether or not a test block window is current. The BLOCKTESTWINDOW system variable controls the display of the contextual panel that is displayed when a test block window is current. When the test block window is current, this system variable is set to 1, otherwise it is set to 0.
Initial value: Simplex.shx Sets the font used for parameters and actions in the Block Editor. You can specify either a True Type font or a SHX font (for example, Verdana or Verdana.ttf). You must add the .shx extension to specify an AutoCAD SHX font. When specifying an Asian Big Font, use the following naming convention: an SHX file followed by a comma (,), followed by the Big Font file name (for example, Simplex.shx,Bigfont.shx).
Forces the text displayed for action parametes and constraint parameters in the Block Editor to be horizontal. 0 Aligns text with the dimension line of the parameter 1 Displays the text for action parameters and constraint parameters in the Block Editor horizontally The BPTEXTHORIZONTAL system variable is applicable to the action parameters and block constraint parameters.
Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls how objects that are made invisible for the current visibility state are displayed in the Block Editor.
2174
C System Variables 30 CALCINPUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether mathematical expressions and global constants are evaluated in text and numeric entry boxes of windows and dialog boxes.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Turns the display of camera objects on or off. The value changes to 1 (to display cameras) when you use the CAMERA command. 0 Camera glyphs are not displayed 1 Camera glyphs are displayed CAMERAHEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Camera Properties Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Specifies the default height for new camera objects. The height is expressed in current drawing units.
You can only enter a named scale that exists in the drawing’s named scale list. CANNOSCALEVALUE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Annotation Scale (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Returns the value of the current annotation scale. CAPTURETHUMBNAILS Quick Reference See also: ■ Content reference to: Rewind Tool Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Specifies if and when thumbnails are captured for the Rewind tool.
CBARTRANSPARENCY Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Verify Geometric Constraints Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the transparency of the constraint bars. The valid CBARTRANSPARENCY system variable is between 10 and 90. The higher value makes the constraint bars more opaque.
CDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain General Drawing Information (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the current date and time in decimal format. The date and time displays in a decimal format starting with the year. After the decimal point, CDATE displays the time using a 24-hour clock. For example, the ninth day of February in the year 2006 at 3:05 pm displays as 20060209.150500.
■ Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE or custom color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" CELTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Linetype Scale Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. Sets the linetype scaling for new objects relative to the LTSCALE command setting. A line created with CELTSCALE = 2 in a drawing with LTSCALE set to 0.
CELWEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Current Lineweight Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -1 Sets the lineweight of new objects. -1 Sets the lineweight to "BYLAYER." -2 Sets the lineweight to "BYBLOCK." -3 Sets the lineweight to "DEFAULT." "DEFAULT" is controlled by the LWDEFAULT system variable. Other valid values entered in hundredths of millimeters include 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211.
CENTERMT does not apply to stretching multiline text by using the ruler in the In-Place Text Editor.
CHAMFERA Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the first chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. CHAMFERB Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the second chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. CHAMFERC Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the chamfer length when CHAMMODE is set to 1.
CHAMFERD Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Chamfers Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the chamfer angle when CHAMMODE is set to 1.
Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the default circle radius. A zero indicates no default. CLASSICKEYS Quick Reference Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets shortcuts to pre-Windows AutoCAD shortcuts or Windows shortcuts. 0 To copy, press Ctrl + C 1 To cancel, press Ctrl + C CLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the current layer.
CLEANSCREENSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off. 0 Off 1 On CLISTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Dock, Resize, and Hide the Command Window (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the command window is open or closed.
CMATERIAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Create New Materials Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: BYLAYER Sets the material of new objects. Valid values are BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and the name of a material in the drawing. CMDACTIVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Enter Commands on the Command Line (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether an ordinary command, transparent command, script, or dialog box is active.
8 Dialog box is active 16 DDE is active 32 AutoLISP is active (only visible to an ObjectARX-defined command) 64 ObjectARX command is active CMDDIA Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Leaders Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of the In-Place Text Editor for the LEADER and QLEADER commands.
Initial value: 1 Controls whether prompts and input are echoed during the AutoLISP command function. 0 Turns off echoing 1 Turns on echoing CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX Quick Reference See also: ■ Shortcut Menus Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 20 Sets the maximum number of previous input values that are stored for a prompt in a command. Display of the history of user input is controlled by the INPUTHISTORYMODE system variable.
For example, LINE'ZOOM indicates that the ZOOM command is being used transparently during the LINE command. This variable is designed for use with programming interfaces such as AutoLISP, DIESEL, and ActiveX Automation. The following is a simple example that demonstrates how to use DIESEL to display the current command at the status line. Command: modemacro New value for MODEMACRO, or .
Specifies multiline justification. 0 Top 1 Zero (Middle) 2 Bottom CMLSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Multilines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 (imperial) or 20.0000 (metric) Controls the overall width of a multiline. A scale factor of 2.0 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A zero scale factor collapses the multiline into a single line.
COMPASS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use 3D Navigation Tools Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls whether the 3D compass is on or off in the current viewport. 0 Turns off the 3D compass 1 Turns on the 3D compass CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings.
1 Displays constraint bars for selected objects after applying constraints 2 Temporarily displays constraint bars for the selected geometrically constrained objects 3 Bits 1 and 2 are both turned on CONSTRAINTBARMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 4095 Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
1024 Equal 2048 Fix For example, set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 12 (8+4) to display parallel and perpendicular constraints on the constraint bars. Set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 4095 to display constraint bars for all constraint types. CONSTRAINTINFER Quick Reference See also: ■ Infer Geometric Constraints Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the geometric constraints are inferred while drawing and editing geometry.
Initial value: 2 Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. 0 Name (for example, Width) 1 Value (for example, 4.0000) 2 Expression (for example, width = 4.0000) NOTE The CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable is also applicable to the block constraint parameters (BCPARAMETER command) in the Block Editor.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. 0 Does not retain the size of the geometry when a constraint is applied or modified 1 Retains the size of the geometry when a constraint is applied or modified When the CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE is set to 0, resizing a constrained line may result in unpredictable behavior.
1 The absolute coordinates of your pointing device is updated continuously 2 The absolute coordinates of your pointing device is updated continuously except when a point, distance, or angle is requested. In that case, relative polar coordinates are displayed instead of X and Y. The Z values always display as absolute coordinates. 3 The absolute coordinates (WCS) of your pointing device is updated continuously with the latitude and longitude coordinate values of the geographic location.
Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: ByColor Controls the current plot style for new objects. If the current drawing you are working in is in color-dependent mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1), CPLOTSTYLE is read-only and has a value of BYCOLOR.
CROSSINGAREACOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 100 Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection. The valid range is 1 to 255. The SELECTIONAREA system variable must be on. CSHADOW Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Backgrounds and Shadows Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the shadow display property for a 3D object.
NOTE To display full shadows, hardware acceleration is required. When Geometry Acceleration is off, full shadows cannot be displayed. (To access these settings, enter 3dconfig at the Command prompt. In the Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning dialog box, click Manual Tune.) CTAB Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Model Space Viewports Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Model Returns the name of the current (model or layout) tab in the drawing.
CULLINGOBJ Quick Reference See also: ■ Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. 0 1 No subobject culling ■ Rolling over 3D objects highlights all 3D subobjects, including hidden subobjects. ■ Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects all 3D subobjects, including hidden subobjects.
Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected. 0 1 No object culling ■ Rolling over 3D objects highlights all 3D objects, including hidden objects. ■ Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects all 3D objects, including hidden objects. Apply object culling ■ Rolling over 3D objects highlights only the objects that are normal in the current view. ■ Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects only the objects that are normal in the current view.
CVPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Select and Use the Current Viewport Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Displays the identification number of the current viewport. You can change this value, which changes the current viewport, if the following conditions are met: ■ The identification number you specify is that of an active viewport. ■ A command in progress has not locked cursor movement to that viewport. ■ Tablet mode is off.
2204
D System Variables 31 DATALINKNOTIFY Quick Reference See also: ■ Link a Table to External Data Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the notification for updated or missing data links. 0 Disables data link update notification. 1 Enables data link notification. Notifies you that external data is linked to the current drawing by displaying the data link icon in the lower-right corner of the application window (the notification area of the status bar tray).
DATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain General Drawing Information (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. This value is represented as a Modified Julian Date (MJD), which is the Julian day number and decimal fraction of a day in the format: .
DBCSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Configure a Database for Use with PRODNAME Drawings (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the dbConnect Manager is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open DBLCLKEDIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Double Click Actions Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area. Double click actions can be customized using the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor.
DBMOD Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates the drawing modification status. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 1 Object database modified 4 Database variable modified 8 Window modified 16 View modified 32 Field modified The DBMOD value is reset to 0 when you save the drawing.
DCTMAIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Spelling Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies by country/region Displays the three letter keyword for the current main spelling dictionary. You can specify a default main spelling dictionary using the SETVAR command. When prompted for a new value for DCTMAIN, you can enter one of the keywords below. Depending on the language version of the program, not all dictionaries may be available.
deo German (pre-reform) ita Italian nor Norwegian (Bokmal) ptb Portuguese (Brazilian) ptg Portuguese (Iberian) rus Russian esp Spanish sve Swedish DEFAULTGIZMO Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Gizmos Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. 0 The 3D Move gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style.
2 The 3D Scale gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. 3 No gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. Set this variable to display the gizmo you use most often by default. With the 3D Move gizmo, you can restrict the movement of selected objects along an X, Y, or Z axis, or within a specified plane. To specify the movement limitations, hover the cursor over the gizmo until the axis or plane is highlighted.
With the 3D Scale gizmo, you can resize selected objects uniformly, resize them along an X, Y, or Z axis, or resize them along a specified plane. To specify the scale limitations, hover the cursor over the gizmo. Highlight the solid area between the axes for uniform resizing. Highlight the double lines between the axes to specify resizing along a plane. Highlight an axis to specify resizing along an axis.
No gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. You can also change the gizmo defaults on the Subobject panel of the Home and Mesh Modeling tabs. DEFAULTLIGHTING Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Lighting Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Turns on and off default lighting in place of other lighting. Default lighting is provided by a set of distant lights that follow the view direction.
light, even if they are turned on. The setting of this system variable is viewport-specific. 0 Default lighting is automatically turned off when point lights, spotlights, distant lights, or the sun are on 1 Default lighting only is turned on DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Lighting Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies the type of default lighting, old or new. The default lighting provided in AutoCAD 2006 and earlier releases used one distant light.
Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: ByColor Specifies the default plot style for all layers in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or for Layer 0 when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. When the drawing is opened and PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1 (color-dependent plot style mode), DEFLPLSTYLE is read-only and has a value of “BYCOLOR.
DELOBJ Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Combine Areas (Regions) ■ Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted. If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 2537 system variable is set to 1, the DELOBJ setting is ignored. 0 All defining geometry is retained. 1 Deletes profile curves, including those used with the EXTRUDE, SWEEP, REVOLVE, and LOFT commands.
-2 Displays prompts to delete all defining geometry, including paths and guide curves used with the SWEEP and LOFT commands. The original geometry for CONVTOSOLID, CONVTOSURFACE, and CONTOMESH commands is removed without prompting. -3 Displays prompts to delete all defining geometry if the resulting entities are a surface of any type.
demand-load the application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects. 3 Demand-loads the source application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects or when you invoke one of the application's commands DGNFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Hide and Show Underlay Frames Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Determines whether DGN underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing. The FRAME system variable overrides the DGNFRAME setting.
Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10000000 Sets the maximum number of elements that are translated when importing a DGN file. This limit prevents the program from running out of memory and suspending when importing large DGN files. 0 Turns off the limit. >0 Sets the limit for the number of elements. DGNMAPPINGPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Manage Translation Mapping Setups (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Specifies the location of the dgnsetups.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in DGN underlays that are attached to the drawing. The UOSNAP system variable overrides the DGNOSNAP setting.
DIGITIZER Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Identifies digitizers connected to the system.
Controls the number of precision places displayed in angular dimensions. -1 Angular dimensions display the number of decimal places specified by DIMDEC. 0-8 Specifies the number of decimal places displayed in angular dimensions (independent of DIMDEC) DIMALT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions. See also DIMALTD, DIMALTF, DIMALTTD, DIMALTTZ, DIMALTZ, and DIMAPOST.
Initial value: 2 (imperial) or 3 (metric) Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units. If DIMALT is turned on, DIMALTD sets the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the alternate measurement. DIMALTF Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 25.4000 (imperial) or 0.0394 (metric) Controls the multiplier for alternate units.
DIMALTTD Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 (imperial) or 3 (metric) Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension. DIMALTTZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
8 Suppresses trailing zeros DIMALTU Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension substyles except Angular.
DIMALTZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values. DIMALTZ values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Indicates whether or not the current dimension style is . 0 Nonannotative 1 Annotative DIMAPOST Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the alternate dimension measurement for all types of dimensions except angular. For instance, if the current units are Architectural, DIMALT is on, DIMALTF is 25.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension. 0 Places arc length symbols before the dimension text 1 Places arc length symbols above the dimension text 2 Suppresses the display of arc length symbols DIMASSOC Quick Reference See also: ■ Associative Dimensions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. 0 Creates exploded dimensions.
ciation point on the geometric object moves, the dimension location, orientation, and value are updated. DIMASSOC is not stored in a dimension style. Drawings saved in a format previous to AutoCAD 2002 retain the setting of the DIMASSOC system variable. When the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2002 or later, the dimension associativity setting is restored. DIMASZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1800 (imperial) or 2.
Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines. 0 Places both text and arrows outside extension lines 1 Moves arrows first, then text 2 Moves text first, then arrows 3 Moves either text or arrows, whichever fits best A leader is added to moved dimension text when DIMTMOVE is set to 1.
DIMAZIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Suppress Zeros in Dimensions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions. 0 Displays all leading and trailing zeros 1 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 2 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 3 Suppresses leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .
Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes are shown below. You can also enter the names of user-defined arrowhead blocks. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.
"_CLOSEDBLANK" closed blank "_DATUMFILLED" datum triangle filled "_DATUMBLANK" datum triangle "_INTEGRAL" integral "_ARCHTICK" architectural tick DIMBLK1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowheads, see DIMBLK.
DIMBLK2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.
>0 Center marks are drawn The absolute value specifies the size of the center mark or centerline. The size of the centerline is the length of the centerline segment that extends outside the circle or arc. It is also the size of the gap between the center mark and the start of the centerline. The size of the center mark is the distance from the center of the circle or arc to the end of the center mark.
Color numbers are displayed in the Select Color dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256. DIMCLRT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Appearance of Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Assigns colors to dimension text. The color can be any valid color number. DIMCONSTRAINTICON Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints.
3 Displays the icon for dynamic and annotational constraints DIMDEC Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 4 (imperial) or 2 (metric) Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a dimension. The precision is based on the units or angle format you have selected. Specified value is applied to angular dimensions when DIMADEC on page 2221 is set to -1.
DIMDLI Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.3800 (imperial) or 3.7500 (metric) Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Each dimension line is offset from the previous one by this amount, if necessary, to avoid drawing over it. Changes made with DIMDLI are not applied to existing dimensions.
DIMEXE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1800 (imperial) or 1.2500 (metric) Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the dimension line. DIMEXO Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0625 (imperial) or 0.6250 (metric) Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. With fixed-length extension lines, this value determines the minimum offset.
Initial value: 0 Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4 (Architectural) or 5 (Fractional). 0 Horizontal stacking 1 Diagonal stacking 2 Not stacked (for example, 1/2) DIMFXL Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin.
DIMGAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Location of Dimension Text Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0900 (imperial) or 0.6250 (metric) Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. Also sets the gap between annotation and a hook line created with the LEADER command. If you enter a negative value, DIMGAP places a box around the dimension text. DIMGAP is also used as the minimum length for pieces of the dimension line.
Jogged radius dimensions are often created when the center point is located off the page. Valid settings range is 5 to 90. DIMJUST Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Location of Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Specifies the arrow type for leaders. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders. DIMLFAC Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Scale for Dimensions Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements.
DIMLIM Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lateral Tolerances Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Generates dimension limits as the default text. Setting DIMLIM to On turns DIMTOL off. Off Dimension limits are not generated as default text On Dimension limits are generated as default text DIMLTEX1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the first extension line.
DIMLTEX2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the second extension line. The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype. DIMLTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the dimension line. The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. 1 Scientific 2 Decimal 3 Engineering 4 Architectural (always displayed stacked) 5 Fractional (always displayed stacked) 6 Microsoft Windows Desktop (decimal format using Control Panel settings for decimal separator and number grouping symbols) DIMLWD Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -2 Assigns lineweight to dimension lines.
DIMLWE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -2 Assigns lineweight to extension lines. -3 Default (the LWDEFAULT value) -2 BYBLOCK -1 BYLAYER The integer represents 1/100th of a mm. DIMPOST Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimension Units Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: None Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement.
Use <> to indicate placement of the text in relation to the dimension value. For example, enter <>mm to display a 5.0 millimeter radial dimension as "5.0mm". If you entered mm <>, the dimension would be displayed as "mm 5.0". Use the <> mechanism for angular dimensions. DIMRND Quick Reference See also: ■ Round Off Dimension Values Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value. For instance, if DIMRND is set to 0.
DIMSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Scale for Dimensions Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. Also affects the leader objects with the LEADER command. Use MLEADERSCALE to scale multileader objects created with the MLEADER command. 0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space.
Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls suppression of the first dimension line and arrowhead. When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension line and arrowhead between the first extension line and the text. Off First dimension line is not suppressed On First dimension line is suppressed DIMSD2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Dimension Lines Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead.
Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Suppresses display of the first extension line. Off Extension line is not suppressed On Extension line is suppressed DIMSE2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Extension Lines Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Suppresses display of the second extension line.
Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. Off Arrowheads are not suppressed On Arrowheads are suppressed If not enough space is available inside the extension lines and DIMTIX is on, setting DIMSOXD to On suppresses the arrowheads. If DIMTIX is off, DIMSOXD has no effect.
Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 1 (metric) Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. 0 Centers the dimension text between the extension lines. 1 Places the dimension text above the dimension line except when the dimension line is not horizontal and text inside the extension lines is forced horizontal (DIMTIH = 1). The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current DIMGAP value.
DIMTFAC Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Scale for Dimensions Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT. For example, if DIMTFAC is set to 1.0, the text height of fractions and tolerances is the same height as the dimension text. If DIMTFAC is set to 0.7500, the text height of fractions and tolerances is three-quarters the size of dimension text.
DIMTFILLCLR Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Appearance of Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. Color numbers are displayed in the Select Color dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.
DIMTIX Quick Reference See also: ■ Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Draws text between extension lines. Off Varies with the type of dimension. For linear and angular dimensions, text is placed inside the extension lines if there is sufficient room. For radius and diameter dimensions that don't fit inside the circle or arc, DIMTIX has no effect and always forces the text outside the circle or arc.
If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is drawn above the lower, and a plus sign is added to the DIMTP value if it is positive. For DIMTM, the program uses the negative of the value you enter (adding a minus sign if you specify a positive number and a plus sign if you specify a negative number). DIMTMOVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets dimension text movement rules.
For radius and diameter dimensions (when DIMTIX is off), draws a dimension line inside the circle or arc and places the text, arrowheads, and leader outside.
Appends tolerances to dimension text. Setting DIMTOL to on turns DIMLIM off. DIMTOLJ Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lateral Tolerances Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 (imperial) or 0 (metric) Sets the vertical justification for tolerance values relative to the nominal dimension text. This system variable has no effect unless DIMTOL is set to On. The default for DIMTOL is Off.
Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. DIMTP accepts signed values. If DIMTOL is on and DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, a tolerance value is drawn. If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is drawn above the lower and a plus sign is added to the DIMTP value if it is positive. DIMTSZ Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Arrowheads Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.
Initial value: 0.0000 Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line. The DIMTVP value is used when DIMTAD is off. The magnitude of the vertical offset of text is the product of the text height and DIMTVP. Setting DIMTVP to 1.0 is equivalent to setting DIMTAD to on. The dimension line splits to accommodate the text only if the absolute value of DIMTVP is less than 0.7.
DIMTXTDIRECTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Appearance of Dimension Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text. 0 Displays dimension text in a Left-to-Right reading style 1 Displays dimension text in a Right-to-Left reading style DIMTZIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lateral Tolerances Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 8 (metric) Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5) DIMUPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Location of Dimension Text Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls options for user-positioned text.
Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 8 (metric) Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value. Values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only: 0 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches 1 Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches 2 Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches 3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet 4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.
Controls display of silhouette edges of 3D solid objects in a 2D Wireframe or 3D Wireframe visual style. 0 Off. Do not display silhouette edges 1 On. Display silhouette edges When turned on, DISPSILH also suppresses the mesh displayed when using the HIDE command in the 2D wireframe visual style. Use the REGEN command to display the results. DISTANCE Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.
This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHBOXLENGTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Box Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh box along the X axis.
This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHBOXWIDTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Box Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of a mesh box along the Y axis. This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box.
Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 8 Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cone base. This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHCONEBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Cone Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh cone base.
This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Cone Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the point or top of the mesh cone.
This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHCYLAXIS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Cylinder Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 8 Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cylinder base.
This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHCYLBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Cylinder Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of radial subdivisions from the center of the mesh cylinder base to its perimeter.
This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box.
Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh cylinder. This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHPYRBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Pyramid Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of radial subdivisions between the center of the mesh pyramid base and its perimeter.
This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Pyramid Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh pyramid.
This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHPYRLENGTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Pyramid Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions along each dimension of a mesh pyramid base.
This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box.
Sets the number of radial subdivisions around the axis endpoint of the mesh sphere. This setting affects new mesh spheres that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Sphere Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 6 Sets the number of subdivisions between the two axis endpoints of the mesh sphere.
DIVMESHTORUSPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Torus Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 8 Sets the number of subdivisions in the path that is swept by the profile of a mesh torus. This setting affects new mesh tori that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box.
Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 8 Sets the number of subdivisions in the profile that sweeps the path of a mesh torus. This setting affects new mesh tori that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Wedge Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of the mesh wedge along the Z axis.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Wedge Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 4 Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh wedge along the X axis.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Wedge Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions in the slope that extends from the apex of the wedge to the edge of the base.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Mesh Wedge Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of the mesh wedge along the Y axis.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command. This value can also be set in the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box. DONUTID Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Donuts Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.5000 Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut.
Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. The value must be nonzero. If DONUTID is larger than DONUTOD, the two values are swapped by the next command. DRAGMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the display of objects being dragged. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.
DRAGP1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10 Sets the regen-drag input sampling rate. DRAGP2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 25 Sets the fast-drag input sampling rate.
Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. You can enter a period (.) to specify the current visual style. DRAGVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. DRAGVS has no effect when the current viewport's visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. The visual style specified for DRAGVS cannot be removed with the PURGE command.
2 Turns on draw order inheritance: new objects created from another object using the commands listed above are assigned the draw order of the original object. 3 Provides full draw order display. Turns on the correct draw order of objects, and turns on draw order inheritance. NOTE Full draw order display may slow some editing operations.
Initial value: 2 Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. Obsolete command. Replaced by the TEXTED on page 2549 system variable. DWFFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Hide and Show Underlay Frames Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Determines whether DWF or DWFx underlay frames are visible or plotted in the current drawing. The FRAME system variable overrides the DWFFRAME setting.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Determines whether object snapping is active for geometry in DWF or DWFx underlays that are attached to the drawing. The UOSNAP system variable overrides the DWFOSNAP setting.
an application other than one released by Autodesk or based on RealDWG, you are warned before the drawing is opened. DWGCODEPAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Text Fonts for International Work (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the same value as SYSCODEPAGE (for compatibility reasons). DWGNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Drawing1.dwg Stores the name of the current drawing.
DWGPREFIX Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the drive and folder prefix for the drawing. DWGTITLED Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the current drawing has been named.
DXEVAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Extracted Data Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 12 Controls when data extraction tables are compared against the data source, and if the data is not current, displays an update notification The setting is stored as an integer using the sum of the following values: 0 No notification 1 Open 2 Save 4 Plot 8 Publish 16 eTransmit/Archive 32 Save with Automatic Update 64 Plot with Automatic Update 128 Publish with Automatic Update 256 eT
DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. 0 Keeps constraints hidden when an object is selected 1 Displays hidden constraints when dimensionally constrained objects are selected NOTE This system variable takes effect when dynamic constraints are hidden (see DCDISPLAY on page 515).
The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 None 1 Resulting dimension 2 Length change dimension 4 Absolute angle dimension 8 Angle change dimension 16 Arc radius dimension The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. DYNDIVIS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls how many dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing.
DYNMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Turns Dynamic Input features on and off. When all features are on, the context governs what is displayed. When DYNMODE is set to a negative value, the Dynamic Input features are not turned on, but the setting is stored. Press the Dyn button in the status bar to set DYNMODE to the corresponding positive value.
DYNPICOORDS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether pointer input uses relative or absolute format for coordinates. 0 Relative 1 Absolute The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. DYNPIFORMAT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether pointer input uses polar or Cartesian format for coordinates.
DYNPIVIS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls when pointer input is displayed. 0 Only when you type at a prompt for a point 1 Automatically at a prompt for a point 2 Always The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. DYNPROMPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls display of prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips.
The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. When DYNMODE is set to 0 (off), prompts are not displayed regardless of the DYNPROMPT setting. DYNTOOLTIPS Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Dynamic Input Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls which tooltips are affected by tooltip appearance settings.
2300
E System Variables 32 EDGEMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Trim or Extend Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges. 0 Uses the selected edge without any extensions 1 Extends or trims the selected object to an imaginary extension of the cutting or boundary edge Lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, rays, and polylines are objects eligible for natural extension.
ELEVATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the User Coordinate System in 3D Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS. ENTERPRISEMENU Quick Reference See also: ■ Create an Enterprise CUIx File (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: "." Stores the enterprise customization file name (if defined), including the path for the file name.
Initial value: 1 Controls whether reference names or reference objects are highlighted when their counterparts are selected in the External References palette or in the drawing window. 0 Referenced objects are not highlighted. 1 Referenced objects are highlighted.
ERSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the External References palette is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open EXPERT Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls whether certain prompts are issued. 0 Issues all prompts normally.
3 Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by the LINETYPE Command prompt (-LINETYPE) if you try to load a linetype that's already loaded or create a new linetype in a file that already defines that linetype. 4 Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by UCS Save and VPORTS Save if the name you supply already exists. 5 Suppresses the prompt, “That name is already in Use, redefine it?” issued by the -DIMSTYLE Save option when you supply the name of an existing dimension style.
EXPORTMODELSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies what part of the drawing to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from Model space 0 Display 1 Extents 2 Window EXPORTPAPERSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies what part of the drawing to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file from paper space.
EXPORTPAGESETUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Export DWF and DWFx Files Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies whether to export to a DWF, DWFx, or PDF file with the current page setup. 0 Current - Exports the file using the DWG’s current page setup. When this is set to 0, the Page Setup combo box in the Export to DWF/PDF panel of the Ribbon’s Output tab displays Current. 1 Override - Exports the file and allows you to override the DWG’s current page setup.
Controls whether the EXPLODE command supports nonuniformly scaled (NUS) blocks. 0 Does not explode NUS blocks 1 Explodes NUS blocks EXTMAX Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the upper-right point of the drawing extents. Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world coordinates for the current space.
Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world coordinates for the current space. EXTNAMES Quick Reference See also: ■ Resolve Name Conflicts in External References Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables. 0 Uses AutoCAD Release 14 parameters, which limit names to 31 characters in length.
2310
F System Variables 33 FACETERDEVNORMAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Meshes by Conversion Type: Real Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 40 Sets the maximum angle between the surface normal and contiguous mesh faces. This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) This value can also be set in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box.
FACETERDEVSURFACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Meshes by Conversion Type: Real Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0.001 Sets how closely the converted mesh object adheres to the original shape of the solid or surface. This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) This value can also be set in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box.
This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) This value can also be set in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. Permissible values range from 0 to 100, and set the height/width ratio of the face. Use this variable to prevent long, thin faces that can result from cylindrical object conversions.
FACETERMAXGRID Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Meshes by Conversion Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 4096 Sets the maximum number of U and V grid lines for solids and surfaces converted to mesh. This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) Permissible values range from 0 to 4096.
2 Faces are mostly triangular This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) This value can also be set in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box.
Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Sets the minimum number of V grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. This setting affects mesh that is converted from a 3D solid or surface object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) Permissible values range from 0 to 1023. Setting 0 (zero) turns off the setting.
Converted to Mesh.) It can also be set in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. FACETERSMOOTHLEV Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Meshes by Conversion Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Sets the default level of smoothness for objects that are converted to mesh.
For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh. This variable can also be set in the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box. FACETRATIO Quick Reference See also: ■ Create 3D Solid Primitives Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls the aspect ratio of faceting for cylindrical and conic solids.
Adjusts the smoothness of shaded objects and objects with hidden lines removed. Valid values are from 0.01 to 10.0. When you use the 3DPRINT command, the FACTRES system variable is set to 10. NOTE 3DDWFPREC replaces FACETRES in controlling the precision of published 3D DWF files. FIELDDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: See also: ■ Update Fields Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. The background is not plotted.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 31 Controls how fields are updated. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Not updated 1 Updated on open 2 Updated on save 4 Updated on plot 8 Updated on use of ETRANSMIT 16 Updated on regeneration NOTE The Date field is updated by UPDATEFIELD, but it is not updated automatically based on the setting of the FIELDEVAL system variable.
1 Displays dialog boxes. However, if a script or AutoLISP/Ob™ jectARX program is active, an ordinary prompt is displayed. FILLETRAD Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Fillets Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects. If you use the FILLET on page 800 command to change the radius of a 2D fillet, the value of this system variable changes to match.
FILLMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. 0 Objects are not filled 1 Objects are filled FONTALT Quick Reference See also: ■ Substitute Fonts Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: simplex.shx Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located.
FONTMAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Substitute Fonts Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: acad.fmp Specifies the font mapping file to be used. A font mapping file contains one font mapping per line; the original font used in the drawing and the font to be substituted for it are separated by a semicolon (;). For example, to substitute the Times TrueType font for the Roman font, the line in the mapping file would read as follows: romanc.shx;times.
The FRAME setting overrides the individual IMAGEFRAME, DWFFRAME, PDFFRAME, DGNFRAME, and XCLIPFRAME settings. 0 The frame is not visible and it is not plotted 1 Displays the frame and allows it to be plotted 2 Displays the frame but keeps it from being plotted 3 The individual setting varies for all underlays in the current drawing (external references, images, and DWF, DWFx, PDF, and DGN underlays all have different frame settings). NOTE This value is used internally by AutoCAD.
FULLOPEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load) (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the current drawing is partially open. 0 Indicates a partially open drawing 1 Indicates a fully open drawing FULLPLOTPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Use AutoSpool Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the full path of the drawing file is sent to the plot spooler.
2326
G System Variables 34 GEOLATLONGFORMAT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geographic Location Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the format of the latitude or longitude values in the Geographic Location dialog box, and the coordinate status bar in Geographic mode.
GEOMARKERVISIBILITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geographic Location Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the visibility of geographic markers. 0 Geographic marker is not visible 1 Geographic marker is visible GFANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies the angle of a gradient fill. Valid values are 0 to 360 (degrees).
GFCLR1 Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "Blue" Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first color for a two-color gradient fill.
■ True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" ■ Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" GFCLRLUM Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill. A tint gradient transitions toward white and a shade gradient transitions toward black.
GFNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill.
Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. 0 Centered 1 Shifted up and to the left GLOBALOPACITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area ■ Transparency Dialog Box on page 1373 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 100 Controls transparency level for all palettes. 0 Fully transparent 100 Fully opaque Enter a value from 0-100 to set the transparency level.
GRIDDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls the display behavior and display limits of the grid.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 5 Controls the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Valid values range from 1 to 100. Grid lines are displayed in any visual style. GRIDMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off.
The setting is stored as an integer using the sum of the following values: 0 Displays lined grid for 2D model space, Block Editor, 3D parallel projection, 3D perspective projection, and Sheet and Layout. 1 Displays dotted grid for 2D model space. 2 Displays dotted grid for Block Editor. 4 Displays dotted grid for Sheet and Layout. GRIDUNIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5000,0.
Controls the display of grips in blocks. 0 Assigns a grip only to the insertion point of the block 1 Assigns grips to objects within the block See also: ■ Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 1348 GRIPCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Grip Modes Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 150 Controls the color of unselected grips. The valid range is 1 to 255.
Initial value: 251 Controls the color of the grip contour. The valid range is 1 to 255. GRIPDYNCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 140 Controls the color of custom grips for dynamic blocks. The valid range is 1 to 255. GRIPHOT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Grip Modes Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 12 Controls the color of selected grips. The valid range is 1 to 255.
GRIPHOVER Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Grip Modes Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 11 Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. The valid range is 1 to 255.
2 Access multi-functional grips with the dynamic menu and the Hot Grip shortcut menu 3 Access multi-functional grips with Ctrl-cycling, the dynamic menu, and the Hot Grip shortcut menu GRIPOBJLIMIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Grip Modes Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 100 Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. The valid range is 0 to 32,767.
Controls the display of grips on selected objects. 0 Hides grips 1 Displays grips 2 Displays additional midpoint grips on polyline segments To adjust the size of the grips and the effective selection area used by the cursor when you snap to a grip, use GRIPSIZE. See also: ■ Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 1348 GRIPSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Grip Modes Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 5 Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. The valid range is 1 to 255.
GRIPSUBOBJMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces ■ Choose a Method to Modify Objects Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected. 0 Does not turn the grips hot when subobjects are selected. 1 Turns the face, edge, or vertex grips hot when subobjects of 3D objects (solid, surface, or mesh) are selected.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. Hover your cursor over the multi-functional grips and pause to display grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. 0 Hides grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. 1 Displays grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips.
GTDEFAULT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Gizmos Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation starts automatically when you start the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. 0 Does not automatically start the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALEcommands when the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE commands are started in a 3D view.
Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. 0 Places the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo at the same location as the UCS icon. The gizmo orientation is aligned with the current UCS. 1 Places the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo at the geometric center of the selection set. This system variable affects the display of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos.
H System Variables 35 HALOGAP Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies a gap to be displayed where an object is hidden by another object. The value is specified as a percent of one unit and is independent of the zoom level. HALOGAP is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSHALOGAP system variable is used.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: On Reports whether object handles can be accessed by applications. Because handles can no longer be turned off, has no effect except to preserve the integrity of scripts. HELPPREFIX Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area ■ Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) on page 1316 Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD Sets the file path for the Help system.
Hides can be calculated in double precision or single precision. Setting HIDEPRECISION to 1 produces more accurate hides by using double precision, but this setting also uses more memory and can affect performance, especially when hiding solids.
Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips. 0 Turns off object selection highlighting 1 Turns on object selection highlighting HPANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. HPANNOTATIVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Scaling Annotations Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative.
HPASSOC Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether hatches and fills are associative.
■ True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" ■ Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" HPBOUND Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY.
Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills. 0 Does not create boundary objects 1 Creates boundary objects according to the HPBOUND system variable HPCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Sets a default color for new hatches. Valid values include the following: ■ “.
HPDLGMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Type: String Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 2 Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box.
Doubling specifies a second set of lines drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines. 0 Turns off hatch pattern doubling 1 Turns on hatch pattern doubling HPDRAWORDER Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 3 Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. Controls whether hatch and fill objects are displayed in front or behind all other objects, or in front or behind their associated boundaries. 0 None.
HPGAPTOL Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0.0000 Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects enclose the area, with no gaps. Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary.
HPISLANDDETECTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Hatch and Fill Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. 0 Normal. Hatches islands within islands. 1 Outer. Hatches only areas outside of islands. 2 Ignore. Hatches everything within the boundaries. An island is an enclosed area within the area to be hatched.
HPLAYER Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. Values other than the “.” (use current) value override the current layer (CELAYER). HPMAXLINES Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1000000 Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch operation.
Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: ANSI31 (imperial) or ANGLE (metric) Sets the default hatch pattern name. Valid names can contain up to 34 characters without spaces. The value "" indicates that there is no default. Enter a period (.) to reset HPNAME to the default value.
HPORIGINMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Hatch Origin Point Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls whether to display a preview when specifying internal points for a hatch. 0 or OFF No preview 1 or ON Quick preview HPSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the hatch pattern scale factor.
1 Separate hatch objects are created HPSPACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. HPTRANSPARENCY Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. Valid values include “use current” (or “.
HYPERLINKBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use a Hyperlink to Access a File or a Web Page Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Specifies the path used for all relative hyperlinks in the drawing. If no value is specified, the drawing path is used for all relative hyperlinks.
2362
I System Variables 36 IMAGEFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. The FRAME system variable overrides the IMAGEFRAME setting. Use the IMAGEFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the IMAGE frame settings. NOTE Normally, when image frames are not displayed, you cannot select images.
IMAGEHLT Quick Reference See also: ■ Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the entire raster image or only the raster image frame is highlighted. 0 Highlights only the raster image frame 1 Highlights the entire raster image IMPLIEDFACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Press or Pull Bounded Areas Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the detection of implied faces. 0 Implied faces cannot be detected.
This variable must be set to 1 if you want to select and modify implied faces. INDEXCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created and saved in drawing files.
Stores the Internet location used by the BROWSER command and the Browse the Web dialog box. INPUTHISTORYMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Shortcut Menus Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 15 Controls the content and location of the display of a history of user input. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 No history of recent input is displayed. 1 History of recent input is displayed at the command line or in a dynamic prompt tooltip.
INSBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the insertion base point set by BASE, which gets expressed as a UCS coordinate for the current space. INSNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Sets a default block name for the INSERT command. The name must conform to symbol naming conventions. Returns "" if no default is set. Enter a period (.) to set no default.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 (imperial) or 4 (metric) Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs inserted or attached to a drawing. NOTE The INSUNITS setting is ignored when inserting blocks into a drawing.
18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Valid range is 0 to 20.
10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs INSUNITSDEFTARGET Quick Reference See also: ■ Insert Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Valid range is 0 to 20.
2 Feet 3 Miles 4 Millimeters 5 Centimeters 6 Meters 7 Kilometers 8 Microinches 9 Mils 10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs INSUNITSDEFTARGET | 2371
INTELLIGENTUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 20 Controls the graphics refresh rate. The default value is 20 frames per second. If you encounter problems related to graphics generation or timing, turn off the variable by setting it to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE works by suppressing the graphics update until the timer expires. Subsequent updates reset the timer.
If you have a color book installed, you can specify any colors that are defined in the book. INTERFEREOBJVS Quick Reference See also: ■ Check 3D Models for Interferences Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Realistic Sets the visual style for interference objects. INTERFEREOBJVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. The visual style specified for INTERFEREOBJVS cannot be removed with the PURGE command.
INTERSECTIONCOLOR Quick Reference See also: See also: ■ Control the Display of Edges Controls the color of polylines at the intersection of 3D surfaces when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available.
ISAVEBAK Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEBAK controls the creation of a backup file (BAK). In the operating system, copying the file data to create a BAK file for large drawings takes a major portion of the incremental save time.
full saves. When the estimate exceeds 50 percent, the next save will be a full save. This resets the wasted space estimate to 0. If ISAVEPERCENT is set to 0, every save is a full save. ISOLINES Quick Reference See also: See also: Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 8 Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on objects. Valid settings are integers from 0 to 2047. NOTE When you create a new drawing that is based on a template, the initial value may differ.
L System Variables 37 LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls large object size limit support when you open and save drawings.
(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the XY plane of the current UCS for the current space. LASTPOINT Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Coordinate Entry Type: 3D-point Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the last point specified, expressed as UCS coordinates for the current space. You can reference the last point specified by entering the @ symbol at a point prompt.
LATITUDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geographic Location Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 37.7950 Specifies the latitude of the drawing model in decimal format. The default is the latitude of San Francisco, California. The valid range is -90 to +90. Positive values represent north latitudes. This value is affected by the settings of the LUPREC system variable. This value is not affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables.
1 Maps LAYER command to use the modeless Layer Properties Manager LAYEREVAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use New Layer Notification ■ LAYEREVALCTL on page 2381 ■ LAYERNOTIFY on page 2383 Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs.
LAYEREVALCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use New Layer Notification ■ LAYEREVAL on page 2380 ■ LAYERNOTIFY on page 2383 Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls the overall Unreconciled New Layer filter list in Layer Properties Manager which is evaluated for new layers. This system variable also affects whether the new layer notification is displayed or not.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Deletes excessive layer filters to improve performance. When a drawing has 100 or more layer filters, and the number of layer filters exceeds the number of layers, LAYERFILTERALERT provides a method for deleting layer filters to improve performance.
LAYERNOTIFY Quick Reference See also: ■ Use New Layer Notification ■ LAYEREVAL on page 2380 ■ LAYERNOTIFY on page 2383 Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found. 0 Off 1 Plot 2 Open 4 Load/Reload/Attach for xrefs 8 Restore layer state 16 Save 32 Insert NOTE LAYEREVALCTL overrides the LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY setvars when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. It acts like a global off (but not a global on).
LAYLOCKFADECTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Layers to Manage Complexity Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the amount of fading for objects on locked layers. Fades the objects on locked layers to contrast them with objects on unlocked layers and reduces the visual complexity of a drawing. Objects on locked layers are still visible for reference and for object snapping. The range for controlling the fading for objects on locked layers is from -90 to 90.
LAYOUTREGENCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. For each tab, the display list is updated either by regenerating the drawing when you switch to that tab or by saving the display list to memory and regenerating only the modified objects when you switch to that tab. Changing the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting can improve performance.
environment. For additional information about performance settings, see System tab (in the Options dialog box). Regardless of the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting, if you redefine a block or undo a tab switch, the drawing is regenerated the first time you switch to any tab that contains saved viewports.
LENSLENGTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Camera Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 50.0000 Stores the length of the lens (in millimeters) used in perspective viewing. LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Lights Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether light glyphs are displayed When this system variable is set to Off, the glyphs that represent lights in the drawing are not displayed.
LIGHTINGUNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls whether generic or photometric lights are used, and specifies the lighting units for the drawing When this system variable is set to 1 or 2, photometric lighting is enabled; otherwise standard (generic) lighting is used. 0 No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled.
Indicates whether the Lights in Model window is open. 0 Closed 1 Open LIGHTSINBLOCKS Quick Reference See also: ■ Incorporate Luminaire Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether lights contained in blocks are used when rendering By default, this system variable is turned on in AutoCAD LT drawings. When this system variable is off, lights in blocks do not affect 3D objects in the current viewport when rendering.
Initial value: 0 Controls the creation of objects outside the grid limits. 0 Objects can be created outside the limits 1 Objects cannot be created outside the limits LIMMAX Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 12.0000,9.0000 (imperial) or 420.0000,297.0000 (metric) Stores the upper-right grid limits for the current space, expressed as a world coordinate.
LIMMIN is read-only when paper space is active and the paper background or printable area is displayed. LINEARBRIGHTNESS Quick Reference See also: ■ Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the brightness level of the viewport in the standard lighting workflow. Controls the brightness level of the viewport when standard lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0). Valid settings are integers from -10 to 10.
LOCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Model Space and Layouts (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies by country/region Displays a code that indicates the current locale. This code appears as a three-letter abbreviation returned by the Windows GetLocaleInfo function using the LOCALE_SABBREVLANGNAME constant.
LOCKUI Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Behavior of Dockable Windows Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Locks the position and size of toolbars and dockable windows such as the ribbon, DesignCenter, and the Properties palette. Locked toolbars and windows can still be opened and closed and items can be added and deleted. To unlock them temporarily, hold down Ctrl. A lock icon in the status bar tray indicates whether toolbars and windows are locked.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 90 Sets the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation. The 0 direction is measured outward from the curve on the plane of the curve. The positive direction is measured toward the next cross section. Valid values include 0 to less than 360. LOFTANG2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 90 Sets the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation.
LOFTMAG2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation. Controls how soon the surface starts bending back toward the next cross section. LOFTNORMALS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the normals of a lofted object where it passes through cross sections.
4 Start and End cross sections 5 All cross sections 6 Use draft angle and magnitude LOFTPARAM Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 7 Controls the shape of lofted solids and surfaces.
LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS Quick Reference See also: ■ Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 65.0 Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using photometric lighting Controls the brightness level of the viweport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range is from 0.0 to 200.0. The brightness level in standard lighting can be controlled by the LINEARBRIGHTNESS systems variable.
LOGEXPDAYLIGHT Quick Reference See also: ■ Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls if the exterior daylight flag is enabled when using photometric lighting When this system variable is off, exterior daylight is turned off when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2). When on, the exposure control algorithm in the rendering acts as if there is an extremely bright light source in the scene.
Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when using photometric lighting Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range from 0.01 to 20.0. LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1500.
LOGFILENAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Application Fonts (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Specifies the path and name of the text window log file for the current drawing. The initial value varies depending on the name of the current drawing and the installation folder.
LOGINNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Open a Drawing (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Displays the Windows login name and is saved with the file properties statistics of DWG and related files. LONGITUDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geographic Location Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -122.3940 Specifies the longitude of the drawing model in decimal format. The default is the longitude of San Francisco, California. The valid range is -180 to +180.
LTSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control Linetype Scale Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the global linetype scale factor. The linetype scale factor cannot equal zero. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. LUNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Unit Format Conventions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets linear units.
LUPREC Quick Reference See also: ■ Set the Unit Format Conventions Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 4 Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates. However, the internal precision of distance, area, and volume values, and linear coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision. LUPREC does not affect the display precision of dimension text (see DIMSTYLE). Valid values are integers from 0 to 8.
LWDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lineweights Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: OFF Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. This setting is controlled separately for model space and for all paper space layouts. OFF Lineweights are not displayed ON Lineweights are displayed LWUNITS Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Lineweights Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters.
38 M System Variables MATBROWSERSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Browse Material Libraries Type: Switch Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Controls the state of the Materials Browser. 0 Materials Browser is closed. 1 Materials Browser is open.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the Materials Editor is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open MATERIALSPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Browse Material Libraries (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: User-settings Initial value: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk Shared\Materials2011 Specifies the path of the materials libraries.
MAXSORT Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Blocks Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1000 Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing commands. If the total number of items exceeds this value, no items are sorted. The value of MAXSORT is an integer between 0 and 32767.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the behavior of the third button or wheel on the pointing device. 0 Supports the action defined in the customization (CUIx) file 1 Supports panning when you hold and drag the button or wheel MEASUREINIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Start a Drawing from Scratch Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies by country/region Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric default settings.
MEASUREMENT Quick Reference See also: ■ Start a Drawing from Scratch Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 1 (metric) Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files.
MENUCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Screen Menus Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the page switching of the screen menu. 0 Screen menu does not switch pages in response to keyboard command entry 1 Screen menu does switch pages in response to keyboard command entry MENUECHO Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Macros Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Sets menu echo and prompt control bits.
4 Disables ^P toggle of menu echoing 8 Displays input/output strings; debugging aid for DIESEL macros MENUNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ User Interface Customization (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: customization_file_name Stores the customization file name, including the path for the file name.
This option does not affect mesh created using the 3DMESH and PFACE commands. MIRRHATCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Mirror Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns. 0 Retains hatch pattern direction 1 Mirrors the hatch pattern direction MIRRTEXT Quick Reference See also: ■ Mirror Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how the MIRROR command reflects text.
MLEADERSCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Leaders Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Use DIMSCALE to scale leader objects created with the LEADER command. 0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space. If you are in paper space or model space and not using the paper space feature, the scale factor is 1.0.
Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Displays a text string on the status line, such as the name of the current drawing, time/date stamp, or special modes. Use MODEMACRO to display a string of text, or use special text strings written in the DIESEL macro language to have the macro evaluated from time to time and base the status line on user-selected conditions.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Markup Set Manager is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open MSOLESCALE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Controls the size of an OLE object with text that is pasted into model space. MSOLESCALE controls only the initial size. If the scale factor value is changed, existing OLE objects in the drawing are not affected.
Sets the default column setting for a multiline text (mtext) object. 0 No column. 1 Dynamic columns with auto height. 2 Dynamic column with manual height. MTEXTED Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Using an Alternate Text Editor Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: "Internal" Sets the application for editing multiline text objects. You can specify a different text editor for the MTEXT command. If you set MTEXTED to internal or to null (.), the In-Place Text Editor is displayed.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in a specified text editor. If MTEXTED is set to “Internal”, multiline text is displayed in the In-Place Text Editor, and the setting of MTEXTFIXED has the following results: 0 or 1 Displays the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it at the size, position, and rotation of the multiline text object in the drawing.
Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 2 Controls the display of the Text Formatting toolbar. 0 The Text Formatting toolbar is never displayed. 1 The Text Formatting toolbar is displayed upon selection of an MTEXT object. 2 The Text Formatting toolbar does not display when the ribbon is on.
(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the full path to the My Documents folder for the user currently logged on. These files are stored in the product folder under the Local Settings folder; for example, "c:\Documents and Settings\username\My Documents".
2420
N System Variables 39 NAVBARDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Navigation Bar Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of the navigation bar in all viewports.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the current mode of the SteeringWheel. 0 Big View Object wheel 1 Big Tour Building wheel 2 Big Full Navigation wheel 3 2D Navigation wheel 4 Mini View Object wheel 5 Mini Tour Building wheel 6 Mini Full Navigation wheel NAVSWHEELOPACITYBIG Quick Reference See also: ■ Navigate with SteeringWheels Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the opacity of the big SteeringWheels. Valid values are from 25 to 90 percent.
NAVSWHEELOPACITYMINI Quick Reference See also: ■ Navigate with SteeringWheels Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the opacity of the mini SteeringWheels. Valid values are from 25 to 90 percent. When set to 90, the mini wheels appear almost fully opaque against the drawing window and obscure the view of the objects under the wheel. When set to less than 90, the mini wheels appear to fade into the drawing window, which results in the objects under the wheel to appear less obscured.
NAVSWHEELSIZEMINI Quick Reference See also: ■ Navigate with SteeringWheels Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Specifies the size of the mini SteeringWheels. 0 Small 1 Normal 2 Large 3 Extra NAVVCUBEDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Use ViewCube Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Controls the display of the ViewCube tool in the current visual style and the current viewport.
2 ViewCube is displayed in 2D visual styles, but not in 3D visual styles 3 ViewCube is displayed in both 2D and 3D visual styles NAVVCUBELOCATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Use ViewCube Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed.
Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive. Valid values are from 0 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the ViewCube appears fully opaque against the drawing window and obscures all objects under it in the viewport. When set to less than 100, the ViewCube fades into the drawing window, which results in the objects under it to appear less obscured. If set to 0, the ViewCube is not displayed in the viewport unless the cursor is positioned over top of the ViewCube’s location.
Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool. 0 Small 1 Normal 2 Large 3 Tiny 4 Automatic; the size of the ViewCube tool is scaled up or down based on the size of the active viewport, zoom factor of the active layout, or drawing window NOMUTT Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Short Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Suppresses the message display (muttering) when it wouldn't normally be suppressed.
NORTHDIRECTION Quick Reference See also: ■ Sun and Sky Simulation Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Specifies the angle of the sun from north. This value is affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables. NOTE The angle is interpreted in the context of the world coordinate system (WCS). This value is completely separate from surveyor angular units, which are always set relative to the current UCS.
O System Variables 40 OBJECTISOLATIONMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Objects Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Controls whether hidden objects remain hidden between drawing sessions. OJBECTISOLATIONMODE controls whether objects that are hidden using the ISOLATEOBJECTS on page 956 or HIDEOBJECTS on page 912 command remain hidden after saving and reopening the drawing.
OBSCUREDCOLOR Quick Reference See also: See also: ■ Control the Display of Edges Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 257 Specifies the color of obscured lines. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI). An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by changing its color and linetype. OBSCUREDCOLOR is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSOBSCUREDCOLOR system variable is used.
An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by changing its color and linetype. OBSCUREDLTYPE is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSOBSCUREDLTYPE system variable is used. Obscured linetypes are independent of zoom level, unlike regular linetypes.
OFFSETDIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Offset an Object Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: -1.0000 Sets the default offset distance. <0 Offsets an object through a specified point 0 Sets the default offset distance OFFSETGAPTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Offset an Object Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when closed polylines are offset.
OLEFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit OLE Objects in Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls whether a frame is displayed and plotted on all OLE objects in the drawing. The frame on an OLE object must be displayed in order for grips to be visible.
2 OLE objects are visible and plot in model space only 3 No OLE objects are visible or plot OLEQUALITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the default plot quality for OLE objects. With OLEQUALITY, you can assign the plot quality for OLE objects to 0 (monochrome), 1 (low graphics), or 2 (high graphics). When OLEQUALITY is set to 3, the quality level is assigned automatically based on the type of object.
OLESTARTUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls whether the source application of an embedded OLE object loads when plotting. Loading the OLE source application may improve the plot quality.
1 Work can begin on the visible portions of a drawing before it is fully open OPMSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores a value that indicates whether the Properties palette is open, closed or hidden.
When ORTHOMODE is turned on, the cursor can move only horizontally or vertically relative to the UCS and the current grid rotation angle 0 Turns off Ortho mode 1 Turns on Ortho mode OSMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Object Snaps Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 4133 Sets running object snaps The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 NONe 1 ENDpoint 2 MIDpoint 4 CENter 8 NODe 16 QUAdrant 32 INTersection 64 INSertion 128 PERpendicula
512 NEArest 1024 Clears all object snaps 2048 APParent Intersection 4096 EXTension 8192 PARallel To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum of their values. For example, entering 3 specifies the Endpoint (bitcode 1) and Midpoint (bitcode 2) object snaps. Entering 16383 specifies all object snaps. When object snaps are switched off using the Osnap button on the status bar, a bitcode of 16384 (0x4000) is returned, in addition to the normal value of OSMODE.
2 Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings except in scripts OSNAPNODELEGACY Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the Node object snap can be used to snap to multiline text objects. The number and location of nodes on a multiline text object snap depends on the vertical and horizontal justification of the multiline text object.
Controls whether object snaps are automatically projected onto a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS at the current elevation.
P System Variables 41 PALETTEOPAQUE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area ■ Transparency Dialog Box on page 1373 Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether palettes can be made transparent. When transparency is available and turned on, you can use the Transparency option on the shortcut menu to set a different degree of transparency for the current palette or for all palettes. When transparency is unavailable or turned off, all palettes are opaque.
2 Transparency is turned off and is not supported by the hardware and/or operating system 3 Transparency is turned on, but is not supported by the hardware and/or operating system Available settings depend whether hardware acceleration is enabled. When hardware acceleration is enabled, setting 2 and 3 are available; when disabled, setting 0 and 1 are available.
PARAMETERCOPYMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Apply Dimensional Constraints Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. Parameters and their values apply to the current space only. Model space, individual paper space layouts, and various block definitions in the block editor cannot access each other's parameters.
ence existing user parameters when available, otherwise create any missing user parameters. Change missing referenced dimensional constraints into user parameters. 4 Copy all dimensional constraints, constraint parameters, and expressions. Rename the parameters of copied objects if conflicts in value occurs for copied parameters.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Determines whether the PDF underlay frame is visible. The FRAME system variable overrides the PDFFRAME setting. Use the PDFFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the PDF frame settings.
PDMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Divide an Object into Equal Segments Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how point objects are displayed. For information about values to enter, see the POINT command. PDSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Divide an Object into Equal Segments Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the display size for point objects.
PEDITACCEPT Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Polylines Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Suppresses display of the Object Selected Is Not a Polyline prompt in PEDIT. The prompt is followed by “Do you want it to turn into one?” Entering y converts the selected object to a polyline. When the prompt is suppressed, the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline.
PERIMETER Quick Reference See also: ■ Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA or LIST command. Also stores perimeter values computed by DBLIST PERSPECTIVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Specifies whether the current viewport displays a perspective view.
PERSPECTIVECLIP Quick Reference See also: ■ Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 5.0000 Determines the location of eyepoint clipping. The value determines where the eye point clipping occurs as a percentage. Values can range between 0.01 and 10.0. If you select a small value, the z-values of objects will be compressed at the target view and beyond. If you select a value such as 0.5%, the clipping will appear very close to the eyepoint of the view.
PICKADD Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Multiple Objects Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 2 Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. 0 Turns off PICKADD. The objects and subobjects most recently selected become the selection set. Previously selected objects and subobjects are removed from the selection set. Add more objects or subobjects to the selection set by pressing SHIFT while selecting. 1 Turns on PICKADD.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt. 0 Turns off PICKAUTO. 1 Draws a selection window (for either a window or a crossing selection) automatically at the Select Objects prompt PICKBOX Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects Individually Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. NOTE When PICKBOX is set to 0, selection previewing of objects is not available.
Controls the method of drawing a selection window. 0 Draws the selection window using two points. Click the pointing device at one corner, and then click to select another corner. 1 Draws the selection window using dragging. Click one corner and drag the pointing device; release the button at the other corner.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. 0 No group selection or associative hatch selection 1 Group selection 2 Associative hatch selection 3 Group selection and associative hatch selection PLATFORM Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates which platform is in use.
Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. 0 Polylines are created with linear segments 1 Polylines are created with arc segments PLINEGEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. Does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.
Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. PLINETYPE controls both the creation of new polylines with the PLINE command and the conversion of existing polylines in drawings from previous releases.
PLOTOFFSET Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust the Plot Offset of a Layout Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper. 0 Sets the plot offset relative to the printable area. 1 Sets the plot offset relative to the edge of the paper PLOTROTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Select a Printer or Plotter Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the orientation of plots.
2 Works the same as 0 value except that the X and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to the rotated origin position. PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Object Properties Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls whether object transparency is plotted.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the display of optional plot-related dialog boxes and nonfatal errors for scripts.
POINTCLOUDDENSITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Import 3D Point Cloud Files ■ Work with AutoCAD Drawings in AutoCAD LT Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 15 Controls the number of points displayed at once for all point clouds in the drawing view. The system variable value is a percentage of 1,500,000, which is the maximum number of points that can exist in a drawing, regardless of the number of point clouds attached to a single drawing.
NOTE This setting does not affect the Lock property for existing point cloud objects. 0 New point cloud objects are not locked and can be manipulated. The Lock property is set to No. 1 New point cloud objects are locked for editing and cannot be manipulated. The Lock property is set to Yes.
POLARADDANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: "" Stores additional angles for polar tracking and polar snap. You can add up to 10 angles. Each angle can be separated with semicolons (;). The AUNITS system variable sets the format for display of angles.Unlike POLARANG, POLARADDANG angles do not result in multiples of their values. The bit value for the POLARMODE system variable must have 4 turned on for POLARADDANG to have an effect.
POLARDIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the snap increment when the SNAPTYPE is set to 1 (PolarSnap). POLARMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking.
Use additional polar tracking angles 0 No 4 Yes Acquire object snap tracking points 0 Acquire automatically 8 Press SHIFT to acquire NOTE In a 3D view, a tracking vector parallel to the Z axis of the UCS is also displayed, and the tooltip displays +Z and -Z for the angle depending on the direction along the Z axis. POLYSIDES Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Rectangles and Polygons Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 4 Sets the default number of sides for the POLYGON command.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Displays the status of the currently configured display driver. 0 Does not support dialog boxes, the menu bar, and icon menus 1 Supports these features PREVIEWEFFECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of face subobjects. 0 No highlight effect for face 1 Highlight face with texture fill PREVIEWFILTER Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 7 Excludes specified object types from selection previewing.
PREVIEWTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the view to use for the drawing thumbnail. 0 Use last saved view 1 Use Home view PRODUCT Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "AutoCAD" Returns the product name.
PROGRAM Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "acad" Returns the program name. PROJECTNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Paths to Referenced Drawings Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Assigns a project name to the current drawing. Used when an xref, image, or DWF underlay file is not found in its original path.
PROJMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Trim or Extend Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or extending. 0 True 3D mode (no projection) 1 Project to the XY plane of the current UCS 2 Project to the current view plane PROXYGRAPHICS Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies whether images of proxy objects are saved in the drawing.
PROXYNOTICE Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays a notice when a proxy is created. A proxy is created when you open a drawing containing custom objects created by an application that is not present. A proxy is also created when you issue a command that unloads a custom object's parent application.
Only the bounding box is displayed for all proxy objects 2 PROXYWEBSEARCH Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Custom and Proxy Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Specifies how the program checks for object enablers. Object enablers allow you to display and use custom objects in drawings even when the ObjectARX application that created them is unavailable. PROXYWEBSEARCH is also controlled with the Live Enabler options on the System tab of the Options dialog box.
Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports. 0 No special linetype scaling. Linetype dash lengths are based on the drawing units of the space (model or paper) in which the objects were created. Scaled by the global LTSCALE factor. 1 Viewport scaling governs linetype scaling. If TILEMODE is set to 0, dash lengths are based on paper space drawing units, even for objects in model space.
PSOLWIDTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Create a Polysolid Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.2500 (imperial) or 5.0000 (metric) Controls the default width for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. The value reflects the last entered height value when using the POLYSOLID command. You cannot enter 0 as the value.
PSTYLEPOLICY Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Plot Styles Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. 0 Drawing is set to use named plot styles. The plot style for new objects is set to the default defined in DEFPLSTYLE.
PUBLISHALLSHEETS Quick Reference See also: See also: ■ Publish 3D DWF Files Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Specifies whether to load the contents of the active document or of all open documents in the Publish dialog box.
Publishing sheets as a single job requires A plot driver that supports the multi-sheet plotting or printing option 0 A published sheet set is processed one sheet at a time. Separate PLT files are created for each sheet. If the sheet set is published, the sheets might be interleaved with other plot jobs. 1 A published sheet set is processed as a single job. A multisheet PLT file is created. If the sheet set is published, it is never interleaved with other plot jobs.
PUCSBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of orthographic UCS settings in paper space only.
Q System Variables 42 QCSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of QuickCalc Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the QuickCalc calculator is open or closed.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the location mode of Quick Properties palette. 0 Quick Properties palette displays using the Cursor-dependent location mode 1 Quick Properties palette displays using the Static location mode QPMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: -1 Sets the on or off state of Quick Properties palette. 0 Turns off the display of the Quick Properties palette for all objects.
QTEXTMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how text is displayed. 0 Turns off Quick Text mode; displays characters 1 Turns on Quick Text mode; displays a box in place of text QVDRAWINGPIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Open Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the default display state of preview images of drawings.
QVLAYOUTPIN Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the default display state of preview images of model space and layouts in a drawing.
R System Variables 43 RASTERDPI Quick Reference See also: ■ Plot to Raster File Formats Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 300 Controls paper size and plot scaling when changing from dimensional to dimensionless output devices, or vice versa. Converts millimeters or inches to pixels, or vice versa. Accepts an integer between 100 and 32,767 as a valid value.
Initial value: 20 Sets the maximum percentage of available virtual memory that is allowed for plotting a raster image. RASTERPREVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
REBUILD2DCV Quick Reference See also: ■ CVREBUILD on page 402 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 6 Sets the number of control vertices when rebuilding a spline. Valid values are from 2 to 32767. REBUILD2DDEGREE Quick Reference See also: ■ CVREBUILD on page 402 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the global degree when rebuilding a spline. Valid values are 1 to 11.
A curve with a degree of 1 is a straight line and a curve with a degree of 2 has one bend. A Bezier curve has a degree of 3. Higher degrees create more complex curves, but require computations. REBUILD2DOPTION Quick Reference See also: ■ CVREBUILD on page 402 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether to delete the original curve when rebuilding a spline.
REBUILDDEGREEU Quick Reference See also: ■ CVREBUILD on page 402 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the degree in the U direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Valid values are 2to 11. REBUILDDEGREEV Quick Reference See also: ■ CVREBUILD on page 402 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the degree in the V direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Valid values are 2 to 11.
REBUILDOPTIONS Quick Reference See also: ■ CVREBUILD on page 402 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls deletion and trimming options when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Value When you use CVREBUILD: 0 The original surface is not deleted and trimmed areas are not applied to the rebuilt object. 1 The original surface is deleted and trimmed areas are not applied to the rebuilt object.
Saved in: Registry Initial value: 6 Sets the number of grid lines in the U direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Enter a value from 2 to 32767 to increase or decrease the number of U direction grid lines used to rebuild the ASM solid or surface. REBUILDV Quick Reference See also: ■ CVREBUILD on page 402 ■ Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 6 Sets the number of grid lines in the V direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface.
Controls the display of recovery notifications before or after opening a damaged drawing file. 0 Displays a task dialog to recover damaged files while opening a drawing that needs recovery. The task dialog interrupts any running scripts. 1 Automatically recovers the damaged files, opens the drawing, and displays a task dialog with the information of the recovered files. If a script is running, the task dialog is suppressed.
2 Recovery information is recorded, and the Drawing Recovery window displays automatically in the next session after a system failure REFEDITNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Displays the name of the reference being edited.
RE-INIT Quick Reference See also: ■ Digitizing Tablets Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Reinitializes the digitizer, digitizer port, and acad.pgp file. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 1 Digitizer input/output port reinitialization 4 Digitizer reinitialization 16 PGP file reinitialization (reload) To specify more than one reinitialization, enter the sum of the bitcode values.
shortcut icon, if a Start In path is specified in the icon properties, that path is used as the default for all standard file selection dialog boxes. 1 The default path in each standard file selection dialog box is the last path used in that dialog box. The Start In folder specified for the AutoCAD shortcut icon is not used.
Provides a way of overriding the DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable for rendering while retaining the setting for working in a viewport. 0 The current lights in the viewport are used in the rendered scene, either default lights or user lights, as specified by the DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable. 1 Overrides the setting for the DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable. Only user lights are rendered.
RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Organize the Ribbon Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls how ribbon contextual tabs are displayed when you single- or double-click an object. 0 When an object or selection set is single- or double-clicked, focus is not automatically switched to ribbon contextual tabs defined in contextual tab states.
The valid range is 0 to 32767. When set to 0, the limit is turned off. Selecting a large number of objects and changing them with the Properties panel or a contextual tab on the ribbon can result in slow response time. This system variable prevents such an occurrence, especially on a computer with limited memory. If the limit is exceeded, the specified property of the selected objects will not be changed, but the setting for the current property will be changed instead.
Initial value: 1 Determines whether a pickfirst selection set remains selected after a ribbon contextual tab is invoked and the command is completed. 0 The pickfirst selection set does not remain selected after a command is executed from a ribbon contextual tab. NOTE There may be exceptions for some commands. 1 The pickfirst selection set remains selected after a command is executed from a ribbon contextual tab.
(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the full path to the root folder where roamable customizable files were installed. If you are working on a network that supports roaming, when you customize files that are in your roaming profile they are available to you regardless of which machine you are currently using. These files are stored in the product folder under the Application Data folder; for example, "c:\Documents and Settings\username\Application Data\productname\versio
ROLLOVERTIPS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of rollover tooltips in the application. The content in tooltips can be customized in the Customize User Interface (CUI) Editor. 0 Object rollover tooltips are not displayed 1 Object rollover tooltips are displayed ROLLOVERTIPS is saved in the current profile.
RTDISPLAY is saved in the current profile.
S System Variables 44 SAVEFIDELITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Save a Drawing Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the drawing is saved with visual fidelity. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Saved without visual fidelity. 1 Annotation objects assigned annotative scales are saved to separate layers for each scale used. Only affects drawings when saving to AutoCAD LT 2007 or earlier file formats.
SAVEFILE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the current automatic save file name. SAVEFILEPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. You can also change the path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Displays the file name and directory path of the most recently saved drawing. SAVETIME Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Up the Drawing Area Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10 Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. 0 Turns off automatic saving. >0 Saves the drawing at intervals specified by the nonzero integer automatically The value of SAVETIME is an integer between 0 and 600.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores the number of boxes in the screen menu area of the drawing area. If the screen menu is turned off, SCREENBOXES is zero. On platforms that permit the drawing area to be resized or the screen menu to be reconfigured during an editing session, the value of this variable might change during the editing session.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 3 Indicates the state of the display. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Text screen is displayed 1 Drawing area is displayed 2 Dual-screen display is configured SCREENSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Switch Between Model Space and Layouts (Read-only) Type: 2D-point Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores current viewport size in pixels (X and Y).
Controls whether alternate are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an object is selected 0 Off 1 On The dimming intensity is controlled by the XFADECTL system variable. SELECTIONAREA Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Object Selection Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of effects for selection areas. Selection areas are created by the Window, Crossing, WPolygon, and CPolygon options of SELECT.
Initial value: 25 Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing selection. The valid range is 0 to 100. The lower the setting, the more transparent the area. A value of 100 makes the area opaque. The SELECTIONAREA system variable must be on. SELECTIONCYCLING Quick Reference See also: ■ Select Objects Individually ■ Use 3D Subobject Grips ■ Modify 3D Subobjects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Turns selection cycling on and off.
Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls the display of selection previewing Objects are highlighted when the pickbox cursor rolls over them. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if you clicked.
8 Linetype scale 16 Lineweight 32 Plot style 64 Object style (such as text styles, dimension styles, and table styles) 128 Name (for referenced objects, such as blocks, xrefs, and images) SETBYLAYERMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Display and Change the Properties of Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 255 Controls which properties are selected for the SETBYLAYER command.
64 Includes blocks when changing ByBlock to ByLayer 128 Transparency property SHADEDGE Quick Reference See also: See also: ■ Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Controls the shading of edges in rendering.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 70 Sets the ratio of diffuse reflective light to ambient light. The ratio is a percentage of diffuse reflective light when SHADEDGE is set to 0 or 1. SHADOWPLANELOCATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Backgrounds and Shadows Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Controls the location of an invisible ground plane used to display shadows. The value is a location on the current Z axis. The ground plane is invisible, but it casts and receives shadows.
The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus, restoring AutoCAD Release 14 behavior. 1 Enables Default mode shortcut menus. 2 Enables Edit mode shortcut menus. 4 Enables Command mode shortcut menus whenever a command is active. 8 Enables Command mode shortcut menus only when command options are currently available at the Command prompt.
2 Displays the history of all solids by overriding the individual Show History property settings for solids. You can view the original objects that were used to create the solid. SHOWLAYERUSAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Layers Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Displays icons in the Layer Properties Manager to indicate whether layers are in use. Setting this system variable to Off improves performance in the Layer Properties Manager.
Controls the default state of the thumbnail shots. 0 Displays thumbnail shots in an unpinned state 1 Displays thumbnail shots in a pinned state SHOWPALETTESTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the palettes, including the ribbon and the Command window, are displayed or hidden.
Sets a default shape name that must conform to symbol- naming conventions. If no default is set, it returns "". Enter a period (.) to set no default. SIGWARN Quick Reference See also: ■ View Digital Signature Details Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. If the system variable is on and you open a file with a valid signature, the digital signature status is displayed.
Sets the record increment for the SKETCH command. SKPOLY Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Determines whether the SKETCH command generates lines, polylines, or splines. 0 Generates lines 1 Generates polylines 2 Generates splines SKTOLERANCE Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Freehand Sketches Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5 Determines how closely the spline fits to the freehand sketch.
SKYSTATUS Quick Reference See also: ■ Sun and Sky Simulation Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Determines if the sky illumination is computed at render time. This has no impact on the viewport illumination or the background. It only makes the sky available as a gathered light source for rendering.
1 Creates a smooth model. Original mesh faces are retained in the converted object. 2 Creates a model with flattened faces. Coplanar faces are optimized, or merged. 3 Creates a model with flattened faces. Original mesh faces are retained in the converted object. This system variable sets the default value for operations that use CONVTOSOLID and CONVTOSURFACE commands.
If the VSLIGHTINGQUALITY system variable is 0, this system variable is ignored and all smoothness levels are displayed as faceted. SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE Quick Reference See also: ■ Change Mesh Smoothness Levels Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1000000 Sets the maximum number of faces permitted for mesh objects. The initial value of this system variable is adjusted for best performance based on your system configuration. Permissible values are from 1 to 16,000,000.
SNAPANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. When SNAPANG is set to a value other than 0, the lined grid will not display. SNAPBASE Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000 Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current viewport relative to the current UCS.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport. 0 Left 1 Top 2 Right SNAPMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Turns the Snap mode on and off.
Initial value: 0 Sets the snap style for the current viewport. 0 Standard (rectangular snap) 1 Isometric snap SNAPTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Adjust Grid and Grid Snap Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the type of snap for the current viewport. 0 Grid, or standard snap. 1 PolarSnap. Snaps along polar angle increments. Use PolarSnap with polar and object snap tracking.
If SNAPSTYL is set to 1, the X value of SNAPUNIT is adjusted automatically to accommodate the isometric snap. Changes to this system variable are not reflected in the grid until the display is refreshed. SOLIDCHECK Quick Reference See also: ■ Clean and Check 3D Solids Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Turns 3D solid validation on and off for the current session.
When set to 1, composite solids retain a “history” of the original objects contained in the composite. 0 Sets the History property to None for all solids. No history is retained. 1 Sets the History property to Record for all solids. All solids retain a history of their original objects. SORTENTS Quick Reference See also: ■ Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 127 Controls object sorting in support of draw order for several operations.
SPLDEGREE Quick Reference (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 3 Stores the last-used degree setting for splines and sets the default degree setting for the SPLINE command when specifying control vertices. Enter a value from 1 to 5. NOTE SPLDEGREE defaults to 3 when AutoCAD starts. SPLFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Creating Meshes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the display of helixes and smoothed mesh objects.
NOTE To control the display for splines, use the CVSHOW on page 407 and the CVHIDE on page 401 commands. SPLINESEGS Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Polylines Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 8 Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. Enter a non-zero integer between -32768 to 32767.
SPLKNOTS Quick Reference Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores the last-used knot parameterization for splines and sets the default knot setting for the SPLINE command when specifying fit points. 0 Chord 1 Square root chord 2 Uniform NOTE SPLKNOTS always defaults to 0 when AutoCAD starts. SPLMETHOD Quick Reference Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores the last-used spline method and sets the default method for the SPLINE command.
SSFOUND Quick Reference See also: ■ Publish, Transmit, and Archive Sheet Sets (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Displays the sheet set path and file name if a search for a sheet set is successful. SSLOCATE must be set to 1 and the drawing file must be open for a successful search.
SSMAUTOOPEN Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls the display behavior of the Sheet Set Manager when a drawing associated with a sheet is opened. 0 Does not open the Sheet Set Manager automatically 1 Opens the Sheet Set Manager automatically SSMAUTOOPEN and SSLOCATE must both be set to 1 to open a sheet set automatically in the Sheet Set Manager.
SSMSHEETSTATUS Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Sheets Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls how the status data in a sheet set is refreshed. The status data for sheets in the current sheet set includes whether a sheet is locked and whether a sheet is missing (or found in an unexpected location). This status data can be updated automatically for all sheets.
Indicates whether the Sheet Set Manager window is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open STANDARDSVIOLATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of CAD Standards Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies whether a user is notified of standards violations in the current drawing when a nonstandard object is created or modified. Changes to the value of this system variable take effect only when Display Icons from Services is checked in the Tray Settings dialog box.
STARTUP Quick Reference See also: ■ Start a Drawing from Scratch Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the Create New Drawing dialog box is displayed when a new drawing is started with NEW or QNEW. Also controls whether the Startup dialog box is displayed when the application is started. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, file dialog boxes are not displayed.
1 Displays only the application status bar 2 Displays both the application and drawing status bars 3 Displays only the drawing status bar STEPSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6.0000 Specifies the size of each step when in walk or fly mode, in drawing units. You can enter any real number from 1E-6 to 1E+6. STEPSPERSEC Quick Reference See also: ■ Walk and Fly Through a Drawing Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects ■ LEGACYCTRLPICK on page 2386 Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. In busy 3D environments with many objects, it can be helpful to filter certain subobjects out of the selection highlighting. 0 When subobject filtering is off, press Ctrl+click to select a face, edge, vertex or a history subobject.
When filtering is set for vertices, you cannot select faces, edges, or history subobjects. When filtering is set for edges, you cannot select faces, vertices, or history subobjects.
When filtering is set for faces, you cannot select edges, vertices, or history subobjects. When filtering is set for history subobjects, you can only select the wireframe representations of portions of objects removed during a union, subtract, or intersect operation.
Subobject Selection Filter Cursors When a subobject selection filter is set, the following images are displayed next to the cursor: Vertex filtering is on Edge filtering is on Face filtering is on History subobject filtering is on Subobject not eligible for selection SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE | 2535
SUNPROPERTIESSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Sun and Sky Simulation (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the Sun Properties window is open or closed. 0 Closed 1 Open SUNSTATUS Quick Reference See also: ■ Sun and Sky Simulation Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Turns on and off the lighting effects of the sun in the current viewport. Only the lights from sources other than the sun affect the view in the current viewport.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Surfaces from Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. When associativity is on, surfaces automatically adjust to modifications made to other, related surfaces.
Controls whether to preview the movement of all related associative surfaces when a related object. Disabling the preview can increase performance. 0 Displays no preview. The display refreshes after dragging is complete. 1 Previews only the movement of the first associated surface. All other associated surfaces do not move until after dragging is complete. 2 Previews the movement of all associated surfaces.
SURFACEMODELINGMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves ■ Create Surfaces Type: Switch Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. 0 Creates a procedural surface when creating surfaces. 1 Creates a NURBS surface when creating surfaces.
SURFTAB2 Quick Reference See also: ■ Construct Meshes from Other Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Sets the mesh density in the N direction for the REVSURF and EDGESURF commands. SURFTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Polylines Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by the Smooth option of the PEDIT command.
SURFU Quick Reference See also: ■ Modify Polylines Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U isolines density on surface objects. Valid values are 0 through 200. Meshes are always created with a minimum surface density of 2.
SYSCODEPAGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Text Fonts for International Work (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates the system code page, which is determined by the operating system. To change the code page, see Help in your operating system.
T System Variables 45 TABLEINDICATOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Create and Modify Tables Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of row numbers and column letters when the In-Place Text Editor is open for editing a table cell.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the display of the Table toolbar. 0 The Table toolbar is never displayed. 1 The Table toolbar is displayed upon selection of a table cell. 2 The Table toolbar is not displayed when the ribbon is turned on. TABMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Digitizing Tablets Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls the use of the tablet. For more information on using and configuring a tablet, see the TABLET command.
TARGET Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Parallel and Perspective Views (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the location (as a UCS coordinate) of the target point for the current viewport. TBCUSTOMIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Tool Palettes Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether tool palette groups can be customized.
TDCREATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the local time and date the drawing was created. TDINDWG Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the total editing time, which is the total elapsed time between saves of the current drawing. The format is: .
TDUCREATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was created. TDUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the local time and date of the last update/save.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the user-elapsed timer. TDUUPDATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Add Identifying Information to Drawings (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the universal time and date of the last update or save. TEMPOVERRIDES Quick Reference See also: ■ Override Object Snap Settings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Turns temporary override keys on and off.
TEMPPREFIX Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify Search Paths and File Locations (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Contains the directory name (if any) configured for placement of temporary files, with a path separator appended. Windows has a character limit of 255 for the combined file name and path length of temporary files. You can modify this limit from the Options dialog box, Files tab, under Temporary Drawing File Location.
TEXTEVAL Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Single-Line Text Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls how text strings entered with TEXT (using AutoLISP) or with -TEXT are evaluated. 0 All responses to prompts for text strings and attribute values are taken literally. 1 All text starting from an opening parenthesis [(] or an exclamation mark [!] is evaluated as an AutoLISP expression, as for nontextual input.
1 Displays text as filled images TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT Quick Reference See also: ■ Share Drawing Files Internationally Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Provides Unicode options for plot and text window log files. 0 ANSI format 1 UTF-8 (Unicode) 2 UTF-16LE (Unicode) 3 UTF-16BE (Unicode) TEXTQLTY Quick Reference See also: ■ Use TrueType Fonts Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.
Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines for TrueType fonts while plotting and rendering. 0 represents no effort to refine the smoothness of the text; 100 represents a maximum effort to smooth text characters. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting speed. Sets the resolution of TrueType fonts while plotting. Use integer values from 0 to 100. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed.
THICKNESS Quick Reference See also: ■ Add 3D Thickness to Objects Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the current 3D thickness. THUMBSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Content reference to: Overview of ShowMotion Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Specifies the maximum generated size for thumbnail previews in pixels.
TILEMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Model Space Viewports Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current. 0 Makes the last active layout tab (paper space) active 1 Makes the Model tab active TIMEZONE Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Geographic Location Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -8000 Sets the time zone for the sun in the drawing. The values in the table are expressed as hours and minutes away from Greenwich Mean Time.
-10000 Hawaii -9000 Alaska -8000 Pacific Time (US & Canada), Tijuana -7000 Arizona -7000 Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan -7000 Mountain Time (US & Canada) -7001 Arizona -7002 Mazatlan -6000 Central America -6001 Central Time (US & Canada) -6002 Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey -6003 Saskatchewan -5000 Eastern Time (US & Canada) -5001 Indiana (East) -5002 Bogota, Lima, Quito -4000 Atlantic Time (Canada) -4001 Caracas, La Paz -4002 Santiago -3300 Newfoundland -3000 Brasil
-2000 Mid-Atlantic -1000 Azores -1001 Cape Verde Is.
+4000 Abu Dhabi, Muscat +4001 Baku, Tbilisi, Yerevan +4300 Kabul +5000 Ekaterinburg +5001 Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent +5300 Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi +5450 Kathmandu +6000 Almaty, Novosibirsk +6001 Astana, Dhaka +6002 Sri Jayawardenepura +6300 Rangoon +7000 Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta +7001 Krasnoyarsk +8000 Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi +8001 Kuala Lumpur, Singapore +8002 Taipei +8003 Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar +8004 Perth +9000 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo +9001 S
+9301 Darwin +10000 Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney +10001 Guam, Port Moresby +10002 Brisbane +10003 Hobart +10004 Vladivostok +11000 Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia +12000 Auckland, Wellington +12001 Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is. +13000 Nuku’alofa TOOLTIPMERGE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip.
TOOLTIPS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of tooltips on the ribbon, toolbars, and other user interface elements. 0 Turns off the display of tooltips 1 Turns on the display of tooltips TPSTATE Quick Reference See also: ■ Customize Tool Palettes (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Tool Palettes window is open or closed.
TRACEWID Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Lines Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0500 (imperial) or 1.0000 (metric) Sets the default trace width. TRACKPATH Quick Reference See also: ■ Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths.
TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display Properties of Certain Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the object transparency is displayed. 0 Object transparency is not displayed 1 Object transparency is displayed TRAYICONS Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether a tray is displayed on the status bar.
TRAYNOTIFY Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether service notifications are displayed in the status bar tray. 0 Does not display notifications 1 Displays notifications TRAYTIMEOUT Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the length of time (in seconds) that service notifications are displayed. Valid values are 0 to 10.
TREEDEPTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3020 Specifies the maximum depth, that is, the number of times the tree-structured spatial index can divide into branches. 0 Suppresses the spatial index entirely, eliminating the performance improvements it provides in working with large drawings. This setting assures that objects are always processed in database order. >0 Turns on spatial indexing.
Initial value: 10000000 Limits memory consumption during drawing regeneration by limiting the number of nodes in the spatial index (oct-tree). By imposing a fixed limit with TREEMAX, you can load drawings created on systems with more memory than your system and with a larger TREEDEPTH than your system can handle. These drawings, if left unchecked, have an oct-tree large enough to eventually consume more memory than is available to your computer.
TSPACEFAC Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance measured as a factor of text height. Valid values are 0.25 to 4.0. TSPACETYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the type of line spacing used in multiline text.
TSTACKALIGN Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the vertical alignment of stacked text. 0 Bottom aligned 1 Center aligned 2 Top aligned TSTACKSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 70 Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height relative to selected text's current height.
U System Variables 46 UCSAXISANG Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 90 Stores the default angle when rotating the UCS around one of its axes using the X, Y, or Z option of the UCS command. Its value must be entered as an angle in degrees (valid values are: 5, 10, 15, 18, 22.5, 30, 45, 90, 180).
Initial value: "" Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of orthographic UCS settings. Valid values include any named UCS. UCSDETECT Quick Reference See also: ■ Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether dynamic UCS acquisition is active or not.
Once the new UCS has been established, you can use DVIEW, PLAN, VIEW, or VPOINT to change the view of the drawing. It will change to a plan view again the next time you change coordinate systems.
UCSNAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon (Read-only) Type: String Saved in:Drawing Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. Returns a null string if the current UCS is unnamed. UCSORG Quick Reference See also: See also: ■ Assign User Coordinate System Orientations to Viewports (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.
UCSORTHO Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored.
UCSVP Quick Reference See also: ■ Assign User Coordinate System Orientations to Viewports Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed or changes to reflect the UCS of the current viewport. The setting of this system variable is viewport specific.
UCSYDIR Quick Reference See also: ■ Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,1.0000,0.0000 Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space. The setting of this system variable is viewport specific. UNDOCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Correct Mistakes (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 53 Indicates the state of the Auto, Control, and Group options of the UNDO command.
4 Auto is turned on 8 A group is currently active 16 Zoom and pan operations are grouped as a single action 32 Layer property operations are grouped as a single action UNDOMARKS Quick Reference See also: ■ Correct Mistakes (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores the number of marks placed in the UNDO control stream by the Mark option. The Mark and Back options are not available if a group is currently active.
By default, the format for displaying measured values differs slightly from the format used for entering them. (You cannot include spaces when entering measured values.
UPDATETHUMBNAIL Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 15 Controls updating of the thumbnail previews in the Sheet Set Manager and Quick View.
Initial value: 0 Provides storage and retrieval of integer values. There are five system variables: USERI1, USERI2, USERI3, USERI4, and USERI5. USERR1-5 Quick Reference See also: ■ DIESEL Expressions in Macros Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Provides storage and retrieval of real numbers. There are five system variables: USERR1, USERR2, USERR3, USERR4, and USERR5.
2578
V System Variables 47 VIEWCTR Quick Reference See also: ■ Pan or Zoom a View (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the center of view in the current viewport. Expressed as a UCS coordinate.
Type: 3D-vector Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,1.0000 Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport, expressed in UCS coordinates. This describes the camera point as a 3D offset from the target point. VIEWMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Stores the View mode for the current viewport. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Turned off. 1 Perspective view active.
VIEWSIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Views (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the height of the view displayed in the current viewport, measured in drawing units. VIEWTWIST Quick Reference See also: ■ Rotate Views in Layout Viewports (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the view rotation angle for the current viewport measured relative to the WCS.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. Controls visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, and plot styles. 0 The layer table, as stored in the reference drawing (xref), takes precedence. Changes made to xref-dependent layers in the current drawing are valid in the current session only and are not saved with the drawing.
VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE Quick Reference See also: ■ Override Layer Properties in Viewports Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether layer property overrides for layout viewports are displayed and plotted.
VPROTATEASSOC Quick Reference See also: ■ Rotate Views in Layout Viewports Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the view within a viewport is rotated with the viewport when the viewport is rotated. 0 When a viewport is rotated, the view inside is not rotated. 1 When a viewport is rotated, the view inside is rotated to match the rotation of the viewport. NOTE After rotating a viewport, VPROTATEASSOC is set to 0 for a new viewport created in the same layout.
VSACURVATURELOW Quick Reference See also: ■ ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 112 ■ ANALYSISOPTIONS - Curvature Tab on page 114 Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -1 Sets the value at which a surface displays as blue during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE on page 110). The default value for this system variable is -1.
3 Minimum curvature (evaluates the minimum curvature of the U and V surface curvature values) VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH Quick Reference See also: ■ ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 112 ■ ANALYSISOPTIONS - Draft Analysis Tab on page 115 Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT on page 111). Draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane. High value is set by this system variable.
Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -3 Sets the value at which a model displays as blue during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT on page 111). Draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane. Low value set by this system variable. -90 Surface is parallel to the UCS with surface normal facing the opposite direction as the construction plane. 0 Surface is perpendicular to the construction plane.
VSAZEBRACOLOR2 Quick Reference See also: ■ ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 112 ■ ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab on page 113 Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: RGB: 0, 0, 0 Sets the second (contrasting) color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. Values for RGB True Color are represented as a comma-separated string of integers 000 to 255. The default value is RGB:0,0,0.
90 Vertical NOTE Enter a value between 0 and 90 degrees to set Zebra stripes at an angle. VSAZEBRASIZE Quick Reference See also: ■ ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 112 ■ ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab on page 113 Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 45 Controls the width of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Valid values are from 1 to 100.
1 Cylinder VSBACKGROUNDS Quick Reference See also: ■ Display Backgrounds and Shadows Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether backgrounds are displayed in the visual style applied to the current viewport. 0 Off 1 On NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available. Valid values for True Colors are a string of integers each from 0 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB. The True Color setting is entered as follows: RGB:000,000,000 If you have a color book installed, you can specify any colors that are defined in the book.
1 Low 2 Medium 3 High NOTE Plot styles are not available for objects with the Jitter edge modifier applied. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
Initial value: -6 Makes edges on 3D objects extend beyond their intersection for a hand-drawn effect. The range is 1 to 100 pixels. Turn off the line extensions effect by preceding the setting with a minus sign (-). NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. VSEDGES Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Edges Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the types of edges that are displayed in the viewport.
isolines displayed facet edges displayed 0 No edges are displayed 1 Isolines are displayed VSEDGES | 2595
2 Facet edges are displayed NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. VSEDGESMOOTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Edges Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies the angle at which crease edges are displayed. The range is 0 to 180.
Controls how the color of faces is calculated. 0 Normal: Does not apply a face color modifier 1 Monochrome: Displays all faces in the color that is specified in the VSMONOCOLOR system variable. 2 Tint: Uses the color that is specified in the VSMONOCOLOR system variable to shade all faces by changing the hue and saturation values of the color.
VSFACEOPACITY Quick Reference See also: ■ Shade and Color Faces Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -60 Turns on and off a preset level of transparency for 3D objects. The level of transparency for 3D solids and surfaces can be set between 100 percent opaque and 0 percent opaque. Negative numbers store the value but turn off the effect. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable.
VSFACESTYLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Shade and Color Faces Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how faces are displayed in the current viewport.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. VSHIDEPRECISION Quick Reference See also: ■ Shade and Color Faces Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls the accuracy of hides and shades in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
Specifies the color of intersection polylines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The initial value is 7, which is a special value that inverts the color (black or white) based on the background color. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available.
VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Edges Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Sets the linetype for intersection lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The range is 1 to 11.
VSISOONTOP Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Edges Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Displays isolines on top of shaded objects in the visual style applied to the current viewport. 0 Off 1 On NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
1 Smooth. The colors are computed as a gradient between the vertices of the faces. 2 Smoothest. If the Per-Pixel Lighting setting is turned on in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box, then the colors are computed for individual pixels. If not, the Smooth setting is used instead. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. VSMAX Quick Reference See also: ■ Save and Restore Model Tab Viewport Arrangements (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the upper-right corner of the current viewport's virtual screen. Expressed as a UCS coordinate.
VSMONOCOLOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Shade and Color Faces Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 255,255,255 Sets the color for monochrome and tint display of faces in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The initial value is white. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. VSOBSCUREDEDGES Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Edges Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether obscured (hidden) edges are displayed. 0 Off 1 On NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable.
The range is 1 to 11. 1 Solid 2 Dashed 3 Dotted 4 Short Dash 5 Medium Dash 6 Long Dash 7 Double Short Dash 8 Double Medium Dash 9 Double Long Dash 10 Medium Long Dash 11 Sparse Dot The initial value of VSOBSCUREDLTYPE varies on the current visual style.
Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value Conceptual 1 Hidden 2 Shaded 1 Shaded with Edges 2 Shades of Gray 1 Sketchy 1 Wireframe 1 X-ray 1 Realistic 1 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
You can also specify a true color or a color book color. Valid values for true colors are a string of integers each from 1 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB. The True Color setting is entered as follows: RGB:000,000,000 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies the linetype of occluded (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The range is 1 to 11.
The initial value of VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE varies on the current visual style. Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value 2D Wireframe 1 Conceptual 1 Hidden 2 Shaded 1 Shaded with Edges 2 Shades of Gray 1 Sketchy 1 Wireframe 1 X-ray 1 Realistic 1 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
Controls whether a visual style displays shadows. 0 No shadows are displayed 1 Ground shadows only are displayed 2 Full shadows are displayed NOTE To display full shadows, hardware acceleration is required. When Geometry Acceleration is off, full shadows cannot be displayed. (To access these settings, enter 3dconfig at the Command prompt. In the Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning dialog box, click Manual Tune.
The initial value of VSSILHEDGES depends on the current visual style. Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value 2D Wireframe 0 3D Wireframe 0 3D Hidden 1 Realistic 0 Conceptual 1 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
VSSILHWIDTH Quick Reference See also: ■ Control the Display of Edges Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 5 Specifies the width in pixels of silhouette edges in the current viewport. The range is 1 to 25. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
VTDURATION Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 750 Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. The valid range is 0 to 5000. VTENABLE Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls when smooth view transitions are used. Smooth view transitions can be on or off for panning and zooming, for changes of view angle, or for scripts. The valid range is 0 to 7.
Setting For pan/zoom For rotation For scripts 4 Off Off On 5 On Off On 6 Off On On 7 On On On VTFPS Quick Reference See also: ■ Set Interface Options Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 7 Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. When a smooth view transition cannot maintain this speed, an instant transition is used. The valid range is 1 to 30.
2618
W System Variables 48 WHIPARC Quick Reference See also: ■ Draw Curved Objects Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether to use an additional processor to improve the speed of operations such as ZOOM that redraw or regenerate the drawing. WHIPTHREAD has no effect on single processor machines. 0 No multithreaded processing; restricts regeneration and redraw processing to a single processor. This setting restores the behavior of AutoCAD 2000 and previous releases.
The valid range is 1 to 255. SELECTIONAREA must be on. WMFBKGND Quick Reference See also: ■ Import Other File Formats Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Off Controls the background display when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. The objects may be inserted using any of the following methods: ■ Output to a Windows metafile using WMFOUT ■ Copied to the Clipboard and pasted as a Windows metafile ■ Dragged as a Windows metafile Off The background color is transparent.
Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Off Controls the assignment of the foreground color when objects are inserted in Windows metafile (WMF) format. The objects may be inserted using any of the following methods: ■ Output to a Windows metafile using WMFOUT ■ Copied to the Clipboard and pasted as a Windows metafile ■ Dragged as a Windows metafile WMFFOREGND applies only when WMFBKGND is set to Off.
1 UCS matches the WCS WORLDVIEW Quick Reference See also: ■ Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Determines whether input to the DVIEW and VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the current UCS.
1 Can write to the drawing WSAUTOSAVE Quick Reference See also: ■ Create Task-Based Workspaces ■ Workspace Settings Dialog Box on page 2103 Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Saves changes you made to a workspace when you switch to another work space. 0 Autosave on 1 Autosave off This system variable determines the default setting in the Workspace Settings dialog box > When Switching Workspaces section on page 2104.
X System Variables 49 XCLIPFRAME Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Determines whether xref clipping boundaries are visible or plotted in the current drawing. The FRAME system variable overrides the XCLIPFRAME setting.
XDWGFADECTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 70 Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects. The valid XDWGFADECTL system variable value is between -90 and 90. When XDWGFADECTL is set to a negative value, the Xref Fading feature is not turned on, but the setting is stored. 0 DWG xref objects are not faded. >0 When the value is positive, controls the percent of fading up to 90 percent.
Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing. 0 Can't use in-place reference editing 1 Can use in-place reference editing XFADECTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the amount of fading within a reference being edited in place. This setting affects only the objects that are not being edited in the reference. Valid values are from 0 to 90.
Initial value: 2 Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. 0 Turns off demand-loading; the entire drawing is loaded. 1 Turns on demand-loading. Referenced drawings are kept open and locked. 2 Turns on demand-loading.
XREFCTL Quick Reference See also: ■ Track External Reference Operations (Log File) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether external reference log (XLG) files are created. 0 Does not write log files 1 Writes log files XREFNOTIFY Quick Reference See also: ■ Update Referenced Drawing Attachments Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the notification for updated or missing xrefs. 0 Disables xref notification 1 Enables xref notification.
2 Enables xref notification and balloon messages. Displays the xref icon as in 1 above. Also displays balloon messages in the same area when xrefs are modified. The number of minutes between checking for modified xrefs is controlled by the system registry variable XNOTIFYTIME. XREFTYPE Quick Reference See also: ■ Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the default reference type when attaching or overlaying an external reference.
Z System Variables 50 ZOOMFACTOR Quick Reference See also: ■ Pointing Device Buttons Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 60 Controls how much the magnification changes when the mouse wheel moves forward or backward. Accepts an integer between 3 and 100 as a valid value. The higher the number, the more the change.
Initial value: 0 Toggles the direction of transparent zoom operations when you scroll the middle mouse wheel. 0 Moves wheel forward zooms in; moving wheel backwards zooms out. 1 Move wheel forward zooms out; moving wheel backwards zooms in.
Utilities 51 This section describes the AutoCAD LT® utilities. You run these utilities separately from AutoCAD LT. Attach Digital Signatures Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Digital Signatures Attaches a digital signature to files. Menu: Start menu (Windows) ➤ Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD LT ➤ Attach Digital Signatures The Attach Digital Signatures dialog box is displayed.
Files to Be Signed Lists the names of the files to be signed, the folder in which each file resides, and the current status of the file. Add Files Opens the Select File dialog box, where you select the files for digital signature. Search Folders Opens the Search Folders dialog box, where you can search for files in the folder you specify. Remove Removes selected files from the Files to Be Signed list. Clear List Removes all files from the Files to Be Signed list.
Time Service Status Displays the connection status (Successfully Contacted Time Server or Could Not Contact Time Server) of the time service. Comment Provides a place to include information relevant to the digital signature or to the files you are signing. Sign Files Attaches a digital signature to every file listed in this dialog box. Search Folders Dialog Box Quick Reference See also: ■ Overview of Digital Signatures Searches for folders that contain files you want to digitally sign.
Batch Standards Checker Quick Reference See also: ■ Check Drawings for Standards Violations Audits a set of drawings for standards violations. Menu: Start menu (Windows) ➤ Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD ➤ Batch Standards Checker The Batch Standards Checker Window is displayed.
Drawings Tab (Batch Standards Checker) Allows you to create a list of drawings to audit for standards violations. Drawings to Check Lists the drawings to audit for standards violations. To add a drawing, click Add Drawing. To remove a drawing, click Remove Drawing. An exclamation mark precedes any drawings that the Batch Standards Checker can't locate. Drawings are audited in the order in which they are listed. To reorder drawings in the list, click Move Up or Move Down.
in the list takes precedence. To change the position of a standards file in the list, select it and click Move Up or Move Down. Add Standards File Adds a standards file to the list displayed in Standards Used for Checking All Drawings. Remove Standards File Removes a standards file from the list displayed in Standards Used for Checking All Drawings. Move Up Moves a standards file up one position in the list displayed in Standards Used for Checking All Drawings.
Batch Standards Checker Toolbar New Creates a new standards check file with a .chx file name extension. Standards check files specify what drawings and standards files are used by the batch audit. Open Opens a standard file selection dialog box, where you can select a standards check file. Save Saves the current standards check file. Save As Opens a standard file save dialog box, where you can specify a name and location to save a standards check file.
ton is available when a batch audit report is available for viewing. The contents of the report are included with the standards check file. Export Report Exports an HTML report that can be distributed to other users. This button is available only when a batch audit has been completed and a report is available to export. This button also allows you to optimize existing XML reports that were created with a previous version of the CAD Standards feature, in order to improve report printing quality.
library specifies the slide library file (extension .slb) into which the slide files (extension .sld) are added. slidelist specifies a list of slide files. If you want to specify a file extension, it must be .sld. SLIDELIB reads a list of slide file names. This list is normally supplied by redirecting a list of files (one per line in another file created using a text editor or a user-supplied utility program) to standard input.
2642
Glossary 52 Commands associated with definitions are shown in parentheses at the end of the definition. 3D mesh primitive Basic mesh forms such as boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, wedges, spheres, and tori. 3D view Any view where the UCS icon appears in rendered colored form; current visual style is not 2D Wireframe, and the model is being viewed from an isometric view. 3Dconnexion Set of navigation tools used to reorient the current view of a model with a 3Dconnexion device.
adaptive sampling A method to accelerate the anti-aliasing process within the bounds of the sample matrix size. See also anti-aliasing. adjacent cell selection A selection of table cells that share at least one boundary with another cell in the same selection. affine calibration A tablet calibration method that provides an arbitrary linear transformation in two-dimensional space.
angular unit The unit of measurement for an angle. Angular units can be measured in decimal degrees, degrees/minutes/seconds, grads, and radians. annotation scale A setting that is saved with model space, layout viewports, and model views. When you create annotative objects, they are scaled based on the current annotation scale setting and automatically displayed at the correct size. annotational constraint Dimensional constraint used to control the size of the geometry as well as annotate the drawing.
aspect ratio Ratio of display width to height. associative dimension A dimension that automatically adapts as the associated geometry is modified. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. See also nonassociative dimension and exploded dimension. associative hatch Hatching that conforms to its bounding objects such that modifying the bounding objects automatically adjusts the hatch.
AutoCAD LT library search path The order in which looks for a support file: current directory, drawing directory, directory specified in the support path, and directory containing the executable file, acad.exe. AutoCAD LT window The drawing area, its surrounding menus, and the command line. axis tripod Icon with X, Y, and Z coordinates that is used to visualize the viewpoint (view direction) of a drawing without displaying the drawing.
block action Defines how the geometry of a dynamic block reference will move or change when the custom properties of a block reference are manipulated in a drawing. A dynamic block definition usually contains at least one action that is associated with a parameter. (BACTION) block authoring object A dimensional constraint, parameter, or action that adds intelligence to a block definition.
BYLAYER A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the color or linetype associated with its layer. See also BYBLOCK. callout block A block used as symbol to reference another sheet. Callout blocks have many industry-specific terms, such as reference tags, detail keys, detail markers, and so on. See also label block. camera Defines the current eye-level position in a 3D model.
command line A text area reserved for keyboard input, prompts, and messages. compass A visual aid that indicates the directions North, South, East, and West in the current model. composite solid A solid created from two or more individual solids. (UNION, SUBTRACT, INTERSECT) constraint bar Displays the geometric constraints associated with objects or with points on objects.
cross sections Generally, curves or lines that define the profile (shape) of a lofted solid or surface. Cross sections can be open or closed. A lofted solid or surface is drawn in the space between the cross sections. (LOFT) crosshairs A type of cursor consisting of two lines that intersect. crossing selection A rectangular area drawn to select objects fully or partly within its borders. CTB file SA color-dependent plot style table.
default drawing See initial environment. default lighting The lighting in a shaded viewport when the sun and user lights are turned off. Faces are lighted by two distant light sources that follow the viewpoint as you move around the model. default value The value that is accepted when you press ENTER at a sub-prompt. The default value is displayed in angle brackets <>. See also default. definition points Points for creating a dimension.
direct distance entry A method to specify a second point by first moving the cursor to indicate direction and then entering a distance. dithering Combining color dots to give the impression of displaying more colors than are actually available. dockable window A user interface element that can be either docked, anchored, or floating in the drawing area. Dockable windows include the command window, tool palettes, Properties Palette, and so on.
DSD For drawing set descriptions. A file format for saving a description of a drawing set that has been assembled using the Publish dialog box. DST For sheet set data. The XML file format used to store the associations and information that define a sheet set. DWF An open, published, and secure file format developed by Autodesk, DWF enables you to combine and publish rich 2D- and 3D-design data and share it with others. DWF underlay See underlay.
embed To use object linking and embedding (OLE) information from a source document in a destination document. An embedded object is a copy of the information from a source document that is placed in the destination document and has no link to the source document. See also link. empty selection set A selection set that contains no objects. enterprise customization file A CUI file that is typically controlled by a CAD manager. It is often accessed by many users and is stored in a shared network location.
extents See drawing extents. external reference (xref) A drawing file referenced by another drawing. (XREF) extrusion A 3D solid created by sweeping an object that encloses an area along a linear path. face A triangular or quadrilateral portion of a surface object. face color mode A setting in the visual style that controls how color is displayed on a face. face style A setting in the visual style that defines the shading on a face. facet The underlying structure of the face of a 3D solid, surface, or mesh.
fit tolerance The setting for the maximum distance that a B-spline can pass for each of the fit points that define it. floating panel A ribbon panel that is not attached to the rest of the ribbon or file window. floating viewports See layout viewports. font A character set, made up of letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and symbols of a distinctive proportion and design. footcandle The American unit of illuminance (symbol: fc). Lm/ft^2. footcandle The American unit of illuminance (symbol: fc).
gizmo A tool that permits you to manipulate a 3D object uniformly or along a specified axis or plane. Examples of gizmos include the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos. They are displayed when you select a 3D object. global illumination An indirect illumination technique that allows for effects such as color bleeding. As light hits a colored object in the model, photons bounce to adjacent objects and tint them with the color of the original object.
handle A unique alphanumeric tag for an object in the program's database. HDI For Heidi Device Interface. An interface for developing device drivers that are required for peripherals to work with the program and other Autodesk products. heads-up display (HUD) The process of transparently displaying user interface elements on top of or over the drawing area without obscuring the view of the objects drawn on the drawing area. helix An open 2D or 3D spiral.
indirect illumination Illumination techniques such as global illumination and final gathering, that enhance the realism of a scene by simulating radiosity, or the interreflection of light between objects in a scene. initial environment The variables and settings for new drawings as defined by the default drawing template, such as acad.dwg or acadiso.dwg. See also template drawing.
layer translation mappings Assignments of a set of layers to another set of layers that defines standards. These standards include layer names and layer properties. Also called layer mappings. layout The environment in which you create and design paper space layout viewports to be plotted. Multiple layouts can be created for each drawing. layout viewports Objects that are created in paper space that display views. See also paper space.
values in a dynamic block reference match a row of input property values, the corresponding lookup property values in that table row are assigned to the block reference. (BLOOKUPTABLE) lookup table Defines properties for and assigns property values to a dynamic block. Assigns property values to the dynamic block reference based on how the block is manipulated in a drawing. (BLOOKUPTABLE) lumen The SI unit of luminous flux (Symbol: lm).
model A two- or three-dimensional representation of an object. model space One of the two primary spaces in which objects reside. Typically, a geometric model is placed in a three-dimensional coordinate space called model space. A final layout of specific views and annotations of this model is placed in paper space. See also paper space. (MSPACE) model viewports A type of display that splits the drawing area into one or more adjacent rectangular viewing areas.
NURBS For nonuniform rational B-spline curve. A B-spline curve or surface defined by a series of weighted control points and one or more knot vectors. See also B-spline curve. NURBS surface Surfaces that are have control vertices in the U and V directions. NURBS surfaces cannot be associative. See also procedural surface and generic surface. object One or more graphical elements, such as text, dimensions, lines, circles, or polylines, treated as a single element for creation, manipulation, and modification.
paper space One of two primary spaces in which objects reside. Paper space is used for creating a finished layout for printing or plotting, as opposed to doing drafting or design work. You design your model using the Model tab. See also model space and viewport. (PSPACE) parameter In a dynamic block definition, defines custom properties for the dynamic block by specifying positions, distances, and angles for geometry in the block.
not preserve the shapes of objects. Parallel lines seemingly converge in the view. The program has perspective view settings for VPORTS table entries as well as viewport objects. photometric lights Photometric lights are physically-correct lights. Physically correct lights attenuate as the square of the distance. Photometry is the science of measurement of visible light in terms of its perceived brightness.
plot style An object property that specifies a set of overrides for color, dithering, gray scale, pen assignments, screening, linetype, lineweight, endstyles, joinstyles, and fill styles. Plot styles are applied at plot time. plot style table A set of plot styles. Plot styles are defined in plot style tables and apply to objects only when the plot style table is attached to a layout or viewport. plug-ins Plug-ins are libraries of reuseable content that extend the functionality of AutoCAD LT.
pre-selection set A selection set of objects that is defined prior to the execution of an action macro. primary table fragment The fragment of a broken table that contains the beginning set of rows up to the first table break. primitive Basic 3D forms such as boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, wedges, spheres, and tori. You can create primitive meshes and primitive 3D solid objects. procedural materials Materials that generate a 3D pattern in two or more colors, and apply it to an object.
recorded value The input captured during the recording of an action macro for a sub-prompt of a command. rectangular break To break a table into multiple parts that are evenly spaced and set at a user-specified height using the table breaking grips. redraw To quickly refresh or clean up blip marks in the current viewport without updating the drawing's database. See also regenerate. (REDRAW) reference A definition, known as an external reference or block reference, that is used and stored in the drawing.
are assigned to the block reference. Depending on how the block was defined, this usually results in a change in the block reference's geometry. (BLOOKUPTABLE) rewind Restores the previous view or movement path created by the Autodesk® ViewCube® navigation tool, SteeringWheels, and other navigation tools. RGB For red, green, and blue. A system of defining colors by specifying percentages of red, green, and blue.
save back To update the objects in the original reference (external or block reference) with changes made to objects in a working set during in-place reference editing. scale representation The display of an annotative object based on the annotation scales that the object supports. For example, if an annotative object supports two annotations scales, it has two scale representations script file A set of commands executed sequentially with a single SCRIPT command.
shortcut keys Keys and key combinations that start commands; for example, CTRL+S saves a file. The function keys (F1, F2, and so on) are also shortcut keys. Also known as accelerator keys. shortcut menu The menu displayed at your cursor location when you right-click your pointing device. The shortcut menu and the options it provides depend on the pointer location and other conditions, such as whether an object is selected or a command is in progress.
solid history A property of a solid that allows you to see and modify the original forms of the solid. solid object An object that represents the entire volume of an object, for example a box. solid primitive A basic solid form. Solid primitives include: box, wedge, cone, cylinder, sphere, torus, and pyramid. spatial index A list that organizes objects based on their location in space. A spatial index is used to locate what portion of the drawing is read when you partially open a drawing.
surface A surface is a 3D object that is a thin shell. Surfaces do not have mass or volume as 3D solids do. There are 3 types of surfaces: analytic, generic, and NURBS. surface associativity See associative surfaces surface normal Positive direction perpendicular to the surface of an object. swept solid/surface A solid or surface created in the shape of the specified profile (the swept object) swept along the specified path. (SWEEP) symbol A representation of an item commonly used in drawings.
texture map The projection of an image (such as a tile pattern) onto an object (such as a chair). thaw A setting that displays previously frozen layers. See also freeze. (LAYER) thickness The distance certain objects are extruded to give them a 3D appearance. (PROPERTIES, CHPROP, ELEV, THICKNESS) tiled viewports See model viewports.
underconstrained geometry Objects with unsolved degrees of freedom are underconstrained. underground The XY plane of the user coordinate system when perspective projection is turned on and when viewed from below ground. The underground plane displays with a color gradient between the earth horizon (nearest to the horizon) and the earth azimuth (opposite the horizon). See also ground plane and sky. underlay A DWF, or DGN file used to provide visual context in a drawing file.
vertical ribbon The ribbon when it is oriented vertically, usually on the left or right of the file window. view A graphical representation of a model from a specific location (viewpoint) in space. See also viewpoint and viewport. (3DORBIT, VPOINT, DVIEW, VIEW) view category A named collection of views in a sheet set that is often organized by function. See also subset.
wheel surface Area of a SteeringWheels that is used to organize wedges and other buttons. wheel wedge A section on the surface of a SteeringWheels that is designated for a specific navigation or orientation tool. window selection A rectangular area specified in the drawing area to select multiple objects at the same time. See also crossing selection, polygon window selection. wipeout object A polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color.
Index 3D command 3 3D DWF Publish dialog box 30 3D Edit Bar shortcut menu 36 3D Free Orbit curson icons 42 3D Modeling tab (Options dialog box) 1346 3D Move Gizmo shortcut menu 48 3D Rotate Gizmo shortcut menu 64 3D Scale Gizmo shortcut menu 67 3D Studio File Import Options dialog box 70 3DALIGN command 15 3DARRAY command 17 3DCLIP command 19 3DCONFIG command about 21 Adaptive Degradation and Performace Tuning dialog box 22 Performance Tuner Log 25 3Dconnexion Settings dialog box 3DCONVERSIONMODE system var
Adaptive Degradation and Performance Tuning dialog box 22 ADCCLOSE command 94 ADCENTER command about DesignCenter window 95 Search dialog box 100 ADCNAVIGATE command 103 ADCSTATE system variable 2149 Add Actions dialog box 1960 Add Angle Value dialog box 1541 Add Custom Property dialog box 713, 1766 Add Distance Value dialog box 1541 Add Folder Options dialog box 426 Add Page Setup dialog box 1473 Add Parameter Properties dialog box 254, 279 Add Profile dialog box 1372 Add Scale dialog box 1696 Add Scales t
Archive a Sheet Set dialog box 135 ARCHIVE command about 135 Archive - Set Password dialog box 144 Archive a Sheet Set dialog box 135 Modify Archive Setup dialog box 139 AREA command 145 AREA system variable 2156 ARRAY command 148 Array dialog box 150 ARX command 157 ATTACH command 159 Attach DGN Underlay dialog box 532 Attach Digital Signatures dialog box 2633 Attach Digital Signatures utility 2633 Attach DWF Underlay dialog box 696 Attach External Reference dialog box 2107 Attach PDF Underlay dialog box 1
BCONSTATUSMODE system variable 2166 BCONSTRUCTION command 216 BCPARAMETER command 217 BCYCLEORDER command 221 BDEPENDENCYHIGHLIGHT system variable 2166 BEDIT command about 223 Block Editor 231 Block Editor Ribbon contextual tab 226 Edit Block Definition dialog box 225 BESETTINGS command 241 BGRIPOBJCOLOR system variable 2167 BGRIPOBJSIZE system variable 2167 BGRIPSET command 244 BHATCH command 245 Bind Xrefs dialog box 2123 BINDTYPE system variable 2168 BLIPMODE command 245 BLIPMODE system variable 2168 Blo
CANNOSCALEVALUE system variable 2177 CAPTURETHUMBNAILS system variable 2178 Category Definition dialog box 1593 CBARTRANSPARENCY system variable 2178 CCONSTRAINTFORM system variable 2178 CDATE system variable 2179 CECOLOR system variable 2180 Cell Border Properties dialog box 1539 Cell shortcut menu 462 CELTSCALE system variable 2180 CELTYPE system variable 2181 CELWEIGHT system variable 2181 CENTERMT system variable 2182 CETRANSPARENCY system variable 2183 CHAMFER command 314 CHAMFERA system variable 2183
Constraint Settings dialog box 353 CONSTRAINTBAR command CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY system variable 2193 CONSTRAINTBARMODE system variable 2194 CONSTRAINTINFER system variable 2194 CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable 2195 CONSTRAINTRELAX system variable 2196 Constraints tab (Block Authoring Palettes window) 238 CONSTRAINTSETTINGS command 352 CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE system variable 2196 Content tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 1187 CONVERT command 356 Convert dialog box 1290 Convert Mesh panel (Mesh Object R
Customize dialog box 398 Customize Layer Columns dialog box 989 Customize tab (Customize User Interface dialog box) 378 Customize User Interface dialog box Customize tab 378 Transfer tab 387 CUTCLIP command 400 CVADD command 400 CVHIDE command 402 CVPORT system variable 2203 CVREBUILD command about 403 Rebuild Curve dialog box 405 Rebuild Surface dialog box 404 CVREMOVE command 406 CVSHOW command 408 CYLINDER command 409 D Data Extraction wizard about 414 Data Extraction-Additional Settings dialog box 428
New Label Template dialog box 501 New Link Template dialog box 502 New Query dialog box 503 Query Editor 466 Replace dialog box 504 Select a Database Object dialog box 505 Select Data Object dialog box 506 Sort dialog box 506 Synchronize dialog box 508 dbConnect Manager about 454 DBCSTATE system variable 2207 DBLCLKEDIT system variable 2208 DBLIST command 509 DBMOD system variable 2208 DCALIGNED command 509 DCANGULAR command 511 DCCONVERT command 513 DCDIAMETER command 514 DCDISPLAY command 515 DCFORM comma
DIMALTF system variable 2223 DIMALTRND system variable 2224 DIMALTTD system variable 2224 DIMALTTZ system variable 2225 DIMALTU system variable 2226 DIMALTZ system variable 2226 DIMANGULAR command 575 DIMANNO system variable 2227 DIMAPOST system variable 2227 DIMARC command 578 DIMARCSYM system variable 2228 DIMASSOC system variable 2229 DIMASZ system variable 2229 DIMATFIT system variable 2230 DIMAUNIT system variable 2231 DIMAZIN system variable 2231 DIMBASELINE command 579 DIMBLK system variable 2233 DIM
DIMSTYLE system variable 2252 DIMTAD system variable 2253 DIMTDEC system variable 2254 DIMTEDIT command 649 DIMTFAC system variable 2254 DIMTFILL system variable 2255 DIMTFILLCLR system variable 2255 DIMTIH system variable 2256 DIMTIX system variable 2256 DIMTM system variable 2257 DIMTMOVE system variable 2257 DIMTOFL system variable 2258 DIMTOH system variable 2258 DIMTOL system variable 2259 DIMTOLJ system variable 2259 DIMTP system variable 2260 DIMTSZ system variable 2260 DIMTVP system variable 2261 DI
DRAWINGRECOVERY command about 659 Drawing Recovery Manager 660 DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE command 661 Drawings tab (Batch Standards Checker) 2637 DRAWORDER command 662 DRAWORDERCTL system variable 2288 DRSTATE system variable 2288 DSETTINGS command about 663 Dimension Input Settings dialog box 680 Pointer Input Settings dialog box 679 Tooltip Appearance dialog box 682 DSVIEWER command 683 DVIEW command 686 DWF Password dialog box 1563 DWF Underlay Ribbon contextual tab 699 DWFADJUST command 105, 694 DWFATTACH comm
Edit Scale List dialog box 1694 Edit Sheet List Table Settings dialog box 1761 Edit Text dialog box 522 EDITSHOT command 725 ELEV command 726 ELEVATION system variable 2302 ELLIPSE command 727 Enhanced Attribute Editor 716 ENTERPRISEMENU system variable 2302 ERASE command 731 ERHIGHLIGHT system variable 2303 ERRNO system variable 2304 ERSTATE system variable 2304 ETRANSMIT command 732 Create Transmittal dialog box 732 Import Transmittal Setups dialog box 738 Modify Transmittal dialog box 739 Transmittal - S
FACETERMINVGRID system variable 2316 FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE system variable 2316 FACETERSMOOTHLEV system variable 2317 FACETRATIO system variable 2318 FACETRES system variable 2319 FBX Export Options dialog box 788 FBX Import Options dialog box 792 FBXEXPORT command 787 FBXIMPORT command 791 FIELD command 795 Field dialog box 797 Field Update Settings dialog box 1367 FIELDDISPLAY system variable 2319 FIELDEVAL system variable 2320 FILEDIA system variable 2321 Files tab (Options dialog box) 1316 Files Table ta
Location Already Exists dialog box 842 Location Picker dialog box 847 GEOLATLONGFORMAT system variable 2328 GEOMARKERVISIBILITY system variable 2328 GEOMCONSTRAINT command 848 Geometric tab (Constraint Settings dialog box) 353 Geometric Tolerance dialog box 1948 GFANG system variable 2329 GFCLR1 system variable 2329 GFCLR2 system variable 2330 GFCLRLUM system variable 2330 GFCLRSTATE system variable 2331 GFNAME system variable 2331 GFSHIFT system variable 2332 GLOBALOPACITY system variable 2333 GOTOURL comm
HPANG system variable 2348 HPANNOTATIVE system variable 2349 HPASSOC system variable 2349 HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR system variable 2350 HPBOUND system variable 2350 HPBOUNDRETAIN system variable 2351 HPCOLOR system variable 2352 HPDLGMODE system variable 2352 HPDOUBLE system variable 2353 HPDRAWORDER system variable 2354 HPGAPTOL system variable 2354 HPINHERIT system variable 2355 HPISLANDDETECTION system variable 2355 HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE system variable 2356 HPLAYER system variable 2356 HPMAXLINES system variab
INSNAME system variable 2367 Inspection Dimension dialog box 594 INSUNITS system variable 2369 INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable 2370 INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable 2372 INTELLIGENTUPDATE system variable 2372 INTERFERE command about 948 Interference Checking dialog box 952 Interference Settings dialog box 951 INTERFERECOLOR system variable 2373 Interference Checking dialog box 952 Interference Settings dialog box 951 INTERFEREOBJVS system variable 2373 INTERFEREVPVS system variable 2374 INTERSECT command
LAYERMANAGERSTATE system variable 2383 LAYERNOTIFY system variable 2384 LAYERP command 994 LAYERPALETTE command 994 LAYERPMODE command 995 LAYERSTATE command about 995 Layer States Manager 997 LayerWalk dialog box 1029 LAYFRZ command 1004 LAYISO command 1006 LAYLCK command 1009 LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable 2385 LAYMCH command 1007 LAYMCUR command 1010 LAYMRG command about 1011 Merge Layers dialog box 1012 Merge to Layer dialog box 1013 LAYOFF command 1014 LAYON command 1016 LAYOUT command 1016 Layout Wiza
Link Template Properties dialog box 500 Links dialog box 1289 LIST command 1049 List of Blocks dialog box 1774 List View shortcut menu 975 LIVESECTION command 1050 LOAD command 1051 Load Multiline Styles dialog box 1210 Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box 1047 Load/Unload Applications dialog box 127 Load/Unload Customizations dialog box 395 LOCALE system variable 2392 LOCALROOTPREFIX system variable 2393 Location Already Exists dialog box 842 Location Picker dialog box 847 LOCKUI system variable 2393 LOFT c
Material Attachment Options dialog box 1101 Material Condition dialog box 1953 Material Tool Property Editor 1099 MATERIALASSIGN command 1100 MATERIALATTACH command about 1100 Material Attachment Options dialog box 1101 MATERIALMAP command 1102 Materials Browser about 1079 MATERIALS command about 1107 Materials Editor about 1086 Material Tool Property Editor 1099 Nested Map Navigation 1098 Texture Editor 1088 MATERIALSCLOSE command 1107 MAXACTVP system variable 2407 MAXSORT system variable 2407 MAXTOUCHES s
Modify Multiline Style dialog box 1206 Multiline Style dialog box 1204 New Multiline Style dialog box 1206 MODEL command 1210 Model Views tab (Sheet Set Manager) 1744 MODEMACRO system variable 2414 Modify Archive Setup dialog box 139 Modify DGN Mapping Setup dialog box 564 Modify Dimension Style dialog box 616 Modify FTP Locations dialog box 1308 Modify Multileader Style dialog box 1184 Modify Multiline Style dialog box 1206 Modify Table Style dialog box 1911 Modify Transmittal dialog box 739 More Options t
New and Modify Excel Link dialog box 448 NEW command about 1269 Advanced Setup wizard 1275 Create New Drawing dialog box 1270 Quick Setup wizard 1273 New Dimension Style dialog box 616 New Drawings Found dialog box 430 New Label Template dialog box 501 New Layer dialog box 1024 New Layer Name dialog box 1714 New Layer State to Save dialog box 999 New Link Template dialog box 502 New Mapping Setup dialog box 562 New Multiline Style dialog box 1206 New Page Setup dialog box 1388 New Parameter dialog box 280 N
OPENDWFMARKUP command 1313 OPENPARTIAL system variable 2436 OPENSHEETSET command 1314 OPMSTATE system variable 2436 OPTIONS command about 1314 Add Profile dialog box 1372 Advanced Preview Options dialog box 1371 Alternate Font dialog box 1356 Camera Glyph Appearance dialog box 1361 Change Profile dialog box 1372 Command Line Window Font dialog box 1359 Default Scale List dialog box 1375 Drawing Window Colors dialog box 1358 Field Update Settings dialog box 1367 Grip Colors dialog box 1353 Hidden Message Set
PARAMETERSCLOSE command 1414 PARAMETERSSTATUS system variable 2444 Partial Load dialog box 1415 Partial Open dialog box 1310 PARTIALOAD command 1414 PARTIALOPEN command 1418 Password tab (Security Options dialog box) 1719 Paste Special dialog box 1424 PASTEASHYPERLINK command 1420 PASTEBLOCK command 1421 PASTECLIP command 1422 PASTEORIG command 1423 PASTESPEC command 1423 PCINWIZARD command 1425 PCX Image Options dialog box 1631 PDF Underlay ribbon contextual tab 1432 PDFADJUST command 1426 PDFATTACH comman
PLOTTERMANAGER command about 1494 Add-a-Plotter wizard 1495 Advanced Settings for COM dialog box 1510 Configure LPT Port dialog box 1508 Plotter Configuration Editor 1495 Settings for COM Port dialog box 1509 PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE system variable 2457 PLQUIET system variable 2458 Plug-ins tab (Batch Standards Checker) 2638 Plug-ins tab (Configure Standards dialog box) 1845 PNG Image Options dialog box 1636 PNGOUT command 1511 POINT command 1512 Point Style dialog box 525 POINTCLOUD command 1514 POINTCLOU
PSLTSCALE system variable 2471 PSOLHEIGHTsystem variable 2472 PSOLWIDTH system variable 2472 PSPACE command 1551 PSTYLEMODE system variable 2473 PSTYLEPOLICY system variable 2473 PSVPSCALE system variable 2474 Publish Block Template dialog box 1560 PUBLISH command about 1552 Block Template Options dialog box 1562 Confirm DWF Password dialog box 1564 DWF Password dialog box 1563 Publish Block Template dialog box 1560 Publish dialog box 1553 Publish Job Progress dialog box 1564 Publish Options dialog box 1558
REBUILD2DDEGREE system variable 2484 REBUILD2DOPTION system variable 2485 REBUILDDEGREEU system variable 2485 REBUILDDEGREEV system variable 2486 REBUILDOPTIONS system variable 2486 REBUILDU system variable 2487 REBUILDV system variable 2487 Record shortcut menu 463 RECOVER command 1601 RECOVERALL command RECOVERAUTO system variable 2488 RECOVERYMODE system variable 2489 RECTANG command 1602 REDEFINE command 1604 REDO command 1604 REDRAW command 1605 REDRAWALL command 1606 REFCLOSE command 1606 REFEDIT comm
RIBBONCONTEXTSELECT system variable 2493 RIBBONCONTEXTSELLIM system variable 2494 RIBBONDOCKEDHEIGHT system variable 2494 RIBBONSELECTMODE system variable 2495 RIBBONSTATE system variable 2495 Right-Click Customization dialog box 1365 ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX system variable 2496 ROLLOVEROPACITY system variable 2497 ROLLOVERTIPS system variable 2497 ROTATE command 1666 ROTATE3D command 1667 RPREF command about 1670 Advanced Render Settings palette 1672 Output Size dialog box 1680 RPREFCLOSE command 1681 RSCRIPT c
Select Layer States dialog box 1003 Select Layers to Add to Layer State dialog box 1002 Select Layout as Sheet Template dialog box 1749 Select Linetype dialog box 982 Select Place in Document dialog box 920 Select Plot Style dialog box 1492 Select Project dialog box 2019 Select Similar Settings dialog box 1727 Selection Cycling tab (Draft settings dialog box) 677 Selection Modes command modifier 2137 Selection tab (Options dialog box) 1349 SELECTIONANNODISPLAY system variable 2504 SELECTIONAREA system varia
Resource Drawing Locations dialog box 1768 Select Block dialog box 1775 Select Layout as Sheet Template dialog box 1749 Sheet Properties dialog box 1769 Sheet Selection dialog box 1771 Sheet Set Custom Properties dialog box 1765 Sheet Set Manager 1738 Sheet Set Properties dialog box 1764 Subset Properties dialog box 1746 View Category dialog box 1773 SHEETSETHIDE command 1776 SHELL command 1776 SHORTCUTMENU system variable 2510 Shot Properties tab (New View dialog box) 2034 SHOWHIST system variable 2511 SHO
SSMAUTOOPEN system variable 2527 SSMPOLLTIME system variable 2528 SSMSHEETSTATUS system variable 2528 SSMSTATE system variable 2529 Stack Properties dialog box 1237 Standard File Selection dialog boxes 1296 STANDARDS command about 1843 CAD Standards Settings dialog box 1846 Configure Standards dialog box 1844 Standards tab (Batch Standards Checker) 2637 Standards tab (Configure Standards dialog box) 1844 STANDARDSVIOLATION system variable 2530 Startup Suite dialog box 129 STARTUP system variable 2530 Statis
Table View tab (Plot Style Table Editor) 1864 TABLEDIT command 1907 TABLEEXPORT command 1907 TABLEINDICATOR system variable 2543 TABLESTYLE command about 1908 Additional Format dialog box 1921 Create New Cell Style dialog box 1917 Create New Table Style dialog box 1910 Manage Cell Styles dialog box 1918 Modify Table Style dialog box 1911 New Table Style dialog box 1911 Table Cell Format dialog box 1919 Table Style dialog box 1909 TABLET command 1922 TABLETOOLBAR system variable 2544 TABMODE system variable
TPNAVIGATE command 1963 TPSTATE system variable 2560 TRACE command 1963 TRACEWID system variable 2560 Tracking command modifier 2136 TRACKPATH system variable 2561 Transfer tab (Customize User Interface dialog box) 387 Transmittal - Set Password dialog box 744 Transmittal Setups dialog box 736 TRANSPARENCY command 1964 Transparency dialog box 1373 TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY system variable 2561 Tray Settings dialog box 1966 TRAYICONS system variable 2562 TRAYNOTIFY system variable 2562 TRAYSETTINGS command 1965 TR
VBA Manager about 2014 VBA Options dialog box 2020 VBAIDE command 2009 VBALOAD command 2010 VBAMAN command 2013 VBARUN command about 2016 Macros dialog box 2017 Select Project dialog box 2019 VBA Options dialog box 2020 VBASTMT command 2022 VBAUNLOAD command 2022 View Category dialog box 1773 VIEW command about 2023 Adjust Background Image dialog box 2041 Adjust Sun & Sky Background dialog box 2039 Background dialog box 2037 New View dialog box 2029 View Manager 2024 View Manager 2024 View of This Drawing t
VSCURRENT command 2077 VSEDGECOLOR system variable 2591 VSEDGEJITTER system variable 2592 VSEDGELEX system variable 2593 VSEDGEOVERHANG system variable 2594 VSEDGES system variable 2596 VSEDGESMOOTH system variable 2596 VSFACECOLORMODE system variable 2597 VSFACEHIGHLIGHT system variable 2598 VSFACEOPACITY system variable 2599 VSFACESTYLE system variable 2599 VSHALOGAP system variable 2600 VSHIDEPRECISION system variable 2600 VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable 2601 VSINTERSECTIONEDGES system variable 2602
Attach External Reference dialog box 2107 External Reference Ribbon contextual tab 2109 XBIND command 2110 Xbind dialog box 2111 XCLIP command 2113 XCLIPFRAME system variable 2626 XDWGFADECTL system variable 2626 XEDGES command 2115 XEDIT system variable 2627 XFADECTL system variable 2627 XLINE command 2116 XLOADCTL system variable 2628 XLOADPATH system variable 2629 XOPEN command 2118 XPLODE command 2120 XREF command 2122 XREFCTL system variable 2629 XREFNOTIFY system variable 2630 XREFTYPE system variabl
2714
